M ind

Science of the Human Vibrations

of Consciousness

Valerie V. H unt

Malibu Publishing Co.

Malibu, California 90265
Copyright © 1989, 1995, 1996 by Valerie V. Hunt

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

INFIN ITE MIND: The Science of Hum an Vibrations of

Consciousness is fully protected under the copyright laws of the
United States of America, The British Empire, including the
Dominion o f Canada, and all other countries o f the Copyright
Union. No part of this book may be reproduced by any means
including recitation, lecturing, public reading, radio
broadcasting, television, cable, video cassettes, audio cassettes,
and any other means of copying or duplicating. All rights,
including the rights of translation into foreign languages, are
strictly reserved.

Publisher’s Cataloging in Publication

Hunt, Valerie V.
Infinite mind: the science of human vibrations of
consciousness / Valerie V. Hunt.—2nd ed.—2nd printing,
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references.
ISBN 0-9643988-1-8
1. Consciousness —Research. 2. Aura—Research. I. Title.
BF311.H86 1996 153
QB196-20406
cr© | ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I acknowledge that I have been blessed by the brilliance and

consciousness of the many people who appeared to work with me.
Emilie Conrad and Rosalyn Bruyere were the first to
introduce me to esoteric concepts, strange ideas and new ways of
thinking about our world and us humans—all ideas that shook my
linear, scientific mind. Wisely, they encouraged me to believe that
if I didn't know how, I would somehow find the way to
scientifically validate ancient wisdoms. I cherish the joys we
shared when our research broke barriers. For these, my first and
foremost teachers, my gratitude abounds.
I offer much thanks to the numerous, excellent engineers,
mathematicians, and physicists who assisted in my Energy Fields
Laboratory at UCLA. During the early years, they questioned my
ideas as revolutionary. They challenged the data as unreal. Then
they helped design new instruments and in the end, they
enthusiastically accepted the direction of the research and the
purity of the data we obtained. I thank them also for not making
discoveries too easy for me.
My deep gratitude goes to the Board Members of the
Bioenergy Fields Foundation, my non-profit educational
organization, for their abiding personal and professional support:
Iris Schirmer, Robert Quaid, Emilie Conrad Daoud, Darrel
Felkner, and Christopher Hegarty, all busy professional persons
with magnificent backgrounds in contemporary and ancient
thoughts about energy fields. Each read Infinite Mind. They gave
me their excited approval for a rapid publication. Then, a warm
appreciation goes to my two roving angels, Peg Van Pelt and
i
Eleanor McCulley, who were always available to make things
happen, facilitate the impossible, and spread the word to their
extensive following.
Todd Chandler of Chandler Design, an award-winning
graphic artist, had all the answers for my difficult display and
jacket designs. He created this beautiful, sensitive cover that
highlights the content and flavor of my book. With only a short
discussion, Todd transferred my ideas into this charming
communication design. I thank you, Todd, for your interest and
your talent.
My special thanks go to two dedicated and loving people,
Carol and Joe Cavella, who handled all the technical parts of word
processing and book formatting of my manuscript to its present
clear, attractive form. They patiently led me through the maze of
details necessary for direct printing.
My deep appreciation goes to my editor, Casaundra Franker,
for her labor of love. Her background as editor of medical,
psychological books and her own spiritual publishing house, The
Purple Iris Press, gave her the expertise to polish my words. But
she did even more. She clarified the order and articulated facts
without changing my thinking or the general flow of my prose. To
me, her skill is a true art.
I believe that no teacher can completely appreciate or
adequately acknowledge the role her students have had in her
growth and evolution. The facts that my students listened
attentively, discussed excitedly, and challenged not only the
information but the wisdom it carried, left me always open and
thinking. I thank each of you deeply for pushing me to develop
comprehensive models from all new evidence in order to keep
thoughts in perspective. You must know that in the classroom and
conferences with you, you allowed me to reach the most creative
and satisfying times of my professional life.

—Valerie V. Hunt
 A C K N O W L E D G E M E N T S .....................................................i

I A M IN D ’S JOURNEY................................................................... 1

II THE HUMAN AURA:

Living Vibrations Brought to Light............................................ 9

III SCIENCE AND THOUGHT:

The Real World.............................................................................37

IV FIELD TRANSACTIONS:
The Biosphere - Cosmosphere Connection................................59

V MIND FIELD:
The Residence of Consciousness and the Soul........................... 80

VI EMOTIONS:
The Mind-Field Organization....................................................104

VII TELEPATHIC KNOWING:

The Transfer of Thought........................................................... 132

VIII EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE.........162

IX LIFEHOODS:
The Hidden Agenda................................................................... 203

X HEALING:
The Miracle of Life.....................................................................232

XI SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTM ENT:

The Evolutionary Goal.............................................................276

EXHIBITS.................................................................................. 313

REFERENCES.......................................................................... 349

AURIC FIELD RELEASES:

Sounds, Video and Lecture Tapes.............................................361
 CHAPTER I

A MIND’S JOURNEY
Have you ever become lost in an enthrallingly beautiful
daydream or imagery so frightening that you crashed back to
ordinary attention, needing time for things to straighten out so that
you could separate yourself from the dream? Perhaps you never
did. Such experiences fade rapidly from memory so that you can’t
even remember what the dream is about. It is easy to pass off these
happenings as your imagination having "play time" or to attribute
them to fatigue. But deep down is a nagging thought that the dream
portrayed a vital part of you that was attempting to surface. Such
experiences are common to us humans.
Have you ever thought of a friend—wondered what he was up
to, when to your surprise, he called? Much more disarming are the
times when you sensed the illness, even death, of a loved one,
immediately denying its truth until the sad news came.
Have you ever answered a friend's query only to hear—"I
never asked you that question, I only thought it.” Close friends
regularly do this.
In your travels, have you ever found yourself in a strange
place, come into a new country with unusual sounds, smells,
buildings, and people who dressed and looked different from those
back home, when suddenly your wonderment changed into deep

1
2 --- INFINITE MIND

attunement, a deja vu experience? Somehow, you knew about this

new land and what to expect.
Have you ever entered a building, a historical or sacred place,
and believed that you heard words, saw people, smelled odors, and
sensed things you "knew" didn't exist there, yet your experience
insisted that this was real? If we allow it, this happens often.
Perhaps more usual, have you ever heard music or sounds so
ephemeral that you soared to some magical place? Or was it an art
object, perhaps of a sunset or a peaceful wide valley, that lifted
your thoughts beyond the scene on the canvas, away from the
shapes and space to a deeper meaning? Sometimes when we are in
a place dedicated to the divine, we feel spiritual vibrations all over
our bodies. It can seem strange that certain sights trigger moods
that don't seem directly related to what we are seeing.
Not long ago, these experiences remained tightly closeted
memories. Occasionally, we would find a creative person to share
with, or a book to explain our "fantasies." I did, but if you are like
me, the "out there" answers didn't ring true. I wanted explanations
that I could understand and own. I pondered why it was that
scientists refused to investigate those things. They even relegated
thought to philosophers, saying that it was too intangible to be
explored by scientific methods. Of course, I remembered that we
scientists are supposed to stick to the facts; we are to perform
experiments that produce verifiable data and can be duplicated in
other laboratories. My quandaries were not occasional; they were
constant, shaking many of what I had come to believe were
irrefutable physiological facts. Accounts that Einstein, Newton,
Fuller, and Pythagoras had discovered their deep wisdoms in some
other realm was little consolation. At the other end of the spectrum,
psychics seemed fuzzy in their thinking; my queries were met with
streams of "psychobabble."
In the early 1970s, I was teaching a graduate seminar on the
neuromuscular aspects of behavior. In addition to discussing
research discoveries, I questioned the vast array of common human
experiences that seemed to defy rational understanding, or to lie
 A MIND’S JOURNEY --- 3
beyond the scope of scientific inquiry. I suggested that these
experiences must have some deep, hidden reality because they
contained such sensory, motor, cognitive and emotional stimuli.
Certainly the label "imagined" didn't fit. Though my comments
were casual, at times it was as if I had lit the fuses of stored
fireworks. The class enlivened. Some of the students shared their
own strange experiences, while others elaborated on my own
doubts.
Often after this class I wondered why mystical experiences
generated so much emotional excitement. Was repressed
information surfacing or was it because these issues were being
discussed at a university twenty-five years ago? In fact, news
trickled back to me that small student groups carried on the
discussion after class far into the night, not about the course's
physiological material, but about unusual consciousness
happenings.
My daily restlessness about such matters led me to seek
counsel with an older, very wise woman, the Senior Warden of my
church. She listened understandingly, but gave no advice until I
reasoned that it was probably all right to pose mystical questions as
long as I didn't commit answers. Even then, I knew to be cautious
because I cherished my position as a tenured faculty member at a
major university at a time when there were few women professors.
At the next class meeting, winter quarter in the late afternoon
when attention wandered, I acknowledged students' interest in
strange happenings, made a few comments, and announced that
we would continue with the scheduled course content. I intuited,
even hoped, that my statement was sufficient to quiet their
curiosity about the parapsychological. Was I ever misinformed!
The entire graduate class of thirty-some students awakened. They
insisted that this was the class where they should study
consciousness, even the ancient literature, and they added a punch
by reminding me that the true function of a university is to expand
the frontier of knowledge. While I agreed with such a lofty ideal,
4 --- INFINITE MIND

I rebutted that I had not found in-depth parapsychological research

appropriate for this research class. They were undaunted; what
better, they said, than to critique the existing research, question the
phenomenological premises, and design a new direction. I was
flooded with mixed feelings—what dreamers these students, and
yet, aren't students supposed to push professors from their
comfortable positions?
Though I did not change the course, I offered to stay an extra
half-hour for those who wanted to talk about psychic and esoteric
experiences, about chakras, entities, past lives, for fun and just to
understand what much of the world believed. This compromise
was satisfactory for the students, but I remembered feeling
unusually depressed and lonesome, as though I had turned a corner
on an unknown path.
My professor friends were not to know of my shift for several
years. My former enjoyment of university social events was now
shadowed by restlessness. When my colleagues asked what I was
up to or what I was thinking about, their questions were met with
a hasty "same old thing." This new, compelling interest didn't
seem to be leading anywhere except into confusion.
When I attended a few meetings of the more conventional
psychics, I came away wanting the pin-pointing clarity of a trained
scientific mind to speak to me. I couldn't follow the psychics'
channeling process when they called in one of the "Great Ones," a
crossed-over soul, to answer their questions. I realized that the
questions asked and the answers given had to do with material
predictions concerning money, friends, lovers, and solutions to
life's situations. Most "channeled" information was so general that
it could be interpreted in as many ways as their astrological
forecasts. I even sought out five popular psychic readers with my
specific questions. They all knew that I had doubts by the nature
of my questions, but their metaphysical answers did not ring true
to me. Needless to say, I gave up this approach.
Next, I reasoned that I needed a teacher, a guide, but not one
locked into a highly structured belief system or religion. Indeed, I
 A MIND'S JOURNEY --- 5
was cautious because I was repulsed by many so-called laws of
karma, or explanations bordering on black magic, the dark night
of the soul, or entity possessions beyond our control. I rejected the
idea of dependency on gurus who were becoming plentiful imports
from India. With some effort, I found three potential teachers, a
Kabbala priest, a physician, and a chiropractor, all with scientific
backgrounds and touted to be spiritually high beings who took
only a few students.
To each, I told my story. This time I owned my experiences,
not just my questions. This time I added what I had not shared
with students, situations of my life that now emerged to clarify my
confusion. I had been in a coma at age three. During a successful
psychotherapy to soften my compulsive work habits in my early
adulthood, I had recovered information about my childhood near­
death experience. Then I catapulted into a cosmic coma from
shock. Equally as suddenly as I entered the coma, I spontaneously
recovered, rediscovered the sensory world, and was a deeply
mystical child. I knew things that ordinary children didn't know,
according to my mother, a trained early childhood teacher. My
father, a college-educated engineer, seemed as perplexed as I. He
was excited to see me responding to life, but I watched him shake
his head in disbelief at my change.
Before this episode I was an outgoing, exuberant child, which
probably helped me to adjust better to my new talents and my
parents' disbelief, though not to being rejected by my little friends,
who didn't want me to play with them anymore. They said I
complicated things by making rules too hard. Still, I could escape
by composing poetry (or perhaps just rhymes), drawing, singing,
and thoroughly indulging in my mystical world.
One day, quite by surprise, my parents took away my paints,
my paper, my crayons, and my books. No one wanted to hear
about the fun things my mind created. My frustration mounted
daily—my world had rejected what I found exciting. I mumbled
to myself angrily with little satisfaction. My parents didn't listen.
Finally, I started "multiplying words" with God, for real. I flashed
6 --- INFINITE MIND

back to my months in a coma when I experienced being with God

in a beautiful land of flowers, sweetness, and love—quiet serenity.
I wanted to stay forever, but I recalled that God had said I would
go back to the world to bring it beauty. I complained because I did
not like the world, and besides I had no talents for beauty. I was
just a very little girl who sensed beauty but didn't know how to
create it. I remembered God assuring me that I would be given
ample talents to do my "beauty work." It was then that I became
aware of people, the room, and things I had known about before.
I had returned from my distant journey.
At first, adults praised my pictures and writings, expecting I
would grow to be an artist. But also I sensed that despite my new
gifts, the world wanted me the old way— a little, ordinary girl,
doing what normal little girls my age did. It was then that I hid in
a deep, dark hall closet hung with layers of winter clothes, the
floor full of scattered, heavy boots. I found my way to the back
where I sat feeling quite protected, so that I could argue with God.
I knew it was all God's fault. He had pushed me out of Heaven,
given me skills that no one would let me use. In spite of my anger,
God was kind and understanding with a new solution—if I
couldn't bring beauty, I could bring knowledge.
To this frightened, angry little girl in a dark closet, the answer
seemed strange, although also sustaining. But could I use my
creativity to bring knowledge? All in all, the solution was safe for
my parents. I wouldn't bother them anymore if I had a new course
and for me, although I had been enthralled at my post-coma skills,
there was also a haunting suddenness to my change that was scary,
particularly when adults said that it was not "real."
All three of the potential esoteric teachers turned me down,
and each with the same reasoning: "You are divinely guided—you
need no human teacher." What should have been a compliment I
took as rejection, for I desperately needed a great teacher.
One day after several years of exploring these questions with
my students, the Dean of Science called me in and asked, "What is
this I hear you are studying in your lab and introducing to your
 A M INDS JOURNEY --- 7
students?" It was then that I remembered my students' ardent
beliefs that the function of the University is to be on the cutting
edge of knowledge. I convinced him that I had paid my dues for
20 years as an orthodox and popular professor, and now that I had
seen a new light I wanted him to protect me from unknowing
criticism. I promised to keep him posted. Apparently, my non­
defensive approach worked. We talked often and he was
interested and encouraging. He must have confided with the
Chancellor, because I found many strange and mystical people
with unusual requests referred to me from the Chancellor's office.
Whether he accepted my direction or just "got them off his back"
I never knew.
Many unusual things happened as I openly taught classes
based upon my frequency recordings of healers, mystics, and
meditators. Professors I had never met in such a large university,
from departments of engineering, physics, art, philosophy, and
medicine called for appointments to talk about what they had
read, their patients, or their own research. Invariably as we talked
I realized their deeper agenda was to find answers to their own
troublesome mystical experiences. Yes, I helped them by
confirming with my own experiences, as they helped me to
realize the universality of human consciousness; and I shed the
loneliness that I had attributed to the cloistered nature of a
university.
I have said enough about my journey, for this book is not
autobiographic in a time-space sense; it is rather an account of my
doubts, deliberations, learnings and tentative answers that have
led me to reach deeply into other levels of consciousness. My
academic background led me to over 25 years of experimental
studies using high frequency instruments to measure human
vibrations, while all the time I was also clinically investigating
the mystical level of emotional states. When I retired early from
UCLA, I had time to collect my own and my students' beginning
experiences to rework my accumulated frequency data, and I took
on older, more advanced students in private classes.
With this as an introduction, come with me on a journey of
8 --- INFINITE MIND

discovery. If it eases you into a deeper understanding of your

humanness, I am pleased. If it causes you to challenge some of our
culture's most cherished beliefs—even if you don't find complete
answers—this book will have served its purpose. You will have
discovered a new way of thinking about the questions. If some of
the thoughts presented weaken your doubts about this side of
humanness, I praise you. And if it strikes one pure note in those of
you scientists who never dared to contemplate such "soft science"
except as entertaining science fiction, I am thrilled.
 er©C CHAPTER II

THE HUMAN AURA:

Living Vibrations
Brought To Light
"The basic texture o f research consists o f dreams into which
threads o f reasoning, measurement and calculation are woven."
—Albert Szent Gydrgyi

Too often we scientists get lost in our data, forgetting that the
essence of science is careful observation, deep thought, and wise
deductions from both reasoning AND the exercise of mystical and
dreamlike states. Rarely do we realize that our research springs
from our level of awareness and our evolutionary needs. I attest to
the fact that the scientist's research is deeply personal.
This chapter is written for lay readers with limited scientific
knowledge who often feel confused by scientific explanations.
Come with me on a journey of discovery into the research of the
vibrant human aura that you can follow and understand. For
scientists, my reasoning, although broad and penetrating—and
sometimes mystical—is based upon scientific facts and clinical
observations.
Margaret Mead, when she was president of the Association of

9
10 — IN FIN ITE MIND

the Advancement of Science in 1969, spearheaded the acceptance

of a new section of parapsychology. She questioned"... whether we
can find ways of studying these phenomena which will make them
as acceptable as the stars and the chromosomes." She cautioned
that "to believe without questioning or to dismiss without
investigation is to comport oneself unscientifically." Such beliefs
fostered the rapid expansion of sound human energy field research
by classical scientists in major institutes and universities.
My background in neurophysiology and psychology neither
prepared me to understand nor to be interested in para-
psychological happenings. So my introduction to energy field
phenomena had to be serendipitous. I had taught at Columbia
University, the University of Iowa, and UCLA, where I researched
skilled and pathological muscular activity, the movement behavior
of individuals, and the neuromuscular patterns of emotions.
To my surprise, data showed relationships between
neuromuscular behavior and personality. The individual's
movements shadowed his unique personal characteristics. But
other strange information emerged that did not fit with accepted
physiology.
One day a graduate dance therapy student asked me to record
what happened when she entered an altered state of consciousness.
At that time, an altered state seemed unreal to me, for there were
no guidelines as to how to record consciousness and no agreement
even as to what it was. Although I was intrigued, I filed her request
deep in my memory with no further intent.
Some weeks later I had a glimmer of how to record her
experience. Possibly the neurological level of muscle stimulation
held a clue to consciousness levels. Timidly, I placed the
electromyographic (EMG) recording electrodes on her lower arm,
her upper arm, and her back muscles, each area primarily
stimulated by a different level of the spinal cord and brain.
Intuitively, in a playful mood, I placed one electrode on top of her
head, although I knew nothing about chakras, the vortices of
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 11
energy described by ancient Eastern literature. When the
electrodes were secured, she started her dance routine. At the
beginning, nothing unusual happened, in fact she commented on
her apprehension about being recorded. Yet, in five minutes the
recordings remarkably changed. The muscular signal from her
lower arm stopped. The baseline activity characteristic of all living
tissue was absent on the scopes. Next, the upper arm recording
dropped out. The engineer believed there was no equipment
failure, although there was no ordinary energy in the arms. Soon
she sat down in a "tailor position" which required back muscle
activity to balance her body. Again the spinal muscles showed no
recording, no energy expended. We have known as long as there is
life, skeletal muscles give off signals. Next, electromagnetic
energy poured from the top of her head with intensity beyond what
our equipment could handle. This state lasted for seven minutes,
followed by a reverse sequence of reactivating the spine, upper
arm, and lower arm muscles. In my years of neuromuscular
research I had never witnessed any similar situation, nor had any
been described in the literature. I was at a total loss to explain, but
I could not forget these happenings.
During a student dance concert at UCLA, I noticed several
performers whom I had watched many times before. Now, they
danced better than ever. They were no longer just good college
dancers; they moved like polished professionals. Later, when I
congratulated them on their superb performances, they attributed
their improvement to Structural Integration, or Rolfing, a
manipulative technique where during ten sessions a technician
manually stretches and moves various kinds of connective tissue,
fascia, tendons and ligaments which make up the body's support
system. With ordinary physical and emotional stress, this
connective tissue constricts, becoming inelastic, causing muscle
imbalance. Generally, people choose to be Rolfed to eliminate
pain and to improve posture and health, or it is prescribed to lessen
neuromuscular and orthopedic disabilities. These dancers,
however, chose Rolfing to increase their flexibility. Additionally,
12 — IN FIN ITE MIND

they discovered that they moved better, felt freer, were more alert,
and experienced higher states of consciousness. As an experienced
physical therapist, I knew about most manipulation regimes, but
Rolfing somehow seemed different.
Today there are numerous manipulative and exercise
programs like Rolfing which loosen and relax the connective
tissues of the body. Now we know that connective tissue has
piezoelectric capacities, which can act like an electrical system,
where stretching enhances the electrical capacity. Therefore, we
conjectured that connective tissue was more than a tissue
scaffolding. It seemed to dictate the flow of electromagnetic
energy throughout the body at the finest level.
With curiosity I conducted studies and discovered that after
Rolfing, muscles did contract more smoothly and with less effort.
People moved more efficiently. (Hunt, 1972) But at that time there
was no known objective method to evaluate their subjective
feelings of health, vitality and consciousness.
Several weeks later another unusual event occurred. At the
suggestion of one of my graduate students, Emilie Conrad, a
shaman healer, came to my office requesting explanations for her
healing techniques. This occurred 25 years ago when shamanic
healing was relatively unknown in this country. Emilie is an
American dancer who had discovered mystical happenings while
she lived and danced in Haiti. At our first meeting, she spoke in
esoteric words full of ritualistic sensory metaphors that confused
me. Hers was like a foreign language that I could not decode. And
yet, for some unknown reason, I sensed that she had something
very important to teach me.
Unable to understand her words, I asked her to communicate
by movement—to let me watch her "do her thing." Spontaneously,
I checked her heart rate and blood pressure before she started. She
then danced strenuously, even acrobatically, for 30 minutes with a
perfection and repertoire superior to any I had seen in a single
dancer. Her movements took in all directions, large and small,
were fast and slow, with complicated neuromuscular rhythms
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 13
flowing through various parts of her body. She demonstrated
amazing flexibility and strength as she effortlessly glided about.
Beyond her technical elegance, I sensed that she communicated
powerful feelings and ideas.
I was not prepared, however, for the shock that came when I
realized that my long study of superior athletes, the handicapped,
and native ritualistic movements from all over the world did not
help me to understand what I observed with Emilie. Furthermore,
my training as a movement observer and neuromuscular
physiologist didn't help. I was vaguely aware that the results of
Rolfing on dancers somehow connected with what I did not
understand about Emilie's dancing. I rechecked her heart rate and
blood pressure, hoping that her physiological changes would clear
up the issue. But to my surprise, neither the heart rate nor the
blood pressure had elevated; in fact both had dropped slightly. To
make things worse, she was not perspiring nor was she breathing
heavily. With total disbelief, I asked for her explanation, not
anticipating her simple answer.
She said, "I create a field of energy and ride it." Now it is easy
to understand riding the outside force of a wave or wind, or skiing
downhill by gravity, but what was this energy that created
movement without a physical force or physiological happenings?
She seemed to be trying to tell me that there are other ways to
move that are beyond the classical neuromuscular contraction that
we physiologists accept.
A few months later Emilie returned to tell me that she was
going to restore paralyzed muscles of a post-polio victim of 23
years. She asked me to record and explain the healing process. I
agreed to measure the polio victim's muscle loss before and after
Emilie's treatment, but I did not know how to evaluate a shamanic
treatment.
I thought I understood the muscular paralysis of polio. At
Columbia University before World War II, I was trained in
physical therapy. During the great polio epidemic in the late
1940's, I supervised polio treatments using the Sister Kenny
14 — INFINITE MIND

methods at a major New York hospital which handled the most

acute polio cases in the state. When I saw this polio victim, I was
aghast that Emilie thought she could restore muscle. The young
woman wore a long leg brace and walked with great difficulty.
Although she had had excellent and lengthy Kenny treatments
when the polio occurred in infancy, her condition had not changed
since then.
Electromyographic tests showed her leg muscles were
extremely weak or degenerated to bands of connective tissue that
did not contract. For a long time we have "known" that when a
muscle loses its neural connection, it atrophies, disintegrates, and
will never recover. Such was the young woman's condition.
Although I was curious about shamanic healing techniques, I was
convinced that nothing would happen. However, as I watched
Emilie moving her hands above the patient's legs, I observed a
rippling motion not ordinarily seen with normal muscle
contraction and never present in paralyzed muscle.
During the several years of Emilie's regular treatment, this
subject recovered almost all of her lost movement. Electro­
myographic recordings confirmed the neuromuscular regen­
eration. She was able to energetically walk without crutches and
braces, and muscle contour returned where there was none before.
Again, I could verify the changes, but I could not explain them.
Within the same year, Emilie asked me to record another
shamanic treatment of a congenitally brain-disturbed young man.
He had been evaluated at UCLA's Neuropsychiatric Institute as
having abnormal brain waves which physicians believed caused
his asocial, disorganized, and immature behavior. They reported
that following Emilie's treatment his brain waves were normal and
his behavior improved.
At the appointed day, Emilie brought an aura reader, Rosalyn
Bruyere, to read the energy field during treatment. Again, having
witnessed many shamanic rituals in Africa, Haiti and the South
Pacific did not prime me to understand or record healing without
 THE HUMAN A URA: LIVING VIBRA TIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 15
physical contact. Emilie described her ritual and the aura reader
disclosed that she would read colors and the action of the field
and the chakras. They both explained the nature of chakras and
located them on the body for me.
The idea of chakras stems from Eastern philosophy and
yogic doctrine. These describe wheel-like vortices of energy over
nerve plexes and endocrine centers of the body, as well as the
third eye and the crown of the head, with small vortices at each
joint. They are functional rather than anatomical structures that
are connected to the meridians and acupuncture points. Numerous
researchers have shown elevated electronic recordings from these
locations, particularly with persons in higher states of
consciousness or with extrasensory abilities.
I decided to use ordinary bipolar surface sensors on the skin
over the chakras, as though these areas were like muscles, just to
see if any electrical activity occurred. On the same data-tape we
simultaneously recorded Emilie's shamanic chanting, Rosalyn's
aura descriptions, and my narrations of the healer's movements.
The subject lay passively on the floor while Emilie performed
esoteric movements around his body and shouted into his
kneecaps. She shook rattles and bells, and waved crystals around
his body, but she never touched him.
Somehow, I wanted skilled witnesses, so I had invited
professors from the Nursing Department, School of Medicine,
and Thelma Moss's parapsychology lab at the Neuropsychiatric
Institute. They all attended.
Throughout the experiment, I monitored the oscilloscope and
graph data, which looked like elaborate but meaningless random
vibrations. Yet at the end of the three-hour session, I noted that
the patient's brain waves had stabilized into an alpha-theta
pattern.
The experiment went on for many hours with so many reams
of graphs and tapes that I postponed even trying to analyze the
data until the semester closed. Then, when I carefully compared
the electronic information with all the other data, there appeared
only one firm relationship. There was no apparent correlation
16 — IN FIN ITE MIND

between Emilie's vocal sounds, the bells, or the crystal placement

with the electronic data. Likewise, there was no obvious
relationship between my running commentary of the quality and
pattern of her movement and the electronic recordings. But there
was a very close correlation between what the aura reader said and
the gross happenings in the electrical activity of the man's auric
field. For example, when Rosalyn reported energy entering his
arm, the amplitude of the recordings increased. She described that
energy had entered his feet and progressed up his legs, "shooting
the Kundalini," and "getting balled up in the heart chakra."
These unscientific descriptions were nonetheless
synchronized with the electronic data showing sudden energy
flowing up both legs with an increased amplitude in the lower
abdomen, or Kundalini, and stopping in the heart chakra. The
heart showed a two-fold increase in the amplitude of contraction
with no change in the rate.
Rosalyn's next description convinced me that some unknown
energy was flowing when she described that Emilie had released
the energy from the heart which spurted out the crown chakra on
top of the head in bursts of white light. The spurts were in sync
with the sudden energy bursts which came from the crown
electrodes, and the frequencies of these data were the highest
recorded during that session. Again, I didn't understand, but I
sensed that this data contained within it information about the
human organism hitherto undiscovered.
During that same year I attended the First International
Acupuncture Conference at Stanford University. This was
following President Richard Nixon's trip to China during which
two American physicians first witnessed acupuncture anesthesia
and treatment. I was thrilled with a new emerging physiological
model, the basis of Oriental medicine, which seemed to
encompass my experiences with Rolfing, Emilie's movement, her
shamanic treatment of polio and brain disturbances, and the
observations of an aura reader.
The following semester I took a sabbatical leave to explore
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 17
these energy field concepts in Southeast Asia. I observed and
worked in the clinics using acupuncture to treat disease and drug
addiction in Japan, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore. In Bali I
participated in trance dancing and watched native ritual healings in
the Indonesian islands and Thailand. On the streets of Kowloon I
observed young children copying the older ones in the insertion of
acupuncture needles.
In Kyoto, Japan, at the famous Pain Control Clinic, I watched
acupuncture and moxibustion treatments, the latter using a small
herbal cone placed on acupuncture points and lighted like incense.
With arthritics, moxibustion gave faster pain relief than our
conventional therapeutic techniques.
One day, an ambulance brought a woman to the pain clinic
with second degree steam bums on both arms. She screamed with
the pain. The common procedure in America was to first inject
narcotics to ease the pain, followed by tissue cooling and
ointment. Instead, the Pain Control Clinic therapists wrapped both
arms in household aluminum foil, to which they attached a
clothespin clamp with a lead wire ending in an acupuncture
needle. The needle was inserted into the acupuncture point just
below the kneecap on the opposite leg. This constituted the entire
treatment.
In a few minutes the burn victim quieted; her face relaxed. In
20 minutes she was totally free of pain. The swollen, turgid,
red-blue tissue looked pink and near normal. After three or four
more daily treatments, her skin was normal without ulceration,
peeling, or scars. The attending physician explained that the steam
had created cellular metabolic disturbances affecting the energy
field, which caused energy from other areas of the body to rush to
the arms to heal them. This excess energy pressed on nerves and
blood vessels, causing swelling and pain. He stated that the
aluminum foil, wire, and acupuncture needles drained the excess
energy from the burned arms back into the legs—a simple, yet
profound, explanation.
Armed with my own fresh, mystical awakenings balanced by
18 — IN FIN ITE MIND

the extended reality of the cultures I had witnessed, I returned to

the university motivated to critically explore and to find out for
myself if claims of subtle energies were valid.
The first equipment we used to measure this energy was a
telemetry instrument built especially for us by an engineer who
had developed the telemetry systems which NASA used to send
back to earth the astronauts' vital physiological recordings of
muscle and heart activity during the first manned space trips.
Simply stated, telemetry is a radio broadcasting system capable of
intercepting and projecting the body's electrical activity. The
electrical signal is picked up from the body's surface by surface
sensors which lead to a miniature, battery-operated radio
transmitter and amplifier attached to the subject by a belt. The
instrument broadcasts the electrical body signal by FM radio
frequency carrier. The airborne signal then is picked up in the
laboratory by a radio receiver and recorded on tape or disk for
future analysis.
I believed the wireless nature of this new instrument would
free subjects from the cumbersome wires of ordinary sensory
devices, allowing them to act more naturally (Exhibit 1.) Actually,
it did more than that; it allowed a small, continuous millivoltage
(one thousandth of a volt) signal from the body surface, the auric
field, to be recorded.
Like all investigations into uncharted areas, we did not set out
to prove anything; our aim was to study the effects of shamanic
healing; the process of energy transfer; consciousness; the auric
field; and elucidate a possible energy field phenomenon, as well as
to understand the neuromuscular effects of Rolfing.
Let me relate simply our current understanding of body
electricity and how this is measured. Brain nerve cells, when
stimulated, create electrical energy which activates nerves. This is
recorded as brain waves by an electroencephalogram (EEG.) The
nerve activities cause muscles to shorten and move the body, and
to stimulate the heart, lungs, blood vessels, intestines, and glands.
When a muscle shortens, an electrical current is generated which
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 19
can be recorded by an electromyogram (EMG.) The electrical
heart activity is picked up by an electrocardiogram (EKG.)
These three kinds of recordings can differ, one from another,
by frequency patterns and strengths. Brain waves under normal
conditions create a characteristic slow wave form from zero to 20
cycles per second. The heart creates a larger and faster wave up to
about 225 cycles per second. The muscles, on the other hand, have
a wide range from zero to 250 cycles per second; two to three
cycles per second in the anal sphincter muscle, and 250 cycles per
second in the small, fast-moving eye muscles. Most skeletal
muscles during normal movement operate between 40 and 120
cycles per second, each with a built-in physiological frequency
signature or speed of operation, some faster and some slower,
based on their location, their structure, and their movement
function. Each of these separate recordings is an important
function of local tissue, but none of them is a measure of general
health in the body.
Although we cannot explain life, we do know that electrical
activity is essential for life. Most medical and biological research
has tried to explain life in terms of gross measures such as heart,
muscle, and nerve electricity, or it has unsuccessfully sought a
source in the biochemistry of cells and fluids. But with recent
discoveries that all cells, even subatomic particles, contain tiny
electrical elements, there is a growing belief that life is
electromagnetic and cannot be explained by mechanical or
biochemical means.
Physics, the scientific source of all natural information about
the universe, holds that all matter which exists in space is
composed of atoms. Atoms are all the same whether they comprise
inert or living matter. In each atom, electrons spin around a
nucleus, throwing off some electrons, leaving an unstable state.
Other electrons in the environment rush in to fill the space. Some
of these free electrons come from living things, others from man-
made objects or the natural physical environment.
In the physical body there are two primary electrical systems.
20 — IN FIN ITE MIND

One is the well-known alternating electric current of the nervous

system, the brain, neurons, and the nerves, which causes muscle
contraction, nerve transmission, glandular secretion, and
sensation. The other is a newly discovered electromagnetic system
probably emanating from atoms and cells. This energy has been
called an aura, though I prefer to describe it as an energy field.
We discovered that this energy field is unique. It is
continuous, while all the other body electric recordings of heart,
brain, and muscle are off-and-on signals: a muscle contraction is
followed by muscle relaxation; a heartbeat is followed by a quiet
rest period; and a brain wave is followed by lesser action.
The pool of electromagnetic energy around an object or a
person allows energy exchange. This corona, invisible to most
people, is seen at times as a halo or light-colored mist around a
living body. Although composed of the same electrons as inert
substances, the human field absorbs and throws off energy
dynamically. It interacts with and influences matter, whereas
fields associated with inert matter react passively. Again, there
have been many names associated with this human energy: chi,
life force, prana, odic force, and aura.
The electromagnetic components of the human energy field
can be detected with special electronic instruments, although
probably this field is more complex, possibly like the little
understood scaler wave, or it may be composed of undiscovered
energy as illusive as ether. If the recording sensor or probe is a
needle inserted into a nerve or muscle, only the very local
electricity or small units are intercepted. If the electrodes are
adhered to the skin surface, there is a larger signal of electrical
activity, or a composite of the underlying muscles or cells (Exhibit
1)
Throughout our recordings, we placed surface sensors over
the chakra where the baseline electricity was strongest, although
we could obtain a similar signal from anywhere on the body
surface. Generally, the subjects were recorded while lying
passively, meditating, imaging, being Rolfed or healed. Although
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 21
the baseline signal we wanted was not altered by the amount of
movement, if the subject was very active, the accompanying heart
and muscle electricity was so strong that it overshadowed the
small constant energy field on the oscilloscope.
On every recording taken from the body where there are
muscles, there is a resting baseline of electrical activity between
muscle contractions. I believe that this is produced by all living
tissue and can be described as life activity. This has been generally
considered to be a rough indicator of muscle tension and therefore
not very important. Yet I noted that after Rolfing, the baseline was
higher or stronger, while a manual tension test used in physical
therapy showed that the subjects were actually more relaxed.
By amplifying the baseline on the oscilloscope, we found that
it was a rich and changing energy. When we filtered the baseline
data to remove the brain, heart and muscle frequencies (0 to 250
cycles per second), we discovered that there is a void (no electrical
activity) between 250 cycles to 450 or 500 cycles per second. But
from 500 cycles per second up to 20,000 cycles per second, the
frequency information was continuous. Our telemetry instrument
was not capable of recording frequencies beyond 20,000 cycles
per second, at that time (Exhibit 3.)
We observed that every recording using body surface
electrodes contained all electrical activity of the body. If taken
from the heart, a powerful generator, the heart frequencies were
the strongest. If taken from the muscle, the muscle depolarization
frequencies were larger, and so with the brain. But all electrical
activity, including that of the auric field, was present in all
telemetry recordings.
„ In other words, beyond the electrical frequencies of muscle,
brain, and heart, there is another field of energy, smaller in
amplitude and higher in frequency. This electromagnetic energy is
eight to ten times faster than the other biological electricity
sampled from the body's surface, and about one-half to one-third
as strong as the millivoltage of a resting muscle. While numerous
researchers have studied extremely low biological frequencies
22 — INFINITE MIND

(ELF) and the magnetic current associated with healing, tissue

health, and disease, the extremely high biological frequency
(EHF) electrical currents associated with mind phenomena and
human consciousness were first researched in my laboratory at
UCLA.
Excluding unicellular organisms, all living systems produce
an electrical current in the order of millivoltage (one-thousandth of
a volt), a relatively strong signal that is considerably larger than
the random microvoltage (one-millionth of a volt) of white noise.
This encouraged us to further explore shamanic healing, Emilie's
movements, emotion and field interaction. We questioned why
these signals had not been reported previously, only to remember
that telemetry was a product of the space age. Earlier recording
equipment was incapable of detecting this small signal of the
energy field.
Probably the primary reason scientists had not discovered the
human energy field before, even with telemetry instruments, was
because they believed that biological energy existed only to make
a muscle shorten, a heart beat, or to create brain activity. Data such
as a dynamic resting baseline were considered to be only an
artifact of the instruments but not real data.
Because our field recordings were faster than neurological
signals of muscles and nerves, although of similar amplitude, and
because these correlated with aura readers' visual reports, we
considered the possibility that these might point to the elusive
auric field. Gradually, I began to see how my experiences with
hands-on healers, acupuncture, and Rolfing related to my research
on the electromagnetic field of emotions, environmental
electromagnetism, hands-on healing, meditation, transfer of
thought, and the interaction of people and animals.
Upon my return from Asia, the Rolf Institute provided a grant
to study emotions, energy fields, and the neuromuscular effects of
Rolfing. For the study, there were 24 men and 24 women divided
into carefully matched pairs based on age, sex, height-weight,
education, occupation, general physical activity and body
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 23
structure. One of each pair was randomly placed in an
experimental group and the other in a control group. The
experimental subjects were given ten Rolfing sessions by two
Rolfers, each subject receiving five sessions in staggered order
with each Rolfer.
Two men and two women from the experimental group were
selected by aura readers based upon the color and dynamics of
their auric field. These four subjects were to be Rolfed in the
laboratory with simultaneous electronic field testing and aura
reader reporting. Although the muscular changes from Rolfing
were substantial (Hunt, 1972), the energy field data were
spectacular. The findings established clear-cut parameters for
future study and provided consistent results that have held up in
ensuing research.
From the first session, each individual showed a unique
pattern of amplitude and frequencies in chakras and in the
synchrony between chakras. Although there were changes during
later sessions, each individual kept his unique pattern, such as its
strength or weakness and its variable frequency over time. For
example, a physiologist, a meditator, had a more active third eye.
A dancer carried hyperactivity in the legs and feet. An actress
showed more energy in the heart and abdomen. A businessman
demonstrated energy in the crown.
We noted individual differences in the complexity or
variability of the wave train of the field. Some had a narrow
repertoire of vibratory patterns over time—a more closed
system—while others showed an open system with a greater
variety of field interactions.
The upward energy flow in chakras progressively increased
during the ten sessions. In the beginning the energy was small,
dark in color, low in frequency and amplitude with an uneven
flow. During later sessions the energy was even, light in color,
with higher amplitude and frequency. When the aura reader
observed a secondary aura five to ten feet beyond the body, the
amplitude on the body's surface lowered and the color became a
24 — IN FIN ITE MIND

steady blue. The person appeared quiet and at great peace,

probably in an altered state in which awareness is focused upon
mystical impressions and not upon ordinary happenings.
The aura reader noted that closed or weakly operating chakras
opened during the session. Likewise, the data confirmed that the
amplitude of the chakras increased after opening. By the seventh
and eighth sessions, all chakras and the composite field were light
blended colors of pink, peach, ice blue and violet, containing the
higher frequencies of white (Exhibit 4.)
When subjects occasionally reported illness, the aura reader
described their field as muddy and unclear. We discovered chakras
were not synchronistic, a measure called "anti-coherency (Exhibit
5.)
Most women displayed decreased energy in the feet and legs
with increased energy in the upper body. Men had a more even
pattern, top to bottom, but a weaker electromagnetic field in the
trunk.
Often aura readers reported the classical chakra colors
described in the ancient metaphysical literature as red in the
coccyx, orange in the abdomen, yellow in the solar plexus, green
in the heart, blue in the throat, violet in the third eye, and white in
the crown—although this was not always the case.
The stretching of connective tissue by Rolfing sometimes
brought pain and a rush of energy to the area, always in the red
frequency. This common red dimension seemed to indicate that
the entire body was alerted to danger (Exhibit 6D.) However, there
were differences in how subjects handled this pain. Those who
became emotional changed their field to red-orange, while others
who "slipped out of their bodies" brought in white along with the
red. Some apparently tolerated the pain without color change, but
with an elevated amplitude of red.
When subjects experienced spaciness or coldness in their feet
and legs, there was a decrease in electromagnetic energy in the
lower body with an increase in the throat, third eye, and crown.
The heart and crown chakras were consistently most active in
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 25
subjects when they felt anxious. This is not surprising since we
live in a time-oriented culture, dominated by a stress syllable
language. There is also tremendous emphasis placed on linear
thinking and material achievement. Of course, we know that all of
these factors are associated with cardiac disease.
Subjects reported numerous emotional experiences, imagery
and memory recall when different parts of their bodies were being
Rolfed. This corroborates Wilhelm Reich's beliefs that memory is
stored in body tissues. When imagery or spontaneous pictures
occurred, there was a strong cyclic energy shift back and forth
between the throat and the third eye. Only during imagery did this
pattern occur. Noting that the literature refers to these chakras as
centers of psychic and creative energy leads to speculation about
the role of chakra activity in human memory. There are no other
electrical body measurements, including brain waves, which
exclusively predict imagery during waking states.
We also discovered information about the Rolfer-Rolfee
interactions. Generally, the Rolfer's hands carried a large blue and
white corona with only minor changes during the sessions. If
subjects expressed pain, Rolfers' hands changed to violet-pink,
which seemed to calm the pain. When subjects reported higher
consciousness states or imaging, invariably the Rolfer's hands
were white. This apparent constant interplay between the fields of
the subject and the Rolfer indicated that a transaction took place
which facilitated energy exchange. Such an exchange probably
occurs during all successful body therapy treatments whether by
massage, acupressure, chiropractic, or orthopedic manipulations.
We observed that before the brain wave was activated and
before stimuli altered the heart rate, blood pressure or breathing,
the field had already responded. This led us to postulate that a
person's primary response in his world takes place first in the auric
field, not in the sensory nerves nor in the brain.
We believed that the auric field hangs around the body,
sometimes loosely and sometimes firmly, but it does not dissipate
like smoke in a wind. However, several times our instruments
26 — IN FIN ITE MIND

failed to record the field at the same time that the aura reader lost
sight of it. When she found the person's field again, she described
it as separated from the body by about six feet. Apparently, some
bonds which attracted the aura close to the body had weakened,
again, we speculated, due to the positive skin valance and the
negative charge of the auric field. Nonetheless, when the mass of
the field separated from the body's surface, we had a very weak
signal. The aura reader could not see the aura until she moved
outside the orbit and looked back at it. Although we observed the
apparent separation of the aura from the body, we could not record
this with surface body sensors.
Another interesting finding is that during the Santa Ana winds
which rush down the mountains in southern California with strong
positive ions, the human field becomes small. After many days of
these winds, people become irritable and sometimes ill. It is as
though the negative auric field splits away from the body, attracted
by the high positive charge of the atmosphere.
Likewise, we found that the field expanded when the person
was in the mountains or near the sea, possibly because of the
increased negative ions present in these environments.
After subsequent study, if a person's field was particularly
small, we would send him to the pool to swim or to a cold shower,
or have him walk barefoot on the grass of the university campus.
These increased his field and improved his feelings, probably
because of the increased negative ions.
Once during a Rolfing session when the subject had sensors
on his upper back and was lying supine, I asked the aura reader to
report on his back chakras. She stated that she couldn't see them
because he was lying on his back. I suggested that she read his
back field by looking under the bed, which was covered by two
mattresses. To her surprise, she saw it, and to ours, it confirmed
the color wave shapes on the oscilloscope.
As a result of the Rolf study, we discovered energy
emanations from the body's surface beyond the frequencies of the
neuromuscular system. At the present time the only appropriate
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 27
explanation is the existence of a bioenergy field. These data were
obtained in quiet, resting states, isolated, and analyzed by
scientifically accepted data analysis procedures such as Wave
Shape Analysis (Exhibit 4), Fourier Frequency Analysis, and
Frequency Spectrogram (Appendix Exhibits 7), all of which
produced the same results, differing only in the fineness of detail.
Furthermore, the sensor readings from chakra locations
corresponded directly with aura readers' descriptions of amount of
energy, its color and the dynamic quality. In addition, there
seemed to be a close relationship between these measures and the
emotional states, imagery, and interpersonal transactions of the
subjects.
As stated earlier, the dynamic details of the auric cloud, if it
separated from the body as reported by readers, could not be
corroborated by our instruments or techniques.
Although sensitives throughout history have described auric
emanations, this is the first reported objective, electronic evidence
which validates their subjective observations of auric color
discharges.
In many ways, more questions were raised than answered by
the Rolf study. For the next 20 years we conducted many pilot
studies of hands-on healing, various types of meditation, and
energy field transactions on a non-verbal level. Throughout these
studies, we established the reliability of aura readers' reports by
comparing simultaneous readings from eight experienced readers.
All readers completely agreed on primary and secondary colors.
With exotic or blended ones such as turquoise, puce, vermillion,
amber, and mauve, they gave similar but not identical names.
To obtain some measure of the validity of the electronic
recordings, we compared these with the purported measures of the
energy field described in both ancient and modem literature. In
every instance, wave shape analysis revealed a unique pattern for
each basic color. In other words, we could differentiate between
primary and secondary colors by reading the electronic signal
shapes. Red, blue, and yellow exhibited strikingly different
28 — IN FIN ITE MIND

shapes, while orange, green, and violet appeared to be

combinations of two primary shapes. (See Exhibit 4 - Energy
Field Wave Shapes.)
Primary studies with hands-on healers verified the uniqueness
of the transaction between healer and healee. For example, healers
who specialized in treating pain and quieting hypertension had
strong blue-white-violet fields when healing (Exhibit 8.) Healers
most successful in improving hypo diseases, such as
hypoglycemia and hypothyroidism, or weak tissues and functions,
created a strong red-orange-amber field (Exhibit 9.) Red was
predominant with healers who regenerated muscle, bone, and
nerves. A green-yellow field proved most effective with nerve
disorders such as Bell's palsy, cerebral palsy, or nerve
degeneration. (Exhibit 6C)
Some people, particularly those with barrier diseases such as
multiple sclerosis, Lou Gehrig's disease, and scleroderma, seemed
to have such a rigid field that they were unable to receive energy
from most healers. We realized that a transaction between the two
fields was essential to hasten healing. When experienced healers
had finished a healing session, the two fields of the healer and the
healee showed an identical pattern. Apparently, when healers
sensed that identical pattern with the healee, they terminated the
healing session (Exhibit 10.)
We decided to test our belief that the auric field projecting
anywhere from several inches to several feet from the body was
probably where the first communication contact occurred between
a person and the outside world. To explore this transaction, we
placed two blindfolded people back-to-back in chairs so that only
their auric fields could touch. Neither subject was consciously
aware of the other. Each was instrumented to record auric changes.
Simply the proximity of two fields did not guarantee a transaction.
With amazement we watched the interface and the change of each
field. Some people did not interact well through their fields; in
fact, sometimes two fields would remain absolutely separate,
retaining their individual patterns. With others, one field totally
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 29
dominated the other, that is, one changed while the other did
not—common with successful healing. Sometimes both fields
changed to become identical, yet unlike either beginning field.
This new, shared field appeared more elaborate than either
person's prior one.
Later, we explored the effects of sensory stimuli, that is, light,
sound, touch, and environmental vibrations on the human field. As
might be expected, individuals' fields were more sensitive to some
kinds of stimuli, regardless of the intensity. Without touching the
body, we stroked the aura with a feather while the person was
blindfolded. In other tests, we varied the intensity of light
vibrations and created sounds both above and below the known
range of hearing. We discovered that the energy field sometimes
responded even when the person experienced no conscious
sensation. Even more dramatic, the field responded before there
was any increased activity in the brain or in the circulation, and
sometimes even when the stimulus was too weak to activate the
nervous system. (See Chapter V, "Mind-Field: Residence of the
Consciousness and Soul" for further discussion.)
Another line of thought followed. Objects are believed to
interact with atmospheric fields. Traditional Buddhist breathing
techniques are based upon the idea of prana, an exchange between
air and the body. Though there is no scientific confirmation of this
exchange, our research led us to believe that a field transaction did
not result from activity of the five senses, but indeed from
interaction of the biological field with atmospheric ones. To test
this hypothesis, we needed to manipulate the atmospheric
electromagnetic field while recording the human field.
First, we studied the auric field in the near sound-sterile
environment of the Anechoic Room at UCLA where sound is
absorbed by baffles projecting from the walls and ceiling. A wire
grate covered floor baffles. The room had no light or outside
sound to provide electromagnetic energy. Four of us sequestered
ourselves in this sterile room with the intention of stimulating
ideas for future research design. Immediately, we felt strange
30 — INFINITE MIND

sensory aberrations; we lost the sense of time. After several rather

vacant hours, we became aware of three strong, pulsing rhythms
in our bodies that we had never felt before. These were in the
extremely low biological frequency ranges and appeared to be
rhythms of the neurological, circulatory, and muscular systems.
Actually, we never did make any electronic recordings in the
Anechoic Room; our consciousness altered so rapidly that we
were unable to operate instruments.
Later, we recorded the energy field of subjects in a Mu
Room (named for the Greek letter, Mu.) This is a shielded room
located in the Physics Department at UCLA, where the natural
electromagnetic energy of the air can be altered without changing
the level of gravitational force or the oxygen content. It is about
seven square feet and high enough to stand up in. Using
instruments inside the room, physicists could alter the quantities
as well as the specific frequencies of the electromagnetic field.
They could also direct electromagnetic frequencies to and from
various locations in the room.
During the recording an aura reader read the auric field by
penlight while physicists manipulated the environmental field.
The subject's auric signals were broadcast by an FM radio tele­
metry system to our outside recording instruments. Subjects gave
a continuing audio report of their personal experiences in the
room while we monitored their physical field and the physicists
manipulated the field in the room. Emilie Conrad, the dancer,
performed simple balance and dance movements, as well as
hands-on healing of a subject.
The findings were amazing. When the electrical aspect of the
atmosphere in the room was withdrawn, leaving less electrical
energy, the auric fields became randomly disorganized, scattered
and incoherent (Exhibit 11.) Sensory feedback was so impaired
that subjects were totally unaware of the location of their bodies
in space. The aura reader described the energy as no longer flow­
ing, but rather as jumping between people and chakras. Inside the
body, she saw energy flowing in an extensive mesh network,
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 31
described as a fishnet energy flow that did not correspond with
meridian pathways. We believed it was flowing through the
connective tissue which binds cells together. The connective tissue
is the extensive structure which holds the body parts and cells
together and composes bone, hair, nails, and skin by organizing
cells into functional units. Without connective tissue, the body
would be specialized protoplasm without unique shapes or
functions. Connective tissue is also known to conduct electricity,
although it is unknown what that energy is. The aura reader
exclaimed at how easy it was to see into the body when the auric
cloud was absent in the depleted electrical environment of the Mu
Room.
When the electromagnetism in the air was depleted, the only
other electrical energy available for the subjects to interact with
was the fields of other subjects in the room. As they drew upon
one another's fields, both fields were weakened. In this absence of
an atmospheric source of electromagnetism, the interaction
increased between their confused fields. At that stage general
disorganization of both fields increased. The subjects burst into
tears and sobbed, an experience unlike these people had ever
endured. Although they reported that they were not sad, their
bodies responded as though they were threatened, as they might be
if the electromagnetic environment which nourished them was
gone. Any sense of body boundary, the body image was absent, as
though the field was searching for another electromagnetic field to
which it could react.
When the electrical field of the room was increased beyond
the usual level, the auric fields were restored to normalcy. The
subjects' thinking became clear and they reported an expansion of
their consciousness. Their auras became light in color with
increased white vibrations.
On the other hand, if the electrical aspect of the room
environment remained normal but the magnetism was decreased,
gross incoordination occurred. The entire neurological integrating
mechanism was thrown off. Subjects could not balance their
32 — INFINITE MIND

bodies; they had difficulty touching finger to nose or performing

simple coordinated movements. They lost kinesthetic awareness.
Contrariwise, when the magnetic field was increased beyond the
normal state, subjects could stand easily on one foot, even on
tiptoes, or lean to previously impossible angles without falling.
Motor coordination had somehow improved.
Apparently, the whole process of movement and coordination
is related to interaction with the environmental electromagnetic
field, not only to gravity. A change in the field transaction
profoundly affected sensory-motor capacities. These findings
caused us to speculate about the possibility of training athletes and
rehabilitating those with muscular disabilities in a strong magnetic
energy field.
The sensitive subjects in the Mu Room reported accurately
through microphones the directional source of energy and the
approximate frequencies introduced by the physicists. When the
frequency generated into the room was 500 cycles per second, the
two subjects and the aura reader described their auras as red. Later,
we confirmed that in a normal electromagnetic atmosphere, when
the aura reader described the field as red, our instruments detected
500 cycles per second from the body's surface.
Subjects were fatigued from the extreme manipulation of
electromagnetism in the Mu Room. At the end of the ten-hour
experiment, all subjects' fields were spent and their bodies
exhausted (Exhibits 11.) Fortunately, their fields returned to
normal the following day.
At this point, I would like to summarize what we had learned
thus far. In a normal electromagnetic environment, the human
field is nourished; physiological processes are carried out
efficiently, and emotional experiences occur with clarity of
thought. When the level of electromagnetism reached a critical
saturation, there was evidence of improved motor performance,
emotional well-being, excitement, and advanced states of
consciousness. However, when the critical deficit was reached,
motor, sensory and intellectual capabilities diminished with
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 33
increased levels of anxiety and emotion.
The literature states that external electromagnetic energy
penetrates the body through acupuncture points and flows through
the meridians into the whole field. We discovered that it also flows
through the connective tissues. We concluded that the
electromagnetic environment is a milieu in which life and
physiological happenings occur. Apparently, for all systems to be
"go", a rich electromagnetic field must be present.
If further studies verify these findings, the implications are
staggering. The Mu Room treatment of neuromuscular
disturbances and degeneration such as cerebral palsy, multiple
sclerosis, and Lou Gehrig's disease should hasten recovery.
Likewise, emotional disturbances, sensory confusion and learning
handicaps should improve.
From approximately 600 hours of recording under many
circumstances, we discovered that each person has a unique,
predictable and recurring field characterized by such measures as
color, the quantity of the energy, the dominance of particular body
areas and the completeness of the spectrum pattern. There were
also individual differences in the complex dynamics or flux of the
field. Occasionally, we found a very stoic field that showed less
interaction with other fields. Frequently women displayed very
weak energy in the lower parts of their bodies. In an esoteric sense,
these people can be described as ungrounded. Contrariwise, males
more often had a spotty field with strength in some areas and
absence in others. Individual fields showed areas where energy
flowed more freely while others were blocked. We discovered by
recording brain waves, blood pressure changes, galvanic skin
responses, heartbeat and muscle contraction simultaneously with
auric changes, that changes occurred in the field before any of the
other systems changed.
The direct correlation of the simultaneous readings of eight
aura seers with our electronic data was used to establish the
validity of the energy field recordings. The Power Density
Spectrum and Sound Spectrogram techniques (Exhibit 7)
34 — INFINITE MIND

specifically indicated the strength of the frequencies of the

electronic recordings relative to color, regardless of the individual
or the specific chakra measured.
While we visually monitored incoming data on oscilloscopes,
we observed that simultaneous recordings from separate chakras
frequently showed a quite different pattern. To check the
differences, we used a Cross Plot Analysis technique to compare
two chakras for strength, frequency and sequence (Exhibit 5.) If
the various chakras had a similar amplitude and frequency they
were coherent, or synchronous. If grossly different, they were out
of sync, or anti-coherent. In later studies, the measure of anti­
coherency was associated with physical and emotional dysfunction
or disease.
We speculated that if a smaller coherent electrical field of the
heart existed in a larger anti-coherent energy field of the body, that
over time, the heart would pick up the body's random anti­
coherency and become dysrhythmic. Later, we were able to
reorganize cardiac dysrhythmia by creating a coherent energy
field. (Chapter X, “Healing: The Miracle of Life”.)

We know that many things happen without predictions or

adequate explanations. Actually, the scientific community ignores
a large residuum of information when that information contains
numerous factors that are blended together and difficult to
separate.
As I observed energy field data on the oscilloscope, I realized
that none of the known analytic techniques could unravel its
complexity. I sensed that the dynamic essence was lost when we
relied on standard statistical procedures. No matter how rigorous
our observations, there seemed to be no available mathematical
formulae complex enough to reveal the patterns within patterns
evident in our data.
It seemed that we had uncovered an information system that
 THE HUMAN AURA: LIVING VIBRATIONS BROUGHT TO LIGHT --- 35
we could not decode completely. All statistical formulae and
computer programs, including the many we had used with limited
success, are based on Euclidian geometry, which can decipher
only data that fell into symmetrical, regular patterns. Irregular
information loses its richness when forced into regular patterns.
Out of necessity, we continued to analyze our data with
Power Density Spectra and Frequency Spectrograms despite the
fact that these seemed to strip away the irregular, seemingly
unpredictable qualities, crunching the data into a smooth, classical
pattern with periodicities that did not actually exist. In other
words, our energy field data, processed by standard statistical
procedures, lost the constantly changing pattern in time and space.
Fortunately for us, early in the 1980s a new fractal
mathematics, the "geometry of nature," was developed. Fractal
mathematics could analyze natural, irregular dynamic phenomena
like the bark on a tree, a sunset, or even aspects of human
consciousness, including our energy field. Now the uneven,
crinkly, curvy swirls of a flapping flag, and the eddies in moving
water, could be studied by pattern. Soon, computer scientists
developed graphic programs to show unusual visual patterns held
even within linear frequency data. At about the same time, fractal
mathematics displayed a startling new concept of chaos. (See
Chapter III)
One of the confounding problems with all very complex data
has been that it looks chaotic, that is random, without pattern or
repetition. Yet using fractal geometry, these chaotic happenings
were found to have deep, profound and predictable order. With
complex information, a highly ordered pattern has emerged from
beneath a superficial appearance of disorder. In other words, what
appeared uneven and unpredictable on a surface level is in fact
orderly and predictable at a deeper level. Furthermore, when very
complex information is processed by fractal geometry the orderly
pattern, called the chaos attractor, rapidly appears as though it was
near the data surface.
We all know how unpredictable weather is. Even satellite data
36 — INFINITE MIND

can only provide short term weather predictions. Meteorologist

Lorenz, using fractal geometry to analyze 40 years of weather
data, discovered a magnificently ordered pattern within the
seeming disorder of the data. He discovered a weather chaos
attractor pattern which indicated that over the years a predictable
weather pattern has emerged. (Exhibit 15)
Using raw data from our energy field experiments, Allen
Garfinkle, an established fractal mathematician, obtained a perfect
dynamic chaos order (Exhibit 12 and 13 - Hunt Chaos Graph.)
Compare the crinkled pattern in the Hunt graph produced from
living human vibrations to the computer generated Rossler Chaos
graph and the Lorenz weather graph. Note the similarity, and also
the difference. (Exhibits 14 and 15.) Even more dramatic is the
fact that the Hunt pattern was derived from only three seconds
worth of data, whereas the weather data were gathered over a span
of 40 years.
Recently, a chaos attractor pattern has been found in brain
wave and heart frequency data, but these require the analysis of
many hours, or even days of continuous data. Three seconds worth
of heart or muscle data generated a straight line, called self similar,
meaning the frequency did not differ, rather than the complex
chaos attractor (Exhibits 16, 17, 18, 19). Probably all data, even
those that are simple and regular, will display a chaos pattern if the
data are extensive enough. But this has little practical value. What
is significant is that the energy field of the human, the most
complex of all living systems, disclosed this magnificent order in
only three seconds worth of data.
So, what is the significance of accessing the Hunt Chaos
Order? It means that by manipulating the energy field we can
refine and encourage coherency in all tissues and biological
systems. This approach could produce results more rapidly and
dramatically than could any other known medical, psychiatric, or
educational approach. Furthermore, through chaos attractor
graphics we will be able to elucidate definable patterns in diseases,
and in emotional and functional disorders.
 S T@ | C H A P T E R III

SCIENCE AND THOUGHT:

The Real World

Information from science and religion molds our beliefs about

reality, what we consider true, what imagined, and what carries the
strongest emotional charges. These pervading beliefs direct our
energies, creating life patterns. To evaluate or to change a
particular idea or a belief requires looking for its source as well as
at how human experience has validated that idea or belief. This
chapter explores some old and some new scientific realities that
structure our thoughts about the world and ourselves within it.
Rather than simply exposing the limitations of currently
accepted scientific laws by presenting some new information, I
hope to offer readers an opportunity to evaluate their beliefs in a
new light.
To classical scientists, the "softness" of mystical thought and
its apparent unreality can be threatening, or disquieting at least.
But for many scientists, the problem is that they must begin to
redefine themselves and their notions of reality; "truth" might
have to expand to accommodate the reality of such experiences as
mystical visions, for example. Of course there are some who
would welcome a broader notion of what constitutes truth. In fact,
37
38 --- INFINITE MIND

many so-called mystical scientists have always been the model

builders, the ones who broke through the age-old barriers. Kuhn,
the philosopher of science, commented that the world needs two
modes of thought—one that cares about truth and intuits what it is,
and one which concerns itself with the logic of truth. I believe that
the new age scientists will do both.
Certainly a profitable dialogue could take place between
scientists and mystics—perhaps difficult at first, but oh, so
fruitful. Both would learn: the mystic to ask more incisive
questions and to more carefully articulate and explain deep
wisdoms; and the scientists to loosen their mental constraints
about the nature of reality to explore "impossible" ideas. It is my
impression that this is indeed happening. Mystically-inclined
young people are now entering scientific disciplines whereas in
the past, they typically chose the arts and philosophy. Some
scientists are already performing research with mystics, and
several medical clinics have practicing mystics on staff Scientists
and other professionals are meditating, practicing tai chi or yoga,
and not just to offset stress but to help them access intuitive
knowing. At a recent research meeting, I was struck with the
realization that the pioneer thinkers resembled the descriptions of
the scientist-priests of the past in their wisdom and personal
commitments.
Scientists have consistently tried to present facts about the
universe and to order them so that generalizations could be made.
In the early stages they sought to discover pervading laws of the
physical universe, of time and space and mass, and to learn how to
manipulate these. This brought in the science of the industrial era.
The twentieth century, characterized by the boldest scientific
exploration, has produced the greatest amount of information in
the shortest amount of time that we have seen in all of history.
Scientific discoveries in the past 30 years have been monumental
in helping to explain the physical world. And by deeper and
broader investigation of phenomena, some earlier truths were
expanded and some shown to be only partially true. Einstein's
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 39
theory of relativity, for example, showed that space and time are
not absolute, as originally thought. Understanding the atomic
structure of all mass, and its splitting and harnessing with the
recent discovery of subatomic particles, demonstrated that the
greatest potential power source in the world lies in the smallest
amounts of matter.
The magnificent accomplishments of overcoming gravity and
maintaining life in hostile environments allowed us to explore the
other planets in our galaxy. Of course, none of us will ever forget
where we were when we heard that man had first set foot on the
moon. I was in a remote section of Uganda, Africa, living with
native peoples. We heard the news through radio reports. The
natives had no comprehension of the scientific break-throughs that
got us "there," but their conscious reality totally understood
humans being "there." Some told me that they went there often in
their dream time.
Our current understanding of infinite space is overwhelming
when compared to that of the early part of this century when we
thought we were the only world, with our stars and our sun and
moon, as though this constituted the entire universe. Now we
know that there are thousands of worlds, perhaps even more, and
as many suns and moons.
Our capacity to communicate in all media via satellites has
made it possible to beam information instantaneously to any
location on the globe. Furthermore, developments in the field of
computer technology have given us a glimpse of the profundity of
the human mind.
Probably the greatest recent discoveries in biology come from
decoding the genetic information system and the genetic
engineering it fostered. Discovering neuropeptides, the ultimate
biological communication system, has overshadowed the
tremendous strides made in the study of neurochemical enzymes.
(See Chapter X, Healing: The Miracle of Life).
As science has delved more deeply into the nature of the
physical world, it has run headlong into grave questions about the
40 --- INFINITE MIND

effects of the human mind on matter, and the role of human

consciousness in the universe. A better understanding of
biochemical processes in the body has not explained man's more
subtle experiences in the material world nor in his inner world.
Actually, science has not yet begun to seriously investigate such
questions. There may be many reasons for this fact: while these
questions are not beyond scientific study, these are beyond the
current scientific concepts and therefore the instruments scientists
have developed. Possibly, physical laws do not apply because such
dynamic happenings may play by a more complex set of rules.
Currently, science deals with less than one-half of human
experience, that portion of experience that is called "real" because
it can be objectively measured and quantified.
No one doubts that scientific discoveries make a difference in
our lives. We can enumerate the time and labor saving devices, the
speed of travel and communication, the improved comfort and
medical care, and the creature pleasures we enjoy. But for many
of us, these improvements have not caused us to alter our concepts
of ourselves, or our beliefs about reality.
So, although we readily accept the fruits of current invention,
we are not prone to give up outmoded thought. Usually, we have
forgotten or perhaps never knew where these beliefs about reality
originated. Therefore, let us examine two parallel, often
complementary but sometimes opposing ways of constructing
reality, one stemming from physical mechanics and the other from
quantum mechanics.
The older paradigm describing physical reality that we have
validated with our experience became known as Newtonian-
Cartesian concepts of reality. In this sytem, there is no such thing
as consciousness. This fundamental concept determined the design
of all experiments. As scientists fit new information into this
jigsaw puzzle, they gained credibility, leading them to believe this
was the only path to great scientific truths.
Science gained authority by discovering and promulgating
indisputable universal laws that are repeatable, stable, unchanging
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 41
descriptions of the nature of things and their interactions. But
today quantum physics has absolutely transcended every postulate
in basic mechanical science. For example, we all know that solid
matter is indestructible. Yet on the subatomic level of the particle,
sometimes we cannot find the mass and particles seem essentially
empty. We find only a wave of energy without dense form. At the
quantum level of matter, things don't exist until they are observed.
Probably both the wave and the particle concepts are essential to
represent reality fully.
The fact that events can no longer be predicted with complete
accuracy is known as the uncertainty principle. It states that the
most accurate descriptions of phenomena lie in probability
predictions, revealing to us that the world is fuzzy and always a bit
uncertain. The laws of gravity are perfect examples. "What goes
up must come down." And yet the Voyager, shot beyond the
effects of gravity will not return. Human levitation defying
gravitational law, at least for a time, is being studied in
Maharishi's laboratories in Switzerland and Iowa. There are even
indications of lateral gravity waves.
Objects don't have well-defined boundaries. One can't
simultaneously know the path and the position of moving objects.
Earlier indisputable laws are now qualified, extended, or limited
in application. Stephen Hawking goes so far as to say that dynamic
mechanical systems resemble human behavior in that there is little
success in predicting from mathematical equations.
An older paradigm states that time flows in an irreversible
direction from past to future. We can't stop time or reverse it.
Einstein consistently reminded us that this was not true. Actually,
space and time are bins into which we place things and
experiences to categorize them. Time and space are constructs
derived from our experiences and interpretations of events
occurring in space, which then give rise to the idea of motion.
Without motion there is no time. We have observed that when
people enter higher states of consciousness, they lose the sense of
time.
42 --- INFINITE MIND

This was brought dramatically to my attention by my

experience in Machu Pichu. I never knew exactly why I was
drawn to Machu Pichu, Peru, until I got there. I thought I went to
see the sights—but this was only partially true. At Machu Pichu I
had spent the night in a tiny room only large enough for a small
bed and a crawl space to get to it, to be ready to see the sunrise
over the ancient Andes archaeological site. I roamed around alone
in the early morning, photographing. I was curious about what had
happened here. The standard tourist information struck me as too
metaphoric to have actually happened. The rarified air rapidly
fatigued us sea-landers, so by noon I chose a quiet, shaded spot in
the courtyard between the two building areas to lie down. I was
awakened sometime later by loud conversation of French and
German tourists who had come for the day. They were
photographing me and the number of llamas that were lying
around me, one with his head on my boot. I am sure I had chosen
their special retreat spot, and my vibrations were sufficiently high
that I may not have resembled a human.
I experienced such an extended state of reality at that time that
my higher consciousness surveyed the area and honed in on the
different parts of the ruins. I mystically saw what had happened at
Machu Pichu. I realized that this beautiful old civilization was not
the peoples' ordinary habitat, but it was their "Temple of
Creation." On the one side were the buildings of spiritual creation
'" v .

where the priests conceived sounds and chants and rituals. In

another area, I saw the ancient artisans pounding gold and copper
into decorations, and making pottery, baskets and fabrics that I had
never before seen. At a shallow cave-like niche with a long slab of
stone separating the entrance from the exit, I saw dead bodies
placed at the entrance and removed for burial at the exit. This was
a ritual for the ascendance of the soul. I realized that Machu Pichu
had been the Incas’ temple where they sent their great visionaries
to create models for their people. This was a very unstabling
emotional experience for me because I was vacillating in a two­
fold reality system. This was my first monumental reality
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 43
confrontation.
On the return trip to Cuzco, I sought our tour leader, a former
Catholic priest who had lived in Peru for many years, to relate my
experiences. While I had no desire to convince him, I wanted to
debrief myself so that I might return to "normal" reality. He
listened quietly, without comment. Several days later, he brought
the curator of the Cuzco Museum to hear my story while he served
as an interpreter. The curator's only comment was, "Perhaps it is
true," because he had heard a very similar story from two
European mystics. One important part of this experience for me
was that I recognized the fallibility of our usual concepts of time.
(See Chapter VI, Telepathic Knowing: The Transfer of Thought).
The second law of thermodynamics describes the
disorganization of matter over time; that is things become less
structured and they decay. Leaves fall and create mulch, an
example of the downside of nature. Increased disorder or entropy
over time helps us to distinguish past from present, indicating the
directionality of material things. This raises the question of how
evolution could take place if the prevailing tendency is toward
disorder and decay. Transition to a higher order, according to Ilya
Prigogine, is universally accompanied by perturbation. He has
shown that if energy is introduced to matter, the disintegration
process is altered and matter takes on a higher organization. So,
entropy can be both the evidence of decay as well as the first step
in the creation of new materials. Jahn refers to the possibility that
consciousness has an entropy-reducing capacity which creates an
ordering influence on otherwise random physical processes,
thereby reversing their normal thermodynamic tendency of
disintegration.
The proof of scientific truth lies in replicating experiments
and producing the same results. When we believed that "truth" was
a single, unquestionable answer, this idea had merit. But the tenets
of the quantum era show that the experimenter, as a part of every
research he performs, influences the results by what he chooses to
study, the collection of data, and how he analyzes it—but even
44 --- INFINITE MIND

more importantly, by his actual presence in an experimental

situation. It seems that scientists cannot extricate themselves from
the experiment. They are a part of the field of interaction and a
basic ingredient of what they study. In this sense, truth on some
levels is always relative.
A subatomic interpretation is that there is no universe without
an observer. It has been said that there is no physical universe
without our thoughts about it. Quantum physics reminds us that
the moment one inquires into matter, like an electron that has no
position, velocity, momentum or spin, that electron acquires
character. Simply, we cannot observe the world without
participating with it. Observers are part of the nature of physical
reality, where matter and mind blend. Furthermore, when studying
open dynamic systems, there can never be identical answers. The
importance of repeating studies is not to determine "truths," but to
disclose many truths—different pieces of information to fill in the
puzzle.
Scientists have been taught to keep the laboratory
environment controlled, emotionally sterile, and non-exploratory
in an attempt to be objective. On the other hand, Jahn has very
succinctly stated: "... Consciousness defined in proper generality
is the ultimate factor in any observation and therefore an intrinsic
ingredient in the conceptualization of matter waves." Likewise,
the rigid objectivity of controlled experiments, if carried to
extreme, limits creative observation.
Mechanistic science, in its search for specific answers, has led
some researchers and many lay people to misinterpret correlation
or connection with cause. Correlation only tells us that two things
co-exist in certain situations and may have some connection, but
not that one creates the other. They may be both the product of
something else. Along this line, I believe that
electroencephalographers have been particularly remiss in judging
that alpha brain waves cause a shift in the level of consciousness
and thus in thinking. I believe that the low alpha and theta brain
waves merely indicate that the brain is operating on such a low
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 45
idling level as to allow the person access to the mind. Alpha
waves, then, would not be the cause, but would be co-happenings
with changes in consciousness.
To summarize, these older scientific paradigms have provided
answers to common questions about the material level of the
world, answers which are verified by our everyday experiences.
The resulting model of the world has been described as a gigantic
machine connected with a linear chain of events. Assuming that
we knew all the facts, we could reconstruct everything we knew
from the past, and predict accurately everything that would happen
in the future. Such a model, from which our beliefs stem, images
the universe and the world as a complex assembly of passive,
unconscious, inert matter, developing and changing without
participation or creative intelligence. It implies that everything
will go on as it is without our having a chance to change it, except
perhaps to build a bigger machine and push matter around.
What gloomy and only partially correct beliefs about life and
the universe have come from these models! They say that in this
material world dominated by entropy from birth to death, we are
on a downhill slide. Our world is random, moving toward thermal
death. We are born to die so that we can evolve. Life can only be
explained by a chemical soup from which we sprang, and we obey
these chemical laws.
Furthermore, we have inserted these concepts into every field
of inquiry. Psychology and psychiatry considered man a machine
with bestial ideas, impulsive and unconscious drives that directed
him. Reality composed of these "truths" is a decidedly restricted
reality, that at most is only an approximation. Such science has
told us about the lowest level of reality, but has provided us with
little information about the higher realms.
Arnold Toynbee's conclusion about twenty-six lost
civilizations was that they all perished for the same reason. They
over-protected the tenets which first made them powerful. They
eventually cracked from rigidity and sterility which accompanies
a refusal to yield to an evolving world view.
46 --- IN FIN ITE MIND

Fortunately for us, a major paradigm shift has brought new

ideas, ideas that cannot be explained by the language of older
paradigms. Thomas Kuhn, in The Structure o f Scientific
Revolutions, predicted a quantum leap in the quest for new truths
that would not happen simply as a result of small addenda to old
truths. Rather, he sees major perceptual change which aligns our
thinking to a more enlightened framework. Perhaps it was
inevitable that science explored mechanistic reality first, like a
baby creeping before it can walk. But the old process persisted so
long that it sidetracked our "seeing" and caused us to forget where
to "look." I refer specifically to the microscopic approach clouding
the macroscopic view of wholeness.
Now we know that reality is infinitely more complex than
science has ever envisioned, even beyond any single religious
ideology existing today. This extended concept of reality
postulates an open system—where constant interactions and
transactions take place back and forth between all existing
systems—in contrast to the closed systems of the past. Quantum
physics has heralded its birth. Stephen Hawking, one of its
eminent spokesmen, commented that "... apparently common
sense notions work well when dealing with material things like
apples and/or comparatively slow moving things like planets; they
don't work at all for things moving at the speed of light."
The advanced order basic to the new physics and all ancillary
sciences was not discovered in particles of matter; it was found in
the minds of scientists who had given up their preconceived ideas
about the physical world and reality, as the overwhelming idea of
the oneness of life impinged upon their consciousness. They saw
that things moved without following the laws of mechanical
motion; things moved disjointedly in a discontinuous manner,
jumping almost effortlessly between two places. This was exactly
how I perceived Emilie Conrad's motion when she said that she
"created a wave and rode it." On the atomic scale, physicists saw
that what they used to measure data "created" and determined
what they found.
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 47
Disclosures that subatomic particles had the characteristics of
light were exciting. But then it was discovered that when one
extends material substances toward infinity, one comes up with
not mass, but a process, an event, and a relationship. One expects
to hear such ideas from philosophers, but from scientists, this can
be a shock. James Jeans, a famous mathematician, wrote that the
universe began to look less like a machine and more like a thought
system.
It logically follows, then, that our thoughts are therefore a part
of the universe's thoughts, and that we can and do influence them.
How strange it is to contemplate that at the deepest level, the
world is more like a thought system than material reality. No
longer can we accept that the universe is a gigantic clock; instead,
it is a unified network of events and relationships in which the
mind and intelligence and the human soul are integral parts of
existence, rather than the products of nature.
Most profound changes in the conception of reality came
from Einstein's Unified Field Theory. This theory states that all
matter is organized energy, and that field reality is one of the
characteristics of the universe. The deeper one probes material
systems, the more one encounters field aspects or the substances'
underlying electrical pattern, the very basis of the substance itself.
Whether the energy is constellated as a cup, a tree, or a human
being, it has a field associated with it. The denser the substance,
the less energetic and more rigid the field becomes. There are no
firm boundaries between fields—boundaries belong to dense
material substances. Fields, then, extend everywhere, an open
system, free to evolve and grow, and as such they are frequently in
disequilibrium.
Physicists have studied the interactions between two
fields, but when it comes to more than two fields interacting,
they bow out, leaving that to the mystics. Yet the most
important level from which to understand the world and
human beings is the level of the field transaction. We know that
living things have dynamic fields which constantly and
48 --- INFINITE MIND

selectively transact with all environmental fields. In this sense,

man's field is primary to his existence.
Fields that are no longer connected to a substance, but instead
to behaviors and thoughts, have been classified by the English
biologist Rupert Sheldrake as morphogenic fields. He believes that
fields which have existed as a result of human lives still exist and
have molded past events as they color what happens today. When
a certain number of individuals of a particular species learn
something, it seems to positively affect the learning of all other
individuals of that species.
The older concept that everything progresses toward decay
does not hold with field beliefs. From a field reality, the world
grows and changes—it evolves. Prigogine, the Nobel biochemist,
showed that when energy was introduced into a system, that
substance was refined and changed. But it did not decay. Open
systems are highly interactive systems. Generally the body, but
also the mind and thought are considered open systems. But
actually, living systems are both open and closed.
In fact, to maintain integrity, no system can be totally open or
completely closed; it would disintegrate into chaos or die from
lack of nourishment. The more complicated the structure, the more
it requires energy transactions to maintain its integrity. Open
systems have a dynamic and shifting balance, whereas more
closed ones have a static balance and are more threatened by
sudden, catastrophic field changes. When a system becomes
closed and stagnant, structural mutations occur. Probably cancer is
such a mutation.
As a result of my work, I can no longer consider the body as
organic systems or tissues. The healthy body is a flowing,
interactive electrodynamic energy field. Motion is more natural to
life than non-motion—things that keep flowing are inherently
good. What interferes with flow will have detrimental effects.
Behavioral science researchers have coined a picturesque
expression, "the random rat" for subjects who nullify otherwise
clear-cut results and distort correlations. Such situations show up
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 49
in most closed systems research where some of the data collected
are so abnormal that they seem to come from another experiment.
This will also occur in open systems studies where it is not seen as
abnormal, but rather a part of the dynamic pattern of phenomena.
We have held the notion that scientists ought to be able to
explain all things. Why, then, can't the meteorologists more
accurately predict the weather? Why can't gamblers predict a
roulette wheel? A man is feeling fine, his doctor says he's in tip­
top health, but he leaves his physician's office and falls over dead
of a heart attack. Why? The basic tool of science, mathematics,
can't even describe or explain clouds or the bark on a tree, or
lightning or a fire. There are happenings in the universe that are
not repetitious, continuous, or highly consistent. These
phenomena are like oddballs or random rats. Simply put, science
has not been geared to understand or predict any type of irregular
behavior.
To summarize, we must acknowledge that we are in a
magnificent era when the old is fading and the new has not been
fully disclosed. But we can say with assurance that a human being
cannot be likened to a gigantic clock with everything
predetermined by mechanistic wheels. The reality of the world lies
in fields which interact with other fields of energy in dynamic
chaos patterns that are always evolving to higher levels of
complexity. This is an open system in which reality is
tremendously complex. What we know as truth, intuition and
consciousness all operate interdependently with matter.
Furthermore, they transform matter as they are transformed by it.
The eminent physicists Eddington and Schroedinger were the
first to acknowledge that science is not dealing with the world
itself, but with the shadows of an imaginary world. The new
physics made us aware of that fact. James Jeans further elaborated
that the mathematical pictures of nature which science discloses
are fictitious and do not represent ultimate reality. (Fred Alan
Wolf wanted to know how a simple observation could "cause" a
wave to spread out over space to produce a point, a particle).
50 --- INFINITE MIND

Where then do we turn if what we have believed to be the core of

science, physics and mathematics, shows us but illusions of the
real world? Many physicists believe it to be a fundamental event
beyond physics—an act of consciousness and thought.
As Jahns and Dunne put it, physical theory is not complete
until consciousness is acknowledged as an active element in the
establishment of reality. But we seem caught in a dilemma.
Consciousness does not fit into the time, space and mass constructs
of material physics. And the old model has so successfully
described ordinary reality that all behavioral disciplines have
embraced it, eliminating consciousness as an acceptable course of
scientific study.
Now we can begin to accept the fact that basic truths do not
stem from information accumulated over the centuries.
Fundamental change is not evolutionary but is revolutionary; it
occurs in conceptual leaps.

Advanced thinkers from the fields of chemistry, biology, and

anthropology have drawn concepts from each other about the
fundamental rules that shape adaptive systems. While each
searches for universal principles of world order, it was the "Santa
Fe Group" which first articulated a unified theory of living
systems. They called it complexity theory—a major revolution in
science. (Lewin).
Somewhat earlier, physicists had introduced the chaos theory,
also as a new macroscopic view of the global nature of the
universe. Even in the early stages, the philosophical descriptions
of these theories showed that they embraced field phenomena and
holographic concepts which help to explain organized
information.
We know that every part of an organized field is a hologram
where each part contains the pattern of the whole. The chaos
concept further elaborates a hologram to show that although each
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 51
part is alike, there will be slight differences in the whole over
time. The hologram then is a more spatial pattern with only
implied time or motion, whereas chaos is a process containing
both time and space, wherever its focus. Possibly, the term
"chaotic hologram" is more appropriate for patterns representing
spectrum distribution of energy over time, unrestricted by the
level of energy.
Do you know that if you cut bits out of material substances
they are no longer the same? But if you take a snip out of a field,
a hologram, it just becomes smaller, not changed, for every
particle is exactly like every other particle. David Bohm stresses
that the hologram is a starting point for a new description of
reality, an enfolded order. Classical concepts of reality have
focused upon secondary manifestations—the unfolded aspect of
things, not their source.
A field is a flowing thing. It flows within itself, through it to
other fields, and as an organized unit it also flows from one place
to another. It carries an ultimate level of information. Recently,
we have been able to measure human fields separate from mass
and describe them as energy patterns, wave shapes, wave trains,
and wave packages or quanta. (See Chapter II). In the future we
will be able to decode fields in other ways where relationships
and patterns of happenings will not be looked on as cause and
effect but a part of the transition. Dynamic fields participate as
they select by attraction. (Lewin).
The unique human field does not merely react or interact; it
transacts because it dynamically makes choices. Here, matter and
energy, mind and spirit, are not really different things, only
aspects of an expanded reality.
So far, experts have not substantially clarified the interface of
complexity and chaos, their differences, similarities and unique
contributions. Perhaps these merely define separate ways of
categorizing elaborate data. While concepts of chaos and
complexity guide a growing body of standard research, their
application to the "softer sciences" of consciousness, creativity,
psychic phenomena and subtle energies is essential. Years ago, I
52 --- INFINITE MIND

sensed such ideas when I discontinued correlation studies to focus

on patterns of the human field. Chaos and complexity theories
offer the first sound framework for understanding my complex
dynamic data; they also provide me with new ways to interpret
mystical phenomena.
Kauffman believes that complexity is not a point, but rather a
quality of a spectrum which depicts overall organization. Both
complexity and chaos stress patterns of information as more
important than specifics. Both can be applied to linear systems but
their ideas are essential in explaining non-linear living systems. I
concur with Kauffman that chaos is a subset of complexity.
(Lewin).
Chaos patterns appear on different scales simultaneously: the
infinite, the microscopic, and the human scale of things that we
can see and touch. On one level chaos describes non-linear, non-
random disorder. On another level there is great order, showing
the self-organizing nature of systems. Gleick reminds us, "In
science as in life, it is well known that a chain of events can have
a crisis point that could magnify small changes. Chaos means that
such points are everywhere—pervasive."
Chaos describes the most dynamic order-disorder of everyday
happenings of energy around us: a flag snapping in the wind, the
wild swirls in a column of smoke, the intermittent steady-to-
random dripping of a faucet, and weather. It seems that some
unknown energy was introduced to account for the erratic
behavior of ordinary happenings—a subliminal stimulus creating
a strange response.
Gleick says that chaos describes the apparent disorganization
of open systems as though they were attempting to jiggle
themselves into higher order. He states, "The greater the
turbulence, the more complex the solution, the greater the jump to
a higher order."
The irregular side of nature, the discontinuous and erratic
side, has been puzzling to classical science since its beginning.
The theory of chaos helps us to appreciate the pervasive non­
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 53
linearity of our world where a system is not totally out of control;
it has another control. Chaos arises in any dynamic system when a
certain level of complexity is reached. It follows no known
determined pattern; however, the greater the complexity the less
predictable are details of its future. In chaotic systems, we know
only what is or what has happened, not exactly what will happen.
In the 1970s physicists expounded ideas from chaos theories that
they thought could account for all complex behavior. In time, they
realized that while applicable, these could not capture all of the
dynamics exhibited by complex systems.
With earlier research involving specific microscopic points of
information, pattern recognition was not very important—
certainly not necessary. Although energy physics is basically a
pattern research, it was only with chaos approaches to living
systems that pattern analysis appeared at front and center stage and
ran headlong into the limited capacity of scientists to observe
unique patterns hidden in apparent disorder.
From this problem sprang the new fractal mathematics of
nature with its companion computer display graphics. Now
visionary researchers could pursue subtle energy fields where
Euclidian mathematics had not worked. Chaos and complexity
concepts could begin to explain things standard science could not.
The word "fractal" was coined by the mathematician Mandelbrot
early in the 1970s from the Latin word fractus, meaning broken,
fragmented, like the branching, twisting organic shapes formed in
nature. Fractal formulas fed to computers created fractal energy
graphics—magnificent, intricate, flowing, lumpy patterns carrying
both deep and global information.
Using the fractal formula, Rossler generated the first
computer model of chaos, where every part of order was slightly
different—an orderly non-random process with gaps. Lorenz,
applying fractal mathematics to 40 years of weather data, formed
a chaos pattern which he described as having a butterfly effect. He
believed this pattern was so powerful that the fluttering of
butterfly wings in Japan could theoretically affect weather patterns
54 --- INFINITE MIND

worldwide. He corroborated that at the deepest level, small

perturbations over time could make things happen in a way that
they could not have happened without that perturbation.
Even dynamic systems have some linear, defined order. And
dynamic systems with greater frequencies are more prone to
exhibiting chaotic relationships and turmoil disorganization.
(Exhibit 13) presents the chaos pattern obtained from three
seconds worth of energy field data. The chaos pattern did not
occur from three seconds worth of neurological data from the
heart muscle and brain. (Exhibits 16, 17, 18, 19.)
Chaos theory emphasizes process with levels of complexity
categorized in three broad phases: (1) ordered, (2) chaotic, and (3)
turmoil. This means that chaos is not a point beyond non-chaos,
but rather a process of initial disorganization of data either toward
randomness or toward a more static order. The Santa Fe group
places specific emphasis on the phase they call "the edge of chaos"
or its onset, the beginning of the classical chaos attractor. Because
in my data these changes are not necessarily instant, I see the
"onset of chaos" as a time dimension and the "ridge of chaos" its
pattern. "Edge of chaos" and "ridge of chaos" differ in that edge
implies abrupt change; ridge refers to a gentler slope.
The complexity of the data increases the opportunity for rapid
change to the dynamic state, or the ridge of chaos. Beyond the
ridge of chaos generally lies not an abrupt chasm of turmoil but a
downward slope toward randomness. This is a vulnerable time
when energy from other sources can reflect the system so that it
fluctuates back and forth on the ridge, becoming neither strictly
ordered nor random.
There are time instances in the ridge state when the system is
in exquisite control, balanced between order and disorder. We
experience this in our consciousness when we subtly shift between
material, and higher or spiritual awareness, or when we are
meditating and arrive at a sudden illumination or profound sense
of knowing.
According to past scientific dictates, change is linear, gradual,
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 55
and continuous. Now a new catastrophic theory speaks about
certain critical stages in nature where a catapult or unpredictable
jump occurs. We have all had peak experiences for which there
was no warning. If one were to examine the macroscopic pattern
of the data before the violent change occurred, one would
probably find an "edge of chaos" point of disequilibrium when
energy reorganized into a different constellation. Such sudden
changes describe volatile weather conditions, political upheavals,
and disease epidemics. Probably the apparent onset was
catastrophic while its process was chaotic.
Lorenz, the meteorologist, first named the unique geometric
form of the chaos pattern the "strange attractor." When the
chaotic attractor appeared, there was an increasing likelihood of
resonating and transacting with other vibrations. Physics and
evolutionary biology describe this instance as a "phase shift"
where some information drops out or changes—as when a solid
changes to a gas.
The presence of strange attractor patterns indicates both time
and organization when systems are evolutionary or vulnerable to
being pulled in many directions. There exists a proclivity for one
part of a field to be drawn to another field, not regularly, for that
could not be called strange. We have observed that people and
physical happenings seem to carry unexplained connections, like
extrasensory awareness or Psi K. Strange attractors in the human
field probably help to explain individual behavioral tendencies
and susceptibility to some diseases. It may even be that genetic
tendencies operate through chaotic attractors in the field.
In the human field, major attractors carry strong, personally
emotional valences like those resulting from childhood trauma. I
personally believe that mind-field attractors from other lifehoods
will replace the ancient concepts of karma. (Chapter IX, Life­
hoods: The Hidden Agenda). It is exciting to realize that the flexi­
bility of the ridge of chaos can be used creatively to change
behavior and thoughts to our advantage. (Chapter X, Healing).
56 --- INFINITE MIND

Just as small disturbances rapidly alter chaotic systems, so

can minute adjustments stabilize behaviors. Physics has found that
by periodically introducing energy into chaotic systems they can
be pulled back toward order. Because the human energy field is so
resilient, manipulation techniques such as hands-on healing, subtle
energy devices, and body therapies introducing subtle energy into
the system can more effectively preserve health than those
therapies using chemical or mechanical intervention. I believe
controlling chaos anywhere in the body via the field will be faster
and more enduring than testing specific biological subsystems.
As living systems transact through their attractors, they build
a complex repertoire of vibrations, which results in a memory. I
describe it as a "wave train." It is like a series of different chaos
patterns strung together over time to show a gestalt or readability
quotient. We have discovered that some people's fields show such
a limited wave train of energy patterns that in a few minutes they
have literally exhausted their everyday reactive capabilities.
Others show untold differences over time, an open, dynamic,
complex field of adjustments. In other words, the nature of the
wave train, a changing auric fingerprint, circumscribes the
available interactive possibilities. It follows that if the human field
does not transact, it loses its complexity, becomes narrow in
vibrational spectrums, and thus displays a simple wave train with
a diminished capacity for self organization or creative exploration.
The Institute of Noetic Sciences in Scientific Positivism: the
New Dualism concluded th a t"... the ultimate stuff of the universe
is consciousness." Ultimate reality is contacted not through the
physical sense of the material world, but through deep intuition.
Such an idea of matter emerging out of human consciousness
seems quite foreign to our Western mind because we have no
experiences of altering matter by "will." However, there is
growing evidence that in expanded consciousness, man has access
to the primary reality of frequencies. Living is a transaction, an
interaction with other force fields, with an element of choice. This
 SCIENCE AND THOUGHT: THE REAL WORLD --- 57

is a domain beyond time, space, and mass where only vibrations

exist.
Jahn and Dunne, in their book Margins o f Reality: The Role
o f Consciousness in the Physical World have postulated a
geometry o f reality, the wave nature o f consciousness, and the
quantum mechanics of experiences. The major hypothesis of this
model is that reality encompassing all aspects of experience,
expression and behavior is constituted only at the interface
between consciousness and its environment. It further presumes
that the sole currency of any reality is information, which may
flow in either direction. "...Consciousness may insert information
into its environment as well as extract information from it." In a
functional sense, information can be constituted by any array of
stimuli that the consciousness is capable of sensing and reacting
to. Numerous theorists are trying to recast quantum physics in
terms of information theory.
"The symbolic nature of physics," according to Eddington, "
... is now formulated in such a way as to make it almost self-
evident that it is a partial aspect of something wider." The shadow
nature o f physics' reality paradoxically leads many scientists
toward metaphysics or a mystical view of the world, like so many
o f our pioneer thinkers: Bohm, Einstein, Heisenberg, Jung,
Penfield, Eccles, Eddington and Schroedinger. Jahn and Dunne
have quoted Charles' Third Law, "Any sufficiently advanced
technology is indistinguishable from magic." "In science we do
not explain things away, but we do get closer to the mystery."
(Lewin).
Actually, science and mysticism cope with the same
things—the broadest extension of reality. Both are processes of
handling information, but each does it differently. Indeed, they
glom on to different pieces of information while seeking to define
what is most important in the world. One could view mysticism at
one pole and science at the other, the two most important poles for
understanding the universe. Science in the past has dealt with the
commonest o f man's experiences—a low level of information and
58 --- INFINITE MIND

order. Mysticism has dealt primarily with the highest, but not the
commonest level, which gives credence to the divine order and
man's spiritual nature. The greatest scientists of all time say that
their experimentation is guided by mystical, intuitive insight. For
"when you've discovered the truth in science, it does have the most
extraordinary magical quality about it." (Lewin).
A Russian cubist painter, Matyuskin, wrote in his diary,
"When at last we shall rush rapidly past objectiveness, we shall
probably see the totality of the whole world."
 C T ^ jf C H A P T E R IV

FIELD TRANSACTIONS:
The Biosphere -
Cosmosphere Connection

Cosmic and atmospheric sciences have produced a sizeable

body o f research about the nature of the universe. But similar
research in bio-sciences has lagged far behind. Understandably, it
is much easier to study the cosmos out there than to study it in
here—within our own bodies where emotions confound things.
Modem instruments have made microcosmic tissue
information available, but to date biology has not attended to the
extensive macroscopic field information of the body. Of course,
until recently there have been no models or research techniques to
guide us. Now the recent expansion of chaos and complexity
theories and the use of fractal mathematics to test these, have set
the stage for definitive studies of macroscopic field patterns of the
human body. As a physiologist, my research connects the body
with the cosmosphere, not by physiological reactions but through
field transactions. The aim is to bridge the chasms between the
cosmic facts, the body field interaction and the resulting human

59
60 --------- IN F IN ITE M IN D

experience.
Each of us carries our own elaborate biosphere within our
tissues and fields. What do we know about our biosphere? We
enter the world equipped with five senses with which we perceive
the world around and within us and from which we create an
ordinary, everyday reality for living. Do you realize that you
cannot see anything without seeing your own body first? Notice
that your nose is in the middle of every view. Likewise, you
cannot hear sound without also hearing the vibrations of your
own body.
I became acutely aware of these realities when I first studied
the auric field in a near sound-sterile environment of the
Anaechoic Room at UCLA. In this windowless room, sound is
absorbed so rapidly that even speech is muffled and inaudible.
Uneven baffles project from the walls, ceiling, and the sliding
door of this huge room. The floor is an elevated grate covering
floor baffles. There is no natural or electrical lighting to give
electromagnetic energy—we used flashlights.
Three scientists and one artist meditated in that room for
several hours to prepare for testing our auric fields after such
sensory deprivation. As described in Chapter II, each of us had
the same profound sense of three pulsing electrical rhythms inside
our bodies—rhythms we had not experienced before. Each of the
three rhythms had a unique frequency pattern and tone, which we
surmised were rhythms of our neurological, circulatory and
neuromuscular systems that we generally do not perceive.
This reminded me that every sound we hear coming from the
outside world also contains the sounds of the living physical
body. Likewise, everything we touch contains the sensation of our
hand which touches. And every odor we smell, even that which is
transported through the air from a distance, is perceived through
the odor of our own bodies. In other words, our primary reference
to the world is our physical body, and from these bodily
sensations we create a reality in which our body is constantly
present.
With this in mind, when we consider relating to the cosmos
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 61

experiencing higher levels of human consciousness, we recognize

a very practical problem. We are locked into average sensory
information from the material world, which is then filtered
through a physical-body oriented perception. As a result, most
people need to be re-educated in order to sense the more subtle
vibrations of the cosmic world.
Not only are single sensations perceived through the physical
body, but a permanent "body image," a holistic body referent, is
completely developed some time between the ages five and seven.
This general body image is composed of all the memories of
living, moving, feeling, and sensing our bodies in every situation.
It makes possible complex language, fine motor coordination, and
conceptual thinking, all o f which are retained in the form of
images in the brain. Although these images change and expand
with time and experience, the body image remains the primary
image which one carries into all new experiences. It definitely
binds us into the ordinary functional reality of our world.
The telereceptors, senses of sight, smell and sound, bring in
"out there" information about the physical world at a gross level.
But it is the "sixth sense" coming from the human field, the finest
o f all senses, which gives us the elaborate, distant knowledge
about the happenings in the cosmosphere. This will be discussed
in this chapter.
Because I personally experience the vibrations of the
macrocosm and research its subtle transactions, I am amazed to
read that cosmologists believe that all interactions between the
human and the cosmos take place in the human brain. Obviously,
when we try to understand how the energy of the universe interacts
with that of the body, brain waves seem to be the primary
connection. That is, of course, because biologists have not
understood the real source of the body's energy field. I reject the
idea that vibrations of the universe interface with our body
vibrations solely through the brain waves, because currently
recorded brain waves are composed primarily of vibrations of
from zero to 24 cycles per second. Such a limited spectrum cannot
62 --- INFINITE MIND

possibly process the extensive information from the universe. This

is not a grand enough scale.
Why are there not better biological parameters to describe our
relationship to the cosmos? Simply, physiology has restricted its
research to the physiological systems discovered many years ago.
The current physical models in biology and medicine encourage
studies in the interrelationship of cardiovascular, muscular, neural,
and endocrine systems. Biochemistry and psychoneuroendo­
crinology look for the environmental effects of temperature,
pressure, and contamination on systems, tissues, and fluids. With
such a restricted model, there is no reference to the fields of living
tissue nor to those of the cosmos.
Let us look at the exciting new findings from physics that
relate directly to the biological and physical universe. The concept
o f the hologram was a major discovery. A hologram is a three-
dimensional representation, a picture, that can be created of any
object. The holographic picture is possible when a laser beam, a
coherent energy source, while focussed on an object, is separated
into two beams by a beam splitter—a piece of glass with one half
mirrored and the other half clear glass. When the laser beam hits
the mirrored part, the light is reflected off to one side. The other
part of the beam goes through the clear glass and hits the object
directly. If the object is at an angle to the reflected beam, the
energy from the beam will pick up all three dimensions of that
object. When both the reflected image and the direct one are
projected onto a photographic plate, a three-dimensional picture is
created. Actually, the hologram is not visible until another beam
o f coherent light is projected again onto the photograph. The
resultant image is like a stereoscopic view, as though one could
walk around the picture.
A revealing aspect of this true hologram is that every part of
it is a total representation of every other part. For example, if the
hologram picture were projected on a piece of glass, and that glass
were broken into a million pieces, each little piece, regardless of
how small, would contain a total representation of the
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 63

object—thus the name "hologram." Again, each tiny part of an

object carries a complete picture of the entire object.
Pribram, a neurophysicist at Stanford, explored the idea that
human memory is present throughout the entire brain rather than
being located in any single part of the brain. After the discovery of
the hologram, he concluded that the brain is also a hologram with
each part carrying a representation of all of it.
Such a far-reaching idea won Pribram a Nobel Prize and gave
us a new understanding of why people can remember things
believed impossible when parts of the brain are destroyed. They
are remembering from the entire brain hologram, not from the
information believed stored only in specific cellular areas. Also, a
holographic brain memory is a perfect template to explain
dramatic neurological recoveries, or to provide a pattern for the
regeneration of organs.
At the same time that Pribram was describing the brain
hologram, Bohm, an English physicist, advanced a cosmos
hologram model, contending that every single part, every unit of
the cosmos, carries a representation of all cosmic happenings.
Thus he described a cosmic memory as a hologram. It follows,
then, that if we accept that the human brain contains a personal
memory hologram, and that there is also a cosmic hologram of the
memory o f everything that has happened in the universe, and if we
accept that we are a part of the cosmos, then there must exist some
kind of scientifically testable interface between these two
holograms.
Concurrently, an experimental physicist, Bob Beck, believed
that the mystical state o f psychics and clairvoyants while they
were at work somehow related to the brain waves. He developed
sensitive instruments that he used to record the brain waves of
proven mystics. When he processed these data, he found that their
brain waves during their mystical work were 7.8 cycles per
second, plus or minus l/100th of a cycle. This particular frequency
reminded him of the research about the Shumann resonance.
Shumann, a German living in the early 1930s, discovered a
64 --- INFINITE MIND

magnetic field that thrust upward from the earth rather than
downward, as does the gravitational field. Beck reckoned that the
great "hot spots," the historical power areas of the world such as
Stonehenge, the pyramids, Delphi, and others, probably had strong
Shumann-type vibrations. Many people have had unusually
profound experiences at these locations, which are revered as
reservoirs o f great truths. Mystics have attested to an increased
power source radiating from the ground at these power spots.
Shumann recorded this resonance as between seven and eight
cycles per second. Beck found it to be 7.8 cycles within one-five-
hundredth of a cycle, exactly the frequency he recorded from the
brain waves of mystics.
To summarize: Three outstanding contemporary scientists
produced similar information from different approaches. Bohm, a
physicist, stated that the cosmos is a hologram containing all the
information about the world. A neurophysicist, Pribram, believed
that the brain is likewise a hologram of the memory of human
experience. Beck, a physicist engineer, found that when persons
who possess extrasensory capacities for knowing about past,
present, and future events are "tuned in," their brain waves are 7.8
cycles per second.
From these concepts, together with the information about the
earth's resonance of 7.8 cycles per second, a vibratory field which
contains data about all the events that have taken place around the
world, a powerful new idea emerges. The biosphere and
cosmosphere can be viewed as two massive holographic
computers doing more than their own isolated work, for they are
referenced, plugged together by a frequency of 7.8 cycles per
second. This is the interface—the tuning mechanism. But in order
to understand the interaction, we need an extended model of
human biology, one which makes it possible to intertwine and
interpret the fields of energy generated in both the cosmos and
biosphere. Let me describe how current research supports such an
idea.
All material substances are composed not only of observable
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 65

matter, but also of more subtle field components with organized

energy patterns, boundaries, and definitions. The deeper one
probes into physical substance, the more one encounters the
underlying electrical energy or the energy field. All material
substances—trees, dishes or animals—have fields because they all
are composed of particles, atoms, and cells. Each of these fields is
in constant dynamic equilibrium.
The less dense a substance, the more energetic the field with
a greater potential to create a force. Living things are the least
dense. (Pasteur found that electrical polarization distinguishes
living from dead matter even though the chemical compositions
were identical). Because fields are not random but are highly
organized, they have their own integrity, vitality and life, different
from, and therefore able to interact with other fields.
For some years the cosmic and ionic fields have been clearly
described, but not the bio-field. We acknowledge that at the
microscopic level of all cells there is a tightly composed energy
system capable of transactions with other energy systems. But we
have failed to recognize that the composite field also has its own
integrity which differs from its parts.
Not until we investigated practices of Eastern medicine and
acupuncture did we give serious attention to human energy fields.
Still, Western science does not consider the human auric field a
credible area for research. If one cannot see the aura and
discussion of it is couched in unfamiliar language from other
cultures, one doubts its value. Ancient writings claiming that
chakras are the auric field source with meridian pathways the
circulation route do not fit snugly into the current understanding
from structural anatomy. Nonetheless, the few who have chosen to
research this uncharted human field area discover facts unique to
living fields that also correspond to universal laws. The human
field looms as primary to life.
Resonating frequencies are primary physical bonds in nature.
For every frequency or frequency band, there exists natural or
created resonators. In other words, a field's frequency pattern at a
66 --- INFINITE MIND

given time is a resonating structure that determines the energy it

will absorb or by which it will be affected. Theoretically, all
frequency vibrations exist in the universe (which includes the
body)—from sub hertzian to as high as modern instruments can
measure—billions and trillions of cycles per second. Nonetheless,
each material substance, living or inert, mineral or chemical, has
its own vibratory signature carried in the structure of its field.
There are dominant and recessive vibrations in each field, giving
it character. Field interactions result from the strength and pattern
of these field vibrations. These constitute windows, or
thoroughfares for transactions.
A sound general principle states that interaction between
fields occurs when there are compatible harmonic frequencies. Yet
this is not always the case with human fields. I have recorded
transactions taking place between people with mathematically
dissimilar dominant fields in which the prevalent frequencies
differed and should not have resonated. Yet they did. Likewise, I
have found others who appeared to have a perfect resonating
compatibility and yet the fields did not interact. Possibly these
fields dynamically shift so rapidly that transactions are
unpredictable, or perhaps a similar frequency pattern is out of
phase and leads to nothing. Also, there is something about a living
field that even though plugged into the 7.8 cycles per second
circuitry of the universe, is not passive, but an active agent. There
is a strange attraction or repulsion of fields which may result from
the surface electrical potential at the boundary of each field, or
from the fine organization of a chaos pattern which has not been
decoded.
On the practical side, new frequency generators still being
tested show great promise for treating disease. Specific generated
frequencies introduced into the feet for a short time apparently can
counteract viral and other disease frequencies. One researcher
found that the frequency programs of most of these healing
generators was nearly identical to some of the upper harmonics of
the Shumann resonance, 7.83 cycles per second. Likewise, the
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 67
dominant frequency patterns of "healers" when healing was
closely correlated with Shumann harmonics. This raises the
question: is the Shumann resonance a universal vibration—the key
to the primary harmonic resonance of our planet? And, does the
extensive increase in the electromagnetic atmosphere of the
electronic age significantly change the harmonic properties of
material substances and with it their resonating capacities? The
science of field constellations is too young to provide adequate
answers, but it does seem clear that we live in a sea of force fields
all being absorbed and altered by the human mind. (See Chapter
V, "Emotions, the Mind Field Organizer").
Sources of universal electromagnetism exist at all levels of
nature because chemicals, minerals and atoms are the same
wherever they are found. When the tiny mass of an electron spins
around the nucleus of an atom, a magnetic field is created by its
spin. Even the center of the atom is said to contain a crystal in the
magnetic domain. All living tissues contain magnetism from iron
in the cells. Magnetic flow at the nerve synapses transports
electrical signals down nerve routes. This natural magnetism
inside the living tissue is directly influenced by the prevalent
electromagnetism of gravity.
Furthermore, gravity seems to lower the body frequencies
toward the red spectrum, particularly in the feet and the lower
body. The higher frequencies in the atmosphere seem to occur
more often in the upper body or head. Such patterns are considered
"normal" on Earth. The classic case of "ungroundedness" with
decreased electromagnetic energy in the lower body, often
resulting from meditation and high thoughts, can be improved by
increased earth vibrations—barefoot walking on the ground,
gardening, lying on the beach, entering caves or being near
volcanoes. Tapping into the red end of the light spectrum grounds
the human electromagnetic field. Bacteria use their magnetism to
create their own north and south poles, to orient themselves and to
swim to light and food. Pigeons and bees direct their flight by a
magnetic substance contained in their heads and bodies. In
68 --- INFINITE MIND

humans, magnetism from iron in hemoglobin may account for our

directional sixth sense.
Wherever there are strong electrical forces released in our
environment, large magnetic fields are created. Today in this
electronic age, the electromagnetic energy of the environment is
the strongest, highest and richest in the history of our planet.
Electromagnetism is spewed out constantly by the radio and TV
stations, high tension lines, industrial electronics, the many
electrical household appliances such as microwaves, heaters,
coolers, dryers, moisturizers and ionizers, as well as the
convenience gadgets we acquire to save time and to entertain
ourselves.
While most reports point out the destructive aspects of
electronic contamination, I believe that there are both positive and
negative effects. To adapt to a more volatile electronic soup, a
higher vibrational mix, challenges the human field to broaden its
spectrum. This increased complexity in turn facilitates higher
consciousness encouraging flights into the ether which enhance
both creativity and a healthy sense of escape.
On the other hand, unsuccessful adaptation to higher levels of
environmental electromagnetism always leaves an incoherent
random field, one in which the edge of chaos has been exceeded,
leading to turmoil.
Of all animals, it is the human who gravitates toward stress;
it taxes the organization of his field and in positive cases, leads to
greater coherency and higher refinement. If one does not respond
successfully to stressful simulation, the body suffers—probably
first in the energy field with anti-coherent patterns. It behooves us,
therefore, to recognize that the health of the electromagnetic field
is critical because this leads to the health or disease of the entire
biological system. Emphasis on clean air, food, water, rest and
exercise are incomplete without retuning and strengthening our
energy fields.
Let us look into the positive side of electromagnetic
enrichment. Remember Prigogine redefined and extended the
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 69

second law of thermodynamics which states that all matter

progresses from organization to disorganization and then to
turmoil. According to this law, humans from birth progress to
disorganization and finally to death. Everything is downhill.
Prigogine found, however, that when energy was introduced into
any field, its complexity increased with concomitant refinement.
It did not disintegrate rapidly by entropy.
In human terms, when energy is introduced into the body, it
becomes more complex and refined; it "moves" upward toward
light and life, and away from death. Perhaps this helps to explain
the long productive lives of symphony conductors, as well as how
living tissue can regenerate. Becker found that by introducing
energy with a frequency of 8 cycles per second into fractures and
injuries, they healed more rapidly. Note again the similarity
between the 8 cycles per second regenerative field, the 7.8 cycles
per second of the mystic brainwave when channeling universal
information, and the Shumann earth resonance. (See Chapter X:
Healing, the Miracle of Life).
There are other practical examples of increased production of
living organisms in heightened energy fields. Crashing waves
deliver a mammoth amount of energy to shoreline plants and
animals—energy estimated to be as much as 15 times greater than
that provided by the sun. Proceedings from the Tropical Research
Institute o f the National Academy of Science disclosed that
abundant wave energy allows marine organisms, algae and mussel
beds to maintain exceptionally high productivity— even greater
than that which occurs in the rain forests. The report concluded
that wave action facilitates the flow of light and nutrients, an
important contribution to the overall richness of this type of
environment. To take a step further, we have known that tumbling
water produces negative ion particles and amps up the
electromagnetic pool. No wonder a day at the beach is so
invigorating!
Earth vibrations carry coded information. For example,
underground water, whether moving or pooled, is sensed by
70 --- INFINITE MIND

dowsers. In rocky areas with surface strata, powerful earth

vibrations often create vectors or "hot spots" from several energy
sources. People gravitate there. In active volcanic areas one may
sense the strong electromagnetic pulses predominantly in the
lower red spectrum. The gravity of the earth also pulses based on
lunar tides.
Trees seem to structure direct earth vibrations to create their
own energy matrix. A group of sensitives at an old ranch deep in a
natural forest studied how the shapes of living trees organize the
air patterns in their immediate environment. During the study they
meditated resting against different tree trunks. Gnarled, ancient
apple trees and dwarfed, crooked pines at timber line emitted a
gentle twist; the energy spiraled as it flowed upward. Great lofty
pines exerted a strong energy suction upward, causing the
consciousness of the meditators to soar—a very different effect
from that in the full, contained richness of the field inside a
greenhouse. They discovered that symmetrical trees planted in
rows and closely growing lodgepole saplings create a lattice-like
field o f energy that jumps and leaps, as contrasted to the flowing
patterns o f isolated trees. The lattice-like field, while strong and
stimulating, was too jumbled to be enjoyed for long.
Pesticides are known to produce chemical contaminants, but
their effect upon energy fields is unknown. Perhaps hints are
contained in insect infestation reports. When particular bugs or
beetles begin to massively destroy one kind of tree, other trees
become immune before they are attacked. They develop a
chemical which expels insects. Apparently, either the insect
vibrations alert the trees, or the already contaminated trees send
out field warnings to other trees. Probably we could hasten the
trees' defenses by recording the insects' fields and broadcasting
this into target trees—a field vaccination to encourage a tree's
immune response. This should be more effective than trying to
poison insects with sprays or systemic chemicals. Insect vibration
generators do exist, which can directly combat infestations
without harm to plants or animals. They are not extensively used
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 71
because of governmental complacency and successful lobbying by
large chemical companies.
We have learned that microwave ovens create a wave
vibrating at between 3 and 11 megahertz, millions of cycles per
second. When the microwave is introduced to the double helix of
the genetic code, it resonates directly. This means that the
important information center in body cells has a direct affinity to
microwave frequencies. Although we cannot predict a result, when
microwave power increases in the atmosphere, the body must
either adapt or suffer destructive consequences.
It appears that the fields of once-living fibers are more
compatible with human vibrations than are the fields of synthetic
fibers. The demand for natural fibers— cotton, wool, and silk
fabrics—increases as people opt for comfort at the expense of
convenience.
At a large health fair, we performed a simple test to determine
the immediate effects of fabrics, chemicals and electromagnetic
radiation on the strength of muscle. We selected four volunteers
from the audience, one man and one woman who were
vegetarians, drank no alcohol, wore natural fabrics and were
meditators. The other man and woman were meat eaters, drank
alcohol, wore synthetic clothes and did not meditate. We brought
each person separately into an area which we contaminated by
operating television, microwave oven, computers and fluorescent
lights. We dressed them in synthetic clothing and asked them to sit
in a chair covered with synthetic fiber placed on a synthetic rug.
Then we further contaminated the atmosphere by introducing
paint remover, ammonia, bleach and fingernail polish remover
into the environment while we sprayed hairspray and aerosol air
freshener nearby.
We then tested the strength of one shoulder muscle group
using a Cibex computerized dynamometer which flashed the
actual foot pounds that those muscles could generate before,
during and after contamination. In each instance, the strength of
the muscles dropped one-quarter to one-half during
72 --- INFINITE MIND

contamination. When the contaminated field was blown out by

fans, the muscle strength returned but not to the pretest level.
However, when we played a tape of the actual recordings of the
sound o f the human aura, a coherent field, the muscle strength
increased to a higher foot poundage than was generated during the
pretest. To protect oneself from immediate sources of toxic
chemicals is essential and somewhat automatic. But toxic field
vibrations are probably equally as harmful and are much more
insidious.
It is not just the random free chemical contaminants that
affect the human field; of greater importance are the localized
contaminants from chemicals stored in the houses. A
comprehensive, five-year study by Harvard University and the
United States Environmental Protection Agency concluded that,
"... your home sweet home is a toxic waste hazard greater than the
Love Canal or a chemical plant or dump site next door." They
chose for their study Bayonne and Elizabeth, New Jersey, both
highly industrialized areas with an abundance of petrochemical
substances in the environment, and Greensboro, North Carolina,
and Devil's Lake, Idaho, pristine areas without industry and
thought to be clean. The report disclosed that most people spend
an average of between 21 to 23 hours per day inside a building, so
that whatever the contamination that exists inside has a more
pronounced effect than the air outside.
Using sophisticated techniques, they sampled the air around
the subjects as they moved about the rooms. Next, they sampled
the air in the yards outside these buildings. Over 350 air samples
were taken in each city. They also analyzed blood, urine and
breath samples. Their conclusions were revealing:
Persons who live in close proximity to industrial
contamination or even right next door to industrial plants have no
greater exposure or bodily contamination than those who live far

*Available from Bioenergy Fields Foundation, P.O. Box 4234,

Malibu, CA 90265, (310) 457-4694
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 73

away or in pristine environments. Finally, they concluded that the

indoor field levels of target chemicals were at least 100 times
greater than outdoor levels, regardless of the location where the
samples were taken. Levels of contamination were equal in all
four locations.
The American Cancer Society acknowledges that
geomagnetic forces affect the incidence of cancer: near the North
Pole and near high tension electrical sources, the incidence is
much higher. They do not conclude, however, as do some
researchers, that cancer is an electromagnetic disturbance. W.
Ross Adey, of Loma Linda University in California, an eminent
neurophysiologist, said that electromagnetic fields may cause
static in the electrical broadcasts from one cell to another, assisting
cancer cells in confusing normal cell development.
Santa Ana winds and atmospheric changes disturb many
sensitives. When positive ions in the atmosphere replace the
negative auric ions, the field is weakened and becomes
ungrounded. I observed a prime example of this when a small
group of us crossed the Alta Plano, a 15,000 foot high desert in
southern Peru. We had ridden a train to the remote Lake Titicaca,
the highest and largest lake in the world. While we were there, a
revolutionary group had captured the rail lines and threatened the
small city. At night we escaped by caravan across the high desert
in old, ill-equipped cars which left the city at different times so as
not to arouse the suspicion of the guerrillas.
I was in the first car, which was to await the others at the end
o f the ascent. Soon after we arrived, two women, one a prior
cardiac patient, went into extreme cardiac distress. We placed
them on the ground, propped them up, and watched as their
conditions worsened. In desperation, I checked their
electromagnetic fields and found totally incoherent, ungrounded
states. The fear of the situation and the altitude had sent them into
this altered state. By verbally assuring them, by laying-on hands
on their feet, and teaching them breathing techniques to stabilize
their fields, they quite rapidly returned to normal.
74 --- INFINITE MIND

Planetary electrical storms can suddenly shock the human

field. A large group of scientists was attending an international
medical meeting in Madras, India, when at 2:00 a.m. some were
awakened by a strong electrical shock. I sat bolt upright breathing
rapidly, with palpitations, acute awareness, and a red explosive
image before my eyes. Some described fear; I felt euphoric, for I
was sure that the source was inter-planetary and not Earth. The
cause eluded us until we returned to the states to learn that this was
when the vibrations of the 1987 super nova explosion reached the
Earth. Although the clock time differed on opposite sides of the
Earth, the shock was identical, and so was the human response.
Let me reiterate a guiding principle of biocosmic interaction.
Whenever there is sufficient energy along with compatible
frequencies, patterns, and phases in the human electromagnetic
range, a transaction can take place. A classic example occurred
when I was on a cruise to Antarctica. During our first day at sea, I
had the impulse to conduct an experiment with the passengers. I
knew about the strong magnetic field of the South Pole from
reading about experiments with single-celled animals. I wondered
how humans would react. Although I had no preconceived ideas
about what would happen in the body, I did anticipate that we
would experience higher consciousness states with glorious
mystical imagery.
I had not taken electronic equipment, but I did have a
pendulum— a crystal ball affixed to a string which had been
validated in the laboratory to show field motion when I held it
over chakras. Generally, the ball would circumscribe a large or
small circle, clockwise or counterclockwise, or create an elliptical
circle. Or it would take a two-dimensional path back and forth, a
north and south excursion in areas of pain, prior injuries or
functional disturbances. Occasionally, it would remain stationary.
With this understanding, I enlisted 80 men and women, cruise
members, volunteers, residents of all inhabited continents, ranging
in age from 15 to 80. Although these passengers were a bit older
than a normal sample of the population, of high economic status
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 75
and very experienced travelers, in all other respects, they seemed
to be average people. I pretested their fields with the crystal ball in
the latitude o f Buenos Aires. We had stopped to observe King
penguins at the now famous Falkland Islands directly east of
Buenos Aires. The findings were ordinary: exactly what I had
found in laboratory electronic tests. Most women displayed little
or no energy in the legs and thighs, with strong head activity and
asymmetrical energies throughout the body, an
electromagnetically ungrounded condition. The men showed
strong fields in the legs and thighs, with uneven energy in the body
and less in the head. There were apparently no racial or ethnic
differences.
But interestingly, four men, displayed perfect fields—strong
and circular in all chakra areas. Later I learned that they were our
guides, and that they had traveled this Antarctic route for three
months. Five days later, as we neared the Antarctic Circle, I
retested the group, both on ship and again on the narrow, frozen,
pebbly beaches where we landed by Zodiac craft. The results of
this second test were more surprising. There was increased energy
in all chakras and major joints, and the crystal ball pathway was
not circular as it was during pretesting; now, it traversed a two-
dimensional, back and forth path indicating an increased magnetic
field from more powerful north-south poles. Furthermore,
everyone had the same pattern, differing only in intensity or how
far up the body the energy continued. Because it diminished in the
upper body, the energy appeared to originate in the feet. I
observed also that no one fell down, despite the slipperiest terrain
one could imagine. Nothing seemed stable, even the smallest shore
rocks were covered in moss; the large boulders were slick with
penguin excrement. Ice lay in between. We disembarked by
wading through water full of seaweed and walked on snow fields
and ice floes. Our bulky clothing and huge boots caused us to
waddle like the penguins. Furthermore, no one walked cautiously
as we focused on photographing birds and sea lions. Nonetheless,
our coordination was superb.
76 --- INFINITE MIND

Why we were not injured was even more difficult to

understand. Often we returned to the ship in landing craft when
waves were so high that we were literally thrown to the gangplank
to be caught by crew members. On one particularly rough day, I
recalled the experiment in the Mu Room where our coordination
improved dramatically when in an increased magnetic field. Did
the naturally rich magnetic field of the South Pole also improve
our coordination? Probably.
Likewise, I also noted that none of the passengers got ill on
the cruise as one might expect when older people engaged in what
was for them vigorous exercise while overeating and drinking. (Of
course, there were no germs there except what we took with us). I
questioned the ship's doctor about my observations. He confirmed
that the passengers were healthier and had fewer complaints
during the Antarctic cruises. We discovered that chronic problems
were almost absent in this environment. In fact, some passengers
remarked that they remained on this ship, tour after tour,
throughout the Antarctic summertime because this was the only
place where they felt totally healthy.
When our ship approached the tip of South America on its
return voyage two weeks later, I retested the field. The Antarctic
pattern, a two-dimensional north-south path of the crystal ball,
remained. Several weeks hence, while five of us were in Peru and
again in Los Angeles, I retested this small group to find that now
their fields were flowing evenly throughout their entire bodies in
a clockwise circle—a perfect pattern. This was not the case with
any o f the passengers before or during the Antarctic cruise. Now
it was apparent that my early deduction gave additional weight to
the idea that electromagnetic environments in which we live
powerfully affect our biological fields. I recalled again the work
o f Robert Becker who introduced magnetic current into body
tissue to hasten healing. I remembered my laboratory study of
"healers" who when healing, generated a stronger magnetic
current. Obviously, the magnetic energy of the South Pole had a
healing effect upon the chronic backaches, insomnia, prostatic and
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 77

cardiovascular difficulties o f the ship's passengers, at least

diminishing the symptoms.
Sensitive people often complain about the noise and crowd
contamination of large groups and conventions. I believe that
these scattered, yet concentrated, energy fields are more
debilitating than the actual decibel level of the noise. Because we
respond so immediately to human field happenings, these can push
us past the dynamic edge of chaos into a disintegrating anti-
coherent field.
A perfect example o f such contamination occurred in the
laboratory one day when a national TV crew came to shoot a
broadcast film. They brought nine technicians with an array of
lights, cameras and power generators, and of course, their own
individual energy fields. By the odor of the alcohol still on their
breaths and their groggy states, they had apparently been
entertained at a party the night before.
As the crew set up their equipment, we prepared to instrument
a person's energy field for direct on-line filming of the
oscilloscope and the computer displays. To our amazement, a
glitch occurred in our equipment. We could not obtain a signal. I
asked the crew to turn off their equipment, for I surmised that their
video lights and generators overloaded our instruments. Still the
energy field signal was absent. Then I asked them to leave their
equipment on while they went outside the room and down the hall.
This was a strange request that worked. In a few minutes, the
normal field recordings occurred. When the crew returned and
approached the subject, the recording signal failed again.
We had had enough experience studying human field
transactions to realize that the problem was not incompatible
instruments, but rather incompatible human fields—a sensitive
subject and a contaminated crew—or even possibly a field
reaction from sensitive staff. We circumvented the problem by
playing old data tapes where there was no new human interaction.
I believe that all diseases are caused by a break in the flow or
a disturbance in the human energy field. Eventually, this
78 --- INFINITE MIND

disturbance is transferred to the organ system creating functional,

and ultimately, destructive changes. By the time the organ systems
are involved, degenerative changes are occurring.
In the future, it should be possible to diagnose field
disturbances and to treat them months or even years before they
are manifested in the physical tissue. We should be able to
increase normal biotissue growth in healing by using the normal
vibrational fields of the universe, for example, by replicating the
powerful, yet harmless, field of the Antarctic. The fields of the
South Pole, emanating from a land mass separated by water from
other land masses, are apparently more powerful than the fields of
the North Pole which are generated over water. There are probably
other important field differences. The South Pole has been called
the "hot pole," or the "female pole," where energy flows up to the
North Pole. On the other hand, the field of the North Pole may
have positive healing effects of its own.
Let me return to my initial comments about the relationship
of the human energy field to the outside cosmic and ionic fields.
Because it is easier to study the world out there than the world here
inside us, information about the fields of the universe has
advanced beyond those o f the human energy field, or our
understanding of field transactions.
At the cutting edge of biological science is the understanding
o f vibrations and the transactions o f fields. Here is information
currently beyond total comprehension but from which will spring
a new biosphere/cosmosphere model, a wedding of the world
micro- and macrocosms, a true understanding of bio-complexity
in action. I have accepted a challenge to try to understand the mind
aspects of our field where we decode field information. It is in this
arena, that by our actions, we can change our internal and external
worlds.
I would like to close on a slightly metaphysical note. There is
an imaginative study of predictions reported by Wilson in his
book, Cosmic Trigger. A group o f computer scientists from
Stanford University were fascinated with the tremendous
 FIELD TRANSACTIONS: THE BIOSPHERE, COSMOSPHERE CONNECTION --- 79
explosion of technological development and scientific knowledge
coming into the world today. Because they were adept in
programming computers to answer intriguing questions, they
decided to categorize and chronologically plot the great
technologic and scientific discoveries in the world, starting from
the beginning of urbanization at about 4,000 or 5,000 B.C.
They traced developments such as the discovery of the wheel,
the printing press, the steam engine, splitting of an atom, and
computers.
As they surveyed the computer printout, the discoveries fell
into a hyperbolic curve which flattened out at the top at about
1975. At the speed at which these discoveries were occurring, they
requested that the computer project into the future and predict the
great upcoming discoveries. The projected pattern took a sudden
upsweep and went completely off the computer graph at the year
2011. This was the end of the computer's predictions.
During the last thirty minutes of the year 2010, the computer
predicted 18 discoveries that equalled the splitting of the atom.
While the specialists were amused, they could not understand.
Suddenly, one of the researchers recalled the Mayan calendar,
which ends at 2011. This date, according to the Mayans, is the end
of the Fifth Age of Man, the Age of the Intellect, and the
beginning of the Sixth Age of Man, the Age of the Gods!
I believe we are leaving the Fifth Age of Man, the age of our
great intellectual development, a development of our magnificent
capacity for higher reasoning, creating and manifesting our
greatest abilities into a world of material things. I hope and trust
that we lose none of these profound skills and abilities as we move
into the power and wisdom of the Sixth Age of Man, the Divine
Age of God.
 C H A P T E R V

MIND FIELD:
The Residence Of Consciousness
And The Soul

Have you ever thought that your mind played tricks on you,
soaring too high for comfort, or getting you into trouble with
^commitments you thought you did not want—keeping you in the
dark, like it had its own remote existence?
It is interesting to notice the language we use when discussing
our minds. We don't say "I am a busy mind," but rather, "I have a
busy mind," or "my mind feels slow," "dull," or "so forgetful I
think I'm losing it." When people think narrowly, we comment
about their rigid, unexercised, or unimaginative minds. Those who
challenge our traditions we label as radical minds. On the days
when everything works, we tap into our creative minds.
These comments indicate deep beliefs that there is some
master operator someplace who runs us and our lives, occasionally
letting us glimpse the master plan, but rarely soliciting our advice.
The "I" both enjoys and has difficulty with what we call mind.
When we refer to our minds, we gesture to our heads.

80
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 81

Everyone knows that mind resides in the skull. Science and logic
tell us that if the mind is encased in the head's bony cave, then it
must be a closed, imprisoned system to be understood only by
microscopic study of brain tissue.
Controversies about the mind have existed since the early
Greek philosophers argued about the nature of the mind-body
relationship. None of these disputes has been solved even today,
although we have shifted the emphasis to the brain-mind
connection. Not that the ancients had a lesser idea about the mind
than we have today, but without brain research they did not
attempt to explain the mind as a brain phenomenon.
Let us examine these early philosophical ideas about the mind
that are still with us today.
Pythagoras commented many centuries ago that the mind is a
substantial reality and somehow it exists in the body, but not in the
head. Plato, like Pythagoras, thought that the mind was an
important entity inside the body which separated from the body at
death. He likened mind to the soul that brought life to the non­
living body.
Socrates stressed the separation of mind and body,
commenting that mental things occur in a non-physical envi­
ronment.
To illustrate the mind's uniqueness, Aristotle said that he
believed it was possible to have thought with no brain, but he did
not think that one could walk without legs or hear without ears. He
guessed that the mind was in the brain, but he felt that studying the
brain as an organ did not answer questions about the mind.
Rene Descartes, the eminent French mathematician and
philosopher, reactivated the controversy, taking a strong stand that
mind and body were not the same.
John Dewey, around the turn of the century, expounded the
educational importance of the whole person's experience, which
he justified by a belief that the mind is everywhere in the body.
Wilhelm Reich further strengthened the belief in the unity of
mind and body by noting that memory of traumatic episodes is
82 — INFINITE MIND

stored in body cells. Physical therapists have discovered that deep

joint and skeletal massage does in fact release memories of
emotional episodes.
William James, the father o f psychology, reiterated his
conviction that the ultimate problems of man came from the mind-
brain connection. Such thoughts contained in the extensive writing
on psychosomatic illness early in the century cemented the belief
in a cause and effect relationship between emotions and body
malfunctions. Here, authors professed a mind-body unity for
which there was growing evidence from the new Gestalt ideas
promoting the "wholeness" of behavior. The mind directly
affected the body, and vice versa. Furthermore, the cause and
effect logic of the oneness of mind and body required that the
mind be located in the body.
Neurologists located the mind in the brain. By electrical
stimulation of brain cells, researchers were able to chart for the
first time the functional contributions of various brain areas to
sensation, movement, affective behavior and recall of sensory
experience. Surgical destruction of animal brain tissue and brain
surgery left motor-sensory disturbances and often caused loss of
memory of both animate and inanimate objects. Observations of
behaviors following cerebral strokes, brain injuries and tumors
showed alterations not only in motor performance, but in thought,
memory, emotions and awareness— all thought to be mind
functions.
Prefrontal lobotomies, severing hemisphere connection, and
other brain surgery were used to cure acute persistent emotional
disturbances. These many findings tightened the knot of proof that
mind and brain were synonymous. It became very clear that the
brain is a specialized body tissue with the unique functions of the
mind. Obviously, it seemed the mind and brain were therefore
identical.
Nonetheless, along with the mounting evidence of the
oneness of mind and brain, there were growing observations to the
contrary. Neurological research showed that electrical stimulation
 M N D FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 83
did not activate what was considered to be the higher mind.
Researchers concluded that there is no neurophysiological
research which conclusively shows that the higher levels of mind
are located in brain tissue.
When parts of the brain are stimulated, there is a perturbation
that the person becomes aware of as emotions or feelings. If we
believe that it is the brain stimulus which causes this experience,
it follows that it must be the brain which is also aware of the
experience. I believe that such proof of the mind-brain's oneness
is a result of faulty logic. That which causes something to happen
is not the same as the consciousness which experiences the
happening. Furthermore, not all conscious awareness should be
lumped together. Although some levels of awareness occur in the
brain, higher levels of consciousness have not been found there.
To the contrary, some philosophers surmised that consciousness is
on a continuum from material to non-material reality in which the
mind is always involved, sensing non-material happenings
primarily, while the brain taps the material ones.
You may ask whether these arguments about the unity or
separation of mind-body are simply academic questions. My
answer is an adamant "no"—as we have already determined, you
think and operate as you believe. If quantum mechanics cannot be
understood by mechanical theories, so the higher mind of man
cannot be comprehended by neurochemical brain studies.
Early in this century, Sir Arthur Sherrington, the leading
neurologist and one of the primary voices of dissent, allied himself
with the ancients' view that the mind, thought and feelings were
difficult to bring into the class of physical things. He doubted that
the mind and body were one.
Karl Pribram, the Nobel Prize winner for his brain hologram
research, commented that the holographic images that we see are
existing in the mind somewhat outside of the brain machine that
produces these—as though the mind hovers like a protective entity
beyond the brain's machinery.
Three eminent contemporary neurophysiologists, Penfield,
84 — INFINITE MIND

Eccles, and Granit all agreed that there is nothing in the brain to
account for the high level of experiences and capabilities of the
mind. They further qualified these higher capacities as intuition,
insight, creativity, imagination, understanding, thought,
reasoning, intent, decision, knowing, will, spirit, or soul. These are
the mysteries of the mind that have been relegated to psychiatrists
and theologians, because we believed that they do not lend
themselves to scientific study.
Penfield became the most convincing spokesman as he
extended the concept of mind to a distinct reality. In his
provocative book, Mysteries o f the Mind, Penfield shared with his
readers his experiences and thoughts as he created the brain charts
still used today. After studying with the pioneer neurophysiologist
Sherrington early in the century, Penfield became an eminent
neurosurgeon specializing in the treatment of epilepsy. During the
latter part of his career, after many observations, he still claimed
that the mind was an entity within itself, although he did not know
where it existed or where the energy o f the mind came from. He
accepted, but with some doubt, that the active brain neurons
supplied the mind with energy when the brain was awake—but on
that basis the mind should have no energy and be inoperative when
the brain was asleep or during anaesthetic. Except, he knew also
that people can remember what happened when the brain was
dormant. He sensed that the mind operated as though it were
endowed with its own energy. As he pondered the source of mind
energy, he wondered also how one could account for a soul when
the nerves of the body died and with them all energy dissipated.
Penfield found that during anaesthesia the human mind
continued to work in spite of the brain's inactivity. The brain
waves were found to be nearly absent while the mind was just as
active as it was in normal states. Here the mind experienced
everything that happened during the surgery, contrary to the belief
that this was impossible. Upon coming out of the anaesthetic, the
patient recalled even minor details about the surgery, including
statements made by the surgical team while he was supposedly
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 85

unconscious. Since Penfield's work, numerous other researchers

have discovered total and acute awareness in comatose patients.
Penfield also discovered that the brain was predictable. A
stimulated brain cell gave a consistent response. Stimulation of
the cerebral cortex brought memory of early childhood
experiences. These memories were as vivid as when the events
had actually happened. (Such stimulation did not bring past life
recall, however). (See Chapter IX, "Lifehoods: The Hidden
Agenda"). He found, on the other hand, that the mind is totally
unpredictable by any known criteria.
He likened the brain to a computer where the memory of
man's experience is stored—more like a data bank for information
retrieval. He strongly expressed the view that the brain is not the
location where experiences are known or altered. Experiencing
the world is an activity of the mind. Succinctly, Penfield
concluded that "... it is the mind which experiences and it is the
brain which records the experience." The brain can store memory,
but it is the mind which makes decisions. The mind is
independent and contains the will of man. In other words, the
mind takes the initiative in exploring the environment. It enters
into transactions and is aware of what is going on. The mind
understands, comprehends, reasons and has judgment. It is aware
of self.
Penfield offered illuminating accounts of the responses of 53
patients during an experiment in which he electrically stimulated
their brain neurons during surgery under local anaesthesia. When
primary sensory locations were stimulated, patients reported gross
sensations or light flashes. But stimulating the neurons of the
cerebral cortex provided dream-like experiences with flashbacks
of long-forgotten episodes—memories of events in this life. His
conclusion that the mind has no memory, or needs none with the
effective brain memory bank, probably stemmed from his
inability to find the mind's energy source, which he felt was
essential for memory storage.
Although during his 30 years of intricate brain study Penfield
86 — INFINITE MIND

did not solve the mind's mystery, he did clarify some cloudy
issues. He taught us that the highest level of the mind contained
the capacities of insight, imagination, creativity, and spirit that
did not exist in brain tissue. Beyond that, he brought to our
attention the mind's role in monitoring one's stream of
consciousness; in fact, it IS the stream of consciousness. The
mind is primary to thought.
A new group of studies declared that thought, feelings and
dreams, all workings of the mind, are the product of chemical,
electrical activity of nerve cells in the brain. This came from
findings that perception, memory and self-awareness become
scrambled when chemistry goes awry. These studies point to
neurotransmitters as possible culprits in Alzheimer's disease,
depression, schizophrenia, and other psychological disorders.
While I acknowledge the soundness of this research, I urge that
neurotransmitters not be misconstrued as the source of higher
mind functions.
Today, more and more scientists are expressing doubts about
the brain-mind model because it leaves unanswered so many
questions about man's ordinary experiences, as well as evading
his mystical, spiritual ones. Some say that philosophers and
scientists operate by different sets, of rules: the brain operates by
physical laws and the mind by principles as yet undiscovered. But
today we look to scientists more than ever before to interpret
linear facts with higher wisdom. It is as though all scientists who
visualize their unique research in the larger scheme of things owe
the world their speculations about ultimate things: life and death,
mind, consciousness and evolution.
One such scientist is Candace Pert who while with the
National Institutes of Health, extensively researched neuropep­
tides. She disclosed that until recently she viewed the brain in
Newtonian terms with the neurochemicals and their receptors
operating like locks and keys. Now she visualizes the brain and
its functions as a vibratory energy field with its locks and keys
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 87
only ways o f perturbing the field. The brain is no longer the end
of the line—it is a receiver and amplifier of collective reality.
Hooper and Teresi in their book, The Three Pound Universe:
The Brain, told about a neuroanatomist who was known for his
methodological vigor pausing during his nerve cell study to
comment, "I doubt we'll ever get to consciousness from here.
Who knows if the mind is even in the brain." Along this same
vein, a prominent pharmacologist said that we may find that the
brain is unnecessary for consciousness.
Primarily, the brain has been studied in an airtight glass jar, a
closed system; while we have tried to deduct from it an open
system—the mind. Still, it is quite evident that the human mind is
the enigma of our time. O f course, the mere acts of splitting and
putting the mind and brain back together again is futile. I believe
the evidence is clear. They differ—one is a physical entity, and
the other is something beyond the physical state. Both inherently
serve the body's existence, but not in the same way.
When a problem has remained unsolved for so many
centuries, the approach and some of the fundamental tenets are
probably incorrect. Our long-held basic premises about the mind
are probably wrong because the linear, frontal attack has not
answered many questions about the mind and human experience.
New approaches loom where the mind is explored through
extended realities, consciousness, different types of awareness,
thought, and spiritual experiences.
To summarize: Some aspects of reality—the mind is one—
cannot be explained in a material framework. Mind has energy
since it causes things to happen. Many of the experiences that we
casually attribute to mind are clearly brain functions: reflexes and
responses to material reality that are recorded in and recovered
from the brain. Other experiences and capacities such as thought,
insight, imagination, and soul seem to be properties of the higher
mind. The higher level mind seems to be outside the domain of
material reality as we have been able to measure it. The mind is
more a field reality, a quantum reality, or a particle reality.
88 — INFINITE MIND

The idea that the mind is unique from the brain and that it has
its own consciousness which monitors awareness outside the realm
of material reality intrigues me. The idea that the mind
experiences non-physical reality quickly led to the thought of the
mind as a field. Einstein stated that all the only reality is that of
energy organized into fields. If all matter were disintegrated, we
would be left with a field, the primary source.
Questions about the "location" of the mind during
anaesthesia, coma, or in the last stages of Alzheimer's disease, in
psychosis or trance states where it seems lost, could be answered
by understanding the mind as a field. Is it possible that the long
undetectable energy of the human mind springs from the electron
energy of the body's atoms? Energy in this form, permeating all
tissues, does not need to be conducted through the nervous system.
The mind-field would then be a literal super-conductor. If the
electron spin-off from the body atoms is the source of the mind's
energy, then the mind might also reabsorb free electrons from the
universe. Since there are no mechanical losses in such a system,
the mind energy is literally recycled in the environment.
We already know that the mind is capable of energizing and
communicating with matter, including the brain, the body, and
other material things. Electromagnetic waves from the universe
and those from the atomic structure of the body in field form could
meet these requirements. At some level, all material boundaries
are permeable. Electromagnetic energy in the form of waves
constitutes information circuits which can penetrate physical
boundaries and, like "worm holes," flow through and back into the
environment. These qualities of an energy field also describe the
mind, that is, the mind is beyond material substances yet
interactive with them in an open system.
Yes, I believe the mind is infinite; it can be everywhere. The
"Mind of the Universe" may be more than a metaphor. The human
mind, if it wills, could have distinct contact with other fields now.
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 89

It could be here and there simultaneously. This agrees with the

thoughts o f Gregory Bateson, a cultural anthropologist, who saw
mind as a set o f relationships realized by the individual organism,
but also by the social and ecological system. By the same token,
there are individual, group and collective minds which likewise
are embedded in the larger mind of the planetary ecosystem. Such
reasoning concurs with my thoughts about the two massive
holographic computers, the reservoirs of information and
experience o f man and cosmos that are interfaced by 7.82 cycles
per second, giving them access to the same informational
network. It is the mind, not the brain, which selects and reads
from this informational pool, making partners of logical and
conceptual thinking.
We know that the behavior of a purely mechanical system,
like the steam engine, can be accurately predicted. Mind functions
and field interactions are unpredictable. While both the mind and
the brain can shift to "automatic pilot," we can predict only the
function of the brain. With the mind, "automatic pilot" means
only that there are degrees o f probability in predicting function.
In the field, there is no immediate cause and effect as we
know these, but rather meaningful coincidences or probabilities.
Fields and minds are characterized by the unpredictability of
chaotic dynamics. The mind with its vast complexity can explore
far beyond a closed-circuit brain. Actually, attempts to understand
the mind send us to research the nature of biological field
transactions.
I recall the difficulty I had when thinking about material
mass and the brain in non-material ways. From the beginning, I
had the impulse to junk the old mechanistic ideas and to
acknowledge mind as a field concept. As I edged toward a mind
field model, my biological training made it hard for me to totally
accept this new model as more than a theoretically sound thought
exercise. I realized how difficult it is to believe that all the human
experiences carried in a fluid, chemical brain cell are like a
computer memory on a tiny chip. Think of the shock at first
90 — IN FIN ITE MIND

learning that the DNA, the genetic code of cells, carries extensive,
basic instruction for the entire human organism, or that each cell
carries a holographic replica of all cell groupings. This knowledge
did give credibility to my belief that positing a mind-field was at
least logical, and probably even true, but for awhile my acceptance
was purely by faith. There was no research evidence to support my
ideas.
Actually, there is no direct means of studying reality, but we
can approach reality by observing field transactions. Likewise, we
cannot judge what is "normal" except by determining what is an
average or central tendency on the scale of reality. Metaphysical
views o f reality show that usually the mind and consciousness are
more universally distributed and in tune with human experience.
These offer us ways to comprehend our place in the scheme of
things, as contrasted to the scientific picture of the brain.
After many years of listening to the higher nervous system's
Morse Code-like sounds, Sir John Eccles was convinced that this
was not the location of consciousness. He added that the complex
neuromechanisms of the brain continue to function regardless of
any co-existing consciousness. The unity of conscious experience
comes from a self-conscious mind, not from a neuronal
mechanism of a neocortex. He ended a series of lectures at
Harvard by admitting that evolutionary processes could account
for the brain, but that only something transcendent could explain
consciousness and thought.
Eccles' ideas are confirmed by observations that tumors in
certain areas of the brain do not affect the higher levels of
consciousness, only the lower ones that deal with experiences of
the material world. Likewise, poor circulation in the brain will
create a change in consciousness, but again, only in material
awareness. Poor circulation creates absolutely no problem in
non-physical awareness, nor in the chaos-reducing capacity of
consciousness.
The right-left hemisphere findings of Sperry and Bogen, so
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 91
popular a few years ago, were over-publicized, wrongly, as the
final explanation for behavior and learning. The research did
demonstrate that, depending on hand dominance, subjects'
hemispheres are specialized for different modes of consciousness
and information processing or retrieval. We have since learned,
however, that one's mental life is not neatly zoned along right-left
lines, nor is consciousness. Abstract experience and thought do not
rely on the function of sensory nerves.
This is when my reckoning took another turn. If higher mind
could not be studied directly like the material brain, then why not
focus on mind's unique functions—extended reality and broadened
consciousness? Basically, reality is neither fact nor fiction but is
the emphasis we place on various parts of our stream of
consciousness. My starting point was accepting that consciousness
is a continuum extending from material awareness to higher
awarenesses. I also knew that the mind experiences by means of
its awarenesses.
Prior Western research has dealt with the material end of
consciousness relegating the non-material realm to philosophical
investigation. On the other hand, Eastern philosophies describe
complementary modes o f consciousness, yet they stress the non­
material modes.
Do you realize that if you move into an altered state of
consciousness, your brain may not be aware of that consciousness?
If this is so, then whatever takes place in the altered state cannot
be remembered until you return to that altered state.
I had such an experience when my wisdom teeth were
removed. Two of my laboratory assistants had taken me to an oral
surgeon's office. I promised to show them how to remove the light,
general anesthetic I was to have once I became conscious again.
After returning home, I showed them how to contact the body
field with the hands, using short outward movements away from
the body, to literally pull the anesthetic from the field. At first, I
had no recall o f what took place during surgery. But as my
assistants worked, I reverted back to the altered state induced by
92 — INFINITE MIND

the sodium pentathol and actually re-experienced the dentist

breaking my gold crown while removing one tooth. I remembered
how upset he became because these teeth were not easy to extract.
A second shot of sodium pentathol was required to keep me under.
(Actually, people who operate in higher consciousness do not stay
"under" easily). His comment when I returned to his office and
described what had happened was, "How did you know? I kept
you asleep."
These are the mentations that I had had for some time.
Always, my approach to an intellectual problem was to look first
at the larger integrating factors, that is, the nature of the forest, to
insure that I did not get lost in the trees. My working philosophies
were Gestalt and Holism. Field theories excited me because these
had a sufficient theoretical and mathematical base to entertain a
mind-field. My earlier research looking at emotional and cultural
correlates of neuromuscular activity patterns had led me in a
similar direction.
As previously described, my first studies of the human aura
involved hands-on healers who simultaneously reduced symptoms
and altered energy fields. Most surprising to me, the auric field
responded—it changed before the sensory nerves told us what was
going on. For example, an inadvertent sound stimulated the field
seconds before the brain waves altered. Light flashes were
instantly recorded in the field—in too short a time for the brain to
receive them. Stimuli that did not even reach the brain affected the
energy field, such as a feather touching the field but not the skin,
or one person changing vibration and affecting another person's
field. The process had already taken place; the transaction was
over by the time the brain finally got the information; and
sometimes the brain never did "get it." This affirmed Penfleld's
oft-repeated statement, "The mind experiences and the brain
records."
But still the questions loomed. Is this where the higher level
of mind resides? Is this the energy that Penfield could not find? Is
this why Reich described the brain as everywhere in the body? I
 M N D FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 93

was recording the energy field from the body's surface and aura
readers were seeing it outside the body; some saw it inside as it
traveled through connective tissue. Pert had found that when brain
neuropeptides were stimulated, body cell neuropeptides in remote
areas were immediately activated—again, too fast for chemical or
neural signal transmission. This could only happen in a field
transaction where there is no material resistance to create a time
delay, or a loss of power or information.
There were other extraordinary field happenings. The
experience of imagery first appeared in the field, and was only
later evident in brain wave recordings. Turmoil in the energy field
signaled the experience of emotions and physiological
manifestations before they happened. The auric field of a healee
changed when the healer's hands were placed over the healee's
body. Field transactions required no physical contact.
I discovered that a person's intent also could affect another
field. If I thought about easing pain or changing a physiological
condition, that's what happened, whereas if my intent was to
release repressed information without knowing or sharing my
intent, the person remembered previously forgotten early
childhood episodes and other lifehoods—even if he didn't believe
that this could happen.
It began to look as though energy field patterns were related
to streams of consciousness—a function of the mind. Along this
line we discovered that when a person's field reached higher
vibrational states, he no longer experienced material things such as
bodies and ego states, or the physical world. He experienced
knowing, higher information, transcendental ideas, insight about
ultimate sources o f reality, and creativity in its pure form.
Thoughts were grander, more penetrating and global. All of these
experiences we attribute to the higher mind because they are not
available through the ordinary senses at lower field vibrational
levels. In fact, the consistently highest vibrations were recorded
from people who were accepted "seers" and "knowers", people
whose perceptions occur at cosmic field level; they know things
94 — INFINITE MIND

about us and the world without the usual sensory clues.

Now another universal question loomed before me. How is it
possible to read another's intangible mind-thoughts unless these
are expressed in some form? My explanation is that a person must
be decoding our mind field with his, resulting in a direct mind or
field communication. He is not "reading" the information stored in
the brain. We had already seen that average people who could
reach higher vibrational states participate in this type of
communication. Conversely, when their vibrations lowered as
they returned to material consciousness, our average state, such
skills subsided.
These discoveries led me to hypothesize that the energy field
is the highest level of the mind of man, and that it is through this
level that we interrelate with the cosmosphere. This model allows
us to investigate scientifically the interface and interdependence of
man and the universe at the level o f mind. Equipment as
sophisticated as the mind itself would be required to completely
validate such a model. It would require the mind to know itself
rather than just to experience itself. It is unlikely that either of
these requirements will be satisfied. But even considering these
restrictions, the research possibilities are enormous.
Thus far, my theories about the mind field were based on
recorded field data. But my strong conviction arose from clinical
observations as I laid-on hands with the intent to expand or open
the mind field. I started slowly, even reluctantly, for although I
was trained and had practiced physical therapy in hospitals, I did
not want to be a mystical healer. Rather, I chose to study the
phenomenon o f field healing as I continued as director of the
Physical Therapy Division at U.C.L.A. and taught physiological
science courses.
While writing up the Rolf Study in a state of exhaustion, I
contracted a serious polio-like virus which left one leg with
sensory and motor paralysis. I could not stand or walk. During the
six long months it took to recover, Rosalyn Bruyere came daily for
three weeks to treat me and later at my home. I learned to meditate
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 95
for the first time by visualizing the transport of oxygen to the
injured tissue and watching the nerve light up with energy. My
condition improved slowly, but consistently, until all sensation
and motor strength returned.
But other strange things happened. I awakened at night with
my hands pulsing with energy. When I placed them on my body,
it enlivened. What should have been exciting actually annoyed me,
for constantly I felt as if my literal hands had been replaced with
big, warm, glowing mitts. Finally, I timidly told a dear friend
about my problem, asking her to let me lay-on hands to get rid of
these excessive vibrations. She hesitantly consented, saying, "I
don't believe in that stuff."
But in spite o f the reluctant subject and a doubting healer,
something profound happened. As I channeled energy to her—and
my mind seemed to know how—she imaged a large pink lady in a
forest, the same pink lady she remembered playing with as a small
child in rural Canada. She vividly and emotionally recalled what
she had forgotten years ago. Now this friend was over 80 years
old, quite a long time since her childhood. Although she loved the
sensation of energy transferral, she accused me of "hokey-pokey,"
and of manipulating her mind. Because I believed my mind was
neutral with no such intent, I easily passed off her experiences as
happenstance.
Later, while teaching graduate students to record the energy
field, I again laid-on hands merely to demonstrate energy
exchange. A similar thing happened, although the experience was
not as pleasant. The student remembered her brother locking her
in the bathroom and setting the next room on fire. She was very
emotional. This time I wanted to know what was happening. In the
weeks that followed, I reconstructed the incidents and arrived at
these ideas.
These memories that had been stimulated "resided" in the
subjects' fields. The strong vibrations from my hands assisted the
subjects in raising their vibrations so that they assumed the states
they were in when the experiences first occurred. This is where the
96 — INFINITE MIND

memory existed.
This was the beginning of my 20 year journey studying the
mind field and working with it to bring about healing. I discovered
that by using energy field biofeedback and guided imagery, we
could powerfully communicate through the mind field. When John
Dewey first proclaimed that a variety of experiences was essential
for a child's education, he must have contemplated this level of
experience. Now I knew that teachers, instead of just providing the
physical aspects of experiences, also should provide the high level
vibrations to activate the mind fields of their students.
As we continued clinical and laboratory research, "out-of-
body" experiences were numerous. Invariably, the person's body
frequencies rose higher as energy in their feet and legs decreased
and energy in the crown increased. The expressions "in" and
"out-of-body" refer to the awareness of the person. It does not
mean that the mind physically separates from the human tissue.
One's mind field is always experienced as being either in or out of
the body, depending on where the awareness is focused. When one
believes he is out-of-body, he simply has no direct connection
with certain material levels of consciousness. This is a
consciousness experience and a vibrational one with a shift of
frequencies and locations. Some people enjoy this shift, others
become frightened that they may get lost and not be able to find
the way back to their bodies. Yes, if you think that the mind is in
the brain, and you experience what you believe is out-of-body
awareness, it is easy to believe that you are too far from the "gas
station" and that you can get stranded. The answer is, if you know
you are "out", you can always get back because there is some
awareness on the brain-material level to tether you back. A similar
situation occurs just before you drop off to sleep—you are shifting
consciousness and minimizing awareness of the material level but
not the mind level. In this sense the mind is then freed and can go
anywhere to dream in different places and times.
Many popular books offer ways to free one's mind, implying
that it is restricted. This reflects old beliefs about the mind. But if
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 97

we consider the mind as a field, then it is free by design, as fields

always are. Eastern philosophies present ideas and exercises
purported to clarify the mind, that is, to sharpen it. These
techniques in fact subtly reorganize the field rather than
mechanically change the brain.
Popular psychotherapy also stresses the importance of
keeping the mind in bounds, meaning controlling emotions,
because most of us fear deep feelings. Unfortunately, it is difficult
to close an open system. It is dangerously repressive and
restrictive. I prefer to solve the problem at the higher source level
by freeing the emotions which so tightly stricture the mind,
limiting its explorations. (Chapter IV, "Emotions: The Mind-Field
Organizer").
Theoretically, I accept that the mind is the most powerful
force in the world, more powerful than the split atom—because it
is beyond physical force. The Bible tells o f Moses parting the Red
Sea and o f the men marching in cadence around the walls of
Jericho who, stopping together, caused the walls to come tumbling
down. I wonder if they had their minds focused on destroying the
walls or, if, as implied, did it result from purely mechanical
vibrations? My guess is that the former was equally true.
Many o f us firmly believe that if enough minds concentrated
together, we could stop floods, hurricanes, tornadoes and perhaps
even earthquakes. There have been some organized groups which
created weather changes. Many individuals have experienced such
mind-power which can be measured through the field. We need to
determine if this power is released only when people believe that
they can make these major environmental changes or when
emotion encourages it. (See Chapter X for evidence of healing
through prayers). Thus far, we have not been able to get enough
people of like mind to concentrate and to test the mind's power
adequately. I accepted these ideas as true for people in general but
not necessarily for me specifically, until my own personal
experience with mind over matter occurred.
98 — IN FIN ITE MIND

I was traveling with a friend in the Vale of Kashmir, India,

among the beautiful lakes and gardens of Shalimar in the lower
Himalayas. It was November, dangerously late to be in this land of
early snows. But it was glorious; and so we lingered. On the day
we were to leave, I for Egypt and my companion for Israel, a
major snowstorm hit; it was frightfully cold as we sat waiting in
the tiny airport. The natives carried little clay pots full of active
charcoals under their huge parkas to keep their hands and tummies
warm. The few planes there were grounded, the officials
suspected, for the entire winter. We were concerned, for we both
had close connections to make in Bombay.
As we sat looking out the window into the stark whiteness,
we both had the urge to alter the storm. After a short discussion
about whether we could do it, we settled down to meditate and
stop the snow. In about 30 minutes, the sun appeared briefly to the
south. We were hustled onto a plane and literally shot out a hole in
the storm. We were the last plane out, we later heard. It is a great
and true story we sometimes share socially, but still in our deep
thoughts it was an "out there" fairy tale happening even to us, until
it happened again.
This time I was on remote Bora Bora island of the Tahitian
group, lying in the sun, oblivious to the cares of the world, when a
sudden violent windstorm with threatening black clouds seemed to
come from nowhere. My doctor friend and I discussed whether to
leave or take a chance on getting our books, recorders and cameras
wet. When we saw the sheet of rain coming at us across the water,
it was too late to move. Our only chance was to stop the rain. To
physically push back all of that force of wind and water quickly
seemed impossible. I chose instead, to try to split it. Both of us
saw the rain part in a V-shaped wedge passing on both sides of us
in a downpour that lasted for many minutes.
Again, this was hard to believe, although it was not really
different than bending spoons or moving impossibly heavy objects
during an emergency, where small amounts of focussed energy
have yielded large results. I was more intrigued with how it
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 99

happened than with the fact that it had happened. To believe that
mind had created a counteractive power sufficient to offset the
storm energy was unacceptable to me. So I searched for other
explanations. If a storm is a chaos pattern of change in weather,
teetering on an edge where an anti-integrity or anti-cohering force
is set in motion, then there also exists an integrity force which
reorganizes it into a coherent state. This can explain a pattern of
vibration which starts the storm, and another which stops it. This
would mean that we would not need physical force to blow away
or to stop the storm because the factor which created the storm was
not mechanical but vibrational. All we had to do was to use our
minds to manipulate the forces which exist for change. By the
same token, rain or snow can be created and objects can be moved.
So it follows that any mind which accepts its power
completely and can focus thought can do profound things. The
mind on the non-physical level has eminent power.
Thoughts are fleeting and non-physical. They contain
information about both physical objects and non-material
happenings. But thought itself can only be understood as a field
regardless of where you think it originated—from brain cells or
from the mind field. I hold the view that thoughts are transactions
of one mind field with another field (or fields). And although the
brain cells are activated to remember and respond, the active
thinking experience is in the field.
Thoughts, then, are structured vibrations—some fleeting and
others which are recorded and become permanent. Some thoughts
display an intellectually intimate connection with information
stored in the brain. Some thoughts are so strong that they color the
entire environment in which they occurred. These create what
Rupert Sheldrake describes as a morphogenic field, or Gregory
Bateson calls individual, group and collective minds. Stated more
simply, there are thought fields in the home, the office, and in
organizations and groups, by virtue of the thought vibrations of
those who created these institutions and those who live there. Each
one o f us has experienced these unique fields, perhaps with
100 — INFINITE MIND

pleasure, doubt, or hostility.

The first time I knew about place-fields was in Jerusalem in
the 1960s, when it was a divided city. To visit the historic,
religious part of Jerusalem one had to enter Jordan by way of
Syria. One could only go through the Mandelbaum Gates
separating the two countries one way, from Jordan to Israel. One
day as my niece and I wandered in the Old City on the Jordan side
of Jerusalem, we found ourselves walking along an ancient high
stone wall on a rocky, dirt path inside the city walls proper. The
longer we walked, the more depressed I became, until I was
morose. Although I couldn't imagine what was happening, I knew
I wanted to get out of this place as fast as possible—the vibrations
were too heavy for me.
That evening I learned this was the "Wailing Wall" where the
vibrations of the Jews' sadness over many centuries still exist
today. Years later I returned to Israel to find the "Wailing Wall"
now in Israeli territory. I was with a young rabbi friend exploring
the Old City when we came to the "Wailing Wall". The local
buildings have been restored with beautiful pink stone from that
area and a new flagstone court led to the Wall. The Jews still come
in large numbers, davening, chanting, and wailing, facing the
Wall. I asked him why so many Jews returned to this place to talk
with God. He explained that it was so easy to contact God from the
Wall because the Jews had done this for centuries, somehow
paving the way. He intimated that Jews went there when they were
troubled. There they could pour out their sorrow to God and
receive divine help. When I asked the rabbi where Jews praised
God for the beauty of the world, and for life and happiness, he
answered, "That is in the temple." Truly, I had experienced the
sadness at the Wall on my earlier trip. The sad thoughts were still
in the field where they had been created.
Another time, when I first visited the Dome of the Rock, the
holy Islamic temple also in Jerusalem, I knew little about its
history other than that it was the place where Mohammed was said
to have ascended into heaven. The structure is magnificent. It
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 101
carries high vibrations and is further beautified with ancient tile
and Persian carpets. The Arabs are proud and reverent about this
temple— second only to Mecca. They insisted that tourists keep
moving and not stop to admire or become curious. Travel guides
spoke only outside. But despite such restrictions, I was enjoying
this unique temple built around a huge rock on a lower level, open
to the main floor. I took the ramp downward to be nearer the holy
rock and walk the pathway around it. Before I had finished, I
became nauseated. Perhaps it was the heat, but nausea was not
one o f my usual reactions. Suddenly, I realized that I smelled
ancient blood of animals. It was so repulsive that I rushed up and
out into the air.
The rock, I learned, was where animal sacrifices had taken
place. Yes, the stone was stained with animal blood which I
thought was the natural color of the rock. I have smelled fresh
human blood in surgery, which gives me no concern, but the field
here carried the thoughts and the information of sacrifice. That
was what upset me. Many others have smelled the same odor
while there, and unless they knew, as I did not, or decoded the
vibrational information, as I did, they just think it is a strong,
unpleasant odor. Odor is a pattern of vibrations that the mind can
decode.
I believe the focused mind-field has the power to tap into
everything going on in the world. Many of us intellectually accept
this as true, but our experience does not confirm it, and our brain
is so busy with things of the day, that we don't even test it.
Besides, most of us identify the mind with the cellular brain; we
don't recognize it as a wireless transmitter and receptor. We
acknowledge as commonplace that we can send and receive radio
waves, bounce them off satellites, unscramble them and
materialize information transmitted over a distance. How strange
that we cannot accept that all the marvelous things we invent or
discover "out there" are really prototypes of the body and the
mind-field. The power of the human mind is such that we could
monitor and decode all major "goings on" in the world. Without
102 — INFINITE MIND

the news media, we could sense starvation and catastrophes when

they occur. The mind-field has the capacity to have known about
the Jones' group in Guyana. With mind-field knowledge, we
would have less need of the CIA or FBI or satellite spying. The
mind-field has the capability o f sending instantaneous thought
messages. Most of us try and are surprised when this works. We
shouldn't be.
On the basis o f my experience with deciphering and
broadcasting thought from a field, I believe that all the great and
profound ideas ever expounded, the tenets of advanced cultures,
the deep and meaningful spiritual happenings around which
religions are organized, all of these are available to us today in
their original vibrational forms. They can be retrieved directly,
rather than passed on with the distortions of time through writing
or story-telling. Socrates at the Forum, the Sermon on the Mount,
Moses and the Ten Commandments, and Buddha at the Bodhi tree,
will someday be experienced by present-day people. So far, we
have not created the adequate instruments and we are not
sufficiently developed to receive and decode these with our minds.
But we will do both in time if we know we can.
Are these ideas really so preposterous in light of the fact that
we landed on the moon by manipulating and controlling physical
forces? No, we can go beyond the stars by harnessing the non­
physical power of the mind. The open mind-field concept says that
all important thought is ours for the taking.
If you can accept as truth, at least tentatively, these ideas, or
if you have been stimulated, or even shaken a bit, then perhaps you
can imagine how difficult it was for me, a didactically-trained
researcher, to arrive at such opinions. I had to weaken my material
referents and reevaluate much of what I had learned as truth from
"holy" science.
Now I take a further step to join the ranks of a growing body
o f philosophers who believe that thought and mind precede
physical substance, and that when matter disintegrates after its
form has changed, the mind and soul are freed and the power of
 MIND FIELD: THE RESIDENCE OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND THE SOUL --- 103

thought still remains. You see, I really do believe in the power and
greatness of the mind as a field. No, not believe; I know its power,
for I have experienced my own.
Recently, when I was meditating, information came to me
that I deemed contained great wisdom. There were no guides or
teachers to tell me that I had tapped into a universal source. I paid
attention to my thoughts and was very pleased, but also a bit
annoyed—irritated because I could have used that information
many years ago. And so my mind complained. Why did I have to
wait so long, as though someone or something held up my
knowing? The answer came quietly and firmly, "You needed
seasoning." My higher mind was speaking to me. Perhaps I am
more seasoned now than fifty years ago when I thought my
students and I could change the world. Now I know that we can,
because this time I think I know the way, through the education
and freeing of the mind-field. Fifty years earlier, I had only the
inspiration.
I will close with an appropriate statement from The Bhagavad
Gita, the ancient Hindu book of wisdom: "If you understand your
own mind completely, you are not just a human being, you
yourself are God."
 CT@ | C H A P T E R VI J © '®

EMOTIONS:
The Mind-Field Organizer
Since the advent of written language there have been more
words recorded about emotions, in every language, than about any
other single subject. Why not, when emotions are the experiences
we know most intimately. They are etched in our minds, indelibly
recorded in our awareness as pleasant or distasteful. Emotions
carry the essence of our unique and collective consciousness. Our
thoughts and behaviors are basically directed by emotions which
either permit or prohibit what we can think and how we can act.
Each o f us is an expert in human emotions— from our
extensive experience with our own, we know them well.
Therefore, any discussion that challenges our beliefs or strays
from accepted philosophies will be controversial. In this sense, the
information presented here may be controversial because it offers
a new model of human emotions. I suggest that human emotion is
the organizer of energy fields.
In my process of rejecting ordinary ideas for strange, yet
possible ones, I remember the Buddha's wisdom:

104
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 105

Do not believe what you have heard. Do not believe in

tradition because it is handed down many generations.
Do not believe in anything that has been spoken of
many times. Do not believe because the written
statements come from some old sage. Do not believe in
conjecture. Do not believe in authority or teachers or
elders. But after careful observation and analysis, when
it agrees with reason and it will benefit one and all, then
accept it and live by it.

I suggest that we adopt a similar attitude as we explore

ideas that may fall outside the range of our current beliefs.
I also advise that we assess their truth in light of the material
evidence and their rational soundness in the context of our own
experience.
Current ideas about the psychology of emotion need
to be re-evaluated. Psychotherapy as it is practiced
today is only partially successful. Freud admitted this with the
statement, "Successful psychotherapy is changing the extreme
suffering o f the neurotic into the normal misery of human
existence." Carl Rogers' study o f an extensive array of
psychological treatment modalities further demonstrated
the incompleteness of psychological techniques. An extensive
questionnaire asked if participants had profited from
their psychotherapy. Fifty-one percent responded that
they got some help; forty-nine percent said that they
were no better after psychotherapy. Statistically, both figures are
too close to chance to be significant. We may then conclude
that if one had embarked on any new healthy endeavor,
they might have come out as well—not a very good
recommendation for current psychotherapy. O f course,
this study does not indicate that the therapy was
worthless, but that it did not change what people wanted
changed. It may have prolonged their lives, or even
106 — INFINITE MIND

benefitted society, but there was something that those respondents

sought that was beyond what they received. I believe that the
source o f the problem was not addressed, and I reject the standard
belief that they did not want to change.
In the last 25 years, 100 new schools of psychology have been
established. But there has not been a revolutionary new idea about
human emotion since the early part o f this century. While it is true
that transpersonal psychology is pointing to higher spiritual
aspects o f consciousness, it is still with a weak voice that is not
commanding the attention paid to the old models. Actually, even
transpersonal psychology is not radically new; it is merely an
extension of older concepts.
I first began to realize the gaps in theories about emotions
when I studied neuroanatomy and pathological neurophysiology at
the College of Physicians and Surgeons at Columbia University,
where we dissected brains. Simultaneously, I was in graduate
school studying emotional and behavioral theories, learning that
both seemed locked into new discoveries about the brain. Reflex
and emotional responses were researched using EEG recordings
when brain neurons were stimulated. Emotional centers were thus
charted with state of the art scientific instruments. I still remember
how confused I became with this approach. Regardless of my
then-amateur status in brain studies, I sensed that reducing
emotion to physiological reflexes and behavioral responses was an
inadequate explanation for what humans experienced. Human
emotions carry a personal element—something of the mind, they
are not merely brain activity. Even then, the great
neurophysiologists, Eccles and Penfield, stated that the mind and
emotions were some kind of organized energy, although they too
sought this in the nerve cells of the brain.
My quandary about emotions arose again following my
eclectic Freudian psychoanalysis when I knew that something was
unfinished, but it seemed unconnected to my personality. I began
to realize that the current information about emotions was
grounded in the scientific emphasis on material existence, upon
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 107

presumed causes and cures. This yielded the belief that emotions
were rooted in the nervous tissue and biochemical substances of
the brain. This, the programmed aspect o f the emotions that is
shared with animals, is instinctual. Even the uniquely human
super-ego, advanced by Freud as that aspect of the psyche that
modulated our raw desires, still was geared to the survival of the
body and personal existence.
Finally, it was during my work in higher consciousness states
while opening the mind-field, and in the laboratory when I
researched human electromagnetic fields, that my long-awaited
questions found answers. I was beginning to peel the emotional
onion.
But first, let me review old and new insights about emotions.
Current psychotherapy suggests a closed system— a perceptual
world that is bounded by the function of the ordinary five senses,
the ego, body image, and selfhood. Verbal, free association
techniques are geared to probe a closed system to find specific
causes for emotional problems. Of course, the many brain
monitors which screen word association themselves exist as a
closed system. Here, emotion is a tool—to keep us alive, to protect
our bodies, elaborate our selfhoods, and to perpetuate our kind.
They protect us from injury and danger and they guide us toward
experiences in the arts, education, and nature which do make our
lives richer and give us pleasure. We know that emotions motivate
us, and that unless we "will" to do something, we will not do it.
Those acts which are heavily encrusted with emotions are willfully
intense— actually, emotion is present every time we care about
something enough to take action.
Protective emotion is strongly attached to the physical body;
when something is seriously wrong with it, most of us get upset,
particularly if the problem is life-threatening. Emotion is linked
with our selfhood or sense of identity—the me I know as me. Any
attack suggesting that I am inferior or not worthy elicits strong
protective emotions. Emotion is embedded in personality and its
behaviors. Some of us with particularly fragile personalities care
108 — INFINITE MIND

more deeply about how we appear to others. But emotion goes

even farther; I also transfer emotional energy to possessions that I
identify with, both things and relationships with others, my mate,
my friends, my children, or my pets. In a broader sense, any
classification with which we identify, whether it is race, sex,
ethnic group, or neighborhood, carries emotional charges. Real or
imagined threats to our group may be interpreted as personal
threats.
All o f these beliefs about emotion and psychotherapy point to
a closed system geared to the ordinary reality of the everyday
world. These beliefs indicate that emotions organize physical
existence.
Information that emerges from higher consciousness states
helps to explain the profound emotional connection with traumatic
episodes, intense spiritual experiences, and threats to the soul.
Although these emotions are similar to those connected to physical
existence, they are simpler, purer, and possess greater charge.
When not released at the source level of higher consciousness, the
effects of these energies seem to filter down to be discharged at the
personality-body level of existence. Thus, higher emotions often
become locked into the material closed reality system.
In contrast to the emotions at the material body level, in
altered states there is evidence of an open emotional system that is
dynamically in touch with deep needs and subtle happenings in the
universe. Here in the no-time/space realm, one discovers free
emotional energy, a super-consciousness state, the home of the
peak experiences that we never forget. Here the closed system
opens, revealing a broad continuum of emotions that explain
things we knew about ourselves, particularly the schisms in our
awareness.
I began to see the current model of emotion in a broader
context when I realized that the emotions connected with the self
are the synthesizing mechanism of the body, and the emotions
connected with the soul are the organizing medium for the mind.
Depending upon the organization o f the field, transactions are
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 109

selected; these transactions constitute humanity's experience.

Somewhere within this emotional continuum, each person
finds his own identity, his patterns for handling reality. Ideally, we
should be able to focus on any aspect of the continuum without
needing to block any other aspect of reality. All emotion should
flow on a continuum, one merging into the next. Actually, because
emotions, the guardians, determine how our mind-field is
organized, we generally hang on to one reality at one time while
hanging on to another under different circumstances. Ideally, we
should be able to focus consciousness on any portion of the
spectrum without losing our identity within the larger system. We
should be able to remain grounded in earth reality while another
part of our awareness is soaring to higher states. And we should be
able to experience emotions materially and metaphysically and to
intellectually process both simultaneously. This is a sign of higher
evolution that all of us seek and few of us command. Here, rigid
emotional resistance fades and our self-identification broadens to
include full access to all realities.
As a prologue to specific examples of the organizing power
of emotion, here is a summary of what we have discussed:
New paradigms of the physical world, new concepts of living
matter cause significant shifts in the beliefs about reality and how
to incorporate inner experience. The power of these beliefs will
shake up every institution in modern society. These brilliant new
ideas about life and societies spring from the concepts of
complexity theory. "Complex adaptive systems are pattern
seekers" (Lewin).. Behavior on all levels, from tissues to
individuals to societies, displays characteristic organization
patterns. And what cells, individuals, or communities do is the
result "of the internal dynamics, not the response to anything
external" (Lewin).. I strongly believe that the internal dynamics of
the most complex biofield, the human energy field, are based on
its emotional organization.
At the deepest level, all things are composed of vibrations
organized into fields that permeate the entire structure. Fields,
110 — INFINITE MIND

whether biological or otherwise, have their own integrity. They

are organized, not random, and they have the capacity to
selectively react, interact, and transact—to respond passively, and
to cooperatively unite with other fields. In other words, the mind
aspect o f the field, the aspect with the highest vibrations,
dynamically guides all choices and transactions as it influences
and is influenced by all other fields.
Emotion provides a force which flows and fluxes; it captains
a field organization to maintain its integrity. Whether the mind-
field can continue without becoming disorganized is determined
by the strength of the emotion.
Patterns of the mind dictate complex human behaviors; brain
patterns activate simpler ones. Every experience has concomitant
emotions, and every emotion temporarily restructures the field.
Activated emotions increase the electromagnetic flow of the field.
Likewise, emotions arise from an altered electromagnetic
environment.

We don't know exactly how the mind-field operates, but we

are aware of some of the vectors. At any given time, the pattern
and power of the mind work as a strange attractor to determine
which fields we resonate with. Strong emotions and decreased
field vibrations often limit the range of transactions but when the
field broadens, interactibility increases. In other words, interactive
opportunities o f the field create the final action arena with its
freedoms, limitations and directions. Dynamic fields on the ridge
o f chaos can reorganize more complexly with revolutionary
transactions and evolutionary outcomes. If, however, that window
of opportunity is missed or is clouded by disorganization, chaotic
behavior can result until the field is more simply organized.
My research shows that human energy fields display a
continuum. The extremely low frequencies (ELF), are directly
involved with life's biological processes. The extremely high
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 111
frequency (EHF) patterns ally with the mind-field and
awarenesses. The general pattern of ELF is similar for all people,
while the EHF reveals a personal signature of emotional patterning
for each person. Therefore, an individual's mind-field patterns
may show unique clumps of energy at different frequencies with
breaks in the frequencies along the total mind-field spectrum.
To understand the individual emotional signatures, the steady
state to which one returns, requires a search in the EHF patterns of
both ordinary people and of the gifted during different states of
consciousness, as well as during abnormal states such as psychosis
and coma. The variables are frequency and power (or amplitude),
and where these clump on the energy continuum. Lower vibrations
exist with material reality, higher ones with mystical reality, and a
full vibrational spectrum with expanded reality. To describe it
another way, one's experience of reality is a direct measure of the
vibrational organization patterns of that individual. Emotions can
be fleeting, lasting only a few seconds. Or the pattern of an instant
can prevail with enduring feelings, moods and affects lasting for
hours or days. These are the forerunners of habitual emotional
patterns of a lifetime, or even many lifetimes. These define the
individual's emotional field signature (Exhibit 20).
The extreme ends of the consciousness continuum describe
two foci o f reality and their frequencies. A grounded state in
material reality shows energy field ranges from about 350 to 600
cycles per second, while an altered state exhibits ranges of
frequencies extending as high as 200,000 cycles per second. This
range accompanies non-material awareness apart from earthly
time-space. Here, experiences are not locked to now-time; they
seem to exist in any time, now, then, forever, and whenever.
Providing the person is simultaneously grounded, thoughts
occurring in the higher states can be intellectually screened for
their potential relevance and usefulness to his physical life. If he is
not grounded in these lower frequencies, his thoughts have little
reference to the material world and he has trouble recalling his
daydreams.
112 — INFINITE MIND

In grounded states, the energy is located in the feet, legs, and

lower torso, while in ungrounded or altered states, energy is
truncated in the upper trunk, limbs, and head. Electronic
recordings often showed energy pouring out the crown in great
plumes, sometimes four and five times the amplitude of ordinary
states, making the top of the head feel extremely hot. This is a
characteristic of most young children, the seriously ill, and the
psychotic.
Expanded consciousness encompasses a complete spectrum
of vibrations with grounding in the lower frequencies combined
with great power in the higher ones. Here any level of reality one
desires is available.
If you happen to be present when a person is "channeling," I
encourage you to pay attention to the kinds of information the
channel expresses. If the facts or predictions are about an
individual, a thing, or the physical world, the channel's strongest
vibrations are in the low to mid-ranges on the consciousness
continuum chart, referencing common reality. We refer to these
channels as "psychics." However, if the information has the
essence of ancient wisdom, great truths, spiritual knowledge, and
lifehoods, their vibrations are in the highest range. (Exhibit 20,
Consciousness Spectrum). This is the pattern of those we call
"mystics."
Oftentimes during meditation, one experiences a sudden shift
in body sensation and awareness, like breaking through a barrier.
The field takes on higher vibrations with a sudden increase in
amplitude—a phase shift. With more experienced meditators, one
shifts unknowingly into higher vibrations. Also, when a powerful
channel or healer comes into one's field, dramatic changes in
consciousness frequently occur.
Repressed emotions create huge gaps in the frequency
spectra; these are sometimes called "chakra blocks." In these cases,
the power o f the electromagnetic vibrations is increased or
decreased, particularly in body areas associated with emotional
trauma. This is the source o f psychosomatic disorders. If the
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 113

emotion is abandoned and not just repressed, there is inactivity in

some chakras.
I saw a dramatic example of repressed field emotions in a
young woman who presented a long history of major neurological
disturbances and gastrointestinal surgeries. She had worked
patiently and unsuccessfully using many therapies and medical
treatments. I found that she imaged so freely that she rapidly
uncovered many childhood sexual experiences, some of which she
had known, with adults and other children. Generally, she freely
participated in or instigated these. The frequency and unusual
character o f her experiences differed from those of sexually-
molested children I had worked with previously. Hers seemed to
be in a more mystical vein.
This young woman's past lives also disclosed extensive sexual
activity, both traumatic and pleasant. What struck me was that
even in the higher consciousness where emotion generally flows
freely, she was emotionless. At times I wondered if she had
created these fantasies, until I realized that the flowing quality of
her speech and the unusual details reflected that these memories
were not creations but were in fact valid memories; also, she was
amazed with what came from her mouth, for she was always
grounded.
Throughout many sessions, we uncovered extensive factual
information without any change in her symptoms. Sometimes, in
fact, her psychosomatic conditions worsened. One day after
numerous mind-field sessions, she discovered another lifehood so
bizarre that it seemed unreal—it was something one might read
about but certainly not experience. Day after day for weeks it
unfolded. She had been a baby victim of a sexual fertility ritual in
an ancient culture somewhere near an ocean, in a tropical country
with many Greek columns. She recalled with sensitive detail how
temple virgins lovingly cared for her as they prepared for her
special mission. When the three-day celebration date arrived, she
enjoyed the elaborate ceremonies during which she was the star
offering to the gods. At this stage she did not seem to know that
114 — INFINITE MIND

she would be killed, only that she had been chosen for the special
role—a gift to please the gods and to bring fertility to the leader
and his wives.
While this story was unfolding, Dr. Walter Frank, a professor
of cultural anthropology at Bonn University in Germany, visited
my home. We had worked together in India. Because he
specialized in "ritual" meanings, I started to tell him in detail this
fantastic story. Before I could finish, he excitedly told me the end
of the story and that it was a real ritual of Tripoli from around 400
B.C. He exclaimed that I had given him far more details than he
had ever found written. We wondered if this kind of recall,
whether conscious or not, provided the stimulus for great novels.
We speculated that history could be updated by this real life
memory as more people reach this consciousness level and recall
lifehoods.
As we continued our work, the subject passively enjoyed the
elaborate music and dancing of this colorful pageant until just
moments before her death. When she was sacrificed by fire, her
emotions exploded into rage and resentment at their acts and at her
own passive acceptance. It was then, when these emotions were
freed, that the energy field became hyperactive and chaotic. Over
a period of weeks, as understanding and integration took place, her
field stabilized, and became strong and flowing. The major
symptoms subsided and her health improved. She has since been
happily married.
While we acknowledge that we are emotionally conditioned
by childhood experiences, most o f us do not acknowledge the
imprints we carry from other lifehoods. I did not fully accept the
reality of lifehood conditioning until I had a dramatic experience.
I was attending an international biomagnetic medical meeting in
India. This was a pleasant, relaxing time for me with a group of
friends from the States. Early one morning I was suddenly
awakened with a great physical shock and emotional excitement.
The entire heavens, as far as I was concerned, were streaming with
bright red light. I was euphoric. The remainder of the night I was
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 115
awake, not wanting to sleep; it was too dramatic. Although I did
not know what had happened, the energy seemed to come from a
far galaxy, not from the Earth. Of the many people I questioned
the next day, only a few had experienced my "red shock." Every
following night for two weeks I was awakened at the same time by
the "big shock." Each time, I enjoyed the euphoria, my body
tingled all over with the full spectrum o f frequencies, and I was
aware o f my hyperconsciousness. Four days later when we
returned to the States, I learned the answer. That was the exact
time when the energy of the supernova of 1987 reached the Earth.
I asked a friend, a hypnotist, to break my habit of awakening
that had been started by the supernova. Under hypnosis, I recalled
the same experience occurring in another lifehood in India when I
was "strung up" like a butchered goat because I had killed two
men. In the middle of the night, when witnesses were gone and I,
from guilt, had passively accepted my impending death, suddenly
something happened. My energy became so great that I broke the
sinews without effort and eventually escaped. Ten years earlier I
had remembered this lifehood. Nothing was new or different so
far. But this time under hypnosis I experienced that same red bolt
of energy. Although I doubt if there were records of such astral
happenings, there must have also been a supernova in the 8th
century. My field that day in India was emotionally programmed
to cosmic happenings.
Under hypnosis I also remembered the many nights I spent
under the bed as a child in this current life, seeking protection
from the intense lightning and thunderstorms in the Midwest
where I lived. Understandably, I was hypersensitive. After these
hypnotically induced memories, my sleep returned to normal and
sudden noises shocked me less.
When a person catapults into higher consciousness without
smoothly raising his vibrations, the body frequently goes into
shock with muscular paroxysms, pain, and emotional dis­
orientation. Probably these are due to sudden phase shifts which
release strong energy, possibly forcing the field past the edge of
116 — IN F IN IT E M IN D

chaos. Powerful activation of the Kundalini (serpent energy rising

from the spinal tail up the spine to the crown) is an example of the
sudden, full-scale release of the EHF. Literature and neurological
clinics have cited numerous examples of the rising Kundalini
energy over powering the nervous system with destructive
consequences. Poorly supervised Kundalini breathing classes can
move people to powerful chaotic disorganization, not only of the
field, but also shocking its biological counterpart, the central
nervous system.
If you are curious about your emotional field organization,
ask yourself these questions. The answers will give you clues
about what easily stimulates your field. What types of situations
really alarm you? What characteristics of a person immediately
upset you? What kinds of persons do you gravitate toward? If we
recorded your energy signature under these situations or along
with the person who stimulates you, we would see that either your
fields were very similar and resonated well, or they contrasted and
clashed. These emotionally programmed field situations occur
before you are consciously aware of "there it goes again."
Do you have any prevailing affects that you frequently
experience, like sadness, anxiety, depression, or happiness? Do
you have persistently intense traits, compulsions, aggression, or
perseverance?
Your energy field signature will show dominant patterns just
like a fingerprint. Modem psychology relates these to childhood
trauma. This offers some understanding, but it rarely eliminates
the problem. Regardless of so-called insight, the field will remain
the same until the emotions which have organized it have likewise
changed. Psychological understanding rarely insures such deep
change. Remember, energy fields should change in concert with
different situations. Complex ones do, and encourage fluid
emotions. Does yours show a very limited change? Are your likes
and interests small? What is the worst thing that ever happened to
you in this life? Do you remember vivid details or only vague
impressions of this experience? If the memory is still intense, your
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 117

field will show anti-coherency in parts during the recall. And some
time afterwards, the field will reorganize in a more coherent
pattern.
Do you have any regular extrasensory experiences or
abilities? And do you pay attention to these by thought or action?
Are you insensitive to things others experience? In both instances,
there is increased power in certain frequencies in the field and/or
areas where there are blanks. If emotion is generated from material
concerns, the lower levels of ELF are affected most. If emotion is
activated from metaphysical thoughts, more action occurs in the
upper ranges of the ELF.
Without external stimuli, one can experience heightened
sensations from memory stored in nerves. But these differ from
memories held in the field. Mystics easily read field memories, but
rarely nervous tissue memories. In other words, they read material
thoughts in vibrational patterns or experiences held in the field
state. The clairvoyant capacity of "reading minds" is more
understandable when we accept this fact.
All o f us can experience an odor coming from a field,
regardless of whether its source is a chemical or a thought form.
This impulse is carried to the brain, activating memory. I
remember when I first sensed odors connected to a field. Alegra
Snyder, a professor of Dance and Ritual Anthropology at UCLA,
and Buckminster Fuller's daughter, and I were personally
exploring mind-fields. As she went up in vibrations and started to
image, we both smelled the unique odor of sandalwood. I thought
she was wearing sandalwood perfume, but she was not. The odor
became stronger and stronger until we adapted and no longer
sensed it. Some time later, we both left the laboratory at the same
time, but I returned after a few minutes to turn off some equipment
I had forgotten. Upon entering the room, I was struck again with
the intense odor of sandalwood.
The next time we worked, we discovered the source. She had
been a temple priestess in Siam during another lifehood, where
before each celebration they put on face masks which had been
118 — INFINITE MIND

impregnated with sandalwood smoke. The odor emanated from

her field from experience in that other lifehood.
While working with an older man, we strongly sensed ether
before he recalled his numerous childhood surgeries. He described
the mask over his face and the agony of believing that he was
being killed. Emotions are particularly intense during inhalation
anesthesia and near-drowning. The sudden loss of oxygen sends
one into the life-death panic. In both instances, the strong
emotions heightened the sense of smell.
Once when Rosalyn Bruyere, the skillful aura reader, mystic
and healer, was scheduled to give a lecture she became very ill
with strep throat. She asked me to lay-on-hands to ease some of
the congestion. As I worked, we both smelled gin. I knew the
distinct odor of gin from gin martinis I had enjoyed in my younger
days. But now, neither of us could find an ordinary source for the
odor in her house. Somewhat later, she remembered a lifetime in
Europe when she and her alchemist father crushed juniper berries
for a medicinal formula that they were creating for the plague. She
didn't know that gin is made of juniper berries.
I relate these experiences, again, to demonstrate that intense
odors were experienced from vibrations in the field connected to
thoughts. In two of the examples, the odors were carried in the
field from other lifehoods, in another example, the odor was
projected into the field from neural memory in this lifehood. All
come from patterns carried within the mind-field.
Cosmic awareness with a completely extended reality is rare.
Pseudo-cosmic awareness is legion with ungrounded people.
Cosmic awareness always is devoid of personal reference with a
field so expanded, so large, that it literally flows into the universe.
The mind expands, becomes hyper-alert to divine global
happenings, not to the physical body or material reality. Not that
one has left the body, but the body image has expanded into an
undifferentiated state which has no me-ness.
The boundaries of the human field become more permeable
as the positive charge on the skin's surface weakens, loosening its
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 119
grip on the aura. This is like allowing a kite to float away by
uncoiling the string. It is still attached but is more distant.
Although I have experienced this cosmic state of being in
total unison with the universe, it only occurred once while I was
recording the field of a subject. This condition cannot be planned
or predicted. Rosalyn Bruyere was reading the auras that day when
the subject had just finished the tenth Rolfing session and was in
an ungrounded, altered state. Suddenly, we lost the vibrational
recordings for three or four minutes. Rosalyn commented that she
couldn't see or find the aura, nor feel it with her hand although she
was standing near the person. Finally, as she walked around the
room to get a different visual perspective, she ran into the field
hovering about eight feet away from the body. This should not be
confused with an eight-foot expanded field in strong contact with
the body. Visually, this aura seemed disconnected from the body's
surface. During those minutes, the subject's electronic sensors
recorded only a few microvolt vibrations (millionths of a volt),
rather than the 20 to 80 millivolt range (thousandths of a volt)
routinely recorded. Generally, we do not consider such low
recordings because these resemble the ambient background of
universal electromagnetism. But in this instance the sudden drop
in voltage apparently signaled a state of cosmic consciousness.
During this state the vibrational patterns were similar to, but of
considerably lower voltage, than during a coma.
Coma, believed to be a state of prolonged unconsciousness, is
actually a state of extremely high, ungrounded consciousness. I
believe as long as any life exists there is awareness. In a coma, the
individual can receive and decode information, but there is
insufficient emotional energy to stimulate the will to act or to
communicate by ordinary means. The mind-field, however, is
sufficiently active that mystics who decode thought can obtain
information and communicate with them. Whether the source is
violent physical injury, emotional shock, anesthetic, self-induced
drugs, or starvation, there is always an emotional element locking
these memories in the field, freeing the self from the tragedy.
120 — INFINITE MIND

Connections are severed; the field is temporarily reprogrammed so

strongly that ordinary consciousness is delayed or never
recovered. In a coma, the individual is protected from memory of
the experience which sent him there until he unlocks the memory
by returning to that expanded state of consciousness in which the
traumatic event occurred.
My coma studies have taken two directions: by assisting
normal people to open their mind-fields and access their coma
experiences, and by working with persons in a comatose state. In
both instances, while in a coma, both the lower ELF and the higher
EHF ranges of frequencies were extremely weak and equal in all
body areas. The physiological body processes were so closed
down that body functions idled. The awareness was high and
weak, but not related to material things. However, this is not a
simple, ungrounded state where healers can change a coma field
by simply feeding it with their own energy. It seems that only
strong, uncomplicated love energy crosses the coma barriers to
make contact.
While I was teaching at UCLA, a physician friend, a
professor of pediatrics at the medical school, asked me to work
with a seven-year-old girl who was mute and cerebral palsied
following anoxia, a lack of oxygen, during an extended anesthetic
for an ordinary tonsillectomy. She was receiving daily speech and
physical therapy, but could walk only a few steps with long leg
braces. She spoke little. I found a sharp break in her energy field
with great amplitude o f lower and higher vibrations and no
connections of the middle vibrations. As I lay-on-hands, she
quickly went into an altered state where I was able to passively
move and reeducate her limbs without the rigid or clonic
contractions of cerebral palsy.
I relayed this information to her physician, along with my
doubts that she had a classical cerebral palsy with central nervous
system destruction. She improved rapidly in walking. Speech
came in sentences and paragraphs. One day while we were
working, she dropped into a deep altered state. I casually
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 121

remarked, "Did something happen to you during surgery?" Almost

instantly, she stopped breathing. With fear, I started mouth-to-
mouth resuscitation. In a short time when her breath returned, she
was in a rage, flailing her limbs and screaming. I held her, asking
her to remember and tell me about what happened. As she calmed
down, she relayed her anger when her father "dragged" her to the
hospital the morning of the surgery. She tried to escape from the
car. She was so upset when they reached the hospital that the
surgery probably should have been delayed. But it was scheduled
and the show went on. She told me that she believed that they tried
to kill her with the anesthetic. She fought a lot. Apparently, in this
hyper-emotional state, more anesthetic was required. Her heart
and breathing had stopped, requiring electrical cardiac
stimulation.
When I checked her memory with what her doctors said
happened during surgery, she had remembered correctly. Her
emotions had caused her field to be so reorganized that memories
were frozen. It was this field block which created the major part of
her neurological and speech handicaps. She learned to walk and to
run again. From a child who could not learn, she became a
verbally assertive little girl who progressed well in school.
I was once called by the brother of a man who willfully, at the
suggestion of his guru, fasted into a coma. The man told me that
there had been a great deal of stress between his brother and an
Asian teacher whom he had brought to this country in connection
with his business as an herbalist-acupuncturist. This was in the
1970s when both treatments were becoming popular. Apparently
the guru had taken over the young man's practice, his house, and
his woman friend, telling him that he was not a high being and was
thus unworthy to continue his work. This is when the student
started a total fast.
In the beginning, his brother agreed not to interfere. But when
he became comatose, the brother called me. I found a man lying
under covers on an outside porch surrounded by trees and
California brush. He was unable to move, to take in nourishment,
122 — INFINITE MIND

and was oblivious to all stimuli. I tested eye, body and pain
reflexes, and found them absent. My first and strongest response
was anger. Professionally, I had known this handsome, highly
educated and brilliant young man for some time, so my emotions
contained a personal aspect. I verbally berated him for trying to
solve his problems in this way. I told him that I would see that he
got one more chance to straighten out his life.
I contacted the U.S. Public Health Service, which
immediately sent a doctor and an ambulance. The young man was
hospitalized and after several weeks of intensive treatment and
intravenous feeding, he came out of the coma calling out my name
in rage. He had comprehended my attitude and what I had said to
him. The coma problem was an emotional block in the mind-field.
To end the story on a better note, weeks later he discovered
his anger at his guru and recognized his passive acceptance of his
guru's behavior. He had the guru deported, took back his practice,
his woman friend, his house and pursued a more normal life.
Near-drownings frequently produce long-term coma where
the actual loss of oxygen causes neurological destruction in the
brain. From work with three little boys in comas following near-
drowning accidents, I obtained some additional information. I
sensed a reluctance on their part to return to normal circumstances.
I wondered if, to fill in the gaps in their consciousness, they
needed to recall the horror o f their near suffocation—to go back
through the door they had closed with the coma. Rather than do
this, their wills seemed to become dormant, wishing neither to
cross over nor to return.
I had found that if someone sits with a comatose child, quiets
his mind to tune into the child's field, the stories of their near-
drownings can be communicated. One does not need to know
anything about children or comas; in fact, that knowledge may
hinder.
One little boy gave me information through his mind-field
that his sister became angry at him and pushed him into the
swimming pool while their mother was in the house. From
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 123

another, I sensed that his mother had left him in the yard too long
when she went to answer the telephone. He became angry and
accidentally fell into the pool when he ran to find her. Information
these boys relayed to me revealed how the incidents had
happened, all of which was confirmed by the parents. But the third
little boy said that he did it purposefully because his father had
preplanned his life so rigidly—he did not communicate how he
had the "accident," or possibly I could not comprehend it. When I
asked his parents, they told me about a party starting around their
pool. They and other guests left the pool area after securely
latching the gate. One other adult had also checked the latch,
which was believed to be too high for a child to reach. Sometime
later, when they missed their son, the gate was open and he was
floating in the pool. The father emotionally told me that his son
would have followed him in his business; he had already picked
out his university, and he would choose his son's bride from the
"old country"— strongly concurring with what I had learned from
the son.
My work with these boys was totally intuitive. Consciously, I
didn't know what to do, but somehow I sensed I was there to learn
and to help with another problem—a problem of the will. I
lay-on-hands with the intent to strengthen their wills to take
action—to come back or cross over, but not to remain in limbo. In
either case, the will had to be strong enough to direct the energy.
Small things happened at first. They smiled when I came into
the room—later, they smiled at their nurses. They started random
movements, slowly, but progressively. The first little angry boy
came out of the coma state in a few weeks. At first he babbled,
then raged about being a soldier in a war he was against, and about
his dying on the battlefield with head wounds and no one to help
him—as though he had died tragically before, in a way similar to
suffocation from this near-drowning.
Again, I wondered if comatose patients needed to go through
a window of death to return to normal consciousness. I speculated
that the war memory could have come from a prior lifehood
124 — INFINITE MIND

because of the vivid detail, but I could not confirm this—the little
boy did not respond to these questions. Over months he grew in
consciousness, went to special teachers and physical therapists,
and became a more spontaneous and outgoing child. I did not
continue work with him—apparently my role of intervening in the
mind-field was completed. When last I saw him, he had some
physical weakness, but he spoke and attended a regular school.
As the field started to organize and become stronger, the child
who may have tried to drown himself suddenly died. Although he
never resumed ordinary consciousness, he crossed over, not at the
weakest time, but when strength and awareness were returning.
Probably a strengthened will enabled him to act. Apparently he
chose to move on.
The third little boy whose sister pushed him into the pool was
progressing steadily, according to the nurses, when the father said
that he did not want a conscious but imperfect son and requested
that I stop seeing him.
What are the important learnings beyond my memory of these
little yearning faces? Into each experience we take our old
programs. There are no simple drownings. A person emotionally
organizes his mind-field as best he can, given the circumstances of
the time. In comas there is a weakening of the will which makes
any course of action difficult. I believe that someday we will know
how to assist victims in making their choice to free their souls or
to reestablish their lives. These stories may point the way.
Drugs do create changes in the energy fields giving emotional
experiences, but the source is chemical, not emotional. Only a few
generalizations can be made about drug reactions because of the
many drugs, the purity and individual reactions to dosages. Bad
trips always result in massive stimulation and disconnection of the
body from both higher and lower consciousness. This makes for
an incoherent field with large quantities of very high and very low
vibrations with no medium-range frequencies. The EHFs may be
very strong or, in extreme coma cases, very weak.
On the other hand, if the field contains large quantities of very
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 125

high frequencies from drugs (without corresponding lower

vibrations), there is a smooth electromagnetic pattern with
pleasant feelings. The person is ungrounded and unable to form
coherent, rational thoughts about the real world, but exists in a
euphoric state. When comparing drug-induced with consciously-
induced higher states, drugs act faster, can be stronger and more
frightening, require no active participation of the person, and are
not under voluntary control. Finally, drugs do not help the
evolutionary process; they hinder it.
Aura readers are called by police departments to "read" the
auras of drug-induced comas so that they can be quickly treated.
Rosalyn Bruyere states that drugs lend a metal appearance to the
aura, unique for each drug. In the future, computer techniques
should enable us to analyze the drug victim's field, hastening
treatment and providing sound evidence for law enforcement
records.
Benett, of the University of California Medical School at
Davis, California, did some interesting research with surgical
patients showing that a surprising amount of awareness does exist
during anesthesia. During surgery he played a tape asking the
patients to rub their ears upon awakening. Nine of 11 subjects did,
although they did not recall being told to do so. He also suggested
that upon awakening, one hand would become warmer than the
other. This indeed occurred. He concluded that anesthesia does
not totally turn off the nervous system. The brain surgeon,
Penfield, similarly concluded that the mind is active during
general anesthesia. He discovered that patients consistently
recalled exact details o f incidents during surgery. He noted,
however, that the EEG brainwave was totally inactive during
anesthesia, ruling out the idea that an active nervous system
produced the memory. From my research, I found out that this
memory is held in the mind-field, where the new emotional
organization limits its retrieval.
Trance mediums who lose normal awareness and have no
memory of what happens during their "reading," generally channel
126 — INFINITE MIND

"real life" information. They diagnose disease at a distance,

predict world disasters or changes, and remotely see people and
events—a psychic type of manifestation. It is as though they
operate a powerful telephoto lens which they focus in a narrow
range to illuminate highly specific information. Edgar Cayce and
Jane Roberts were examples of this deep trance mediumship.
During normal states, trance mediums pose questions that are to be
answered in the trance state. But their findings are recorded by
others. In deep trance they have no recall. Although it is somewhat
unique for each medium, the energy field during trancing shows
massive explosions in a narrow range of EHF, not the highest
frequencies, and with no apparent connection to the lower
frequencies. This explains why they cannot remember. Although
some mediums are also higher beings who bring wisdom to bear
on these predictions, this is not a part of trancing p e r se.
Unfortunately, their current popularity has exposed many trance
mediums with neither sound predictions nor wisdom. (Exhibit 20)
If trancing is a narrow pinpoint of awareness, hypnosis is a
powerful wide angle lens that is capable of surveying a broad
range o f information—to bridge a gap in memory and recover
forgotten information. Generally, like trancing, the information
from hypnotic states is about material happenings, since that is
usually the motivation. The frequencies are strong and broadly
spread in the low- to mid-ranges of the higher frequencies.
Occasionally, this consciousness overlaps to higher vibrations
where lifehoods are experienced.
I was measuring neuromuscular coordination changes in
patients from the UCLA Neuropsychiatric Institute who were
participating in a dance therapy study. Individuals had different
psychopathological diagnoses and were on different medications.
All were sufficiently disoriented to require attendants to bring
them to my laboratory. While I instrumented their muscles, I had
time to casually chat with them. Each gave me the standard
complaint, which, of course, is very true: we average people do
not understand what they feel. Many complained that they were
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 127

"wired," plugged into an electric light socket, and they described

how painful it was.
Their metaphors seemed somehow correct—their bodies
literally buzzed. So I decided to place electrodes also over the
chakras to check their electromagnetic fields. All of the recordings
from the crown (or top of their head) were so intense and of such
high frequency that even without amplification these sounded like
the buzzing of a bee. We could feel the electromagnetic energy
pouring out of the crown in plumes that actually stung our hands.
Also, no patient showed any recordable vibrations below the
waist. The acute truncation of energy in the head with absence in
the body made them literally electromagnetically top-heavy. There
was a very narrow banding in the extreme upper ranges of human
vibrations and little in the grounding lower ones. No wonder they
were out of touch with Earth realities; they were out in the ether!
I do not know how much of the patients' physiological
depression was caused by sedative drugs. But I doubt whether
depression or drugs altered the field pattern except to decrease
its strength. The larger quantity of high vibrations probably
kept them in fuzzy consciousness rather than in a true comatose
state.
To witness some of the treatments for psychopathology today
causes us to realize our limited understanding of the process. We
have not envisioned psychopathic behavior as a break in the
vibrational continuum tied to a consciousness split. Probably when
a person's mind-field slips over the ridge into chaos, a gross
disorganization occurs, forcing him into an altered state devoid of
everyday reality. Here we treat only his symptoms—not the cause.
I was impressed when I visited Epidarus, the ancient Greek
center in operation many centuries ago to treat the mentally ill.
They must have intuited even then that the primary problem was
consciousness, not a disturbed physiology. Then they isolated
patients in solitary, padded rooms where they were protected from
self-injury and removed from reality, encouraging them to reach
their extreme aberrant state. Diagnosis and treatment were planned
128 — INFINITE MIND

by observing them in this acute altered consciousness. Treatment

involved full days o f heightened sensory experiences and
participation in athletics, symbolic plays in the Greek
amphitheaters, music, and other creative arts. Reports indicate that
such a regimen was very successful.
Fears of insanity occur with average people when they move
into sub- or superconscious states and are not in touch with the
other realities. Particularly when one is reaching out for other
awarenesses, there may be fear of not returning, as though one
might get caught in the rapture of the heights or the depths. I
believe that every single soul now existing in human form has had
during some lifehood a schizophrenic episode—a splitting of
reality so that the person was no longer functional. Such episodes
are very frightening if we realize that our will is not in
command—if we cannot consciously monitor what we do.
After we open the mind-field and move these persons through
a schizophrenic episode, fears lessen. I recall working with a
35-year-old illiterate woman sent to me from the UCLA
Neuropsychiatric Institute. She could neither read nor write. Her
psychiatrist asked me to help determine whether she was a deep
mystic or a psychotic. He said that she had been hypnotically
regressed to age five, where she got stuck and would not
communicate. They had had difficulty bringing her out of that
hypnotic state. When I first saw her, she announced that she was a
mystic, to which I responded, "So am I, we should have a good
time together." She described that she had been an Army "brat"
whose family had moved so fast from place to place that she never
had time to go to school. And besides, she had to care for her
younger brothers and sisters.
When she appeared comfortable after telling bizarre stories
about her strange, yet skillful drawings of people, I suggested,
"Let's take a consciousness trip." I explained that she should close
her eyes and start imagining that she was walking on a path, and
then to look around and describe what she saw. After some
rambling, she saw herself as a young girl with a whole rack of
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER --- 129

new, little girl clothes of all colors and styles. When I asked her
which of these she wanted to put on, she chose a black and red
one, not the colors chosen by most little girls. She put it on and
went back to a play area. There she found a boy who was "playing
around." Instantly, her vibrations shot up, leaving a vacuum. She
escaped something frightening by entering another state of
consciousness. I made contact with her in her higher state and
suggested that she was "out of her body" and should come back so
that we could work. Finally, I was able to gradually lower both of
our vibrations and literally, while talking with her, to "walk her
back down" in consciousness.
Soon she again remembered the little boy and started to
vibrationally escape. This time I knew that I must get her
cooperation if we were to continue. I told her that she was "going
away" so often that I needed her help. I asked her to grab one of
her feet in her imagination when she started to escape, while I
would grab the other. Together we would keep her grounded. She
liked that; she could do something about her escape. Later, I gave
her the job of monitoring to see when she was about to pop out of
her body. She was then to pull both feet downward. It worked
fabulously.
Throughout a long session, we discovered that the age five
episode was a sexual attack where, to protect her from her rage,
she went into a high mystical state which she enjoyed so much that
she did not tell anyone about either experience. Furthermore, if
she stayed in that mystic state she could not remember the attack.
She also verbalized that she did not want to read or write because
it was not any fun. I told her psychiatrist that the emotional
program of her consciousness and electromagnetic field had
blocked their diagnosis and treatment. It should be easier now that
we had made some connection.
Another woman was referred by a local priest because of her
intense debilitating fear that neither he nor a psychiatrist had been
able to change by working on the many material problems in her
life. I chose to concentrate on the fear. Intuitively, I suspected that
130 — INFINITE MIND

she had been insane in some other lifehood, although this was not
the present diagnosis. When she started imaging and going up in
vibration, she poured out the crown chakra until I could no longer
feel her energy field, as though it had slipped from her body. This
condition existed off and on for many days. When I brought down
her vibrations by contacting her field, it was like trying to ground
a helium balloon.
In this state individuals do not know the way back and many
do not will to return. Different from comatose patients with a
weak will, they have an energized will which misdirects all their
energy into the altered state. Finally, I helped this woman to know
how to put on the brakes so as not to lose consciousness. We
walked up and down the vibrational consciousness scale until
material imagery came. There were many skirmishes with
lifehoods, none settling on any significant information—until we
hit pay dirt. She laboriously relived being a wizened old woman in
Egypt who at one time had been a simple mystic who channeled
information that the priests had rejected. When they threw her out
of the temple she went to live in a small rock cave. There she
became insane. At night she crept out to steal people's dogs to
cook and eat ceremonially.
Gradually, she began to recognize this horrible experience
and to acknowledge how her spiritual nature had been rejected
when she was a temple priestess. She confided that she had always
been afraid of insanity and had known that she was insane before.
Indeed, her life has changed, her mystic nature is returning, and
her fears have lessened. More importantly, she no longer fears
insanity, for she had relived insanity and returned. We helped her
to reprogram her energy field. In the process of reprogramming
she found the emotion which organized the field and the behavior
which resulted.
All of the examples in this chapter have demonstrated the
direct relationship between emotion and vibrational patterns in the
mind-field. In order to heal and to evolve, we must learn to
coherently organize our emotions and to use this emotional energy
 EMOTIONS: THE MIND-FIELD ORGANIZER -— 131
to expand the mind-field. This is often slow and tedious work, but
when we have done it, we are free to evolve into the magnificent
beings that we are capable of being.
 G r@ | C H A P T E R VII |© " C

TELEPATHIC KNOWING:
The Transfer Of Thought

Jacob Bronowski in The Ascent o f Man stated, " There are

many gifts that are unique in man, but at the center of them all, the
root from which all knowledge grows, lies the ability to draw
conclusions from what we see to what we do not see."
Telepathic knowing requires tapping into remote information
sources. Since we can't explain clearly why we know things when
logic says that we can't, we attribute our knowing to ill-defined
skills like mind reading or intuition. We have all experienced
intuition—an innate way of processing information—but still it
remains an intellectual mystery.
Sending and gathering subtle information does not involve an
act o f will, but rather a high level exchange between mind fields,
minds that are selectively organized by emotions. Telepathic
communication of thought requires decoding and bringing to
awareness information held in frequency codes. While
philosophers are concerned with thought as reason, I am more
interested in higher thought as a mystical process.
Human thought has always been a philosopher's enigma.

132
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 133

Scientists don't touch it except to record brain waves, the activity

during thought; but brain waves do not resemble anything as
mercurial as thought. I believe that mind reading and thought
transfer will remain a conundrum until we envision a fie ld of
thought occurring in a larger mind field.
Thought is an organized field of energy composed of complex
patterns of vibrations which consolidate information. If the
accompanying emotional energy is strong, the field is energetic
and integrated. It persists and stimulates other fields to action, both
the dense world of matter and other human beings. If one uses
auditory memory skills to decode an information field, one hears
sounds or voices. If one translates thoughts through visual
memory, one sees pictures or print. And if one processes vibratory
information via olfactory or kinesthetic memory, one smells odors
or has a motion sensation. If one somehow integrates all of these,
one knows.
We have been aware of our thoughts since childhood and we
know that most occur spontaneously. They come and go so
quickly, and they are like quicksilver when we try to capture them.
Have you ever wished that you could put your finger on a thought
to hold it for contemplation or remembrance? But thoughts are
peripatetic, constantly on the move, non-static, and non-rigid, the
machinations of a dynamic, restless mind.
Some of us keep a tape recorder handy for important
thoughts, or a notepad near our bed. Isn't it interesting that our
gem thoughts occur often during daydreaming or preceding or
following sleep or meditation? This reminds us that the field never
sleeps; sleep belongs to the brain.
Transient thoughts, those most difficult to anchor, are of an
order beyond simple thoughts. The slippery ones can be kept intact
throughout several lifetimes by emotions which give them flavor
and persistence. These tell us about our inner self—a different
reality—the non-material reality o f the higher mind. Isn't it
interesting that our thoughts about physical reality are themselves
non-physical?
134 --- INFINITE MIND

Thoughts are events in the mind field that are available not
only to the consciousness of the creator, but also to other minds.
Does it alarm you to know that your very private thoughts are not
private, but field-public? As we can read others' minds, so too can
they read ours. But remember, this is a special situation. Since the
part o f our mind which reads others' minds is non-material, it
requires a higher reality to decode thought vibrations. I believe
that sleeping partners are aware of the other's thoughts. When one
is ill and the other healthy, the ill one should benefit; the other may
not. If there are discordant thoughts, particularly if these concern
each other, it is better to straighten these out or at least to clear up
the fields before trying to sleep.
I was involved with several dramatic experiences of telepathic
knowing and thought transferral. While I superficially
acknowledged that sometimes things happen that could only be
explained by telepathy, like most normal people, I laughed and did
not accept that reason. In my work as an academic kinesiologist, I
studied the postures, gestures, and movement of sub-cultures and
racial groups on every continent and taught university classes on
non-verbal communication. It was obvious that each group had its
unique patterns of movements, rituals, and the rhythms of speech,
and there were no universal gestures except gross facial reflexes
that were programmed by the nervous system. I discovered,
however, that the dominant pattern and location of a movement
did give me an initial impression which preceded verbal
communication. For example, the Asians had small, quick
movements, some smooth, some staccato, with accents upwards.
American Indians on reservations moved slowly with a sustained
disregard of time and a downward emphasis binding them to the
earth. The South Sea island peoples displayed a rhythmic,
undulating movement of their limbs, flowing with nature, with
gestures out and away from the body towards others and an
expanding world. The movements of tribal Africans incorporated
a great variety of slow and sustained to bursting and explosive
movements outward from the body—a pattern common to hunting
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 135

cultures.
These observations were so general that I did not explore
them further until I discovered energy fields. Here I conducted
specific laboratory studies of the Southwest American Indian Com
Dance, the Japanese ritual warrior dances, and African war dances.
By simultaneously comparing energy fields with the actions of
muscles, I was startled to find that each predicted the other. When
the movement was light, continuous and exaggerated in the arms
and neck with little movement in the legs and torso, those were the
same locations of the continuous low energy field recordings.
Both movement and energy field patterns coalesced during the
African and Japanese war dances with strong, sustained,
explosive, muscular activity and intense, very changeable field
patterns with sharp amplitudes and continuous strong ones.
My curiosity was so piqued, I asked one class to put on
blindfolds and sense the quality of movement (without music) of
these three cultural dances and improvisational movements
performed by three modem dancers with unique styles. Beyond
chance, the students predicted the quality of the movements and
the feeling states these communicated by sensing the field. These
experiences implied three things: one could sense the field without
seeing it; the field communicated some affect flavor; and the
communication effectiveness of ethnic, ritual movements and
individual dance styles were probably equal. While most people
accept that the quality of movement seems to carry messages, now
it appears that the unseen field carries the same non-verbal,
non-material message.
These findings were interesting, but still I was not inclined to
pursue the role o f thought in the transfer of field information. One
could hypothesize motion all the way upstream to a source in
thought, but that was a remote jump for my rational mind. Then I
experienced something I did not forget.
Some 20 years ago when I attended Brugh Joy's 17-day
workshop, I dramatically participated in the transfer of thought
exercises. The scientific part of me ruminated over it. I didn't just
136 --- INFINITE MIND

buy it; I dissected it. And it went like this:

On a Saturday evening we all started a three-day silent fast. I
was rooming with an attractive psychologist who was as curious
as I about what we would experience. To reduce material thought,
we were encouraged not to communicate in any way by gestures
or sign language—to try to rule out the existence of the other
person.
The first night my roommate and I quietly went to bed
without the usual patter, and with no recognition of each other. I
relished the period of silence to explore my inner states. But the
moment she turned out the light, she began to snore. This
surprised me, because she had not snored during previous nights;
but now this energetic young woman ripped and bucked stronger
than any large man I have ever heard. I was conditioned to be
sensitive to snoring because my father snored so loudly that he
was heard through doors and walls. During my childhood, I slept
with a pillow over my head to muffle the noise. Now my pleasant
thoughts of a quiet fast changed to annoying ones of a noisy
starvation. This irritation kept me awake. If I spoke to her, I would
break my silent pledge, and if I shook her, I would communicate
non-verbally. With frustration, I thought, "Dammit, Susie, stop
snoring!" My imagination disclosed my emotions when
immediately I saw a huge, black, snorting rhinoceros pawing the
ground. In Africa, I learned that they can hear, but they can't see.
Symbolically, I was hearing things while not seeing around the
problem.
Finally, to calm down, I went out onto the porch to smoke.
This was years ago, when I still smoked. As I closed the door,
Susie stopped snoring. That really alerted me, but I rationalized
that it was a coincidence, of course. When I finished the cigarette,
I was more relaxed and eager for sleep, but as I opened the door,
she started again. My analytical mind again insisted on a
coincidence. But still, I began to wonder if on a subconscious level
she had somehow heard the door opening. So outside I went while
I opened and shut the door, and she stopped. No longer a
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 137
coincidence, my anger was gone and my curiosity up. Strangely,
she was turned away from the door, yet somehow she knew when
I went out and when I was inside, unrelated to the door opening
and closing. Back in bed, I still wondered what was happening, but
decided I would consciously block out her noise.
Again, imagery disclosed what was going on with me, even if
I didn't know what was going on with her. Now I saw a big, black
hippopotamus stomping the ground. Hippopotami can see, but
they can't hear. In Africa, rhinos and hippos help alert each other.
For me, I was still angry but at least moving beyond hearing to a
deeper seeing stage. Despite my attempts, I was not successful at
blocking my hearing. In exasperation, I sent her a telepathic
thought: "Dear sweet and sensitive Susie, I love you, but you are
keeping me awake." She stopped snoring immediately. Now it was
quiet and I could sleep, but I was wide awake.
Something important was happening and I had to understand
it. For about five minutes, all was calm except my racing mind.
Then she started snoring again. Again, I thought non-verbally to
ask her to stop snoring. Each time she responded, and each time it
lasted a bit longer, but she always reverted to snoring. My mind
fought the possibility of conscious transfer of thought.
Eventually, I realized that I would be awake all night long,
telling her to stop snoring so that I could sleep. I somehow knew I
had to get the cooperation of her higher consciousness. Only then
did I realize that I already had access to her mind. Deliberately, I
sent a message. "Dear sensitive Susie, I charge your mind to
monitor your brain to keep you from snoring." And to my utter
surprise, she stopped snoring for that and all ensuing nights.
For one who was basically a disbeliever in such non-material
transfer of information, I was in awe, confused, and a bit anxious.
In some way I had intervened in the mind of another, had changed
a behavior by my willful thought. To me, that was exceedingly
dangerous. Seemingly from nowhere came the thought, the words,
"You will study the transfer of thought." In a heated dialogue, I
spontaneously answered, "Oh, no, I won't; that can be dangerous
138 --- INFINITE MIND

and manipulative." The other voice rejoined, "No, it's not

dangerous if you follow the divine law." Hastily, I countered with,
"But I don't know the divine law." The rebuttal came, "You will
know the divine law as you grow in consciousness." This was my
first conscious transfer of thought. The words and thoughts had
come from the higher reaches of my own mind. No outside force
had created them. But two levels o f consciousness, generally
separate, had fused.
By now I was convinced that thought was a major
communication system between self and others. I was shown the
power of thought when I was in Jordan just after Israel was
declared a nation. I was visiting a sabra, a native-born Israeli
woman, who was instrumental in starting neighborhood
conversations and social gatherings among the Jews and Arabs in
Israel in the 1970s. She had made friends with influential
Jordanians and Palestinians, whom she loved and admired, and she
was concerned about their peoples' struggle since Israel somewhat
controlled their lives. She wanted us to meet and to talk about their
concerns and my work.
On the appointed day, she secreted me on a circuitous route
so that we were not followed, across the pink and mauve rolling
hills of Judea, beyond the Jordan River to a small town outside the
then-Israeli border. The modest Arab house was in the center of a
small dust-swept village. The Arabs' greetings were spontaneously
warm. Assembled were about 15 ranking magistrates, lawyers,
judges, professors, and spiritual leaders, who all spoke English
fluently. For our meeting they had prepared a special lamb feast.
I was touched by their intelligent, sensitive discussion of their
concerns for both Jews and Arabs. When they asked me about my
work, I hesitated, expecting that they might doubt or be
disinterested. On the contrary, they totally understood about non­
verbal communication, emotions, lifehoods, healing and
spirituality, and although they had never heard of energy fields,
they did know about auras.
Our conversation lightened. I thought up an experiment to
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 139

give them an example of communication by field vibrations. One

man had brought his little son who was about nine months old. I
asked if the child had known any of these people before. When he
answered no, I asked if he would place his son in the middle of our
circle and then leave the room. I predicted that the child would
crawl to two men whom I had already observed had the highest
vibrating fields. The child did methodically crawl only to the two
men I had predicted. One accused me laughingly that Americans
always manipulate things.
When the father returned to the room, we praised his son's
brightness, to which he rejoined that his child cried a lot at night.
Then he complained that if he got up to comfort the child, the
child stopped crying but started again when he left. Remembering
my experience with snoring, I suggested that he send a telepathic
thought to his son broadcasting his love and intention to keep the
child warm and safe. With a quizzical expression, the father said
that he had done just that the night before, not really believing, but
it had worked. You see, he did know the answer; we only
confirmed it, and encouraged him to acknowledge it. Again, we all
too easily get caught in thought patterns that must be broken to
allow for new information.
Thoughts are created from transactions with other fields. We
do not think in, or from, a vacuum. Thought and mind have been
said to precede the existence of matter, to continue through matter,
and to exist at the termination of matter albeit in new forms. This
implies that thought and mind do not disintegrate because they are
not subject to physical laws. Matter is the denser of the vibrations,
mind the finer o f them. Mind should probably be reserved for
organisms of higher complexity, but not just humans.
One's thoughts, especially when amplified by intent or
emotion, leave an imprint on matter , that is, will directs all
energy. Previous thought forms may remain as fields in places
such as buildings, powerfully affecting susceptible people who
resonate with them. Actually, such thought forms can be removed
by powerful counter-thoughts or made impotent by persons who
140 --- INFINITE MIND

do not need to resonate with them. I believe fire can disintegrate

all existing thought forms, including the destructive ones.
I was invited to assist an exorcist on an Atlantic island where
a plantation farm was supposedly inhabited by entities. Now I
went with considerable doubt about exorcisms and the existence of
entities. The farmhouse was old and musty, full of clothes and
papers of a former owner who had been a slave on this sugar cane
plantation. The property had been given to the current owner's
grandfather by his English "master" when he was freed.
The first night I witnessed a Kabbala ceremony during which
black and white candles were burned and the house was cleansed
with fire pots. A ring of salt was placed into a long-handled tin
skillet, which was then doused with alcohol and set afire. We
moved about the rooms carrying these low burning pots, raising
and lowering them under tables and chairs until the small flame
flared. With these little flame explosions the exorcist exclaimed,
"We got another one!" She thought that we were burning up souls,
beings, entities.
Her comments startled me because I don't believe that a soul
can be burned up; it is forever. Theoretically, the fire flare came
from some form of organized energy; some strange attraction
created the unpredictable. I wondered about thought-form as a
source, but had no proof of my strange idea until the last two days
o f our work.
During the days that followed, the house smelled cleaner, the
windows had been opened, and gone were the depressed feelings
I first experienced—like the sadness at the Wailing Wall. I
believed that we had cleaned up some of the thoughts left there by
the slaves, but I wondered if the present owner, the grandson of
the slave, also had something to do with the so-called house
possession. He allowed me to help him open his mind into higher
consciousness to see if he had a part in creating the problem.
During this process, he remembered being a small boy in the
hospital with acute typhoid fever. His father, a reserved, educated
man, was separated from his mother, a warm and loving, more
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 141

primitive native woman, who stayed with him throughout his

illness. He remembers her wailing at the foot of his bed, "The
voodoo has got you." This probably made him susceptible to the
thought forms which remained in that farmhouse. Still, there was
only minimal proof of my beliefs until the last day.
To conclude our work, we checked out each room only to
sense a problem in one bedroom that the owner said was never
used. Actually, no one lived in the farmhouse—the owner used
part o f it as an office and a place to rest when he was at the
plantation. As we meditated in that room, we picked up new
thoughts of a woman's fear. When questioned, the laundry woman
admitted for the first time ironing in that room. She went there,
she said, because we had not "messed" with it. She was afraid she
would lose her job—something superstitious about the Kabbala
ritual and candles burning all day.
Now, the ideas all seemed to come together. The difficult
vibrations we experienced first in the house and later in the back
room were emotional thoughts to which the owner was
particularly susceptible from his boyhood hospital experience.
Thoughts are passed down to future generations not just by
picture, print or the spoken word, but by the strong thoughts
remaining in fields.
I remember my great-great-grandmother, an Irish Romany
Gypsy herbalist. Even as a child, I ran from her. Later, I learned
that she professed black magic. At that stage I couldn't describe
why, when all the other family members "bowed down" to her, I
got sharp pains in her presence and evaded her.
Thoughts, of course, are not material; they do not occupy
space with size and weight, but each has its own energy pattern.
The gross energy may resemble a whirlpool, an octopus, an arrow,
or a meandering stream. It has space-shape like words do. If its
emotional strength is sufficient, it will travel any distance like the
speed of light. If decoded correctly—or even incorrectly—there is
a transfer of information.
Transference implies a distance; somehow, thoughts get from
142 --- INFINITE MIND

here to there. When we try to understand how, we create a package

with our sensory telereceptors—our eyes, ears, and nose—with
their antennae which bring in information from a distance. In other
words, these sensory nerve endings put us in touch with distant
information. This is our way of materially reaching out for
information in the space that extends from our own bodies; but our
sensory apparatus can give us information about only local space,
not infinite space. Infinite space belongs to field transactions.
Local happenings perceived by ordinary awareness belong to the
senses and the brain, and they exhibit a superficial cause-and-
effect relationship. In telecommunications, unseen, unheard and
unsmelled essences come from infinite space where energy flows
back and forth in patterns of interrelationships.
Telepathic communications, however, often referred to as a
"sixth sense," are entirely different. These have nothing to do with
physical nerve endings; they are field transactions. As a result, I
find it so much easier to explain my ideas about telepathic
communication by lecture than by the written word because during
a lecture, I place my thoughts in my field and literally broadcast
them to my audience. Then, the audience has four methods of
"listening"—my posture, gestures, words, and thought fields.
In order to decode human thought vibrations, we must leave
behind the constructs of space and time as we know them. We
must enter the neutral state, neither past nor future, but now. We
must extend our consciousness to experience through fields
directly so we can grasp the inner content, the nuances of
information, as well as its external form. In extended energy field
recordings, we found dynamic shifts that may come from the
energy fluctuations of thought waves themselves. We know the
frequencies of thoughts are neither consistent nor constant; they
exist, cease to exist, and exist again, in a continuous on-and-off
pattern.
Transfer of thought implies a transaction. As one becomes
more skillful in tapping one's own field and projecting thoughts,
one is better able to decode rapidly the information from others'
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 143

fields. Such is the capacity of the great healers, lecturers,

clairvoyants, physicians, and spiritual leaders when they enter
expanded consciousness states.
On a more mundane level, one day in the laboratory we were
studying simple transfer of energy between two people lying with
the soles of their feet in contact. An aura reader reported a strange
pulsation in the field of the leg of one participant. Although the
other could not hear this comment, apparently the incoherent
energy passed into the other's leg, causing a major muscle spasm.
This was an energy transfer across space, through fields
interacting on a biological level.
Because we know how powerfully we communicate through
our thoughts, I suggest that we use them consciously and
creatively to get help and information when we need it. If we
actually believe that we can get what we ask for, we will. Many
times I came upon a research problem that I could not solve—I
had no idea even where to turn. Help from the usual sources was
inadequate. So I broadcast my need to the universe, asking for the
most knowledgeable people to assist me. They came, four of them,
a physicist, an engineer, a pharmacologist, and a chemist. Some
called almost immediately to ask what I wanted. Strangely, I didn't
even know them. Others asked to see me and didn't know why
until we met. A telepathic communication system had brought us
together.
Most thoughts never leave the auric field of their creator.
Only those firmly structured and vitalized by emotion have
sufficient power to be broadcast. This implies that random
thoughts go nowhere, but announces that the great thoughts of our
civilization are still available. We know that when emotions are
stirred up, earth fields react more potently. Plants respond
positively or negatively to strong emotions. All therapy and rituals
activate and release energy carrying both individual thoughts and
group beliefs. Some people with dynamic fields excel in
communicating thoughts very convincingly. We hail them as the
"great communicators."
144 --- INFINITE MIND

When we refer to the inner work requisite to evolution, we

mean communication with the self, or our higher mind. We cannot
escape the driving insistence of our own thoughts—our inner life.
And yet, such self-knowing does not come easily, for we must
focus attention on our own fleeting thoughts, decode these, and
then emotionally experience the content and our "now" reaction.
There are many techniques to assist us. Here is one that broke my
reserve.
At the same 17-day intensive workshop in the 1970s
(mentioned earlier), Brugh Joy told us to find an animate or
inanimate object to relate to. Because I like animals and grow
plants easily, I chose instead to commune with a rock, an inert
piece of matter. I was instructed to go into the desert and look for
a rock until one rock somehow chose me or spoke to me. To put it
mildly, this was a bit far-fetched for me, but I passively played the
game. I walked back and forth for a long time in the desert. No
rock chose me. No rock said, "I'm your rock." Finally, I had to
return to the retreat for lunch with no rock communicant, so I
decided to quickly make a choice. I would choose a rock, not it
me. Up loomed a big, nondescript one, to which I mumbled,
"You're my rock, whether you like it or not."
Later that afternoon, I returned down the same path to
commune with that special rock, complaining under my breath
about having to go back and talk with a dumb rock. I personalized
the rock to berate it as a dull, insensitive rock lying on a sandy
desert for all of its existence. What am I doing making a trip to talk
to you? And as I neared my nemesis rock, confronting it with,
"Who do you think you are?" I heard a wee voice saying, "I am a
rock and the source from which you will build your temple."
This only strengthened my defiance. I thought, how dare that
rock try to instruct me to build my temple—much too
metaphysical for me. I muttered, "Dumb old rock, what do you
know, you've never done anything in the world but lie there and
get moved around with the shifting sands." The answer came, "Of
all the things you know, you don't even know yourself."
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 145

My game plan was over, I was exposed. My deepest mind

level was communicating with my conscious level to tell me a
profound truth about myself—it was humbling and quieting. I sat
all afternoon on that rock, learning more about myself, my
unfinished business, feeling grateful for an experience with an
inert rock, which, of course, told me nothing, but allowed me to
project my hidden thoughts on to it so that I could become aware
on another level. This is a powerful technique for removing
barriers to self-communication.
Thought communication by group dreaming has become
popular throughout the country. Dream incubation with helpers
was started in 1970 by Henry Reid; now many thousands of people
are involved. To do this, a group of people concentrates its
dreaming on an individual and his problems, which are never
described to the dreamers. The next morning, when the group
members gather to recount their dreams, they are often surprised
to find similar details in their dreams, yet with their own self-
illuminating details.
Today there are extensive practical reasons for tapping into
universal thought. We know that the brain alone cannot absorb and
retain the current explosion of information. But telepathic methods
also provide simultaneous access to the unusual and great thoughts
of many people. Time has fostered the popularity of "channeling,"
with both its good and bad features. When psychics stress that all
information is available to everyone, and when they teach people
how to access it, channeling is constructive. The emphasis is
destructive when people sense its importance as a tool, but believe
that it belongs only to those who have some gift or quirk of birth.
Believing that all channeled information is the gospel truth is
another negative feature. In fact, a great deal of information
proffered by famous channels is from lower sources and lacks
wisdom.
The most disastrous aspect of channeling occurs when
individuals give over their power to guides and accept without
discrimination all information obtained as God-ordained. Many
146 --- INFINITE MIND

believe that guides choose us and actively communicate with us,

when instead we are the active agents—we have to reach the
vibrational level to tap this information; guides can't drop down to
contact us. The use of guides is merely a technique to help us get
our intellectual, rational mind out of the way so that universal
information is available (perhaps a step up from my rock
experience).
Yes, I have used guides. I have seen them, heard them, and
for a long time, was sure that they instructed me. I contacted
Einstein, Pythagoras, Aristotle and Christ, each time obtaining
unique information. It was fun to play the "guide game" and it
made interesting conversation, replacing what my psychiatrist and
I uncovered. Now it was my guides and me. I even got vignettes
that convinced me that I had directly contacted these people, not
just their thoughts. I saw Carl Jung at a magnificent waterfall—
before his interview with the British Broadcasting Company
disclosed to me that he lived beside, and spent much time on the
banks of, a fast-flowing stream.
When I contacted Einstein after his death, my questions were
creatively answered by graphic imagery. Some weeks later, a
physics professor told me that Einstein did not think in words, but
rather in images.
For a healing problem, I sought to contact Aesculapius, whom
I knew to be the father of medicine and the teacher of Hippocrates.
I received the information, but never saw or heard him. A Greek
philosopher friend told me that Aesculapius was a god, not a
human.
In these and many other instances, personal information about
the "guide" comes along with the requested information. We can
indeed tap into the vibratory fields of those who have crossed
over. But remember that channeling occurs at a soul level, not at
the level o f physical beings, and we must not become emotionally
dependent on a personality that doesn't exist on this level. But the
question arises: how can we see these guides? Remember, we
decode information visually, auditorily, and olfactorily, which
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 147
means that we can see, hear, or smell the information. While there
is some truth in this manner of decoding, we will progress faster
and farther if we don't dwell on the sensory process. It is not
important. At most, these experiences can be valuable to assure
you that you are never alone.
The children of Fatima and the recently publicized Chinese
children with highly developed sensing capacities have
encouraged the writing of many popular articles and books about
their predictions and feats of remote seeing. They are mentioned
here only because a special physics research team from the High
Energy Institute announced that these children could expose film
in a lightproof container. When channeling information, the
children seemed to emit light quanta and electrical waves that
could be picked up by special biodetectors. The exciting dramas
associated with these manifestations do not really concern me. The
value lies in the clear-cut examples of the human capacity to
experience higher consciousness.
Is there research evidence of telepathy? In a series of
controlled studies, the Russians demonstrated sending and
receiving specific factual information between two people over a
distance of hundreds of miles. Several of my laboratory staff were
able to predict the color changes of the vibrations radiating from a
subject's body seconds before the telemetered data appeared on an
oscilloscope. They were in an instrument room, unable to see the
subject, or hear the aura reader's report.
I recall when four researchers met to perform some energy
field experiments in an anechoic room (where there is no sound).
It was early morning. We were a bit bleary-eyed from lack of
sleep, having been awakened with a start at 1:45 a.m. We all
agreed something must have happened in the cosmosphere. Bob
Beck, a physicist, called one of his contacts in Washington, D.C.
to learn that the Russians had detonated an atomic bomb at that
time. All four of us had experienced the vibratory shock wave.
Elaborately controlled remote viewing experiences by Targ
and Harary reported in The M ind Race that individuals, while
148 --- INFINITE MIND

sitting quietly with their eyes closed, can, by using their psychic
abilities, accurately describe activities, events and geographic
locations all over the planet. We have discovered that when
individuals telepathically "saw," consciousness was expanded and
the mind-field vibrations increased.
Dunne and Bisaha found accuracies on precognitive viewing
or predicting target locations before these were chosen or known
were equal to accuracies where the locations were chosen at the
time o f telepathic viewing. Because of their strange findings, they
concluded that not all remote viewing is telepathic. I believe that
their interpretation is incorrect, that both precognitive and present
cognitive remote viewing are telepathic. When a person's sense of
time is lessened but not absent during higher consciousness,
remote viewing of current happenings can occur. However, when
a person loses the sense of time, during even higher altered states,
there is no now or later, no present or future, and field information
is not referenced to time. Here, it is as easy to predict future events
as present ones for the strange attractor fields already exist.
Actually, telepathy is a kind of intuition— a direct knowing of
distant facts devoid of time. The problem we mortals have in
understanding the experience of knowing before things happen
comes from our incomplete understanding of space-time. Einstein
commented that the distinction between past, present, and future
is an illusion—although a stubborn one.
As mentioned previously, growing trees communicate alarm
to like trees through their fields. Willow and maple trees that are
attacked by parasites seem able to communicate the news to
untouched trees nearby. When trees are attacked, they try to fight
off the parasite by changing their chemistry to make themselves
unpalatable. Research shows that the untouched trees get the
message that invaders are nearby; they respond by making the
same chemical changes.
I have surmised for some time that the primary method of
communication, the transference of information, is through the
field rather than by written or spoken word or gesture. I also
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 149

believe that the field carries as much general meaning as the more
ordinary modes of communication. Now there is evidence that
infants understand a great deal more than we believed they could,
even before they are able to speak and supposedly do not
understand the language. Hypnotic regression discloses that, at
birth, the child knows if he is a wanted child, and if his parents
approve of his particular sex. He comprehends the general nature
of his relationship with his family members and their attitudes.
This basic information is not necessarily communicated by word,
but by intent and thoughts available to him through fields from
which he interprets and understands the world.
Through mind-field work, I confirm what hypnotists have
stated for years. There is a close, two-way communication
between fetus and mother. More than a chemical relationship, the
mother's field carries specific information about her emotional
state and her experiences with pregnancy. In his book, The Secret
Life o f the Unborn Child, Vemy offers impressive evidence of this
communication. He stresses the value o f the father's presence
during the mother's pregnancy, and the importance of the mother's
emotional calmness and happiness in the process of bonding. He
encourages both parents to talk to the unborn about their love and
joy at the upcoming birth. Actually, talking to the baby through
the mother's tummy is appealing, but it is probably the thoughts
and not the words which are communicated. Only the thoughts are
necessary—the baby understands. Communication with the
unborn doesn't make sense if the mind is in a brain that is not yet
developed. But it makes perfect sense when we know that the
mind is non-material, and that it is perfectly developed when the
soul enters the fetus.
I have also learned that the field interactions of mother and
child carry both nourishing and destructive content. Back before
surgical abortions were legally available, some women resorted to
dangerous, violent attempts to abort the child they did not want.
Others wanted to abort, but for moral reasons or out of guilt, did
not attempt it. It was startling to bring to consciousness the
150 --- INFINITE MIND

detailed information stored in the mind-field of those who lived

through the attempted abortion, or in those where the thought
existed but was not attempted. When re-experiencing that fetal
state, the person's emotions are spontaneous, frequently
overwhelming, and often doubted. It has taken time to sort these
out and to discover the truth. Because of such discoveries, a new
"prenatal psychology" is emerging to handle emotional problems
that originated in utero.
Let me explore some other examples of communication
through fields. Vibrations of 16,000, 17,000, or 18,000 cycles per
second are frequencies which the normal ear can detect if the
amplitude is sufficiently great. Above these frequencies, we can
only experience through the field, but we cannot hear through the
ear. However, animals hear frequencies in much higher ranges.
For them, the field is their principal mode of communication.
They smell and hear vibrations with senses which are much more
acute, and they appear to be more aware of vibrational differences.
For example, camels smell a human's breath to make judgments.
Domestic animals, particularly cats, gravitate to persons with
higher vibratory fields—persons they don't know, even if these
persons dislike animals. Once a cat selects a person, it moves to
the chakra with the strongest vortex, the throat, abdomen or
crown, where they purr and knead with their paws.
Jacques Cousteau has reported that the same person has been
attacked by sharks off the beach in Australia, and again in France.
Do some human fields, then, attract and some repel sharks as in
the example of domestic animals? I would speculate that at the
time of an attack the victim is carrying either a dominant color, a
frequency pattern probably red and orange, biologically vitalizing,
or a fear reaction, either of which could stimulate sharks. If this
were true, one could counter the attack by altering the field, either
consciously or with instruments.
When watching trainers work with dolphins and seals, I
wondered how much of the learning resulted from the trainer's
intent and his thoughts, and how much from his gestures and
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 151

verbal commands. Marine research shows that dolphins and sharks

respond to frequencies up to 200,000 cycles per second, the same
range we recorded from human fields.
Once on an African safari, I watched lion prides, gorged from
food, lying on their backs as if asleep, oblivious to the zebra, their
chosen food, literally grazing all around them. Each knew of the
others' presence. Suddenly, the zebra became alerted. As a group,
they moved steadily but slowly away from the lions before they
broke into a gallop to escape. A few minutes after they had gone,
the lions awoke and started their hunting prowl. According to our
African naturalist, the lions had broadcast their intent to kill and
eat again even before they awoke. What a subtle agreement
between predator and prey!
When in San Diego, I often visit the famous Sea World
museum. Friends and I enjoy going to the building housing the
electric eels, piranha, and small predator fish. By placing our
hands near the individual tanks we are able to predict which fish
kill their prey by electric shock and which merely stun them. The
killers that shock have a sharp, sudden blast of electrical energy
from their bodies; those that stunned have a much smoother and
milder discharge. The electrical information had crossed space
from the fishes' field to the fields of our hands, telling us about the
fishes' behavior.
This idea of attraction and repulsion as a field communication
phenomenon emerged when I observed peddlers and hucksters
selling trinkets and cards at tourist sites around the world. If I am
on tour with others, I am not the woman they haggle. Once,
several women friends who were exasperated by being blocked
and hassled to buy, asked me how I protected myself. I hadn't
really thought about it, but told them that these men annoy me and
probably my field turns aggressively red and my thoughts carry
anger, telling them that I cannot be coerced. That night I gave
lessons in projecting color and thought into our fields. In the days
that followed, it worked wonders for all except one woman. She
said she couldn't get angry, that it wasn't spiritual. We didn't try to
152 --- INFINITE MIND

change her, but when passing the peddlers, we encircled her, and
she was left alone.
I have assisted numbers of women who have been raped or
sexually assaulted in this life to relive their fears by opening the
mind-field to their emotions. In eveiy instance, at the time of the
attack, their emotional field was weak and passive; it also carried
intense fear of their own anger and aggression. As society
becomes more open and helpful to these women, new information
surfaces. Rapists tell us that they intuitively know which women
are easy targets. They describe them as passive and fearful of
their own emotions—the same pattern I discovered in the victims.
I, like other women who have chosen to travel this globe and, of
necessity, frequently alone, have found ourselves at times in very
perilous situations. But I do not believe that it is luck that we have
never been attacked. I have found that, in these situations, pure,
unadulterated rage is the best protection. Running announces your
fear, and physical fighting, unless one is skilled in the martial
arts, is nearly worthless. Remember that, regardless of the
intensity of the attacker's motivation, their lives are not in danger
and ours may be. If the woman is emotionally free to express
powerful emotion, even rage, assailants will be shocked and
frightened, as are all people when they encounter a raw,
emotional display.
As evidence by the earlier examples, first research on field
communications should use animals and infant subjects because
they are more sensitive to field information. Also, the primacy and
complexity of verbal and non-verbal communication with older
children and adults cloud the experiments. Along this line, we
have already started a pilot study using sharks. First, we recorded
the field o f a mystic while she was in an altered state, unaware of
ordinary stimuli. Her field was quiet and strong, and her brain
wave was theta. Two healers who were able to focus their
thoughts broadcast specific thoughts via their field to the mystic
while she was in this altered state. The thoughts were commands
directed to the fish such as "come to me," "go away from me", or
"remain still," all action commands. These thoughts were
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 153

broadcast for a prescribed time in cadence with a flashing light.

Our data show that the mystic's field responded in sync with the
time cadence o f the thought. The computer printout showed that
her field activated while senders were thinking and quieted when
they stopped. Later, the senders thought about "anger and attack",
followed by "love and embrace"— emotions combined with
actions. All three fields responded identically and as thought
changed, so did the data from the senders and receiver. We have
secured the permission to play these data underwater to a captive
shark in a small pen at the Hebb Research Institute at San Diego.
The thought vibrations will be introduced into the tank by auditory
amplifiers while the action of the shark is monitored by video
camera. No people will be in the immediate environment during
the experiment, so as not to contaminate the thought field.
Studies o f children and persons with language differences
should follow. As we decode the primary information carried as
thought forms, we should find a new approach to linguistic
barriers from which a truly universal language could emerge.
Returning to telepathic knowing, psychics glean historical
information from the static fields of people's rings, clothing, and
possessions with varying degrees of credibility. If the owner is
present, the psychics say that reading inert objects is much easier
because of his active thoughts.

Just as technology stagnates without the stimulus of pure

research, so human life is condemned to routine existence without
the inspiration o f new ideas and the power of creative imagination.
Telepathic knowing is the essence of the creative act.
Have you ever had a great creative urge come over you? Or
felt a growing need to create something— something you never got
to? Perhaps you don't know what it is or why you are holding
back. Do you believe you will in time overcome these restrictions?
154 --- INFINITE MIND

Most of us don't, for we try many antidotes, generally the easier,

ineffective ones, like time management, studying "how-to's" and
learning new skills. Actually, the real problem is the emotional
barriers that we experience as we move into the creative
consciousness state.
There are no rules for creativity, but if there were one, it
would be to break the accepted rules for coping with material
problems and to find better, more imaginative ones. DeBono
popularized creative thinking as lateral thinking—thinking around
a problem and elaborating it in all possible ways before making a
commitment. Divergent thinking is fun and helpful, but to achieve
high level creative freedom, there is no substitute for emotional
liberty.
While we accept the value of self-communication in
understanding our loftier drives, we fail to realize that the energy
o f emotions directly activates creative potentials. Actually, the
deep ties of emotion and consciousness are so bound up with acts
o f creativity they cause either a creative flow or a blockage.
During strong emotional states, one moves rapidly away from
material things and body-self reality into higher consciousness, the
consciousness of the creative process and mysticism. Here, pent-
up emotions are directly released, while some of the energy fuels
creative acts and thoughts. If, however, these emotions are intense,
unsettling, and from an unconscious source, fears may arise to turn
one away, blocking creative action.
Affective emotional disturbances and mood disorders are
legion among highly creative individuals. Examples are the
manic-depressive behaviors of Isaac Newton, Ludwig von
Beethoven, Charles Dickens, and Vincent Van Gogh. These
disturbances stimulated a partial escape into an altered state. But a
restless drive remained when the escape was not total. Naturally,
they would gravitate to physical work or to creative acts in an
attempt to organize their struggle in an impersonal way.
Somehow, a neurotic drive coupled with an obsessive focus flames
an otherwise normal, pleasant, creative process.
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 155

An Iowa study of prestigious writers revealed that 80%

suffered severe depression or manic-depressive illness as
compared to 30% of the less creative population. Studies in France
and England corroborated these findings. Depression,
despondence, hypermanic states and blocks in creativity are all
restrictions to the coherent flow of emotions. When native people
repress their emotions, they consequently repress their creativity.
Remember, creativity springs from a life force. To create opens
one to the deepest levels of altered states. Of course, psychosis is
also an altered state. But if one can extend consciousness to
monitor a vastly greater stream of happenings in the world without
residual emotional turmoil, one does not get confused; clarity and
creativity become heightened. This is to say creativity does not
inevitably lead to psychopathology.
The remote senses of sight, hearing, and smell come closest
to bridging physical reality with the creative state. Material reality
dissolves into the real nature of the cosmos, a world of vibrating
energy fields and resonances. Transcendent states carry
experiences of worlds or tonal symbols, odors or essences, and
pictures or graphic shapes. When these experiences occur, humans
want to speak about them, write them, paint or compose them—to
give their experiences material reality. They want to manifest and
re-express their sensory perceptions flowing with telepathic ones.
Creativity is, after all, an aspect of telepathic knowing. This is a
process geared toward imagination and insight. What we have
called extrasensory might better be called "supersensory."
During my years of university teaching, I was aware that our
society and educational systems have helped to stifle creativity.
But my assignments were always creative for the students and for
me. I barely tolerated papers which regurgitated course
information. Rather, I wanted students to turn information around,
apply it creatively, and pose new questions about it. I wanted them
to be so involved with the information that it made a difference to
them. I spent a great deal of time stimulating and developing their
creative processes. Some students loved the excitement of these
156 --- INFINITE MIND

assignments; they were the creative ones who spawned unique

ideas. Unfortunately, many never did comprehend a creative
opportunity. They kept asking what I wanted, while bemoaning
not understanding.
The capacity to create remains a strong but unachieved
educational goal because we have sought creativity through
technique. But I believe that, rather than having mastered
technique, the most all-around successful creators who live
creative lives are those with the widest range of high and low
vibrations, or a complete spectrum without gaps, who live on the
ridge of chaos but rarely fall over the edge. Such people should be
able to survey freely, play the vibrational scales, and focus on any
part of the field at will. Perhaps education should try to soften the
creative block, by changing the vibratory field, and allowing
people to reclaim or reinstate their creativity, rather than trying to
teach creativity.
Creativity involves many levels of consciousness operating
simultaneously and freely. The mind is tapping into the higher
sources in the universe, while at the same time acquiring
information about the real world that is stored within the brain. In
short, creativity requires the recovery of information stored in the
brain or delivered by telepathic knowing and thought transference,
or a combination of the two. When you think an original thought
or you create a novel object, whether this sprang from an evolving
idea or from sudden insight, you have manipulated old
information in new ways. This is the highest level of thought.
While these created ideas may be simple, the creative thought
process was not. Skill in this process separates out the geniuses.
But the interesting thing about the creative process is that it occurs
when your mind is free and your brain is on automatic pilot,
idling, so to speak, doing routine reflex work. Mozart and
Buckminster Fuller created while walking. Darwin found the
origin of the species when he was riding in a coach. Descartes'
stimulus was intuitive dreams. The Egyptians incubated creative
dreams with ritual practices in sleep temples.
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 157
Analysis of the creative process reveals conscious and
unconscious stages. The preparatory stage requires motivation
followed by defining the task or envisioning the end product. This
is followed by reminiscing to bring to consciousness the memory
of all information and hunches one has about the subject—the
collection of raw ingredients before the slow cooking—where the
process is removed from conscious reality. One does not dwell
upon the process nor does one struggle to get answers. One trusts
the process of higher creative thought, accepting that low level
striving is not needed; involvement in routine tasks helps. The
brain wave will drift into alpha, an idling state, and free the mind
to soar. Some people use self-hypnosis ritually to calm the brain-
talk so that the mind-field can think. And, as the mind-field is
activated, telepathic knowing escalates, bringing in rich, unknown
information from other fields.
From new insights in evolutionary biology we learn that just
preceding the creation of new forms, there is a bewildering variety
of complexity. (Lewin). The same principle is at work in creative
thought. Most people are aware of the tensions, insecurities,
excitement or agitation they experience before they birth brave
new concepts. During these times the human field dramatically
increases in strength and frequency spectra, almost to the state of
chaos, before new and finer organization takes place. We can
hasten it with tolerant understanding, but the process stops only
with manifestation or temporary chaotic disintegration. This state
(before manifestation or disintegration) has been referred to as a
no-man's-land where chaos and stability pull in opposite
directions. It can be likened to the period when an element is
passing from a solid state to a gaseous one. It is a clear switch
from one state to another. In the metaphysical world, we refer to a
consciousness shift, or a phase transition in consciousness.
Probably during this period of instability, new information comes
to awareness, bringing a greater capacity to manipulate complex
information. The state of being at the edge of chaos describes an
eminently creative or universal consciousness where information
158 --- INFINITE MIND

seems to have a life of its own. (Lewin).

Strangely, as we grow older and obtain elaborate skills and
much more information to create from, our creativity lessens.
While some gifted, creatively free individuals increase in skill
with age, the shocking fact remains that statistically, creativity
decreases with age. Using the best prediction tests of creative
manipulation o f objects, children age five have 100% of their
creative capacity. By age seven their creativity has decreased 50%.
And by 40 years o f age, creativity is reduced to 1% of one's
capacity. In other words, the creative solutions to manipulating the
physical environment in our culture, and the creative use of
material information stored in the brain becomes thwarted with
age. I wonder if, as we age, we become less tolerant of the
feelings, instability and uncertainty of teetering on the creative
edge of chaos. It is interesting to note that IQ scores are not related
to creativity; children classified by current intellectual standards as
retarded were found to be normal or above normal in some
creative processes.
Descriptions of the different phases of creative states, such as
belittling logic, complete absorption, increased imagery, absence
o f judgment, courage to take a chance, withdrawal from external
realities, expanded perceptions, weakened body image boundaries,
time warp and spatial distortion, trusting open systems of insight,
intuition, imagination, also describe aspects of higher
consciousness. Everyone experiences the loss of the sense of time
and space during deep creative states—we become lost in thought.
During higher consciousness, when the mind-field is in touch with
other fields, thoughts are clear and coherent. Even manipulative
tasks seem to be done for us; there is no conscious struggle. The
"will" sets the course, then gets out of the driver's seat. We are
continuously amazed that the "I" doesn't seem to be involved. The
creative act is somehow illuminated when personality isn't.
Creativity is a magical synthesis. When we comprehend our
creative products, we may have difficulty understanding that they
happened so simply. Often we see mystical truths revealed. These
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 159

facts help us to recognize that a confusion exists between what our

culture stresses, that is, knowing factual information, being
practical, rational, and thinking logically and realistically, but not
strangely or innovatively, and the states necessary for living
creatively. To comply with cultural dictates demands that we
concentrate on brain activity, skirting the mind-field where
creativity resides.
A very successful physical therapist uses biofeedback training
to put patients into an alpha state so that they can image tissue
healing. He noted that when the brain reached an alpha wave, an
interactive state, the person's mental capabilities soared. They
thought clearly, learned biofeedback rapidly, created all manner of
unusual imagery, and they rapidly improved the injured or painful
area. When he asked me why, I remembered some earlier
laboratory findings. When the normal brain wave frequency
lowered to alpha or theta, imagination catapulted. Information
from other lifehoods surfaced and with it sometimes unusual
musical, artistic, or literary talent. The mind-field data became
stronger with a wider frequency range, as a repository of the soul's
learnings flooded the awareness.
Elmer Green of the Menninger Clinic performed an
interesting biofeedback study. Students were taken into an alpha
state and then into the deeper theta state, an even lower frequency
which supposedly carries a different information processing
capacity, one providing hypnogogic or creative imagery. In this
state, students had more vivid dreams, recalled early childhood
experiences, had archetypal imagery, and were more appreciative
of nature and beauty. Also in this state, they were better able to
take tests, supposedly because they were more intuitive. We in
educational circles have known that objective type tests are best
taken while using higher conscious thinking. Test takers who
know nothing about the subject frequently have higher test scores
than the informed student who uses rational selection.
When studies attribute creative thought to the increased alpha
waves that do in fact occur during creativity, they are in error. The
160 --- INFINITE MIND

alpha state coexists with creativity, but is not its cause. The alpha
state means that the brain is quiet, out of the way, so that the
mind-field can intuitively access facts and provide a broader
vision. It's interesting, however, that creative people under
ordinary circumstances create fewer alpha waves than non-
creative people, but when assigned a creative task, they produce
more than the non-creative ones. They move into higher
consciousness states and are more disturbed by strong sensory
stimuli like loud noises, bright lights, or strong odors.
Likewise, right hemisphere activity increases during
creativity. This hemisphere is a processing and retrieving center
for the spatial facts and relationships needed during the creative
process. But brain hemispheres do not cause creativity; at most,
they only support it.
In summary, during creative experiences one has freed a pari
o f the mind from handling the world, and has reached a
consciousness state where what the brain records and what the
field receives simultaneously flow back and forth—a brain/mind
coherency o f exceeding complexity. This is a new understanding
of the creative process.
The literature abounds with descriptions of the brain being an
active, self-organizing system of material information. I believe
that the brain is an elegant recognition and sorting instrument. But
the brain is brilliantly uncreative, as are people who process
information primarily via the brain. The brain is basically not a
creative, thinking machine; that is the mind-field which scans for
new information connections and does the lateral thinking. We
might say that we have a schizophrenic split, a one-sided model of
thought and creativity. When tied to the brain, there is no "depth
perception," only surface happenings.
Brahms described his exalted state when he composed music
as pure inspiration outside himself. This resembles a semi-trance
state, where one goes through a small door to an immense new
world. Trance falls into an autistic mode of thinking, where reality
orientation is suspended but not lost. To create, the mind must
 TELEPATHIC KNOWING: THE TRANSFER OF THOUGHT — 161
withdraw from the physical self and everyday concerns for a time
to focus forces. This is a tender, sensitive time when humans often
choose solitude, or seek to retreat into the wilderness to quiet the
brain in preparation for the mind's action. When intense creative
urges have taken their course, one generally wishes to return to
material reality.
Unfortunately, we have accepted the limitations of mind and
body set forth by psychology, physiology and medicine, and by
experience we have innately confirmed these norms of human
capacity. Let us not confuse the limitations of material flesh with
the infinite aspects o f the mind. Conscious transferring and
decoding of thought—what has occurred, what occurs, and what
is to occur, I believe is the capacity of all people who choose to be
truly human. Such an explanation of the creative nature of man
describes his ascent, his evolution.
 S '© ! C H A P T E R VI I I

EMOTIONS AND THE

MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE
The emotions associated with mystical experiences are those
which are embedded in the upper ranges of reality and awareness.
Mystical experiences differ from psychic ones. The former
involve information not available to ordinary senses; this
information has a spiritual quality connected with the soul,
providing access to the grand thoughts and wisdom of the ages.
Jung's ideas of the Self alluded to this mystical spark of the soul.
Psychic experiences, which are also beyond the scope of the five
senses, are restricted to information about the everyday existence
of the body and personality.
Mystical experience comes first in all creative endeavors, for
here we not only join the divine, but we access extremely high
levels of information. The rational and logical follows. To put it
another way, all great thoughts start mystically, to be later refined
practically.
Albert Einstein once said, "The most beautiful thing we can
experience is the mysterious. Recognition of the mystery of the
universe is the source of all true science. He to whom emotions are
a stranger, who can no longer pause to wonder and stand rapt in
awe is as good as dead; his eyes are closed." Einstein was alluding

162
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 163

to the metaphysical aspect of emotions.

William James stated that psychology is not a science, it is
only the hope of a science, and someday when we find the answers
these will probably be metaphysical in nature.
Nowhere in the scientific literature is there a comprehensive
model o f the role o f human emotions in higher consciousness.
There have been no systematic studies of human emotion
connected with mystical states.
I believe that in this, the last years of the 20th century, the
truly monumental discoveries about human behavior will be
information about the emotions associated with the profoundly
mystical qualities of the human psyche, the soul. And, I believe
that we will realize finally that the origin of all emotional
problems is embedded in mystical experiences. To probe these
sources, one must personally tap into awarenesses of the non-
rational nature of human beings. Pyschotherapists must envision
this realm of consciousness as essential to an expanded, orderly
relationship with self and the cosmic world. Too often, even today,
mystical experiences are considered emotional aberrations
primarily because they are divorced from ordinary reality. While
mystical states may exist with prolonged breaks in consciousness
creating emotional disturbances, mystical states are also absolutely
essential for comprehending life's profound meanings.
To some, acknowledging the mystical is to return to the
"outback" wilderness as though human development has passed
beyond such experiences. Although great philosophers have
always affirmed our mystical nature, at a practical level many of
us either mistrust or spontaneously deny our personal contacts
with it. Others acknowledge it, but call it "weird".
If we wish to be fully human, we must cultivate our mystical
nature. This requires re-examination of our beliefs about
emotions. During mystical experiences, emotions may be
repressed or more intense than in ordinary states. But new
information is revealed; subconscious thoughts connect with
superconscious ones, creating a flow that accesses wisdom and
164 — INFINITE MIND

destiny.
Socrates, many centuries ago, wisely stated: "To know thyself
will set you free." Surely we have made superficial strides in that
direction, but how sad it is that most of us still feel strangers to
ourselves. With all the many things our mind understands, "We
don't even know ourselves." Each judgment we make, each
concept o f truth that we embrace, each time we align with a cause,
we believe we must be correct because we have logically thought
out our positions. We operate as though we know our deep
motivations.
Actually, we generally communicate with self in a vacuum.
New age advice that one should transcend ego boundaries forgets
one important fact. Successful communication with all aspects of
self is a requisite to a satisfying interaction in an interplanetary
world. True self discovery means changing our inner input of
reality. The first necessary change lies within ourselves, with our
motivations, awarenesses, and goals. Of all our mental processes,
the most difficult is to entertain a sweeping new concept which, if
accepted as true, will cause us to junk a life of training and to
discard our framework for interpreting our experiences. But
whether we like it or not, the process is already in motion. Things
that worked in the past do not seem to work well anymore; cars
break down, equipment fails, institutions crumble, and useful
behavior patterns abort. When things were just a bit off, we
tolerated them—now we cannot.
Anyone who tries to direct his life toward divinity would
agree, I think, that to evolve is a seemingly impossible struggle.
Probably, there is not one person who has crossed major barriers
"on the path" who has not suffered. I believe that there is no easy
route if one focuses on the ultimate.
But I do know that evolution would be easier if we were
firmly in touch with our mystical nature. Too often, we relegate
mystical knowing to others, but do not accept it for ourselves. So
we pursue gurus, esoteric conferences, and psychic readings, or
even more intellectual facts, but without success or gratification.
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 165

Sorokin, at the Harvard Research Center for Creative

Altruism, became aware of two distinct patterns of creative growth
in superconsciousness from a study of life histories of the greats.
There were those who grew quietly and gracefully in altruism and
creativity, accessing the super-consciousness, and those who had
catastrophic or sharp conversions with drastic rearrangement of
egos, group affiliation, and values. The Buddha, St. Francis, St.
Paul, St. Augustine, St. Ignatius of Loyola, Gandhi and St.
Theresa, were some of this latter group.
Early in my M ind Mastery work, I discovered these same two
general categories without satisfactory explanation. But as I
observed the progress of dedicated people, the smooth, flowing,
graceful changes came to an abrupt halt. Such casual changes were
much too superficial when they plunged into another, deeper level.
Suddenly, fear overwhelmed them. But there were often greater
mystical knowing and more magnificent manifestations just
beyond. This was a major ecstatic transition, the intensity of which
often brought feelings of impending danger. Many reported
thinking that they were going to die. Although there are
similarities to the death of the physical body, these feelings are
like "death of the soul", a feeling of permanent death, a state of
absolute non-existence at all levels of awareness. Fear of death is
both material and metaphysical, but remember it is the self which
cares whether you physically live or die; the soul is not involved.
The soul is forever. Fully integrating these dichotomies, of course,
is easier intellectually than emotionally.
The real struggle we experience as we evolve comes from our
resistance to change, not just to move forward, but to take a new,
uncharted route. Change at this level disrupts ways of thinking,
making choices and behaving.
Some of us approach change with a strong will to move all
manner of obstacles, others with passive acceptance that divine
inspiration will remove all errors of thinking. It is correct; there
are some superficial habit patterns of eating and living as well as
bland beliefs that will change comfortably with more information
166 — INFINITE MIND

or a new focus. However, those behaviors with deep hidden

sources carry such strong emotional charges that they seemingly
resist all current psychotherapeutic techniques. These stubborn
blocks are more than reflexes or habits; they are agreements with
ourselves and with others about who we are and what we accept.
There are both active and acquiescent agreements that are beyond
our awareness which keep us from changing—again, agreements
we have made about what we believe about ourselves and the role
we accept within a family, community, or social group. When the
unnamed rules are accepted, there are no waves and little emotion,
often to the detriment of all involved. The agreements, although
reconfirmed in this life, stem from other lifehoods; they may
continue throughout the present lifetime unless, for example, one
or both people decide that some of their agreements are stifling
and that they must change.
Changing an agreement involves confronting one's own
feeling and those of others. I ask you to look at your relationships,
your agreements. Regardless of how comfortable or materially
satisfying these are, do these agreements honestly encourage the
evolution of both people? If the answer is "no", be careful not to
place the blame on the other person, rather than upon mutually
acknowledged agreements that may have served to protect both of
you from the trauma of deep change. Many people delay change
by rationalizing that the reason they do not confront is because
they don't want to hurt another person. If an agreement is
unsatisfactory to you, you must state and discuss it with whomever
it involves. Have you ever realized that you and some of your old
friends have few common interests? If they bore you, you
probably also bore them!
Generally, it is easier to make excuses and drop out quietly,
terminating the agreement to continue as close friends. I believe
this is acceptable with casual acquaintances, but with deep
commitments, it is unacceptable. Only by firmly acknowledging
your need for a new relationship or a better role, can you solidify
your change.
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 167

Many of you are acquainted with the philosophies of emotion

from research into sensation, perception, learning, brain-mind
relationships, psychopathology, and currently, the biochemistry of
neuropeptides and enzymes. What we forget is that we accept
some of these ideas as more significant than others because they
help to explain ourselves on levels that we can accept. They are
not too threatening. So the explanations that we like best, we
personalize. Psychology and psychotherapy, concerned with body
image, selfhood, personality, ego, id, superego, do not address
mystical experiences or higher states of consciousness. Instead,
they deal with ordinary awareness of the body, material world, and
relationships. Even the Freudian superego, the monitor of right
and wrong acting to control emotions, is connected to the material
world. All of these emotional concepts are time-space dimensions
of reality and do not help explain other realities.
We may possibly categorize emotions as higher or lower by
the vibrations we experience. With mystical thoughts, the field
vibrations are of high frequencies while the body processes are
slowed down. Contrary-wise, with unrepressed emotions
connected with material happenings, the quantity of
electromagnetic energy is increased but not its frequency, and the
physiology is stimulated throughout.
Further distinctions between mystical and material emotions
are based on the energy source and its supposed function. The
material level of emotions we say comes from what we view as
stress or harm to the physical body and ego. Its function is to
protect and embellish both. Mystical emotions are responsible for
protecting and elaborating the soul level of existence.
For example, pure emotions like love and joy lead to
behaviors which elaborate life— anger and fear to protective
behaviors which eliminate threat. Both of these occur regardless of
whether the source is mystical or material. Although happenings
in the material world can trigger all emotion, when probing
deeper, one finds the strongest emotional charges attached to
unresolved problems and attitudes at the soul's level—from
168 — INFINITE MIND

mystical knowing— from spiritual thoughts. Current

psychotherapy is based on the notion that the problem can be
understood and solved by uncovering material childhood
experiences. While some behaviors can be altered or at least the
emotions discharged, the urgency of the strong emotions is not
resolved; nor is there peace, emotional freedom, or spiritual
evolution by the old route.
Psychotherapists acknowledge the spiritual aspects of humans
by referring clients to religious counselors. While there are some
enlightened leaders, there is nothing in the training of priests,
ministers, or rabbis which prepares them to enter into and decode
the mystical experiences of people. Remember that many of the
mystical passages in the Bible were removed by Christians at the
Nicean Conference in Constantinople in the 12th century. The
portions retained in Catholic theology are rarely understood by
grass roots priests and only a special group of rabbis is trained in
the mystical Judaism of the Kabbala.
So where can we learn about emotions and the mystical
experiences? There is a growing body of narrative reports about
personal experiences in altered states. While some are probing,
many are so irrationally esoteric (they emanated from the
ungrounded state of the narrator) that these should not become a
part of a model of mystical aspirations. Myths and rituals handed
down in various cultures carry common themes, particularly
popular in today's spiritual milieu. A great many are beautiful and
enlightening, but when they contain so much symbolism that they
encourage an ungrounded state, they make little difference in
everyday living.
Universal mystical truths are also disclosed in archetypal
images that symbolically encourage many interpretations. From
my experience, archetypal symbolism is frequently used to explain
irrational emotions. It is so easy when working with archetypal
images to split in consciousness—to become ungrounded. When
the identification is held on the symbolic level, it is difficult to
incorporate these mystical experiences into one's life. But if we
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 169

allow ourselves to witness the mystical part of our being while

maintaining a realistic grounded orientation, we can tap
simultaneously into the personal and the universal information.
In deep mystical states one often experiences contrasting
ecstasy and fear. While most humans like joy, ecstasy is
something else— it carries an overwhelming charge. One does not
know what to think or what to do with it. An overpowering fear
also makes no logical sense, yet its presence cries out for answers.
Sometimes the person has fleeting thoughts that he "may be
going off the deep end" and not coming back. This protective
reaction wisely keeps one from moving too quickly. It is possible,
but not too probable, that an insane episode could result. If you
don't accept insanity as a satisfactory escape, it will not occur.
Insanity is a human experience. Except in the case of disease,
animals in the wild are not insane and apparently experience no
mental illness. Man can parry "madness" by developing realistic
ways of handling his overwhelming visionary, illusionary, and
spiritual experiences.
During mystical reaching, there may be intense anger at
others who have denied you the right to feel divine. Frequently,
there is also massive anger against God, who has not saved you
from all manner of trauma or made you perfect.
In amnesia, an altered state, when one leaves the time-space
reality, the brain no longer records the experience. It is idling with
a theta wave. The mind-field, on the other hand, is in massive
fluctuation. This is where memories of these mystical experiences
are stored, where they constantly influence our material behavior
without giving us access to the so-called files.
Recovery of these experiences comes only as one repeats the
initial altered states. The closest to this in modem psychotherapy
is hypnotherapy, although most hypnotherapists interpret findings
on a material body-ego level, not on a soul level.
The literature does not clearly differentiate mystical states in
particular from altered states in general. Altered, to me, means
ungrounded, not Earth-oriented; it does not imply connection to
170 — INFINITE MIND

the soul level. Generally, it means adrift and floating somewhere

in between.
Research has shown that during altered states the sensory
threshold to subliminal or marginal stimuli is lowered. Individuals
respond more strongly to minimal intensity stimulation during
altered states. But because they are disconnected from everyday
reality, they may not experience pain. In most altered states, the
range of environmental stimuli one responds to is constricted and
the awareness may be focused upon a narrow circle of ideas.
Thinking is generally subjective, egocentric, with strong precepts
and no concepts. Everything may seem to be connected with
everything else, but not in a rational, material manner. This is not
true with mystical, flowing, complex states where information is
quickly integrated.
We must understand that the current time-space ideas about
emotions leave much unexplained. While these beliefs are not
wrong, they are gravely incomplete.
My basic information about emotion comes from graduate
academic training in psychology and from a long and "successful"
psychoanalysis by a member of the American Psychoanalytic
Society. Neither o f these prepared me for mystical things.
Furthermore, a lifetime of participation in Christian churches as a
vestry member, and concerted study o f the Bible and religions
only informed me about man's experiences with the divine. The
deep understanding about mysticism and emotion came during my
own evolutionary process, and when I recovered lifehoods and
comprehended my divine nature.
I acknowledge how difficult this is. As a result of my own
personal experiences, my mystical capabilities increased, allowing
me to enter the mind-fields of others and to read deep thoughts. I
developed techniques o f opening the mind-field to recover the
unfinished business of lifehoods that were strongly affecting the
current life.
During long sessions of mystical probing, I learned more
about the soul's struggle, the universal decisions that are again
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 171

replicated in the current life. My goal was to empower the

individual with profound mystical understanding and to help him
experience spiritual light. As a result of our work, no one ever left
the same as he came, and always there was a glimmer of beauty,
if not a full view of the glory of the human soul. The change is
never complete with such insight, but a new course can be
set—amazingly, many of the material problems lose their luster.
Because I am a teacher and counselor, I believe that
information alone will not bring change, and so I refuse to give
psychic readings. I learned that only through the insight available
by emotionally reexperiencing past lifehoods could one remove
the blocks to knowing one's divine nature. The person had to
actively recover his or her own information.
During the course o f 30 years, hundreds of successful
professionals have given me the opportunity to assist them, to
penetrate their mind-fields and recover this unfinished business. I
am not interested in who you were in another life, for that lies in
the ego, physical, emotional level, but rather, how you lived, what
mystical experiences you had, and what you did with these. For
these constitute the attitudes you hold today. This is at the soul
level of change. (See Chapter II, "Spirituality: The Evolutionary
Goal", and Chapter IX, "Lifehoods: The Hidden Agenda".)
Now we come to the question: what is emotion, anyway?
Academic definitions of emotion have yielded two approaches:
emotion as experience, and emotion as physiological process.
Neither description fits the discussion o f emotions in higher
awareness or mystical states. Only a field concept fills the bill, as
elaborated in Chapter IV. Here the human mind is envisioned as
an energy field organized by emotion, where emotion is an
agitation, a disturbance in the quality of flow of energy occurring
as a result of field transaction. Physiological phenomena are
secondary responses. Many aspects o f emotion we don't
understand, but we do know that all human experiences are created
by, stem from, and are embedded in the energetic part of the
energy field we describe as emotions. Emotion is aroused energy,
172 — INFINITE MIND

a human power source. Although we have never defined emotion

adequately, we know that without some level of energy arousal
from emotion, there is no life. Most of us acknowledge emotion
when something hurts, is grand, strange, or huge. Like all
experiences, emotions have gradations which have to do with
source and how the individual interprets and uses this energy. It is
little wonder that we experience and interpret emotions
differently.
You may wonder, if one does not experience emotion, does it
exist? My answer is, if there is a field disturbance which one
experiences with feelings, there is emotion. But emotional energy
can activate behavior and create bodily happenings without
feelings. This is the common state with mystical denial.
Wilhelm Reich's classification of emotion into primary/
rational and secondary/irrational, has encouraged unsatisfactory
conclusions. When we do not understand their source, we label
emotions irrational. Actually, there are no irrational emotions; it is
only how we use them that is sometimes irrational.
Let me summarize: emotion is an energetic agitation or
condition, first in the field, and then in the body and awareness. It
has a source, a response, and an interpretation in the continuum of
consciousness. If focused in the time-space domain, the concern is
with body and self. If out of time and in a mystical state, its
concern is the soul.
There is an interesting, yet confusing, relationship between
the two emotional sources. If the emotional agitation comes from
the soul and cannot be handled, solved or dissipated, the energy
filters down to material awareness where it creates all manner of
social and sexual problems. Contrariwise, if the source is here and
now, strongly tied to life, death or intense pain, the agitation may
be so great that it cannot be integrated, acted upon, or resolved.
The emotional force itself will catapult the person's awareness to
an altered state where there is no selfhood, no body, and therefore,
no pain. Here one is beyond ego. Immediate problems dissipate,
one is at peace temporarily on the personality level, although
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 173

behavior is still being influenced. Here the goal of emotion is to

maintain the integrity of the field rather than that of the dense
body. If emotions are experienced, they are connected to mystical,
spiritual, or psychic things and everyday "real" experiences are
absent.
Although the true source of traumatic experiences may be in
this life's experiences, the altered state which results from major
shock cloisters us from the memory. It creates a schism in reality.
Remember, when reality changes, and with it awareness,
emotional energy is not lost. Some is abated in the shift; the
remainder becomes associated with the soul. Now it is ego-less.
To express it another way, strong emotions which have no
outlet or solution are most often sidetracked by a shift in reality.
In other words, emotion changes reality, and reality can change
emotional experiences.
Here is a dramatic example of a person who recovered
physical capacities by reexperiencing a mystical state. I had met
socially an anesthesiologist who asked me about my
communication with comatose patients to bring them back to
consciousness. Several years later, he called me to tell me that his
teen-aged son had been in a major automobile accident with
extensive head trauma and surgery. He had been in an extended
coma ever since. I encouraged the parents to talk to their son
regularly as though he could hear, because he could hear, only he
couldn't respond. I suggested they encourage his high school
friends to tell him what was going on with them—to keep him in
touch with the world he had lost. They were to have music played
in his room during the daytime, also to stimulate material
awareness. He came out of the coma in several months, but this
brilliant student, an athlete and school leader, was now dull; he
couldn't remember. The "light" seemed to have gone out. His
speech and minor coordination were affected. To his parents'
query about what I could do about it, my answer was clear. If it is
neurological destruction, I can do nothing. If it is psychic shock, I
may be able to help. Since there was no way of knowing the cause,
174 — INFINITE MIND

I chose to take him into higher consciousness to try and recover

what happened during the accident and surgery.
In sessions lasting for six hours, he recovered all the
information of what had taken place, from before the collision to
his removal from the car, the trip to the hospital, the surgeons, and
his own worried father. He remembered his rage at surgeons who
did not ask his permission to "saw" into his brain. Now surgeons
don't generally ask that question of people in comas. Apparently
they should, because he understood and wanted to be considered,
despite the fact he could not respond with words. He complained
of tremendous pain, although brains are not supposed to have
sensory nerve endings for recording pain, and likewise, in comas
we are not supposed to feel pain. (Yet we have discovered in the
laboratory that pain occurs first in the field. In altered states, pain
in the field is often experienced, not pain in the physical body.)
This also brought him more anger because the doctors did not stop
his pain. When the brain surgery was over and he was so seriously
ill that he thought he might not live, he talked to God. At this
stage, he relived the intense humbling emotions of having a direct
line to God, one he had never experienced before. God told him he
would live "if your will is strong enough." If not, he would die.
These words did not mean anything to him then.
During his long intensive care, his family and a few friends
came for brief visits. His mother, a loving but not particularly
spontaneous woman, wept and emotionally told him how much
she loved him. His friends expressed how much they needed and
missed him. They were openly emotional at seeing this stunning
young man inert with a swollen, distorted face, and still
unconscious. But because they thought he was not conscious and
would never know, they were free to show their emotional loss. It
was these many intense emotional expressions that tipped the
scale and gave him "a will to live." When he knew that others
cared about him that much, he wanted to recover and live. Because
he relived these mystical states and recovered the emotional
information held there, his mind cleared, the slowness left, and his
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 175

speech returned to normal. Now he is a bright college graduate and

one with psychic abilities.
I would like to return here to the intense feelings of ecstasy
and fear which often accompany mystical states. You may recall
when such feelings, sometimes accompanied by imagery of
vicious animals, distorted gargoyles, conquering fire and blinding
light upset your meditation, compelling you to return suddenly to
everyday concerns. When you sought explanations from some
meditation teachers, out of their own fears, they cautioned you not
to proceed into this "darkness of the soul."
Psychologists frequently allude to the dark places, the demons
of the human soul. Accounts and explanations of inhuman
possessions and acts from earlier incarnations appear in the New
Age and esoteric literature. It is unfortunate to run from these
symptoms. If one gently takes the bull by the horns—brings these
projected images into self and owns them—rage and anger occur
and the fear is gone. Now one can begin to understand the source
of these uncomfortable emotions. Fear always protects us from
strong emotions, and when coupled with ugly images, their power
encourages us all the more to "run" from them.
In my own and my student's evolution, fear is always present,
but diabolic thoughts are not inevitable. Let me assure you that
these seemingly insurmountable barriers are grossly and
disastrously inflated. These so-called horrors of the emotions are
machinations created by the mind to protect us from the unknown,
and ultimately from change. There is no metaphysical reality in
these horror images.
Because I understand the relationship between fear and
mystical experiences, I refuse to empower these defenses. It is best
to face them squarely as distorted and denied emotions. Rather
than encourage people to work through so-called "dark spots," I
ask them if they are willing to realize that they are defenses, and
then give them up, because they are not the real problem. People
are amazed at how rapidly the darkness turns to light.
Some psychics believe that the incidence of black magic and
176 — INFINITE MIND

Satan worship is increasing, although I have seen no compelling

evidence to support that. But I have some experiences that could
allay inordinate concerns. Of course, black magic and Satan
worship exist. We need not fear sacrificial animal killings, as
reported in southern Texas, unless we personally gravitate toward
such distorted behaviors. I have seen the spontaneous voodoo
sacrifices of animals in Haiti and I was tempted to observe the
nightly black magic rituals on the beaches of Rio. Their so-called
diabolical powers could not have affected me, but the practitioners
would have known that I was not a fellow traveler, and my body
might not have fared as well.
Years ago, when Rosalyn Bruyere and I were lecturing at the
University of California at Santa Barbara, I was approached by an
aggressive, unkempt young woman demanding an appointment. I
was so uncomfortable that I literally backed away from her,
evading any further relationship—not my usual pattern at all. I
mumbled some excuse about not having my datebook, suggesting
that she call me at my laboratory, all the while hoping that she
wouldn't.
When our lectures were finished, Rosalyn congratulated me
on handling that "black magic" woman. Apparently, this woman's
aura was the same as a professed black magic group she had
observed at other times. I didn't see auras then, but I sensed a
weak, yet angry, field and that she definitely wanted something
from me. Rosalyn said that such people seek out persons with vital
life forces because they themselves lack the biologically
stimulating red frequencies. I immediately flashed back to my
"black" great-great-grandmother, a Romany Gypsy herbalist, who
chased me as a small child to hold and crush me. My father had
explained that she saw black witches and goblin-like creatures.
When I understood my anxiety, I pursued the young woman and
gave her an appointment, realizing that she was no threat to me,
and perhaps I could help her. Unfortunately for both of us, she did
not keep the appointment.
Later a local minister sent me a former parishioner who had
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 177
joined a Satan worship group. Admittedly, she was only partially
converted or she would not have confided in the minister nor
come to me. By opening her mind-field, we uncovered her
extreme anger at God—anger she had not consciously known.
She felt that God had abandoned her when she was unjustly
accused o f stealing and was flogged to death. In that lifetime, she
was out to get God, using Satan as her weapon. She joined a
group which performed rituals in which Satan could express her
defiance and anger at God. The members of this group could
vicariously vent their anger without understanding or taking
responsibility.
Furthermore, we discovered that in other lifetimes she had
been a mystic seer who was punished and killed for her skills. She
discovered that she had set up these horrible black magic scen­
arios to insure her feelings of inadequacy. Now she turned her
anger on the Satan group, vowing to destroy them. I encouraged
her to work with her new insights to change herself. The group
had actually served her need to become aware of her anger at
God, her "hidden agenda." I belief that this anger at God is almost
always the key motivation for participating in Satan worship.
We have simply invested too much emotional energy in
protecting ourselves from imagined threats. How strange it is to
employ evil thought to protect us from our greatness, to keep
ourselves from the knowledge of the God within us. When people
decide to give up these defenses, the change they experience is a
true metamorphosis o f the type Sorokin observed in the lives of
those who suffered and then manifested their gifts on the grandest
scale.
Reports in the literature o f individuals experiencing states of
being "Christed" or "sainted" are often interpreted as psycho-
pathological or at least evidence o f psychotic episodes. Of course,
if the individual cannot differentiate these experiences and the
physical realities o f being a saint, then there is aberration. But to
reach the level of vibrations where one experiences his divine
simultaneously with his mortal nature is a goal of evolution. This
state illuminates our unfinished business of lifehoods, the source
178 — INFINITE MIND

o f all deep problems, and the reason for this particular

reincarnation. I believe that each soul yearns and has the capacity
for such ascendance. All truly "sainted" and "Christed" beings
have come to these experiences and have incorporated them into
their lives, allowing acts of greatness.
It seems apparent that most people will not reach this goal in
this lifehood, but during the Aquarian Age, more people will be
willing to suffer the pain, endure the training, and make the
changes—probably more than at any other time in history. More
people will become visionaries, as wise as the sages, and many
will manifest as divine healers. I do know that when we compare
ourselves to the giants of our civilization, the ones we call masters,
most of us feel inferior. Recall that we have imbued Pythagoras,
Newton, Raphael, Shakespeare, and Einstein with greatness for
their discoveries, creations, and intellectual capabilities, and
others, such as St. Paul, Jacob, Abraham, and Gandhi for their
wisdom and divine power. All of these people used mystical
consciousness to tap into universal information, to use it in a
disciplined way, and then to share with the world.
If we acknowledge that their true gift was divine, we must
begin to accept that it is also yours and mine if our souls choose to
honor its divinity. We can no longer entertain beliefs that we are
unworthy and inadequate, only then can the soul recognize that it
cannot be held back by negative thoughts or ego concerns. The
ego remains strong and secure but humble, with the strength of
this knowing.
I encourage you to find and to turn this comer. When you do,
a new awareness appears. Everyday life starts to improve. There is
a temptation to dwell upon these changes and to relate them to
others excitedly. Actually, the improvements have occurred
because you are getting out of your own way. Take time to enjoy
your own change, even if it also seems only a tentative disruption
of your old pattern of struggle.
But don't delay too long in reminiscence. Other subtle
changes will begin to reach your awareness. You may know about
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 179

future events or your wish may cause things to happen without

effort. Others seek your company, want to talk with you, want to
share deeper parts of themselves without being asked. Things
seem good—at times, strange. You may sleep less or find yourself
daydreaming or meditating more.
You may have periods of ungroundedness and get cold feet as
your awareness drifts. Tolerate this latter state, but don't let it
become a habit. If you remain grounded, with one foot in ordinary
reality, you may still experience some emotional instability and
sudden mood changes. Observe these, but don't get lost in them. In
fact, simply acknowledge, but don't dwell upon them. This is a
part of deeper change.
You may find that your experiences are more intense: you
may dislike things more, experience greater fear, stronger joy, and
more peak experiences. Auditory sensations with higher pitch
sounds and music often accompany vivid imagery. Historical
spiritual figures may appear.
Situations which formerly brought empathy are now super­
charged. You will wonder what is happening and if it will last.
Spiritual feelings will seem to come from nowhere as though old
triggers such as church ritual, liturgical music, biblical verse and
poetry all simultaneously impinge upon you. Even your body
enlivens in a way that no drug or physical stimulant could effect.
You are in motion, vibrating, with few physical barriers. Your
sensory acuity is so heightened, that you can touch all thought to
know all things.
From a psychiatric and material reality, these are
hallucinations. When we clearly understand hallucinations, I
suspect we will discover that they play an intermediary role
between normal sensory perception and mystical knowing. From
an expanded awareness of full consciousness, most of these so-
called hallucinations will become normal, routine experiences.
If you feel bombarded with hyperstrong sensations, know that
these conditions are not abnormal, just unusually new for you.
They are requisite to deeper change. In the physical world, this
180 — INFINITE MIND

state of vibration is called chaos— a condition appearing to be

disorganized or entropic because it is new and unknown. Like
chaos, this heralds a new level of organization so refined that the
human mind has not yet been able to reach a level of
reorganization that can incorporate its perfection.
I have been given the great opportunity of helping to support
and guide many others in ascending this rocky, spiritual path. I
have learned that although the work is primarily metaphysical in
nature, there are some fundamental conditions that are essential to
progress. The individual must have developed a relatively secure
ego and selfhood and have reached some degree of success and
satisfaction in society. There must be a sufficient degree of
comfort with one's relationships and there must be economic
security to satisfy deep needs and average human wants.
Those whose lives have been basically unsuccessful can, of
course, progress slowly, but not on the level I am describing. Until
these basic physical and psychological requirements are met, one's
energy is too diffuse and dissipated. There is not sufficient self-
strength to protect one from psychic escape when internal
pressures are released into the awareness. There must also be
strength of will to direct the energy and a true sense of self-worth
to support it.
When people are still operating from a narrow consciousness
and emphasizing physical existence, the energy from unresolved
spiritual problems is truncated and leads to material problems.
Since the source is not material, these perceived problems persist.
Intuitively list your daily problems. Which of these, with some
effort, do you want to handle immediately? Which o f the
remaining ones are you so sick of that you are going to start giving
them up by denying them front stage? Now you will find that you
have fewer problems. If those remaining are material problems,
devote just half as much energy to them. This way you can double
your energy for solving spiritual problems. This is a sensible
approach when we remember that we cannot explain most
emotional disturbances rationally or work them out intellectually.
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 181

Let us examine some widespread beliefs, which many of us

have accepted, that are first line barriers to emotional freedom.
Evaluate your stand on these. Have you bought the idea that
happiness and bliss are the ultimate goals of everyday life? If you
have, you will continue seeking superficial pleasures, all short­
lived and incomplete. I believe the soul's goal is to evolve to the
highest level, spiritually, emotionally, intellectually, and
physically—this requires the full development of one's mystical
nature. Happiness and bliss should not be the goal. These will
come anyway as a result of successful evolution.
Another way to avoid emotional freedom is to blame one's
culture. Ethnospiritual beliefs and customs create a framework for
our lives, which do present powerful dictates, but these do not
cause our problems. We know this because when customs change,
our so-called problems change, but they don't go away. No
culture can dictate beliefs unless we "buy" them, and unless we
neurotically need them. Cultural beliefs exist to perpetuate the
society, but more importantly, at another level, to protect us from
our grandest emotions. This handicaps us. When people covet
cultural beliefs as immutable God-ordained laws, they stifle their
spiritual growth. Furthermore, they accept these dictates as
"truths" instead o f just as guidelines. In other words, what looks
ideal has destructive potential if it encourages us to remain on
ordinary human levels, ignoring the full range of mystical
wisdom and the spiritual power which enables us to evolve and
advance our civilization.
We have also abdicated personal responsibility to
government bureaucracy, to civil laws which are frequently out of
tune with higher truths. Think of all the practices destructive to
our world that are protected by law. While we acknowledge how
bad things are, we must be reminded that we are on the frontier of
magnanimous change. Only by reaching depths of personal and
group despair are we willing to reconstruct our unacceptable
corporate and personal beliefs and practices.
We still have not comprehended that part of self which is so
182 — INFINITE A m D

luminescent, so grandly spiritual. To recognize that we can do

almost anything, that we have command, that we are larger,
stronger, higher, and greater than we have ever known looks ideal.
So it seems incomprehensible that these could be miserable
burdens—but they are. The problem lies in the deep emotions we
uncover when we remember the times when we gladly played a
lesser role out of fear of overwhelmingly great thoughts and plans.
The dissatisfied ranks are growing. More and more of us want
only the clearest, most harmonic total world. And we do know
how to experience our own divine love and joy which nourishes
all people and our planet as well. Our lives can turn around and
turn around immediately. This is the overriding charge of the
future.
So how do we get there? There are no detailed charts, but
there are sure guidelines. We must be willing to discipline
ourselves to avoid tangents and being lured by incomplete
solutions. Urgency to "get through it" is legion, as though this is a
trip from one place to another on a well-known path—going the
distance but remaining the same. Human nature seems eager to be
rid of annoyances in order to reap rewards, but without having to
change. But change is essential. So often one hears that the
problem lies in one's relationship to the world. But to change how
we interact with the world is a simple approach that won't work. It
shouldn't be our focus. What must change is our relationship to
ourselves—our awareness, motivation, and behavior so that all
levels of consciousness are in harmony.
Some people equate this kind of change with giving up their
humanness, maintaining that humanness is too important and
satisfying to destroy. Of course, this is incorrect thinking.
Actually, humanness begins to take on a new meaning. It is true
that less energy will be spent on the material aspects of existence
and more upon the metaphysical, spiritual components. When
awareness is complete, emotional energy flows, nourishing the
mind and feeding the body with the complete realm of feelings
and abilities.
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 183

Let me highlight some other widely held emotional beliefs

that often become barriers. One is the emphasis upon the "lower
self and the negative emotions," that is, aggression, rage, and
anger, a common emphasis in the psychological literature. The
Noetic Institute's study o f positive emotions says that the very
process one goes through to access the higher emotions may also
reap the lower ones, revealing the less worthy side of oneself.
This makes the discernment of inner experience problematic, as it
has been for thousands of years. While discovering potentially
destructive aspects of ourselves is possible, it must be
deemphasized for two reasons. The "unworthy" sides of self in no
way are built into the nature of humanness; these are programmed
and perpetuated by us. Those who feel the so-called negative
emotions are individuals who enjoy self-deprecating groveling. I
ask such people if they like these unpleasant emotions. If they do,
I must help them to comprehend that these are simply defenses.
On the other hand, if they don't enjoy these feelings or destructive
urges, then I ask if they are ready to give these up, recognizing
that they are harmful baggage.
Here are some clues for becoming self-responsible and for
better solving your own problems. Suppose you didn't have your
problems or could replace them with others, what would you
choose? Take some time to ponder this—make a list. See if your
new choices resemble the old ones, also just material needs and
wants, and the same old inadequacies.
Dependency is another barrier to emotional freedom. In order
to be freely, securely dependent, one must be first independent.
Dependency should come from choice, not from compulsion. The
poet Kahlil Gibran wisely said that unless one is independent, one
cannot truly love—and one has little to offer to a love relationship.
Think how appealing we usually find two people who cannot
live without each other, as though this is a sign of true love.
Actually, in this situation each gives away his power and choices.
As one clings, one diminishes his capacity to exude a loving field.
Personal growth is restricted and at the deepest level there is
184 — INFINITE MIND

resentment. Gibran reminds us that lust, not love, is expressed in

dependency that must possess and feed upon another, even as it
offers itself to the existence it claims.
As I mentioned earlier, the importance of guides for
navigating this path is often taken for granted. We are taught to
call upon guides and to trust them as our special "all wise" gurus.
Custom holds that a guide was chosen for you in some divine way
to move you through the invariable trials along the path to
consciousness; with gratitude, you are asked to humbly accept this
assignment. Because the guide is deemed to be the only mystical
being who can guide you, he takes on major proportions.
In much the same way, our educational system tells us that
wisdom is imparted and information purveyed only from the
writings and direct teachings of other people, as though our mind
is an open, empty vessel waiting to be filled. We are not taught
that we, too, have the ability to tap into and decode the universal
storehouse of information in the cosmic field—that all great
thoughts can be ours if we choose.
So, we learn to listen and heed teachers' or guides' directions,
for they are always right. We accept that guides come down to
instruct us. They are active teachers and we are the passive
recipients. Oftentimes when we don't seek advice, we seem to be
given it against our will. Of course, what happens if we follow
guides' wishes is that we can also make them our scapegoats,
relieving ourselves o f responsibility when things go wrong.
Guides then become the perfect, untouchable "cop-outs." I have
never heard of people kicking out their guides, although they may
outgrow them.
My major complaint is not with the guide concept itself, but
with how it is misused. Some people have to check with their
guides before taking action, and, like an adult tied to his parents,
it stifles mystical growth. There is a subtle, yet profound,
difference between "My guide told me to do this," and "On a
higher level I found information which helped me to choose the
way."
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 185

Sometimes we do access powerful information or deep

wisdom which gives us no consternation until we create something
from it or manifest something noticeable with it. Then we easily
become fearful of our own power, not occasionally, but almost
always. How humbly appealing and easy it is to say, "My guide
did it," and what a relief to sidestep responsibility.
In past life recall, we contact many parts of self which
unknowingly influence our decisions and behavior. We inevitably
find that parts of self which are attributed to guides actually come
from our soul's experiences in other lifehoods, but they have not
been integrated. With these new insights we can reclaim the power
we have given to guides.
By the way, at an early stage I, too, fell into the error of guide
dependency. My first guide was Jacob of the Bible, a very popular
guide whom I chose subconsciously, for he represented my
evolutionary problem. He fought God to become the "Lion of
God" as did I in other lifehoods.
Let me stress again, we humans can contact thoughts that
seem to exist outside ourselves. We can comprehend a field of
information that seems connected with disembodied souls. We can
receive information from a higher source. Furthermore, these
fields of information are available to all people at all times. It is
not unusual to see spontaneous pictures and hear words that at one
time were associated with persons who are no longer alive.
Understandably, then, we can logically believe our guides are
involved.
Occasionally, I have used guides as a way to focus thought, a
method of accessing specific information: thoughts about Einstein,
for science; Gibran, for philosophy; St. Francis, for spiritual
information, and for help to pinpoint the nature of my requests and
the level of information I seek. But I was careful not to get lost in
the belief that these entities "gave it to me." Even this technique
became unnecessary as the power to mystically know became my
own. Imaginary playmates of children serve the same function.
Schizophrenic voices are little different than "guides," except that
186 — INFINITE MIND

guides are supposed to be good and caring; schizophrenic entities

may be the opposite.
During a three-day spontaneous initiation, I made repeated
contact with the wisdom o f the great philosophers, scientists,
artists, and spiritual leaders of the past. I learned to use them to ask
questions and receive answers that I did not consciously know. But
what was more important, I learned that I did not have to wait
passively for them to appear. I could, at will, contact that level of
information.
Regardless o f how exciting we find them, I warn against
dependency on guides, voices, entities, or even spontaneous
writing, which can manipulate us. Remember that we are the
active agents—we have the experience. Teacher guides provide us
with an informational source and a motivational thrust which may
be useful as long as we don't confuse it with material reality.
Guides don't make us do or believe anything.
In Hinduism, the inner search culminates in self-realization.
There is no charismatic leader—the higher self contacts the
perennial wisdom. We must no longer rely on external teachers to
tell us what to do and think. Our evolutionary work is to develop
our higher plane of knowing and the techniques to access and use
it.

Have you ever tried to make a statement about something

worth saying, but no one listened? (You do know when you are
ineffectual.) It is easy to believe, but rarely correct, that your ideas
threaten people. When you believe strongly in what you say,
people may argue with you, but they rarely ignore you. But when
you are insecure about what you are saying, people simply
accommodate you by ignoring you.
To start turning such behavior around, ask yourself on what
issues you are willing to assert yourself—and which ones would
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 187

you rather evade? Do you tacitly participate in social groups, in

conferences, and in religious groups which you don't enjoy and
may even disapprove of? Do you ever turn down social invitations
without excuses because you don't want to attend? How easy it is
to think that you would lose a friend if you did. Consider whether
your friendships are truly satisfying or if they are just unsuccessful
agreements. There are two apparent solutions, both of which
require change. Either you change, or you change the agreement.
We are encouraged by our cultures, our families, and ethnic
groups to maintain these dependent relationships, and we are
offered security in return. I am not encouraging anyone to break
laws or disregard the dictates of his culture. But if these are unwise
and restrictive, change them. To remain dependent on others or
beliefs that you do not accept only maintains your weakness. This
is an unacceptable way to escape spiritual power. Stop giving
energy to the things you do not believe in.
One student remembered a lifehood in Greece as an oracle
who channeled information from the one God. The Delphi priests
became annoyed—they wanted information from their many gods.
When she refused, they drugged her food. In this weakened
condition, she channeled the information the priests requested,
knowing that her will had been overshadowed. Under the
influence o f drugs, she could not resist their pressure, so to
maintain her integrity, she refused food, ultimately starving to
death, believing that she had no other choice. The ideal response
would have been a direct confrontation with the priests. The
excuse she accepted, that she would have been killed, is not
appropriate when we know that she starved to death anyway. Even
the excuse of, "Why take a stand anyway because the priests
would not change," is also inadequate. Acknowledging her strong
beliefs in one God would not have saved her life, but her soul
would not have suffered, and as I have repeatedly said, it is these
situations which are the root of all our emotional and material
problems.
Feelings of inadequacy are another almost universal problem.
188 — INFINITE MIND

I ask you to look realistically at these feelings—not at your

behavior, but at your true capacities. Are you really inadequate?
Approached this way, I have never found a person who actually
felt inadequate. We don't choose that defense if we honestly feel
inadequate; it would be too painful.
But why should one behave inadequately when one knows
one isn't? The answer is simpler than the solution. When we feel
inadequate, we don't express our opinions, we don't stand up to be
counted, and we don't confront people and ideas that bother us.
We don't threaten and we aren't threatened. In the process, we
don't have to reevaluate our worth and we do not have to change.
For example, the experiences of poverty and repeated failures are
often, perhaps always, self-created and are rarely the truth. These
are our ways of putting ourselves down and keeping ourselves in
line.
Let me give you an example of how low self-esteem is used
for protection. Once I questioned an Alcoholics Anonymous
member if he was willing to give up his identification with being
alcoholic. He pondered, then answered no. He said that his
admission in Alcoholics Anonymous that he was an alcoholic had
caused him to stop drinking. But I had not asked him if he was
willing to give up alcohol—that is what AA does well. I asked him
if he was willing to give up his need to deprecate himself with a
negative self-image. I wanted him to consider whether he was
tired o f accepting himself as inferior, whether he was ready to see
how an alcoholic self-image now shielded him from deeper
struggle with himself. While AA helped him to overcome a
difficult behavior, it only treated the symptom. It did not eliminate
the problem.
Ask yourself if there is a part of you which purposely
perpetuates low self-esteem, unworthiness, incapacity, and
poverty. If your first spontaneous answer is yes, then without guilt
or self-criticism ask if you are now willing to give this up, and to
have it no more. You may discover that even contemplating giving
it up literally leaves you "out on a limb" and frightened. No matter
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 189

how bad these problems seem, they often feel more manageable
than the unknown. They have protected you like an old friend.
If you have followed my thinking this far, you are getting a
glimpse of a new problem for us humans: we don't know how to
experience the power of God manifest in us. It is more
comfortable to remain lowly humans than to become magnificent
beings. It is true that we have few opportunities to experience
being divine and human simultaneously in a world that offers this
role only to the sages and the saints—not to us average mortals.
Other barriers to our experience of the entire emotional
spectrum originate in the area of sexuality. Freud and others have
elucidated multiple problems with our sense of maleness and
femaleness. One's sexual identity is a source of self-worth, and the
target of tremendous emotional energy. From a biological point of
view, we know that neither sex is complete, and so we experience
strong sexual drives. But on the soul and energy field level, the
sexes don't differ and they are not innately incomplete. Actually,
we have experienced being both male and female in different
lifehoods with the ensuing expectations, opportunities, and
restrictions.
The choice o f our sex in a particular lifehood is strong,
because it contains numerous motives, each somehow connected
to our path to enlightenment; sometimes it reminds us of our
unfinished business, sometimes it provides opportunities to solve
problems in new ways, and sometimes it even helps us to escape.
When I find an individual consistently choosing the same sex,
lifehood after lifehood, I know where the real work lies. It is a
lifehood of the other sex. Macho men run from their gentle, tender
urges just as delicate women run from their aggressive, assertive
strength. Trying to solve these problems on a material man/woman
level is unsuccessful.
A metaphysical interpretation of male-femaleness is very
different. Energy in the right side of the body is said to represent
the male; Jung used the word animus, Eastern philosophy, the
yang. The left side of the body is believed to represent the female,
190 — INFINITE MIND

the anima, or the yin. In a mystical sense, both of these refer to

ways of processing perceptions and behaviors; they have no direct
sexual connotation.
Strong electromagnetic energy on the yang side can occur in
individuals of either sex who have physical and emotional skills to
cope successfully with material reality—to make a living, to
understand the physical universe, to take care of needs, and to
behave competently in social settings. Strong energy on the left,
the anima, or the yin side, shows the capacity for inner processing
of stimuli from the world or the mystical— sensitive feelings,
intuitive, imaginative, spiritual experiencing and understanding.
Over the years I have tested the electromagnetic energy of many
men and women, and these concepts are consistently correct.
Our culture has aligned maleness with skills in the physical
world, the so-called "real" world, making a living, solving
mechanical and financial problems, and judgments concerning this
level of reality. Females, on the other hand, have been allowed,
even encouraged, to process information in the more personal,
intuitive, and mystical way. The sexual connotations are
unfortunate, since both are important ways of perceiving,
processing, and behaving—one on the mystical, intuitive level, the
other on the physical, material one.
Regardless of the sex, if emotional energies are weak or
absent in either side of the body, then the abilities associated with
it are under stress. Contrariwise, if they are strong in either or
both, those comparable perceptions are secure and operative.
Unfortunately, many sexual unions are motivated by
incompleteness at the metaphysical level where an ungrounded,
dependent woman chooses a realistic, problem-solving mate, and
the realistic, practical man chooses one who has mystical, intuitive
qualities. Despite their needs, neither understands the other.
It is a fallacy to believe that by choosing a mate with
characteristics that we do not possess, we somehow become
complete. We may actually compound our basic problem as we
seek to live through others. Ideally, one could choose a sexual
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 191

partner as a model to help one grow out of one's limited

perspective. Here our mate provides a stimulus to confront our
limitations, to experience the emotion which blocks our growth, to
personally change and become more complete. But in most
instances, that is not the case. More people abdicate their
evolutionary needs, becoming increasingly dependent on the
other, and sometimes stoically comfortable. Or equally as often,
one or both become angry at the other who has failed to make
them feel complete by mere association.
But no one can make us over; only we can change and evolve.
In the end, if one person moves toward becoming a more complete
being and the other does not, the agreement no longer holds, the
connection breaks up, or they persist in a stormy, unsatisfactory
relationship. O f course, if both grow, the relationship of two
evolving beings can be superb.
As we experience emotion, generally, we attach negative
values to painful emotions like fear and anger, and positive ones to
love and joy. But the value is not inherent in the emotional energy
of itself. Rather, the value comes from the pleasure or the
discomfort associated with the emotion and its resultant behaviors.
In our culture, fear and anger produce stress and anxiety about
the potentially unacceptable behaviors which might result. Joy and
love tend to produce relaxation and pleasure. Often, so-called
negative and positive emotions play back and forth without clear-
cut separation. Joy may border on fear of losing the happy
condition. Love merges with anger when one is denied the object
of one's love. It is also true that discordant energy is inevitable
when one tries to control emotions.
Anger is universally the most maligned and potentially the
most dangerous o f all emotions—perilous because its fiery
volatility can get out o f control and become destructive. Anger is
a sign that something is awry, that there is conflict.
Anger is also the power which motivates us to confront or
redress the disorder. From a field concept, everything which
threatens the integrity of the mind-field or soul creates anger. The
192 — INFINITE MIND

energy field of a person experiencing anger is recorded in the

spectrogram (Exhibit 16). This recording was taken from a man
while he felt pain from an acute muscle spasm while being Rolfed.
Note the heavy black line at number 7 (or 700 cycles per second)
represents the energy of pain. He processed and expressed his
agony with emotional outbursts of swearing and stomping his foot.
This outburst is displayed in the auric color orange at 6 (or 600
cycles per second). The line at 13 or (1300 cycles per second) is
white, stemming from the presence of small quantities of all color
vibrations. Here white represents the mild altered state of
consciousness he obtained from the energy of pain. (See Chapter
X for other ways people process pain.)
Anger which manifests as dissatisfaction can be a prologue to
change, but anger does wear many cloaks. It can be marvelous,
like a shot in the arm that creates well-being, activating us to take
action, to create, to free ourselves from real or imagined dangers.
Normally, every time there is injury to the physical body or self,
the energy of anger is stimulated, whether it is acknowledged or
not. When the injury is to one's divine nature or ultimate truths, it
carries a much more volatile emotional charge. Christ did not tarry
on the Mount of Olives; he came down to express his anger at the
money changers in the temple.
As described earlier, anger and fear serve to actually protect
us from threats to physical life and to spiritual integrity. Anger
may also function to protect us from experiencing the powerful
emotions o f divine love and ecstasy. But when we maintain a
protective emotional posture, all dynamic feelings are weakened.
Psychology has exposed anger as the seat of all emotional
problems, but it has been less successful at finding beneficial ways
of dealing with it. Suggestions to "handle it," "control it," and even
"transcend it" show, unfortunately, that our goal is to dispense
rapidly with the unpleasantness of anger, rather than
acknowledging it as a powerful teacher about our unfinished
business from other lifehoods.
As we know, anger can and often does lead to destructive
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 193

behaviors. But neither is repression of anger ideal. It destroys the

body, sabotages development, and if it escapes, creates violence.
Nor is it enough to simply recognize our anger, unless we also
understand our role in creating it in other lifehoods and
perpetuating it in this one. I believe that the only acceptable
method of eliminating strong residual anger is to discover its
source in other lifehoods.
Transformational psychologists state that, "... the profound
task of every individual in the journey of increasing consciousness
is dealing with anger." They go beyond the historical discussions
of repression and direct expression, to stressing the need to
transfer the energy o f anger to helpful, pleasant feelings or
unconditional love. Such an emphasis upon transmuting negative
emotions to more positive ones requires mystical capabilities.
Many popular writers and conference speakers present methods
for transforming anger to love by opening the heart chakra. Surely,
love is the crowning human emotion that is often hidden and
under-expressed. We must encourage the experience of our innate
lovingness, and learn to transmute the energies of anger and fear
into love and joy, which are more creative states.
Pir Vilayat Khan, a metaphysical teacher, stressed that, "...
when the fire of anger gets transmuted into light, it is the same
radiance but a different frequency, as a warm fire returning to a
cold light." But transforming complex human emotions should not
be likened to a simple, predictable chemical or physical
change—no, a dynamic, living, human being is involved here.
Theoretically, it should be possible to totally transform emotional
energy. Actually, it does not work that way. Because transformed
emotion still carries the field organization of its source, this energy
is classically sublimated on a higher consciousness level. I am
deeply concerned about promoting as ideal the transcendence of
direct or displaced anger. It may be practically acceptable to
society, but it is not ideal if we hold the conviction that evolution
is our ultimate goal.
Actually, I have never seen emotional energy completely
194 — INFINITE MIND

transmuted. Even when emotional energy is no longer allied to its

source, it is not eliminated. Also, I often find that when anger is
transmuted into love, it is powerless, wishy-washy, neither pure
nor evolving a kind of insipid love so characteristic of the New
Age movement. They call their love unconditional, while I think it
can be better described as bland and non-discriminating, with
narcotic corollaries. It is not empowering. When persons
transmute powerful anger, they become ungrounded, losing their
orientation to material reality. The resulting love is an airy-fairy
type o f consciousness without the power to evolve either the
individual or the world.
To reiterate, if emotions have to be altered by transforming
them, then the person has not changed, the problem is not
eliminated. Rather, a substitution has been made. It is far from
ideal and should be considered a temporary detour which weakens
emotional energy. On a more mundane level, we spend too much
time trying to change or eliminate conditions that trigger anger
rather than dealing with them at their source.
Since psychologists have not been able to offer an acceptable
method o f dealing with anger, it is time to look elsewhere. We
must look to mystical experiences and other lifehoods as sources
o f residual anger to discover why people cling to anger and
recreate it. Also, we must remember that anger is protective and is
not the basic problem. Rather, it serves to keep the person
dependent—in an inadequate state—certainly protecting him from
knowing his profound emotions of divine love and the power of
God. At the very depth of protective, mystical anger, one finds
misplaced anger at God which I discuss extensively in Chapter XI,
"Spirituality, the Ultimate Evolution."
When it is no longer fueled by prior life frustrations and
neurotic needs, residual anger will abate. When the fire is not
smouldering and the kindling is not dry, then anger can
immediately and freely serve its paramount purpose to protect in
this lifehood.
Have you ever used willpower to try to change an emotional
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 195

pattern? Have you ever experienced very intense emotions and had
fear immediately overwhelm you? Have you ever had the impulse
to jump, strike, kill, or destroy another person? I asked that
question of one audience, expecting them to respond only to
themselves. But two thirds o f the group raised their hands,
indicating that they had experienced such feelings. Probably, even
those who did not respond have had the urge. I believe these
violent thoughts are universal.
Some societies have hidden their angry urges behind
apparently gentle, good-humored serenity. The Gebusi, living in
the New Guinea rain forests, are an example. But behind their
conviviality lurks a brutal paradox. The Gebusi murder each other
at a rate that is among the highest ever reported—about four times
the rate in the United States. Their pattern of peaceful living is
punctuated by aggression which is unrestrained and frequently
homicidal. Four out of five of the Gebusi killings are of someone
branded as a sorcerer who allegedly caused the death of another
who actually died of diseases or parasites. The study concluded
that current theories of violence offer no satisfactory theories to
explain why Gebusi, with their peaceful culture, murder for
alleged witchcraft which they do not accept or practice. I believe
that as the Gebusi seek an answer for the painful emotions of
death, they intuit a mystical connection. Their murderous response
both releases their hostile emotions and is mystically justified by
blaming the destructive thoughts on another person.
Even the near-utopian Samoa, originally described by
Margaret Mead as unencumbered by aggression, competition, or
sexual repression, has since been found to be much more complex,
and even violent. Rape is not an uncommon occurrence.
The Bushmen of the Kalahari Desert in Africa, dubbed "the
harmless people" several decades ago because they were
gregarious and peaceful, have recently been discovered to have a
homicide rate nearly three times that in the United States, which is
one of the highest in Western nations.
. Similar patterns o f goodwill and self-effacement are
196 — INFINITE MIND

combined with occasional flare-ups and even murders in Eskimo

groups, in aboriginal Malaysians, and in the nomadic tribes of
Tanzania.
Most of us believe that fear of death, the destruction of the
body with loss of physical existence, is the ultimate fear. But as I
worked with the past life recall of many clients, I found other
information about fear and death. Life and death urges involve the
person's will. Physical death is rarely simply the result of an
accident, disease, or old age. The complex structures of
personality and soul are involved here. There is always a deep
personal choice about death, anything from a desire to escape to a
passive acceptance, or even pleasure at its inevitability, or a
determination to live and a refusal to die until one's time has come.
Some people would rather die than experience the source of
emotions which would allow them to live fully. At this level,
comfort comes from the fact that the soul knows it is forever. A
new body is available with each reincarnation. Actually, the soul
doesn't care whether you live or die—it cares only that you evolve.
Ordinary fear of physical death is not metaphysical; it is a
material fear. Symbolically, it may become mystical if the person
perceives death as leaving the known reality for the unknown. I
could relate hundreds o f clinical examples of other lifehoods
where persons who recalled being killed, dying from human
neglect, or even self-starvation, also experienced feelings o f anger,
release, and happiness. Some, with guilt, desired death as
punishment. Many related that they chose to die. So, each of us
knows how to die; we have died innumerable times before.
Frequently, we repeat certain methods of dying, such as by
violence, disease, or suicide; some quietly fade away, while others
go out with dramatic flair.
To summarize, there are two major mystical sources of fear.
One, the fear of the profound intensity of underlying emotions, is
similar to material fears, but stronger. The second is the fear of
feeling, knowing, and being responsible for one's divine self. This
is the ultimate fear, for when the first fear abates, the second
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 197

heightens. When mystical fears are not resolved, they are

displaced as I have shown earlier, manifesting in death, or in
sexual or social problems. You have experienced a mystical
source o f fear if you have ever daydreamed or had pleasant
experiences with nothing particular happening, and suddenly
became really frightened; or the deeper you went into meditation,
the more fearful you became. To explain and minimize these
fears, people say that they fear their dark side or the horrible
things they did in other lifehoods—everything from murder to
witchcraft. To be sure, we may discover these horrible and violent
episodes, but when we probe these the fear does not dissipate.
Generally, we discover instead that we have also done profoundly
good things, not just bad ones. But it is actually easier to profess
the bad, using it as an excuse to hide the real fear of spiritual
power. Honestly engaging in the death-life straggle is a route
toward inner peace, and only on the mystical level does it insure
spiritual strength.
As infants, when our needs are fulfilled, there is pleasure and
contentment, which we experience as love. It is no wonder that
we associate these early love experiences with the humans who
pleasurably satisfy our needs. How easy it is to locate our love
feelings in another person rather than in our own happy state.
Soon we learn that our love is contingent upon others since they
can give it or take it away. In this sense, love can be bartered. But
there is another aspect of love. While we hear a lot about
unconditional love, love itself has no conditions; it is a field of
energy with emotional components. Numerous things stimulate it.
Whether it is conditional or unconditional depends on the
stimulus, with what people associate with love feelings, and the
conditions they place upon giving and receiving love.
While love and hate may shadow-box (similar to fear and
anger), our deepest urge remains to experience love as a God-
ordained human feeling. I call this "lovingness." Lovingness has
no boundaries and no specific recipients. It is a state of being or a
condition of the mind, and as such is not specifically associated
with an object nor with the heart chakra; it is neither sexual nor
198 — INFINITE MIND

spiritual, nor is it connected with a specific person. Lovingness is

a quality of a coherent field that provides a happy awareness. In
the laboratory, we found that unconditional lovingness carries a
pink field—the vitality of red blended into the white of higher
consciousness. Early on, all healthy, happy babies have pink
auras.
Loving energy exists in the mind-field around the body
during one's highest state of awareness where it is free from
memories of earthly love encounters. It is in tune with divine
experiences where love takes on universal proportions and is
focused only on the person's highest concept of God. When
persons first experience such profound love feelings, they often
feel anxious about the freedom, for barriers do not exist;
limitations and confinements are gone. Some feel exposed, even
vulnerable.
To see where you stand, ask yourself the question, "Is it easier
to experience a loving field or to create one?" Notice that this is
different from asking if it is easier for you to give or to receive
love. If you have ever appreciated a person for loving you, have
you ever taken the next step which is to thank that person for
providing you with the experience of your own lovingness?
To reiterate, there are two primary aspects of my model of
emotions and mystical experiences. First, the most powerful
source of all emotions resides at the soul level. If these emotions
are not resolved at the source, a head of steam, anger or fear, is
carried from lifehood to lifehood. These soul problems focus
behavior in each ensuing life, providing patterns and emotional
charges for material life experiences. Furthermore, when the
source is unknown, people consistently fail to resolve them using
techniques that focus on the material, everyday level of existence.
Until we find the deeper sources, we will not solve our problems.
The second tenet is that all really traumatic earthly
experiences become relegated to an altered state where common
awareness is shut off. With trauma there is tremendous emotional
energy, yet confusion about how to act. The energy catapults the
person to an altered state where there is no awareness of selfhood
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 199

or body and pain—a perfect escape. Talk therapy cannot easily

access such trauma. Dreams, on the other hand, an expression of
an altered state, can tap the source but unfortunately, the symbolic
nature of dreams often leads to speculation at the material level
and thus, to misinterpretation.
The better treatment is to directly open the mind-field by
raising the physical vibrations, tapping expanded awareness, and
imaging. This provides direct access to both past and present life
material and mystical traumas.
Here is an example. I asked a very gifted psychic and minister
if she remembered when she had discovered her unusual mystical
capabilities. She said, "at birth," but she knew nothing about the
details. As we opened her mind-field, we discovered that at birth,
the physicians had placed her in a pan to die while caring for her
seriously ill mother. Her will to live brought forth so much rage
that she catapulted into an altered state, what we have called "out
of body", where she was able to observe the proceedings without
emotion or pain, and to physically survive. This rage was
reactivated several months later when she was put up for adoption.
These altered states became her primary reality. At these dramatic
times she was able to perceive the world in an entirely magnificent
way, with a purity beyond the ordinary reality that most of us live
by. Here was the source of her deep spiritual knowing.
Those of you who have followed my discussion of emotions
and mystical experience, and who are motivated to take the next
step, are faced with a monumental question. "Are you ready to lay
down your burdens?" While this may sound like a charge from a
television evangelist, I am not referring to laying down your
burdens at the feet of the Lord. Rather, are you ready to de­
energize the personal problems that have preoccupied your
thoughts and drained your energy for too long? Are you ready to
open up to the real, spiritual problem?
Problem-solving at this level is always transforming and
mystical. Hold these thoughts in mind as you make your
200 — INFINITE MIND

dedication. By embracing mediocrity, we sell ourselves short of

our infinite greatness. The deep level of the soul always wants to
be free to manifest Godliness. Recall the evolutionary process
described earlier, going from order to chaos and then back to a
more refined order. Evolution is the reordering of life into a finer
order. Unstable equilibrium is inevitable at times.
Grounding your awareness in everyday reality and in the
electromagnetic vibrations of the Earth must come first in any
attempt to tackle mystical problems. (Did you ever think that the
sky begins at your feet? We think it's out there in the air rather
than up there and down here simultaneously.) Again, the
emotional blocks can only be resolved by returning to the mystical
level for the deepest answers. But to fly there without a
simultaneously firm orientation in the reality of the physical world
is the ultimate escape. We only accomplish a flighty surcease or a
life disconnected from self and the world.
There are different therapeutic approaches to activate specific
layers o f the psyche. For exercises to uncover the sources of
emotional turmoil or the altered states hiding emotional energy, I
refer you to my forthcoming book, Mind Mastery Meditations.
Here you will find exercises for activating the physical field,
opening the emotional field, accessing lifehoods and energizing
the spiritual field.
Another key to staying grounded is to exercise regularly. In
the chapter, "Healing: The Miracle of Life," I expand on the role
o f the connective tissue in transporting electromagnetic energy to
every cell, molecule, and atom in the body, increasing cellular
vibrations.
Allow yourself quiet times even in a busy schedule to get in
touch with yourself, or plan time regularly for satisfying
"diddling." Hobbies are fine if these are casually entertaining,
where you get lost in the experience but not deeply emotionally
involved. They should provide an opportunity to know and
indulge yourself. Beware o f hobbies that you approach as
seriously as you approach your working life.
 EMOTIONS AND THE MYSTICAL EXPERIENCE — 201

Prepare your body for the higher vibrations it will experience.

A change in diet toward lighter, vegetarian, non-processed food is
helpful. Actually, most people who reach this level have already
changed their diets because their bodies no longer tolerate dead,
processed foods, sugars, alcohol and drugs.
To meditate regularly for at least thirty minutes daily, I
believe is essential—and not just quasi-meditation or daydreaming
while occupied with something else. The total mind must be
involved. Having a quiet, leisurely time is more important than the
specific time o f day. I do not, however, recommend a formal
meditation plan. Be creative. Use a variety of methods depending
on the day's need. If the body is tense, spend time on the physical
field. If you feel emotional blocks, start on the path to find your
child, observe what is going on, and find the unfinished emotional
business.
If you discover a powerful lifehood with many messages for
you, ask this image to return to you. Do not intellectually try to
direct it. Your deeper mind knows the answers. Follow, observe,
and don't get in your own way. Remember that you have control
of your images. If you lose an important image, don't struggle to
bring it back, merely command that it return and then wait,
knowing that it will come. You created it and you can command it.
If you've found a profoundly radiant life or spiritual
experience with little material structure, ask that it return to you
rich with details. When it occurs, ask if you have ever had such an
experience as a mortal being in this or other lifehoods. Don't think;
accept the first answer. If the answer is yes, ask to have those
images return to you purely. Frequently lifehoods open abruptly.
As you enter these mystical levels, you, like others, often doubt
whether these are real because we have learned to dichotomize the
real and the imagined. Remember, what comes when you imagine
or symbolize is your own personal message to yourself. Each
image is your own, from your own sources.
When you are imagining on different levels, don't try to
realistically or logically figure out complete answers from just a
202 — INFINITE MIND

few clues. Look rather, for patterns of problems and emotions.

The reason we try urgently to intellectually figure out the clues is
that we want to quickly eliminate the problem. However, we can
never succeed this way. The problem goes only when we change.
Place the new information in your memory banks and over
time, fresh logic will occur. The mind does not give up its
defenses or find its gems immediately. Although what you
discover sometimes does not seem to fit, in time it probably will.
Particularly with your early experiences, do not intellectually
process what happens until later. Discover that expansion of
consciousness must be negotiated; it cannot be forced.
These are all cues to help you become an active participant so
that the mind can offer up its treasures. Have a great mystical trip.
Join the rest o f us in patient excitement and inevitably, some
suffering—both are the nature of deep change.
Know that your first responsibility is not to others, but to
yourself. As you hoist yourself to a state where you validate the
divine potential of your being, you will elevate others simply by
your presence. Your vibrations and you as a role model express
more than anything you can say or do.
 LIFEHOODS:
The Hidden Agenda
The word "lifehoods", is not just a word I coined for the old
ideas about past lives. It presents a new philosophy of
reincarnation created from very different concepts about humans
and the Earth. The expression "past lives" emphasizes the physical
existence of a life— a time-space construct. On the other hand,
lifehoods, emphasizing the soul, which is a part of the mind-field,
exist now and have no time reference.
To reiterate, lifehoods de-emphasize the space-time domain
of the physical body and emphasize the metaphysical existence of
the soul. Because it operates as a field, a lifehood carries
information about the soul's experience in a material body at any
time in history. Since the soul is never destroyed, as is each
physical body it enlivens, information from lifehoods is always
now, a part of each new life.
Stephen Hawking reminds us that the laws of science do not
distinguish between past, present and future. Neither do higher
states of consciousness. Likewise, the soul is not metaphysically
past, for there is neither soul-time nor soul-space. Therefore,
concepts like past-life regression, by whatever techniques, can
make sense only when referenced to the current physical body's

203
204 --- INFINITE MIND

existence. Regression makes no logical sense when applied to the

soul which carries the information about other lifehoods.
Karma, the series of beliefs passed down in Eastern
philosophy from the Vedas, supplied answers about the reasons
that humans reincarnate, and about the inevitable events a person
must re-experience in the current life. These elaborate beliefs
placed emphasis upon who you were, what you did and when you
lived— all physical details of what they called "past lives." Quite
different, the concept o f lifehoods gives answers to what the
person experienced, what he made of it, and what patterns and
beliefs his soul carried with it into each reincarnation. These are
the memories o f soul experiences.
Lifehood information can either help or hinder our evolution;
but in each new life this information powerfully influences the
development of selfhood and behaviors. Even more, these
memories are the emotional residue, the true psychological source,
the deepest director of a human life—with an impact much greater
than biologically-inherited traits or early childhood experiences.
The semantic use of the words "past life" and "lifehoods"
depends upon who perceives the lifehood information. If another
person, a therapist, psychic, or friend hears or reads the
information or if the person relates his lifehood experience to
another, he does so in Earth time—using concepts of past, present,
and future. Here the words "past life" are meaningful. On the other
hand, when a person re-experiences a lifehood, the past and the
present are now and it is not a historical event.
Likewise, as people go up in consciousness and vibration to
the levels where recall occurs, there is also no time but the present
time. In field information, there is no past field information, there
is only now field information. Past, present, and future can
describe material happenings, but not mystical or metaphysical
ones. To say it another way: we correctly use the words "past
lives" when describing happenings that are time-locked. Lifehoods
describe soul information, which always is now. I will use the
words "past lives" when discussing ideas that are time oriented and
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 205

"lifehoods" when not.

Explanations of past lives, reincarnation and karma have been
with us from the beginning o f history—formulated in ancient
cultures where ways of thinking and knowledge about the nature
of the universe were limited. Yet, these same out-dated concepts
are the mainstay o f our current literature. Apparently, current
philosophies have neither questioned nor changed them, while
many lay people believe these explanations are incomprehensible
and undesirable for modem life. In the past, we had two choices;
either we blindly accepted the standard explanations of
reincarnation and karma, or we rejected the whole idea as
irrational, unintelligent, flaky metaphysics. We need to dismantle
these outmoded ideas, to bring forth a new paradigm which
upgrades ancient ideas about past lives to lifehoods. The new ideas
will be important to guide the masses of people of all ages who are
and will be having these important mystical experiences. For as
the spectrum of human consciousness broadens, with it invariably
comes lifehood recall. People will need sound bases so that they
will be able to accept, understand, and use this information for
their own material growth and spiritual evolution.
I believe that as man evolves rapidly in the twentieth century,
the concept o f lifehoods will become a dominant, new,
philosophical idea, important because it views human emotions,
spirituality and the body in a way that focuses holistically on
human empowerment. A recent survey from the National Opinion
Research Center in Chicago reported that 29% of all Americans
now believe in past lives. Even more astonishing is the comment
in the Journal o f the American M edical Association stating we
now have " ... on record a large amount of data that cannot be
ignored" which is "difficult to understand on any other grounds
but reincarnation."
Today those people who find difficulty accepting lifehoods
are those who have had no personal recall. Regardless of what I
say or how powerfully the historical, religious, and philosophical
literature confirms lifehoods, these will only influence our beliefs.
206 --- INFINITE MIND

One can only know for certain when one has experienced the
intense and spontaneous emotions, the information never before
contacted, and the physical feelings as the lifehoods are being
recalled; another confirmation occurs when one sees change
taking place, and experiences the resulting peace and fullness.
My radical findings about lifehoods come from 25 years of
clinical practice as a metaphysical counselor. I have opened the
mind-fields of my clients so that they could remember their
lifehoods and discover the emotional source of their immediate
psychological problems. I believe that the emotions connected
with lifehoods are forever the barriers to progress, and that
remembering lifehoods is essential to the change which leads to
higher evolution.
There are things that most people know in altered states of
consciousness which they cannot recall in ordinary ones, such as
lifehoods and spiritual experiences. Charles Tart reminds us of the
importance of direct knowledge by experience. He believes that
we have traded direct knowledge of things like the unity of life
and connection to the divine, for abstract, intellectual thoughts and
theories which are not very personally satisfying. Experiences
with the soul and physical body constitute the most direct
knowledge the individual can gain about himself. But the deepest
knowledge comes in expanded awareness states, not in altered
ones where recall is often strong but memory is limited.
Many years ago, I met a professor of mechanical physics from
an Ivy League university during a scientific meeting. Over
cocktails he inquired about my research in energy fields. Although
he understood the scientific explanation, when I related these to
consciousness and emotions he was intrigued, but lost. Some years
later after he had retired in California, he asked me to work with
him, saying that he wanted to remove his blocks to higher
consciousness, while he adamantly denied that he believed in "that
stuff." But as he persisted and denied less, I agreed to work with
him.
To my surprise, as we worked he moved rapidly into an
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 207

expanded state of consciousness. He saw himself as a young man

in Egypt, which he promptly denied, adding, "I don't want to touch
that." Later, he remembered a tiny, baby boy abandoned to die in
the harsh desert. Whatever he was experiencing was so
emotionally loaded that his body trembled and he became fearful.
He accused me of "zapping" him—which, of course, I hadn't or
couldn't. I encouraged him to stop those images for a while
because they were so painful.
Without encouragement, he started talking about Moses,
immediately insisting that he was not Moses. He rationalized that
his Moses imagery occurred because he loved "Porgy and Bess"
which contained some reference to Moses. I confirmed that of
course he was not Moses, but that there was something about
Moses that he identified with and was trying to recall. A bit later,
as he re-imaged the abandoned little boy near death in the desert,
a regal woman found him. Like Moses, he was saved by a
Pharaoh's daughter. This man's outbursts of emotion at being
saved were intense and they frightened him; he denied them
vehemently. Each time he tried not to remember, he remembered
anyway, and each time a dam of emotions was released. But he
could not understand nor integrate what he experienced on a
rational level, despite the fact that his life had been saved. He grew
up in the palace where he was loved, tenderly cared for, and
appreciated. As a man, his life lacked luster. At this stage, he
immediately denied this lifehood experience altogether, saying
that he made it all up, which allowed him to return to a very quiet
emotional state.
Later, I asked him to return to that memory and just tell me
about it. Each time the sobs were uncontrollable, and each time, he
denied its reality. Finally, after more work, I assured him that his
imagination could have created that story, and if it did, he could
just relate it to me again without the emotion of reliving it. But he
never could. Each time when his life was saved, the same
emotions arose spontaneously, with fear and shock as his body
chilled. It was then that he left denial and finally believed in the
208 --------- INFINITE MIND

notion of lifehoods.
This story clearly demonstrates that in one state of
consciousness the subject experienced a life, yet when he moved
back into a lower state he could no longer comprehend that he had
had such an experience. Only at the end of our work when the two
levels of consciousness blended in a continuum was he aware that
he no longer needed to deny this lifehood experience.
Let us return here to the historical development of the concept
of reincarnation; the idea of reincarnation developed
simultaneously with religious ideas about divine power. It ranks
among the oldest ideas entertained by successive cultures, and is
one of the most frequently recurring themes in the literature of the
world.
In the Orient and India, beliefs about reincarnation and karma
were nurtured and developed. Krishna, the supposed Indian author
of the Bhagavad Gita, first professed to believe in past lives and
reincarnation. Today, Hindus encourage suffering in this lifehood
so that their reward will be nirvana in the next. Some believe that
the punishment for wrongdoing will be regression to existences as
animals or insects in future lives.
The Buddhist faith, stemming from the old Indian
philosophies, advanced reincarnation and karma as its two primary
tenets, giving them the power of higher law. Like Jesus, the
Buddha never recorded his beliefs, but his followers did in great
detail. Tibetan Buddhism elaborated on concepts of death and
rebirth by believing that the Dalai Lama reincarnated in a new life
near the time of death of the previous Dalai Lama. In fact, all
higher Buddhists are considered to be incarnations of previous
lamas.
Confucius neither taught nor denied the reality of immortality
and reincarnation. The Koran, the scripture of Islam, apparently
affirmed the belief in reincarnation but did not propagate it as a
primary teaching. The Koran states, "God generated beings and
sent them back over and over again until they returned to him."
The strictly Orthodox branch of Hasidic Judaism teaches
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN A GENDA --- 209

reincarnation. The Talmud, however, expressed the necessity to

cast a veil over the whole question of survival beyond the grave
in an attempt to wean people from the idolatrous cults of the dead
which preceded Judaism in the Near East. Reincarnation was
associated with these.
Contrariwise, the Kabbala, a mystical system of interpreting
the scriptures, was a strong current in Judaism that affected many
forms of religious expression as well as Jewish history. Some
believe the Kabbala is the traditional law. Others deem it above
the law of Moses because of its mystical nature. Kabbalists
believe that everyone carries the secret trace of transmigration in
their souls in the lineaments of their foreheads and hands, and in
the aura which radiates around their bodies. This power field
extends beyond the limits of personal cell-selfs, even in ordinary
people. The destiny of a person is connected not only to those
things he himself creates and does, but also to what happened to
his soul in previous incarnations.
The Kabbalistic teachings contain a wonderful field concept
of the soul; soul sparks radiate from the individual like a spiritual
aura around him when he returns to re-incarnate. For an advanced
being, the whole world of mankind becomes a cosmic power field
of his soul. The Kabbala presented the idea of attaining perfection
through repeated rebirths, instead of rebirth being a form of
punishment as taught by Plato. Kabbalistic beliefs were advanced
by the Sephardic Jews in Spain in their Book o f Splendor, also
called the Zohar. For centuries, it reigned as an expression of all
that was profound in the innermost recesses of the Jewish soul.
The Kabbala probably helped stimulate the Italian
Renaissance and the German Reformation during a time when it
was flourishing in the Jewish community. The Talmud and Torah
were both strong then. But in the 19th century, Jewish scholars
became hostile to Kabbalistic beliefs and aligned them with
agnosticism and the skepticism of science. Today there are many
Kabbalistic rabbis, but generally it is considered dangerous and
out of reach for the average Jew because o f its mystical nature.
210 --- INFINITE MIND

Although today rabbis hold many life views, reincarnation is

not openly taught in the four main branches of Judaism: Orthodox,
Conservative, Reform, and Reconstructionist. Thus, Jewish people
may have hazy beliefs about concepts involving the next life.
There are some well-known Jewish scholars who believe that now
is the eminently correct time for Jews to re-examine their religious
heritage to see that rebirth was a dominant outlook in Judaism at
one time. That vision may help to illuminate solutions to the
problems o f the modem world.
The mystical religions and philosophical doctrines of early
Christian sects, combining Greek, Jewish and Oriental beliefs,
embraced reincarnation. The Coptic copies of the original papyrus
Gnostic texts documented this. But as early as 180 AD the Roman
Church with all its power branded Gnosticism as heresy.
In the sixth century, a group of Christian bishops at the
Council of Constantinople outlawed the teaching of reincarnation.
Despite this edict, Christians continued to propagate the belief in
reincarnation until it became so widespread that in the 13th
century it almost overturned the Roman Catholic Church. The
Inquisition in Spain, mounted primarily by the Catholic Church,
had as a major aim rooting out beliefs in reincarnation. Over the
centuries, the Church has generally substituted the word "rebirth"
for "reincarnation" because of the heathen meanings associated
with the latter. Interestingly, the same karmic concept of
Hinduism, that is, a reward for good and a reproach for evil, was
used by the early Christian church to control its members. Many
eminent Christian theologians today accept these ancient ideas
about reincarnation.
The great Greek thinker Pythagoras taught the doctrine of
rebirth which he is believed to have brought from his studies in
Egypt. Plato's philosophical thought, recorded in his Phaedo,
expounded the highest Pythagorean doctrine. He felt strongly that
we have lived before and will live again, and he wondered how it
could be thought otherwise. He believed that innate ideas were
inherited experiences from other lives. Reincarnation pervaded his
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 211

philosophy with themes of life, death, and rebirth, which he

unfolded in numerous myths. His writings had enormous influence
on St. Paul and the early Christian church in Greece. Socrates and
Aristotle, both students of Pythagoras and Plato, also professed the
immortality of the soul and encouraged respect for this life
because of its eternal nature. At a much later date, Tolstoy
believed that if we remembered our past lives we would be wiser.
The arch-skeptic materialist Thomas Huxley theorized that if
consciousness survived death there was no end to the possibilities
of its development in future lives. Sir Julian Huxley dared to think
that, under the scheme of rebirth, the incoming entity brings with
him the footages of his own thoughts and actions from previous
lives—he inherits from himself.
The preponderance of great Western intellectuals like Francis
Bacon, Sir Walter Scott, Charles Dickens, Oscar Wilde, Rudyard
Kipling, Ralph Waldo Emerson, Walt Whitman, Thomas Edison,
and Luther Burbank all accepted reincarnation. The current
Theosophical Movement, strong in the United States, England,
and India, was probably most instrumental in regenerating interest
in past lives and accompanying beliefs about karma.
Even with the strong evidence for reincarnation from
religions and great thinkers, I personally found past life concepts
stubborn obstacles. My scientific training led me to reason that if
we are born into this life with new parents, a new genetic
background, and a new brain to record this life's experiences, how
is it possible to recall or even be remotely connected to a prior
life? Added to that intellectual quandary, I had had no past life
recall.
My first insight came from clinical evidence presented by
Verny, a psychiatrist, in his book, The Secret Life o f the Unborn
Child , and from reports on hypnotic regression. Both indicated
that the soul rarely entered the fetus at conception but generally it
did so around the third month. If that were true, it stood to reason
that the soul is separate from the union of cells at conception. As
I pondered how a soul could enter an already-developing fetus, I
212 --- INFINITE MIND

had to conclude the soul could not exist in the form of tissue but
that it must be an energy field of information.
The study of energy fields in my laboratory had encouraged
me to believe that the highest level of the mind is located in the
auric field. This led me to further speculate that the soul must enter
the fetus as a field, directly into the mind-field. Therefore, the
brain which records this life's experiences would have no direct
knowledge of the soul's lifehoods.
My changing beliefs about lifehoods were still purely
intellectual; still I had had no past life recall. As a rational being I
had grave doubts about what I considered superstition and
misconception from "ancient wisdoms." But I recognized that we
humans need to explain life happenings and so we will do so from
our state of awareness and with the information available at the
time.
So philosophies of reincarnation had been guided by limited
models containing a motley collection of metaphors, each
generating its own way of thinking and compatible answers.
Although most o f the world's people believe in reincarnation,
many Westerners are repelled by the idea. My final acceptance
came from my own lifehood experiences and those of hundreds of
my students—so powerful were they, that my doubts vanished. I
encourage you not to discredit the value of reincarnation because
of previous faulty explanations.
The following discussion will, I hope, open new avenues for
you. I am sure that it will not change devout followers of
Theosophy or yoga or some psychics, and it will fall on deaf ears
among those who use belief in karma as a crutch. But for those
truly seeking enlightenment, these ideas may find intuitive
acceptance, even filling gaps between intellectual believing and
experiential knowing.
Ideas about action at a distance, or action through a field are
difficult to grasp. When we want to cause something to happen we
lift or press it, push or pull it, or manipulate it in some other way.
This we understand. Of course, we accept radio and television
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 213

waves or signals, even if we don't understand them. The modern

physics concept of a field states that it is a continuous medium of
transmission and information storage. Into this field are
transmitted radio and television signals from which we receive and
decode sound and picture. Likewise, the vibrations of the past are
always in this universal field. The whole of the past of a soul is
always in its energy field whether it is in spirit or human form.
From this we realize that what happened a thousand years ago in
physical time is not one thousand units apart from the present—it
is now here, in the present time. Now although the soul is
immortal, it has taken a mortal course in its evolutionary process.
So to know about the soul's immortal struggles we must uncover
the mortal lives it nourished, that is, its lifehoods.
Some people who accept past lives with vague details do so
intuitively, not by mere faith, but as some ill-defined aspect of
consciousness. These people often recognize their soul's
oldness—many times it has existed in a human form. Aurobindo,
the great Indian philosopher, believed that when one becomes
enlightened the most immediate experience is that of always
having been and of being forever.
Other people want scientific validation that the material body
existed in time and space, as confirmation of the information they
recall. Studies by Ian Stevenson of 2,000 reincarnation-type
recalls from ten cultures note that children of Burma, India, Sri
Lanka, and Thailand easily remember past lives when they begin
to speak. He validated 204 Indian children's reports of recent past
lives. There are many other such attempts, one being the study of
Bridey Murphy's numerous lives. I take no issue with such reports
because I believe that reincarnation is a fourth dimension concept
and therefore, time-space proofs are irrelevant.
One common factor in all reincarnation doctrines is the
existence of a soul, the source of life, reaching for perfection and
divinity. I believe that we reincarnate so that we can evolve to the
highest level o f human capacity, manifesting the divine and
human nature simultaneously. If the soul could do this in spirit
214 --- INFINITE MIND

form, there would be no reason to return in human form.

Early karmic concepts veered away from mystical religious
explanations in favor of material, scientific ones. Later, physical
laws were applied to karmic reasoning to enhance its credibility.
Today, this logic must be critically rejected. Quantum physics tells
us that even the laws of physics, these supposedly unalterable
truths, are only relative. The natural laws of the universe exist only
in the limited situations described by material reality and certainly
should not be used as arguments for the reincarnation of the soul.
Actually, in the reductionist world view of material science, there
is no place for mysticism, religion, or lifehoods.
Ken Wilbur, a popular metaphysical psychologist, warns
against trying to carry mysticism on the shoulders of physics. He
believes that the material realm is not the most fundamental; it is
the least fundamental with less "reality" than life, mind, or spirit.
Physics in this sense is a study of the realm of least being. Yet,
cosmic determinism called "Infinite Laws" is a frequently used
term to describe the soul's reincarnation in human form. To me, it
seems strange that such rigid determinism could be associated with
a fluid concept like lifehoods. Surely, we cannot determine the
truth about reincarnation using such distorted thinking.
We should accept that mystical truths do not need the "proof1
of science, nor will proof come from material science. Karma has
been described as the acceptable, logical explanation of rebirth
because it is based on laws, even called divine laws, to make the
explanation more impregnable to question. This is a subtle trap
that we humans fall into. If we are really afraid of something, put
a divine label on it, and we all leave it alone. Reincarnation, in
fact, is divine; karmic laws used to explain it are not. Actually,
so-called divine laws are usually moral dictates which are neither
divine nor universal; and more often than not, a "divine law" is
simply a rational belief that has not been exposed as such.
Let us evaluate some karmic laws. Principles of conservation
of energy declaring that energy is transformed but never lost were
borrowed and distorted by karma enthusiasts and called the "Law
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 215

of Parsimony." Madame Blavatsky in the 19th century held that

karmic law does not create anything, but it adjusts everything. On
the other hand, most current thinkers believe that the world
changes by interaction, even chaotic interaction, and not by
deterministic adjustment.
The "Law of Service" has been coined to describe a reason for
reincarnation—we return to the world to carry out our predestined
service work. It is true that all lives have cycles, as a soul must
have cycles o f reincarnation in order to evolve. As humans
become more evolved, they have a corresponding awareness of the
state of the Earth, the humans upon it, and they have more divine
vibrations which they will manifest in service. Service here is an
outgrowth of our change, but not the reason for reincarnation.
When we come into our divine levels of lovingness, we will serve.
It is not true that we will experience divine vibrations simply as a
result of performing service. The former concept is fluid, while the
other is rigid and static.
To summarize, I believe that the concept of laws is so
tremendously final that it does not encourage the human mind to
change. Further, all laws are relative; they are not universal.
Pythagoras taught that although the material world was subject to
laws, "... there is another higher state of being in which the soul
would rise above the laws of the lower world." What we have
called the laws of reincarnation, the ultimate laws, I believe will
not hold up in light of the facts and intellectual scrutiny.
Karma, the companion doctrine of reincarnation, professes
tight cause-and-effect relationships between lifehoods and the
soul. Remember, cause-and-effect laws relate to the time-space
aspects of the physical world, which is not the world of lifehoods
and souls. Furthermore, science tells us that two things may
coexist and even be related, but one may not cause the other. For
example, two lives may manifest similarities because it is always
the same soul existing in them. This does not necessarily indicate
any cause-and-effect relationship.
These cause-and-effect cycles of karma were also encouraged
216 --- INFINITE MIND

by religious beliefs. Biblical references of "an eye for an eye" and

"as you sow, so shall you reap" are examples.
Many writings about karma say that the same enemies
continue to appear in each lifetime until we learn that the only way
to destroy an enemy is to make a friend of him, as if the "enemy"
is the recurring problem to be solved, not "us" and the fact that we
keep attracting such people. Actually, until we have straightened
out ourselves, the cycle will continue and we will attract people
whom we interpret as the same enemy. Simply making friends
with this "enemy" is a childlike, impossible solution, and further,
makes the "enemy problem" a predestined one that is bigger than
we are. I believe that we choose many circumstances in each
lifehood, and no matter how bad these may be, they carry a
dramatic reminder of our unfinished business—that here we have
handled things badly and need to change. Only then will the
"enemies" fade away.
Here is an example of a client who uncovered experiences
where she was killed by Mongols in northern China while she was
a temple priestess. She had been stabbed to death because her
spiritual radiance stopped the Mongols from raiding the village.
She relived three other powerful lives in which she also came to a
violent end, by the sword, by hanging, and by bludgeoning—all at
the hands o f "enemies." This unfinished business persisted for
three lifetimes until startlingly, she discovered that she had been a
spiritual leader each time who had abandoned her spiritual power
on the threat of death. She learned that had she maintained her
power, instead of killing her, her "enemies" would have become
her followers. She began to change when she emotionally declared
that she would never again allow the fear of death to strip her of
her spiritual strengths.
Karmic laws state that we return to work out our social/sexual
problems with the same human beings. Therefore, we will marry
the same mate, we will have the same parents, siblings or friends
reincarnated. Indian philosophy indicates that we reincarnate to
work out our personality problems and to change our behavioral
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 217

traits, and that to understand our humanness we must experience a

life of all five races. I view these reasons as superficial, and based
on ego, personality, and the self level of the psyche, not in the soul
level where there is truly sufficient scope to demand many
reincarnations. I believe instead that we return to evolve as
humans and to become divine. Actually, this superficial reasoning
about personality and self is convenient; it allows us to release
pent-up energy while not requiring us to change deeply.
Karma also decrees that every decision has its deterministic
consequence. We return to a new life because we did something in
the past that we must repay in the present, to wipe the slate clean.
This concept of predestination, a direct outgrowth of cause-and-
effect karma, constitutes the primary reason why many people
reject reincarnation today. However, an enlightened interpretation
of an orderly world declares that decisions are not preordained, but
are arrived at by choice, even if the process is not rationally
understood. Our choices may lead to repeating unsuccessful
attempts to work on the problems from other lifetimes. There will
also be "repetitions" in the sense that one will find common
threads, such as interest in the arts or music or sensitivities to
nature. These are manifestations of skills one has gained.
Some explain reincarnation with the belief that humans must
experience all human weaknesses; all types of earthly relations and
responsibilities, every desire, affliction, and passion; every form
of temptation and conflict in order to understand humanity. This
seems absurd. The limitation o f this logic is the premise that
reincarnation occurs so that we accumulate experiences. Actually,
no experience guarantees learning, and certainly not constructive
learning. Therefore, a person who deeply experiences and
evaluates, and learns on the higher mystical levels, does not need
as many experiences as one who is constantly butting his head
against the same walls, failing to change or gain insight. To evolve
means that each experience in each life gives us more and better
insights. I am sure that some souls neither discover nor use
insights as effectively as others. Likewise, the selection of where
218 --------- INFINITE MIND

we will reincarnate and at what time in societal development

places us in different arenas for experience. For each individual,
there are some growth experiences that are superior to others.
These contain more challenges—often more stress— and present
both the greatest opportunity to remain dormant and potentially
the greatest stimulus to change and to evolve.
Often it is said that old souls are not required to reincarnate as
many times as newer ones. If we accept that the function of
reincarnation is to evolve, then the number of reincarnations is
immaterial. Rather, the only criteria for advanced souls is the
quality of evolution, the level of perfection reached.
The function of lifehoods is not to learn tolerance. In fact, you
can't learn tolerance. That is an attitude that comes with security
about oneself and others. If we handle such big problems, then the
little ones are gone. When man learns to experience divine love,
he loves himself as a divine manifestation, making unloving
behaviors impossible.
As I have said repeatedly, I object to people spending so
much energy trying to solve soul problems on a personality level.
Yes, we can learn from all new opportunities, both positive and
negative ones. There are simple lessons and there are profound
ones. As a person who has advanced to the level of energy field
concepts, who sees the world as one unit, who has touched
spiritual enlightenment, I have little tolerance for empty,
superficial answers that produce nothing. The causes that affect
me spiritually at the deepest level of myself are non-deterministic.
Our soul evolves in an open system. And psycho-physical
development alone does not produce soul evolution; it
accompanies it.
During my lifehoods I have killed five people, and I have not
returned in this one to pay a debt. I have no motivation to do good
because I have killed. I suffered desperately in those lives for these
huge mistakes and returned to know it and to change. The lessons
we can learn from lifehoods are very deep and abiding
lessons—not the superficial ones of karmic reasoning. To work on
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 219

minor behavioral traits as a way to evolve relegates man's higher

knowing, his destiny, and his goal of perfection to the realm of
inconsequential things.
Although the philosophy of karma purports to deal equally
with the body and the soul, most of the writings dwell upon the
material body, not the metaphysical aspects. The very reference to
the so-called "layers of the aura," calling these "bodies," places
emphasis on material things. Never have I seen any reference to a
field energy having layers—there are vibrations, but these don't
have the linear structure of layers. The aura layers seen by many
people are actually the visual perceptual organizations of
information, not irrefutable facts. Smoke does not layer just as
light does not appear as a spectrum until refracted by a lens, water,
or a crystal prism. Then, the layering results from the interactive
process. Describing astral, physical, etheric, and spiritual bodies as
layers created in the auric field is a misnomer. Any qualified
difference in these vibrations, at best, will become a blend.
The concept of auric bodies comes from the Secret Doctrine
o f Madame Blavatsky, published early in this century. She faced a
quarrel between the profane and the esoteric sciences. To
distinguish the astral essence from the physical body composed of
tissues, she posited mystical bodies in the auric field, using the
concept of bodies metaphorically. These metaphors have been
literalized and elaborate psychic constructs have been fashioned
around them.
I would like to discuss here one remaining standard concept
that is common to reincarnational beliefs, that of Akashic Records.
This is a metaphysical metaphor for the belief that everything that
has ever happened in the world is available in some recorded form.
Generally we think of records as written or otherwise recorded
histories or legends. Actually, I believe that direct information of
all the great thoughts and profound happenings in the world from
all civilization is available in the form of organized energy fields.
Probably, someday we will be able to recover directly such things
as the Gettysburg Address, Christ's Sermon on the Mount, and
220 --------- INFINITE MIND

teachings of the Apostles—the profound events of each

civilization. In fact, those individuals who have reached higher
evolutionary levels can tap into and decode these fields as they
"read" their own soul's history. Our new histories will be written
from this reference. I object to the idea of Akashic Records only
when it is used as a deterministic source of the reincarnations of
the lifehoods of people.
Of course, there is the perennial question of Job: "Why do the
wicked prosper and the righteous suffer?" The reincarnationists,
believing in the doctrines of karma, have a ready answer: people
come in to this life to receive their punishment or their reward. I
strongly believe that we make our own choices and that these
choices are not based upon suffering or non-suffering, goodness or
wickedness. We base our choice on what we come in to do, on
where we are on our evolutionary ladder, on what situations we
believe will assist us in removing obstacles, and not always
directly or easily. For example, impossibly difficult situations of
crippling or poverty or prejudice may seem to deter evolution, but
on the other hand, they create such a great stimulus that they may
actually assist the individual in removing all other barriers,
barriers that may be more difficult to the soul than the physically
crippling ones.
It is true; if one probes lifehoods, one may find recurrences of
maimed bodies. My interpretation is that both are connected to a
deeper, unresolved problem. During the lifehood in which the
maiming occurred, the person's role must be probed, not just what
happened, because the handicap in this life is a reminder of
unfinished business of previous lifehoods. The problem will not be
solved until the individual looks beyond the physical or sensory
imperfections.
In this vein, the Bible offers the well-known story of the
disciple John's question, after Jesus healed a man who was born
blind: "Rabbi, who sinned, this man or his parents, that he was
born blind?" Jesus answered, "It was not that this man sinned or
his parents, it's that the works of God might be made manifest in
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 221

him." (John 9:2-3.)

Remember, when handicaps occur, these are opportunities for
heightened development and refinement of other senses, as well as
for profound transactions with the deeper self.
The doctrine of predestination, that by divine decree souls are
born to be saved or lost, is the worst sin some theologies have
inflicted upon the world. Most people who accept karma believe
that somehow we will be punished for our sins. I believe that
neither God nor karma punishes us. Our moral knowledge does an
adequate job. Many people have weakened the bonds of material
consciousness, but have not yet given up religious dogma that was
designed to keep them loyal, but not necessarily spiritual. I
contend, however, that even if we don't have all the answers, we
should not lock ourselves into half-truths about reincarnation, nor
should we embrace any unclear, misleading beliefs that limit our
evolutionary growth.
To me, karmic thinking about man's experiences is like fool's
gold. It is appealing—it enamors us for a time, but there is no truth
there. It is not gold, but only an imposter. We cling to these
untenable theories because we fear being out on a limb, or we
simply don't want to change. I prefer the writings of the Kabbala
which describe reincarnation as a great privilege; I reject the
concept of punishment or misery to pay back debts for previous
misdoings. In the final analysis, lifehoods provide an opportunity
for soul work, not for personality struggles.
We, as physical beings, are not God, we are humans trying to
live through the full range of our souls' potentialities to manifest
divine vibrations. What the soul carries with it between lifehoods,
consciousness and awareness, are points of orientation for the new
venture.
How do we know about lifehoods other than by blind faith?
In the past, most evidence came through psychic past-life readers.
Remember, past life information is carried in the human energy
field, and as such it is available to anyone who is capable of
perceptually tapping into it.
222 --------- INFINITE MIND

Some mystics are particularly skilled in tracing personality

trends throughout lifehoods in order to understand current,
ordinary reality problems. Some are predisposed to read in the
fields only "acceptable" information designed to remove life
stress. Their skills are appropriate for those who wish to work on
isolated problems. At best, psychic readings comfort the mind for
a time, but they also can become unnecessary crutches. At the
deepest level we want truth, particularly when it doesn't hurt.
What is limiting about past life readings, even by those who are
clear channels, is that the information they find concerns the
material, time-space, physical aspects of life—the least important
ones. They retrieve information about who you were and what
you did. This information is then often filtered and translated
through the ideas of karma. Their reports are already laden with
interpretation. Furthermore, the most compelling reason for
recovering lifehood information is to discover our interpretations
and misjudgments, and to change them. It is not to gain material
information.
George Meek believes that past life readings have very little
validity, yet he believes that past life records are a reality.
"Everything that ever happened, every thought ever held, every
word ever spoken is permanently embedded in the fabric of the
cosmos ... on a master recording tape—but very few souls on
Earth today can easily and accurately tap into this material and
get the precise and accurate read-out of data."
Olga Worral, one of the honored mystic teachers, commented
that as she traveled abroad, she was shocked to find what was
happening to people as the result of false teachings about
reincarnation. She met dozens of St. Pauls, St. Johns, and Mothers
of Christ. These phony past life readings were causing a
breakdown in many families; they were leading to immoral
behaviors stemming from information these people were given
about their "soul-mates."
Each individual must discover and relive his own lifehoods.
No one else can do it for us. In every session where I help open the
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 223

mind-field, I see lifehood information, but I never announce it to

the person. I only confirm and then assist the person in putting the
information into perspective.
Many instances of past-life recall are reported during near­
death experiences. It seems that psychic information from a deep
source is available for review. During a traumatic experience, a
person goes into an altered state where the information remains
hidden. In near-death experiences, the person again reaches a deep
altered state where this cloistered information, particularly
lifehood information, is readily available. I find, however, that
near-death experiences happen so rapidly and are so truncated that
only small parts of the experience are ever recalled. Fortunately,
there are other ways that one can become aware of lifehoods.
Another indication of the existence of lifehoods is that infant
precocity and genius have not been explained by heredity. The
statement, "geniuses are bom and not made" allows that past lives
may account for special talents in music, art, or dance— all
material skills. These talented people are extremely sensitive and
mystical, and were attuned to the arts and movement in other
lives—but not always to the specific gift that they currently
demonstrate.
Speaking in tongues, or zenoglossy, is rarely reported during
lifehood recovery, probably because lifehood recall takes place in
now-time, not in past-time; current thought has to be expressed in
one's present language. However, Dr. Ian Stevenson, at the
University o f Virginia, found that among more than 2,000 cases
around the world of children with past life recall, many exhibit
zenoglossy (Omni, January, 1988). When adults recall a lifehood,
sometimes there occurs a childlike babble resembling the
primitive language invented by children for other children, but this
is different than "speaking in tongues."
In my practice, I have found only two adults who spoke in a
true foreign tongue. One woman spoke the lilting rhythm of the
Nubian language of the people of the upper Nile in southern
Egypt. I recognized the rhythmic quality of this language, for I
224 --- INFINITE MIND

had traveled through the Nubian tribes, south of the Aswan Lake.
I directed her, when she broke into the "tongue," to let her
thoughts flow into and through the English language. She did this
without losing the tonal or phrasing qualities of the Nubian, and
she re-experienced her life as a Nubian princess who was captured
to become one of Pharaoh's mistresses.
You may know that there are some religious groups in this
country whose ceremonies are structured around "speaking in
tongues"—each person with a different tongue. I believe this is a
way of experiencing lifehoods on a level where emotions are
released, but the meanings of that lifehood remain hidden—again,
a perfect way to escape responsibility.
The most prevalent method for obtaining early childhood
information is hypnotic regression. There is understandable
confusion in people's minds about regression. I believe the word
"regression" itself should be used only to describe a technique for
uncovering the current life information that is subconscious,
memory of which is recorded in the brain. This is space-time
locked information and can be recovered rapidly by regression that
requires backward steps in time memory.
Regression methods should not be applied to lifehoods where
the information is metaphysical, held in the mind-field. As such,
it is out of time-space and so is not available by regression. Mind-
field awareness is superconscious, not subconscious. Remember,
mind-field information is now, not in the past. This probably
explains why not all hypnotists uncover lifehoods. Those who do
are breaking barriers to mind-field memory, but not by regression.
Hypnotherapists generally work on subconscious material stored
in the brain. They do not as readily access super-consciousness
material in the mind-field.
Hypnotherapists do not understand why some people slip into
lifehoods and others do not; they report that when lifehoods
appear, the regression is an unusual one. I believe that this may
occur during hypnosis when a person automatically catapults into
the altered state, which is where lifehoods are recovered. We do
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 225

know that, when a high enough vibration exists in the mind-field,

lifehoods are available, independent of the technique one uses.
True regression primarily opens the neural memory of this
life, but not the mind-field memory of lifehoods. Classical
hypnosis creates low vibrations in the body similar to those in the
brain. Lifehoods tap into the high vibrations of the field. Dr. Brian
Weiss has extensively reported recovering past-lives by means of
hypnosis. He found that past-life therapy was a quick, vivid, and
relatively inexpensive therapeutic technique for dealing with
emotional and physical problems in this current lifehood (Omni,
March, 1994). Hypnosis, as Dr. Weiss used it, activates a state of
focused concentration which is different from the emphasis of
classical regression hypnosis.
Dr. Weiss and I obtained somewhat different patterns of brain
waves during lifehood recaii. I believe this occurred because his
therapy accessed information primarily geared to the material
world of personality and body. He reported that his patients
exhibited an entire smorgasbord of brain waves. My lifehood work
focuses primarily upon the mystical, spiritual aspects of lifehoods
which I find to be the ultimate source of this lifehood's problems.
Not only do people get better, but they evolve. The brain waves
accompanying this level of lifehood are alpha, with a dramatic
increase in the frequency and quantity of the energy field. This
field aspect, I believe, is the determining factor in the level of
lifehood recall, that is, whether one retrieves soul information or
personality/body information.
Psychologist Wambach analyzed 800 hypnotically-induced
past-life experiences. Although she did not state that these
"proved" past lives, she did comment that it became more and
more difficult to explain past-life recall as fantasy. Her study
involved the physical aspects of previous lives, such as location,
dates, and so forth. These lives were scattered in time and place
and were not primarily the lives of famous people.
Numerous authors have reported that the traditional Chinese
medical use o f acupuncture needles seems to unblock nerve
226 --- INFINITE MIND

channels to release past-life information. Apparently, placing

needles around the third eye, the psychic meridian points on the
right and left shoulders, or on the galactic points of the ears,
encourages the person to experience scenes, memories, and
vignettes o f their past-lives. Acupuncture circumvents brain
activity as it taps directly into the energy field.
Sometimes, after the long and arduous training of physical,
spiritual, and mental development, one frequently has the
experience o f higher, inner initiation. Intuitive psychic facilities
are awakened. This allows for direct investigation of every detail
of lifehoods, which sometimes requires weeks or even months.
The memories that emerge are elegantly detailed, complete with
facts, thoughts and emotions. At this level, the person changes
beyond recognition because the evolutionary process is hyper­
accelerated. Wisdom begins to replace knowledge, and
reincarnation is no longer just an appealing idea; it is a fact.
Many people experience fantasy lives which seem to be
stimulated by recent books, movies, or by famous fables. But if
probed more deeply, these fantasy lives can provide some
amazingly correct information about the subject's real lifehood. It
seems that couching the material in fantasy releases some of the
energy, without requiring the subject to own it totally. The
information, however, is important because it can lead to new
awareness. The caution, of course, is not to take these fantasy lives
too literally.
There are, however, some very clear criteria for
differentiating between symbolic and real lifehoods. Fantasy
experiences flow freely, lucidly, and intellectually, without
vibrational changes in the body. With real life recall there are
hesitations, blocks, physical symptoms or sensations, and
spontaneous emotional charges; and the affect may be animated or
stumbling and flat. A fantasy is narrated and elaborated like a
story, quite removed from self. In actual lifehoods, the memory of
each statement is a surprise for the person, who exclaims,
"Amazing!" or "Unbelievable! And yet I know it's truth!"
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 227

Here is an example. A very upbeat, creative, outgoing,

socially and professionally successful builder suddenly
experienced a slump after he had finished a major project. As I
worked with him, his images were elaborate, copious, and
beautiful. I suspected that reality was just the opposite. He saw
himself as a desert potentate with a huge caravan, animals, harem,
and fine clothes and possessions. He was taking his entourage on
a yearly trek into the depths of the desert to commune with the
divine. This was a colorful and happy pageant which became more
elaborate as the narration continued. I asked him to respond
quickly to my next question: "Is this a real life?" His answer, to his
surprise, was no. I told him that the deeper structures of his mind
were trying to tell us something. I explained that if he had had a
similar real life that fostered this fantasy, memory of that life
would come to him slowly if he did not try to create it, but just
allowed the memory to surface.
It came falteringly. He saw a young man dressed in ragged
sacks, emaciated and stooped, but compelled to discover his
destiny. He was walking toward a vast, arid desert. It took a long
time to reach a place distant enough that he could not be traced.
Here, he lay beside the sparse, stunted growth of the desert in the
daytime, and climbed a small hill to be warmer at night. Each day,
he returned to the desert floor to await insight while he warmed
himself and took nourishment by chewing roots. As he recalled
this experience, his speech was hesitant with spontaneous bursts of
emotion about the hardships, but he revealed no additional
content.
One day he found a long stick which he saw as his staff,
divinely given to him. His emotional state deteriorated until, in his
weakened condition, he became delusional. At times, he would
snap out of it into his everyday, lighthearted patter only to realize
that the sudden depression in his current life was the same.
Eventually, he placed his staff over his body, dedicated his soul to
God, and he purposely gave up his life.
When his awareness returned to his current life, he was very
228 --- INFINITE MIND

touched by these experiences. He commented that this was surely

his life—he had felt it deeply. He wanted to pursue what in that
life or prior ones had caused him to deny his spiritual nature. We
made the appointment, but he never returned. We both knew that
he was not willing to take the next step—what could have been a
glorious step, but one which would have demanded that he change
to honor his soul's need for spiritual power. Perhaps someday he
will be ready.
Children's reports about past lives are probably the purest,
because they don't yet know that "reality isn't that way." Ages two
to four are the most fluid; at those ages, children have only limited
information from which to build an intellectual case for
reincarnation. They produce names and places with a great deal of
affect. Their images are so clear and vivid that they seem surprised
that we cannot see them. If these early recalls are not blocked,
children use them in fantasy play, denying their validity only as
these begin to blend with the experiences of this life. Stevenson,
at the University of Virginia Medical School, sought records to
verify the reality of children's statements about past lives. He
found that 90% of the past-life recall of children who had
reincarnated rapidly was in fact verified by records.
Why can't we remember past lives easily? First, remember
that the information is not recorded in the brain; only experiences
of this life are stored there. Lifehood information is stored in the
field. Early in life, the field is our primary memory bank, not the
brain, because obviously a child has had few experiences to record
in the brain. Also, the importance of mystical information wanes
as we become more dependent upon our biological senses—we
become more materially conscious. And finally, our culture says
that mystical knowledge is not real, so we lose contact with it,
though we never forget. Additionally, there is a personal
motivation to forget the soul's struggles and to be freed from deep
emotions—to repress our soul's unfinished business.
Again, I would like to stress that my techniques for lifehood
recovery do not focus on relieving social pressure or solving
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 229

isolated problems. They are geared toward ultimate evolution—to

assist the soul in its growth toward divinity. During my work with
individuals of all faiths, both sexes, a wide age range, different
races and ethnic groups, and different stages of advancement, I
find a common problem. The problem is not a subconscious one,
but a superconscious one. Each person has had difficulty
experiencing divine feelings or images of God.
At times o f great stress or insurmountable problems, all
people turn to God. If their questions are not answered, or at least
not in the way that they wished, they experience doubt, anger, and
frustration. They continue their problem with God, feeling guilty
and unworthy. Eventually, these feelings become associated with
their parents. If this problem is not solved, no soul can reach its
destiny to become one with God, nor can it manifest a divine
energy. This is the ultimate problem. It can never be successfully
sublimated or circumvented. It can only be eliminated by
recovering the first and all subsequent experiences where
problems with God or divine power became manifest. Finally,
with this information, one has the opportunity to change—again
beyond recognition. The burden is released. Enhanced wisdom,
creativity, higher beingness, and enlightenment are the end results.
Many people tell me that they don't want to delve into past
lives and learn painful things. They don't want to regress. Quickly,
I tell them they will not regress or go into a trance nor will they
lose consciousness. They will only go up in vibrations, expand,
while still maintaining their sense of reality as the mind-field
opens. At this stage, one assumes an active-passive state by
allowing the information to interact with thought—to create
images, to produce all manner of body sensations, and to bring
forth truth.
We never judge the specific information until we see that it
has settled into a pattern. These patterns are both facilitators and
inhibitors. They can be evaded, but not eliminated. We can
examine our role in creating these patterns—what were the
judgments we made and are still holding, and what determination
230 --- INFINITE MIND

prompted our decision to never, ever recall these experiences

again. Despite that resolve, you have been trying ever since to
discover your divinity, and to satisfy your need for spiritual
experiences. You have been running from the very thing you have
been longing for.
Ideally, you should be able to move randomly, and at will,
among any number of lifehoods so that you can understand your
accomplishments as well as your unfinished business. All these
disparate aspects of your soul can be integrated into your current
personality. I also want you to take hold of your own power and to
know that you have the skill and divine guidance to evolve more
rapidly without outside help. If you have patience, you can indeed
discover the patterns of any life as well as the decisions and the
beliefs that are still with you today.
I conclude with this offering of lyric prose which came to me
one day:

The strongest human beliefs arise from the profoundly

invisible reality of God.
No man can become self-realized without belief in his
immortal soul. The fulfilling of human destiny depends upon
what we have become aware of and what our soul has done
with it.
And yet, forgetfulness dims our early remembrances of
this life, and a body veil of secrecy seems to hide other life
experiences as if to insure that this life remains the soul's
primary concern.
The truism—to know thyself will set you free—is
unattainable until awareness of the unfinished business of
childhood expands to include the uncompleted work of
lifehoods.
Then as man's level of awareness—his consciousness—is
fed with these inner knowings, he can command the full
 LIFEHOODS: THE HIDDEN AGENDA --- 231

spectrum of his existences. Only then can he realize

truth— and his soul be freed to exercise his will as the
"Divine Will of God."

As Leo Tolstoy wrote: "Our life is but one of the dreams of

that more real life, and so it is endless until the last one, the very
real life, the life of God."
 C H A P T E R X

HEALING:
The Miracle Of Life
"If the head and body are to be well, you need to begin by
curing the soul."
—Plato, Dialogues

I extol a social consciousness which acknowledges that life

choices can be debilitating and lead to illness; and I applaud a
consciousness which chooses to eliminate illness rather than resort
to common scapegoating like: "I caught my disease from other
people," or "the work-place contamination made me ill."
Both society and individuals must take action to decontami­
nate our living spaces. But the motivation for health must come
from deep convictions that it isn't alright to be ill, from a personal
perspective of suffering, expense, immobility, and loss of contri­
bution. It isn't okay to be an emotional burden or a financial drain
on loved ones or society. And it is not acceptable to contaminate
the environment with bacteria, viruses, and the anti-coherent
vibrational fields of illness.
In other words, your being ill hurts you and everyone else—
because wherever there is illness it distorts the energy field in
which we live. Whether I can catch your bacteria or virus, or

232
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --- 233

you mine, is perhaps less important than the fact that disease,
wherever it is, presents an anti-coherent, disturbed field within the
electromagnetic pool of our mutual lives. Every one of us must be
responsible for all disease and dysfunction.
First, this requires that we replace old, worn-out ideas about
illness. We should tolerate illness which fosters constructive
change, that is, healing the body and/or the soul. And we should
be increasingly vigilant of illnesses or treatments that do not hold
both goals in mind.
Furthermore, freedom from disease is not enough. A broad
perspective of illness demands a widespread, comprehensive and
diligent attack upon human filth, industrial contamination,
poverty, and personally irresponsible and destructive habits which
lower human resistance. We must attack all human conditions
known to lower human resistance and those that stimulate
diseases. This mandates that people, individually and collectively,
assume responsibility and participate fully. Individuals and groups
should not have the freedom to do otherwise. Negligence seems
strange when freedom from illness with vital health is within the
capacity of the world community if we declare that illness is no
longer acceptable.
We are tackling global infectious illness through world insti­
tutions and conferences. There is growing legislation in this
country to provide for the aging ill, handicapped and addicted.
Some insurance companies are contemplating health policies with
lower premiums for good health, although there is no widespread
public acceptance as yet. But I hear only a whisper instead of a
shout demanding that each person assume responsibility for his
health. Social welfare consciousness that we are our brother's
keeper is an inadequate approach to improving world health.
The treatment of illness is coming full circle. Medicine and
healing, which started out together and then separated, are tenta­
tively acknowledging each other's value. Actually, the bulk of
orthodox medicine is still empirical, as is esoteric healing.
Western medicine began with Hippocrates and the Island of Cos,
234 --- IN FIN ITE MIND

where he studied with the Aesculipian healers. Healing was tied to

the religious beliefs of the time. Healing rituals actually preceded
formal religion. Before Judeo-Christian belief in one God, healing
was attributed to many gods and goddesses. All societies had
major healing gods who were invoked to intervene in illness.
Healers held an elevated role and were worshipped in early
cultures, similar to physicians today. As Greek medicine became
more involved with alchemy, the connection between healing and
the gods began to unravel, setting the stage for chemical treatment
o f illness.
Although specifics of early healing practices are not known,
they are believed to have come from India by way of Tibet, where
these "top of the world" peoples were more isolated and could
protect their medical secrets from marauding bands. A Buddhist
monarch is reported to have sent 80,000 medical missionaries to
Greece, China and Egypt. Perhaps this explains why these
countries have a very common medical tradition. India is reported
to have developed the first surgery, followed closely by Egypt.
Moses' seraph, represented by three pairs of wings with a
serpent coiled on a staff, believed to indicate the highest order of
celestial beings, supposedly gave him the power to heal his people
in the wilderness. The universal healing symbol remains some
form of an asp— a small viper or serpent—crossed and coiled
around a staff. These symbols have been described as the Ida and
Pingala or the male and female life energies. Near the top of the
staff, representing the spine, are the spread wings symbolizing the
latent healing power and knowledge contained in the physical
body. All races and societies have used them as symbols of the
healer. The Greek god Mercury was depicted carrying this ancient
staff to herald the medical profession. Understandably, it was
adopted by the American Medical Association.
Occult or esoteric healing continued to develop around the
divine power of regeneration believed to emanate from the chakra
vortices of the body. When the power flowed upward from these
areas, the person's aura became white and the sacred lotus flower
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF L I F E --- 235

at the crown chakra was said to open, bringing divine insight.

Magical healing elements were developed, symbolized and passed
on to each advancing culture.
Healers in ancient Greek healing temples, and later in Egypt,
stimulated a dream consciousness state in patients to initiate the
curative process. In Europe from the 11th to the 18th century, the
ability to heal was attributed to royalty who were reported to lay-
on hands. Philip I of France and Olaf of Norway were particularly
respected as successful healers. In the 18th century, Mesmer
advanced his sweeping new ideas of mind intervention with his
renowned healing. His techniques and ideas were brought to
America with Phineas P. Quimby, who developed a technique
called the Science of Health and Happiness. Mary Baker Eddy,
one of his patients, later founded Christian Science.
During the 19th century there was an upsurge in the spiritual­
ist movement in France, which had originated in African shaman­
ism. These spiritual-healing beliefs were also taken to South
America by early colonizers to become the strong Espiritiste
movement which now sponsors large healing hospitals where
psychic diagnosis, healing, and surgery parallel, and are acknowl­
edged by, orthodox medicine.
The early physicians and scientists were mystics, astrologers,
alchemists, religious and spiritual leaders. Gradually, as alchemy
and herbal treatment took over, medicine lost its magical and
spiritual connections.
Yet even with the advanced information from anatomy and
physiology in the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the physician
was generally still a healer, taking time to understand his patients
and be concerned about their general welfare. But the human
element in treatment, stressing the importance of the transaction
between physician and patient, gradually weakened as medical
schools upgraded standards and focused upon using advanced
technology for diagnosis. Research into the electrical nature of the
body advanced early in this century until a choice was made to
focus primarily on the chemistry of physiological processes.
236 --- INFINITE MIND

As disease became more impersonal, so did treatment. The

treatments of choice became shots, pills and surgery, all disease
and illness-oriented rather than geared to the person and his
healing response. Physicians seemed to use more and more power­
ful and potentially dangerous substances for supposed good, all the
while ignoring and negating man's healing energies.
The use of drugs gathered momentum in medicine during the
19th century, but the discovery of penicillin in the 20th century
declared the science of biochemistry the source of medicine. In a
short time, life was defined as a purely chemical phenomenon.
Earlier treatment concepts that did not fit this pattern were
abandoned. While this biochemical fix handled infectious diseases
easily, degenerative health problems such as heart attacks,
arteriosclerosis, cancer, stroke, arthritis, hypertension and ulcers,
the major enemies of life, were less amenable to chemical
treatment.
In contrast, occult and psychic healers were trained by other
healers. They were selected and initiated into secret orders in
which unwritten information was guarded and protected with the
belief that it belonged to the chosen ones of a higher conscious­
ness. Yet, there has always been a large number of persons who,
without formal training, have discovered their power to channel
energy and initiate healing. Their only source of explanation for
these healing events was the ancient occult literature, heavily
steeped in superstition, metaphysical deductions, and myths. This
apparently satisfied the unscientific, but also caused them to be
relegated to a less acceptable second class. Generally, in modern
times, only when scientific medicine failed to cure complex
diseases did patients seek out healers as a last resort. Fortunately
for them and for health care, there was sufficient success when all
else failed, to bring older healing methods back to the attention of
the so-called enlightened world.
It was also true that modem healers who worked intuitively,
like the ancient healers, were more scientifically oriented and
sought better explanations for their cures. Likewise, professional
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --- 237

individuals trained in medicine and science, who recognized their

mystical and visionary tendencies, began to study the source and
course of illness by studying energy rather than chemistry. From
these beginnings, research on human energy fields began to
appear during the 1970s and 1980s in some of the outstanding
research laboratories throughout the world.
With this historical perspective, it is easy to understand that
medical development resulted in a tunnel vision which lost sight
of the dynamics of life. Medicine has followed the path of
biochemistry to discover life and health and has not revised its
direction in light of new evidence.
During this century, physics has moved further away from a
mechanical model toward a more organic view of life, while
biology and physiology have generally migrated in the opposite
direction by attempting to explain tissue behaviors almost entirely
in a reductionist way by genetics and DNA. Their work did
provide some information about these component parts of a
biosystem, but with it was lost the true notion of the "organism"
as a fundamental entity that generates its own healing and
regenerates tissues to conform to its biologically intrinsic order.
(Truelinger.)
W. Ross Adey, an eminent neurophysiologist, has noted that,
"Over the past twenty years a series of observations has pointed
with increasing certainty to an essential organization of living
matter, physical in nature at a far finer level than the structural
and functional image defined by the chemistry of structures."
Physicists have commented similarly.
In a little more than a century our biological vista has
moved from organs to tissues, to cells, and most recently
to molecules that are the exquisite fabric of living
systems. There is now a new frontier, more difficult to
understand, but of vastly greater significance. It is at the
atomic level that the physical processes, rather than the
chemical reactions in the fabric of molecules, appear to
238 --- INFINITE MIND

shape the transfer of energy and the flow of signals

in living systems (Trullinger.)
Chemical theories contend that biological life as we know it
has a purely chemical source. This centuries-old model is
frequently described as bankrupt, yielding scores of impossible
problems and contradictions about life's secrets. Electrical
theories, on the other hand, insist that there is some electromag­
netic energy associated with all life's processes. The view that life
is an electrical force is gaining recognition. Answers are coming
from nuclear, not mechanical, physics.
We have learned that the body remembers a chemical in its
field long after the chemical molecules have disappeared. The
disturbed field is believed to cause many debilitating aging
diseases, most of which have unknown etiology. We have learned
also that all chemistry is based upon and controlled by electrical
charges and their distribution. Command of these electrical
stimulations controls the biochemistry of the cell and the body.
This has encouraged the practice of homeopathy, the treatment of
field disturbances with chemical fields.
Since the early 1800s, homeopathy was practiced in Europe,
India, Pakistan and Sri Lanka for treating illness. Only recently
has it become more popular in this country as we became alarmed
at the many long-term toxic reactions to current drugs. At the
Research Institute of Glasgow, one drop of a chemical substance
was diluted 99 times until no molecule of the original substance
could be expected to be present. Yet the diluted substance affected
the cells in the same way as the original chemical. Clinical
evidence o f homeopathic effectiveness was the only convincing
evidence until 1963. At that time, a double-blind study at the
Research Institute of Glasgow showed that homeopathic remedies
were significantly more effective than placebos in treating allergy.
The Brain-MindBulletin, December 29, 1986, stated,
Most medical preparations act on the physiological
or tissue level. Homeopathic preparations
reportedly act on a cellular level in accordance with
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 239

a pharmacologic law: a weak stimulus excites life

processes in the protoplasm, a moderate stimulus
impedes these, a moderately strong stimulus
depresses them, and a very strong stimulus stops or
destroys protoplasm.
About homeopathic solutions it was said that,
By serial dilution the substance tends to spread out
evenly in the solvent. The higher the dilution, the
greater the resonance or potency. There is more
'elbow room1in which the medicine molecule can
resonate. As it resonates, it generates ultra-low
frequency electromagnetic wave emanations. The
greater the resonance, the greater the intensity of
the frequency generated. Beyond the 30th dilution,
it is unlikely that any of the original molecules are
contained in the drop extracted. In theory, the
original molecules, acting as templates, have
imprinted their characteristics on the polywater
molecules.
The prestigious British science journal Nature published a
paper by a French allergist, Benveniste, of the University of Paris,
South, in which it commented about "observations for which there
is no physical basis." The editors called the results so startling
"because they strike at the roots of two centuries of observation
and rationalization of physical phenomena." Basically, the article
shows that it is possible to dilute a water solution of an antibody
indefinitely without losing its biological activity. Researchers in
five other laboratories in four countries have confirmed
Benveniste’s results. I believe that within the next few years we
will be able to scientifically demonstrate that homeopathic
chemical fields resonate with the human field, to explain these
remarkable findings.
In like fashion, herbal medicines may indirectly trigger the
same healing mechanisms common to specific therapies or drugs,
or have a direct placebo effect through the vibrational field of the
240 --------- INFINITE MIND

herbs.
Quite beyond the electrical source of molecular life is the
pattern of the organization of the body's electrical field. Sub­
atomic physics failed to give full account of the organizational
features, but quantum physics showed that macro answers cannot
come from collective atomic molecular activity. Now a new
perspective emerges: things are controlled not only from below
upward, by atomic and molecular action, the micro-source of
fields, but also from above downward from mental, emotional
properties or fields.
The existence of energy systems and streams of energy were
professed some 4,000 years ago in Oriental medicine. Disease and
debilitation were seen as malfunctioning energy fields. Treatment
by acupuncture and herbs was designed either to release dammed-
up energy in organs and meridians (energy tracks) or to stimulate
deficient organs and meridians.
Orthopedist Robert Becker's studies and mine give the most
extensive evidence that healing occurs through changes in the
electromagnetic field. At the cellular level of molecular circuits,
there are endless electro-windings as well as a microtubular array
of collagen, that is, connective tissue, the support structure of all
tissue. At every level throughout the body, from cell, to molecule,
to atom, there are structural evidences of the intrinsic electromag­
netism of life. The whole body oscillates It has even been
speculated that the non-resistive superconductive circuits at the
molecular level intimately connect life on a global basis.
This growing emphasis from biomagnetic field studies on the
electrical nature of life has given birth to the new Energy Field
medical specialty. Similarly, because of interest in shamanism
and religious healing rites based on energy field beliefs, there are
the new specialties of medical anthropology and spiritual
ethnology.
Throughout these chapters, I have presented the human
energy field as the mind-field. The characteristics of body tissue
and the nature of transactions with outside fields determine its
dynamic, non-random organization which fits the classical mathe­
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 241

matical chaos pattern. The mind-field is our first and primary

contact with the world. Transactions of the field change it and all
participating fields. Although the human field may have unknown
energies, or even scaler waves, we know that it is composed also
of both alternating and magnetic currents of the electromagnetic
spectrum. As described in the previous chapter, the magnetic
current appears to be the facilitator—the interlock of organism-
universe interaction. Magnetism which exists in the body is the
primary energy of the Earth, of volcanoes and of batteries.
A living field is much more sophisticated with electrical
energies than the electrical energy of inert fields. It is believed to
radiate from small to smaller units: cells, molecules, atoms and
particles. The density of tissue helps determine the frequency and
pattern of energy released. Dense tissues, like bone and cartilage,
present a slower moving, lower frequency, with more sluggish
energy, while lighter tissue such as nerves and glands, produces a
faster, higher, more dynamic frequency.
Dense fields probably absorb more from other fields. We
might speculate that the more fluid the field, the more interaction.
Remember that living things with their more elaborate fields do
select transactions on the mind level rather; they do not simply
react. Furthermore, the living field with its complexity responds
more readily to elaborate fields than to simple, isolated ones. For
example, if one were in Machu Pichu in person, one's field would
react more than if one saw a picture or held a rock from Machu
Pichu.
Otologists were greatly surprised to find that the ear, suppos­
edly a primary instrument of sound reception, also transmits a
frequency. All parts of the body, as well as the ear, are both radio
transmitters and receivers. When we say that a body remembers its
experience, probably it is the field that remembers best; and the
more fluid the field, the more information is available. This leads
us to ask about how field transactions take place. In general, fields
are known to be attracted to like fields that they resonate with;
they are repulsed by those with unlike characteristics.
242 --------- INFINITE MIND

We find that the human field or aura hangs around the body
probably because of the positive electrical charge on the skin and
the negative charge of the field. Every ingress and egress to and
from body tissue is apparently through thousands of acupuncture
points on the skin's surface. Oriental medicine charted these major
points and modem science measured and found them to be lower
in electrical resistance, acting like a couplet between the inside and
outside of the body. These electrical meridians, not physically
locatable but electronically verifiable, seem to be channels for the
flow of this energy. Our research in the Mu Room demonstrated
the extensive flow of this energy in all the body's connective tissue
as well.
When instruments in the Mu Room lowered the electricity in
the air to a near ambient state, aura readers could accurately see
past the skin to the inside of the body. They excitedly observed the
ripples of energy in the minute connective tissue around cells and
between tissues. They described flowing, waving, fishnet-like
structures we know as human connective tissue with its many
different forms such as fascia, ligament, cartilage, as well as the
scaffolding for all cells. Its yellow and white composition we
knew provided different mechanical capabilities such as elasticity,
tensile and shearing strength. But we had never before envisioned
connective tissue as an anatomical, electromagnetic circulating
system.
Adey reported that cells are separated by narrow fluid
channels that are especially important in cell to cell communica­
tion. He believes that these fluid "gutters" are the preferred
pathways for energy field migration because of their electrical
impedance which is lower than that of cell membranes.
Theorists o f complex systems believe that biological
membranes, where the edge of chaos is found, serve as the space
transition between field and tissue. This is the place where "...
information gets its foot in the door—where order and chaos
meet." (Lewin.)
Let's return our attention to the electromagnetic current.
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 243

Although electrical and magnetic components are inseparable, one

can have greater intensity than the other, giving the current
different capacities. The predominant electrical energy of nerve
and muscle is an alternating current with rapid positive and
negative deflection back and forth as evident in EEG, ECG and
EMG graphs. The magnetic current lower in frequency with less
deflections shifts slowly between a positive and negative pole. In
the body, the iron in the hemoglobin may be its primary source.
Both aspects of electromagnetic systems are intrinsic to the body
field, allowing a flow of electrons.
In laboratory tests we found that an increase in magnetic
energy preceded a change in consciousness, emotion, or any
dramatic change in the electrical energy—as though it acted as a
harbinger or facilitator. We know from physics that weak energy
facilitates energy interaction. Becker found that at the location of
an injury, the magnetic energy increased and flowed from the
center of the body outward. This agrees with our observation that
the magnetic flux precedes changes in alternating current activity.
A simple test for "good" or "bad" field interaction is demon­
strated with applied kinesiological manual testing of the muscle
strength o f the arm when a single food, herb or medication is
placed in one's field or held in one's hand. If the muscles test
strong to downward pressures on the arm, the field interaction is
positive and that substance is not harmful to the person. If the
muscles become weakened and the arm cannot resist pressure, the
field interaction is poor and the substance should be avoided. For
example, the fields of poisonous, caustic cleaning substances,
alcohol, coffee, and sugar weaken everyone's field reaction. The
strength of the field can be determined by the same method if the
person being tested simply thinks about a specific food or
substance. Actually, the tester can get the same results if he thinks
of a substance or food while pressing down on the testee's arm and
asking him to respond to the tester's thought.
Concepts of energy field transaction introduce a new perspec­
tive on illness and healing. The body slides into a chaotic reaction
244 --------- INFINITE MIND

precipitating illness and by readjusting, heals itself. Medication,

surgery, rituals, supplements and foods only facilitate the healing
process. The best description of healing refers to the activation of
the body's energies toward dynamic equilibrium, growth and
evolution.
Perhaps the best measure of health is an organism which is
constantly self-healing. Here, healing implies an elimination of the
disturbance and maintenance o f the body's integrity. Whether
conventional or other methods are used, in order to heal, the
person must actively "will" to recover. For best results, all health
procedures must take into account beliefs that inhibit or facilitate
positive attitudes toward cure.
Because medical diagnosis is based on description and classi­
fication o f symptoms and pathological states, the mind and
emotions have been given less recognition. Spiritual and psychic
healers, on the other hand, place primary emphasis upon healing
the soul when it gets off track. They attempt to reach into the
painful and misdirected areas of the soul to gently awaken the
healing response. They believe that the source of all illness is
forgetting who we are. The healing process helps us to remember
that we are divine and perfect beings. They maintain that outer
healing saves the biological life, while inner healing focuses on
belief systems as the contaminating source.
Electromedical researchers believe that each disease or
functional disturbance has its own energy field which must be
reversed before healing can take place. Probably illness is a distur­
bance first in the energy field and healing is the restoration of that
field to health.
Soon we should be able to show unequivocally that field
disturbance precedes all tissue changes. When tissue is diseased,
the problem is already far advanced. Even pain occurs in the field
before it is felt in the body. Energy field evaluations to detect
potential health problems should be the health exam of choice.
Allopathic medical tests should follow when indicated. Such an
assessment will disclose potential health problems perhaps weeks,
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 245

months, or even years before symptoms or tissue changes occur,

and will therefore predict health more accurately.
Do you realize that there is no valid measure of health today?
Health is assumed if there is no pathology or dysfunction. Yet we
have all heard reports of individuals who were declared healthy
following a complete medical exam; then suddenly they were
stricken with a massive heart attack. The seed of the electrical
disturbance that was not detected in the EKG will be evident in the
energy field exam. These comments reiterate that the static models
of illness and healing that have guided treatments thus far are not
so much incorrect as they are incomplete.
Health, then, should be viewed as the perfection and
maintenance o f a dynamic energy field which is flowing, coherent,
and strong, giving it the capacity to vibrationally interact. In his
many writings, Burr stressed the electrical phenomena accompa­
nying all growth and life. He reminded us that the myriad of body
cells, except those in the brain, grow old and die to be replaced by
new cells. The electrical phenomenon remains the only constant as
new cells are created and organized in the pattern of the cells they
replace.
The new electromagnetic model of illness and health is like
this: material tissue ages, gets sick and diseased. It repairs itself,
but eventually entropy takes over and causes deterioration and
disintegration. This is not true of the human field where, by the
introduction of new energy, the field improves, or even becomes
more refined. The field is affected before we breathe, eat, or ingest
substances, making it the first line of disturbance, defense, and
regeneration. Regeneration comes from re-energizing the field,
and hence the tissue.
Fitness, a positive affirmation of a healthy state, is first
characterized by a dynamic complex field allowing a person to
react to situations in numerous adaptive and evolutionary ways. A
fit field is critically self-organized so that it gravitates to the edge
of chaos, its favored position for maximizing and sustaining its
fitness (Lewin.) Stated another way, to be healthy an organism
246 --------- INFINITE MIND

must exhibit dynamic flexibility in all of its systems and tissues.

Recently I saw a vivid example of the old, static concept of
health. A courageous, insightful woman physician called me to the
hospital to see her patient suffering from a potentially fatal heart
attack. She did so at the displeasure of the intensive care unit staff.
I found the patient's energy field to be concentrated in the upper
body, weak and anti-coherent. Her feet were cold and her face
revealed acute stress. I laid-on-hands primarily to ground her field
and to make her more comfortable, for I knew not how to help her
cardiac condition. Intuitively, my hands went to her feet. Within
minutes her feet warmed and she seemed to be experiencing less
stress. In 30 minutes, the cardiac monitoring equipment showed a
stronger, steady condition as she went off to a peaceful sleep. The
supervising nurse who had been observing was amazed because
this patient had not rallied during 12 hours of intensive drug
treatment. By morning she was much improved. It was then that I
taught her how to experience the flow of electromagnetic energy
throughout her body and to consciously manipulate it with
breathing exercises. She progressively recovered in the months
that followed. With cardiac medication and her energy field work,
she is still alive in her late 80s.
Another example is a 65-year-old asthmatic woman with
bronchial congestion from the flu. She had been in bed for several
days prior to directing a small, intense, working conference. At the
end of a long evening she collapsed with paroxysmal breathing,
weakness, tachycardia, and a feeling that she was dying. A nurse
companion reported her pulse became too weak to palpate. While
awaiting paramedics, I stabilized her random, anti-coherent field.
The energy was concentrated in the upper body, streaming out
over the top of her head, and absent in the lower body. As the field
became more coherent, the cardiovascular and respiratory
symptoms diminished. By the time emergency help came, she was
resting quietly and needed no hospitalization.
Lastly, a woman physician with months of cardiac
dysrhythmia, who could not be stabilized with medication, was
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF U F E --------- 247

scheduled for a pacemaker. Knowing of her impending surgery, I

visited her at her home. Since there was no emergency, I did not
lay-on-hands, but I taught her to use breathing to consciously
redirect her energy field from a moderate chaotic condition to a
more coherent one. With one week's breathing practice, the
symptoms of dysrhythmia were sufficiently improved that her
cardiologist cancelled the pacemaker surgery. Several months
later she was allowed to travel by air to professional meetings.
During a trip to China she visited the Great Wall at an elevation of
8,000 feet.
Such happenings are not the result of magic. It seems logical
that when the entire field is weak, anti-coherent, and incomplete
throughout the body, all the electrical systems controlling
breathing and the heart will eventually come into sync with this
anti-coherent field, producing these symptoms. Furthering these
beliefs was the fact that by using a cross plot analysis comparison
of two different simultaneous recordings, the dysrhythmic heart
showed the same anti-coherent pattern as the anti-coherent field.
Conversely, a healthy heart and field are both coherent. By
improving the field coherency, anti-coherency in the breathing and
heart come under automatic control.
Let me review information about normal healing. Injured
dense tissue, like bones and ligaments, heals more slowly than less
dense soft tissue. We attribute this to the slower blood and
lymphatic circulation in dense tissue which delays the removal of
the local acidity produced by injury. Also, the electromagnetic
flow through this tissue is diminished, and slower than in softer
tissue. On the positive side, the magnetic part of the electromag­
netic spectrum is facilitated. This is the energy which we find to
be associated with healing.
During the first few days of regeneration, hyper-acidity from
tissue death is carried away by the circulation—regrowth requires
a more neutral environment. Becker explains the regeneration
process by cell dedifferentiation followed by redifferentiation.
Dedifferentiation of cells, for example, means that a blood cell can
248 --------- INFINITE MIND

lose its unique capacity to generate a blood cell and can be

redifferentiated or transposed into a muscle cell, a nerve cell, or a
connective tissue cell. He believes that the magnetic energy
flowing outward from the site of injury stimulates this. Unspecial­
ized or dedifferentiated cells accumulate around the injury, later to
become differentiated into osteoblasts (bone creators), neuroblasts
(nerve creators), and fibroblasts (creating patching or scar tissue).
These are the body's built-in growth cells which it uses to heal
itself. Becker states that for regrowth of these cells to occur,
apparently about 30% of the normal nerve tissue must be intact to
serve as a catalyst. Yet I am finding instances where the energy
field takes over and operates like the nervous system when it is
defective.
The template pattern for regrowth is provided by the field.
The DNA is known to carry genetic information about cellular
development, but it has not been found to create the form of living
substance, i.e. arms, legs, or noses. Remember, material tissue can
be destroyed but a field, with its holistic properties, cannot be. If
bits were cut out of a field, it would only become smaller. As a
hologram it carries information which guides development and
regeneration. For this reason some leading researchers have
hypothesized that we humans should be able to regenerate not just
tissue but limbs and organs as we learn to stimulate the appropriate
electrical aspects of the body, perhaps when our consciousness is
more evolved.
All healing is a movement toward wholeness with cells regen­
erating along their original healthy plan. Therefore, the regrowth
of complex body areas comes from regrowth of several differenti­
ated cells along each cell's original growth pattern. Becker, in his
extensive studies of animal regeneration, noted that the ability to
regenerate declines as an organism moves up the evolutionary
scale where the cerebral cortex commands the lower neural
centers.
Singukin measured the electrical field around plants as they
healed, finding a current flowing outward from the leaf wound for
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --- 249

a few days—negative at first, and later changing to a positive

charge as tissues multiplied. He called this the "energy of injury."
Becker, using surface electrical measurements, found the same
phenomenon in human limb amputation. I have discovered that the
energy at the injured site, normally stronger in the electrical
component, becomes dominantly magnetic, as do the healer's
hands when performing a treatment. I have therefore entitled the
phenomenon the "energy of healing."
How does the field information system work in healing? Is the
field essential or is it just a relay station? We believe that the
activity of the immune system from chemical secretions of the
thymus, spleen, lymph nodes, bone marrow, tonsils and pineal
gland is the first line of defense in healing. Neuropeptides, protein
amino-acid cells attached to the outside of all nerves, glands,
muscle and bone cells, seem to be the first communication lines of
cellular distress. It is the premier information system for all cells.
Candace Pert, while at the National Institutes of Health, reported
that when neuropeptides connected to brain cells are stimulated,
remote neuropeptides on cells in distant body areas responded
faster than the nervous or circulatory systems could transmit the
information. An energy field relay is the only logical explanation.
Immune cells have been thought to affect other cells simply
by lying adjacent to them. Now we know that they have a remote
telepathic communication capacity. In other words, there is a
communication system attached to each cell which is in touch with
remote cells, not just by direct contact or regular circuits, but by
almost simultaneous transmission through the energy field.
Pert further states that while every cell has some receptors and
combinations of different receptors, one cell might have as many
as 60, while another might have relatively few. These informa­
tional substances get titillated or vibrationally activated to change
shape, often floating and attaching to another molecule, or sliding
laterally around the cell membrane, or even cascading while still
in contact with the internal events of the cell. Apparently it is at
the cell's surface where interface and interactions take place
250 --------- IN FIN ITE MIND

among systems. Pert describes the action as "exquisite

specificity."
Today we know that there are some peptides that are sensitive
to receiving information from body chemicals and drugs. Sensitiv­
ity to a vast array of other information is hypothesized. We have
known about classical information substances, acetylcholine,
adrenaline, norephinephrine. Now it seems that 95% of all
information substances, and hormones except sex hormones, are
neuropeptides causing action from outside the cell. Apparently,
sex hormones chemically affect the cell inside. Neuropeptides are
called behaviorally active because there are similar receptors in
the brain. Although not yet clearly defined, one function appears
to be that of creating emotions. These informational substances
seem to integrate the whole body with a high proportion of action
coming from a distance—and sometimes a rather long distance.
Many body workers insist that all cells have emotional
memory. While the fact that cells are replaced during life points to
new explanations of tissue memory, the scientific facts about
neuropeptides will probably replace the old ideas that the sole
source of emotion is the limbic system of the brain. Pert believes
that subconsciousness is deep down in the peptides of every cell,
not just, as Freud taught, in the lower brain structures.
To summarize, I have presented three aspects of a new energy
field model of healing. Robert O. Becker's work on the cellular,
biological aspects of cells shows that with injury or disease, repair
cells are instructed to go to the injured site to initiate the healing
process. He notes that the increase of the low frequency magnetic
field encourages repair cells to redifferentiate and grow. At the site
of the damage, peptides are released, often part of the clotting
reaction, from damaged cells or, are already circulating in the area.
The local peptides sense that repair cells are there and start the
regrowth process in a very organized and controlled fashion.
Information from my research with the more complex higher
frequency aspects of the electromagnetic field demonstrates that
the mind-field is the source for instruction of the lower magnetic
healing process. This can overshadow, hasten, assist and resist the
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 251

built-in cellular healing process.

Pert's work I believe is the direct interface between the mind-
field and the bio-healing response. The neuropeptide communica­
tion system, a field telemetry system, "talks" most rapidly directly
from cell to cell and from remote to local areas eliciting total
cooperation. I believe also that this exquisite communication
system not only integrates the lower bio process, but it has the
exclusive communication lines between the mind-field and the
senses, to instruct the healing process of the body as a whole, and
local tissue in particular. These three integrated processes I view
as the healing response.
Probably, laying-on-of-hands, touching and manipulating
encourages the release of peptides locally. Although Pert has
carefully described the local information transfer, she did not
discuss emotions and attitudes as factors affecting healing. I
believe this influence is carried to local tissues by way of the
field—a system that can be accessed from distant or local levels.
In other words, the neuropeptide is the receiver and encoder; while
the source o f information can come slowly through the liquid
system, it is rapid through the electromagnetic field. The energy
field system is non-linear because it has no central clearing house
or hierarchy like that of the brain to the body or a cell to a cell.
Rossi believes that "neuropeptides ... are a previously unrec­
ognized form of information transduction between mind and body
that may be the basis of many hypnotherapeutic, psychosocial, and
even placebo effects. These may be more pervasive, flexible and
unconscious than the central and peripheral nervous system ones."
Theoretically, such information can bypass intermediate
processes and have direct input at distant locations from the
source. Thus, neuropeptides seem to be a major dense system for
integrating the whole body structure, to provide a direct interface
with the body energy fields and those of the cosmos. The human
field is an information system operating not like nerves and
telephone wires, but like light and television systems.
It is clear that patterns of thought and emotions trigger
252 --------- INFINITE MIND

specific illness. Likewise, other thoughts and emotions create the

appropriate energy for healing. In cancer, psychological trauma
may be a stronger precipitating factor than a genetic one. Acute
stress and strong emotional states such as depression and anxiety
often suppress activity of T-cells, natural healer cells, and other
immune system elements.
Early work on psychosoma stimulated by Hans Selye pointed
to emotions and the activity of the hypothalamus of the brain as
the mediating mechanism of illness. I find evidence of a deeper
source, probably centered in the emotional organization of the
field. These new biological models are even paralleled by ancient
philosophical ones. Hippocrates stated, "Disease is not an entity
but a fluctuating condition of the patient's body, a battle between
the substances of disease and the natural, self-healing tendency of
the body."
Brendan O'Regan of the Institute of Noetic Science studied
records of spontaneous healing and placebo effects which
provided information for his new healing concept. He viewed the
healing process as a healing response, recognizing that the body
knows automatically how to heal itself. He likened the healing
response to a functional system of seemingly disconnected
happenings acting together in a specific direction. The healing
system, he believed, accounts for self-diagnosis, self-repair, and
regeneration as it serves as an interface between the immune and
nervous systems.
When we finally fathom the healing system's structure, I
believe it will resemble a communication system between mind
and matter. Such deductions lead us inevitably to the energy field
as the means of communication between the internal biological
healing process and the instigating source in the mind.
Spontaneous remission occurs in all kinds of illnesses. Some
patients with tumors also had an infection during the illness which
activated a healing response. When the fever subsided, the tumor
slowly disappeared. O'Regan hypothesized that a blood-borne
factor will be found to account for this. I believe that more proba­
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 253

bly changes occurred in the mind-field that released a coherent

flow o f energy which reestablished a normal field instead of a
tumorous one, again reiterating that healing is a restoration of
harmony in the energy field.
Physicians and researchers are realizing that the placebo or
nocebo component is present in all therapeutic interactions. If one
believes surgery will cure the problem, a placebo phenomenon
occurs, or if one doubts the therapist's capability or the treatment,
a nocebo one takes place. Even diagnostic procedures alone can
induce a placebo effect. Words seem to trigger a patient's recovery
or demise. Attitudes and conversations of the surgeon when the
person is supposedly unconscious are clearly remembered on the
subconscious level, and as shown with comatose patients, may be
the primary placebo or nocebo effect. O'Regan stated, "The
placebo effect is a poorly understood process where psychological
factors such as beliefs and expectations trigger a healthy healing
response that can be as powerful as any conventional therapy, be
it drugs, surgery, or psychotherapy, for a wide range of medical
and psychological problems."
However, the nonspecific factors o f the placebo's healing
response cannot be explained by the current chemical model of
health and disease. An electromagnetic model is required.
O'Regan found that sugar pills, which should have had no
effects upon healing, had two distinct effects based on the
information supplied with the pills. When subjects were told that
the sugar pills were drugs that would heal them, there was a
positive placebo effect. When told that these pills would not heal
them, there was an opposite, negative, or nocebo effect. He
alluded to a study demonstrating the placebo effect of surgery for
angina pectoris and another study showing that 30% of a control
group given a placebo, knowing that chemotherapy caused hair
loss, lost their hair. He speculated that the healing response might
be dormant until a person is confronted with stress, trauma,
disease or illness of some kind. This is in agreement with Norman
Cousins' statement that healing and belief systems work
254 --------- INFINITE MIND

together—the healing system being the way the body mobilizes all
of its resources. The belief system is often the activator of the
healing system.
All of us are aware of the research about the contaminated
environment with the disastrous fumes we breathe, chemicals we
absorb from foods and water, and the electromagnetic radiation
with which our fields resonate. The man-made vibrations are
potent and everywhere, from microwaves, computer and video
terminals, X-rays, and ELF signals from the satellite receiver
dishes and high tension wires. Even chemical fumes from
industry, household solvents and cleaning fluids carry a destruc­
tive field. Geomagnetic forces seem to increase the incidence of
cancer. W. Ross Adey showed possible links between electromag­
netic field exposure and cancer by way of static electrical broad­
casts from cell to cell, assisting cancer cells in confusing normal
cell functioning.
Whenever there is an electromagnetic frequency pattern in the
environmental field which falls within the pattern of the human
field, resonance occurs, immediately affecting cell structure,
probably by way of neuropeptides. The environmental field may
be immediately destructive, disorganizing the human field with all
manner of predictable results, or it may be milder and continuous
with an insidious effect over time.
Delgado's research in Spain disclosed that chick embryos
became abnormal when they were in close proximity to video
terminals. In this country, women who worked at video terminals
produced deformed babies twice as often as other women. Miscar­
riages were three times greater, and stillbirths six times more
prevalent. Animals showed stress reactions around video
vibrations. Probably the new diseases of the future will result from
field interaction with contaminated environmental fields.
The body is particularly susceptible to environmental electro­
magnetism. Life is electromagnetic at the atomic, cellular,
molecular, and systemic level. Life exists and is molded by its
environmental fields. As we discovered in the Mu Room, behavior
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 255

and consciousness are changed by interaction between environ­

mental and human fields.
Broad consideration of the healing principle implicates
societies, humans, individuals, as well as body tissues in the
process. Each is a part of the illness-wellness syndrome. Since I
have discussed this in other chapters, here I will consider only the
illness or health of the physical body, still reiterating that what one
believes about health is what one's health becomes.
Belief systems that are firmly ingrained culturally take on the
power o f absolute law. They not only create many field distur­
bances, but they also determine how these disturbances are
manifest. Here are some dramatic examples. Only recently have
we understood the physiological mechanisms of voodoo death. In
those parts of the world where tribes still cause death by voodoo
ceremonies, anthropologists have for years witnessed, but could
not explain, the phenomenon. These cultures believe that if a
person is condemned to death by a voodoo ritual, he will die. This
has been borne out for centuries, so that all members of the society
are deeply programmed with this belief.
After the elders or shamans sentence the person to death, a
time is then set for the death ritual. The victim is informed so that
conditioning will take place during the interim. On the appointed
day, the community gathers for a large ritual ceremony with
costumes, dancing, music, drums and fire, and often violent acts,
though not toward the condemned. Each of these rituals stimulates
the body, its field and physiology, as well as its mental processes.
Ideally, the sympathetic nervous system should respond with
hyperactivity and vitality. But because of the profound death
programming, this automatic response is reversed and stimulates
the parasympathetic nervous system, and with it, lowers
metabolism, blood pressure, heart rate and breathing until the
condemned person dies.
Doctors complicate matters by expounding their beliefs that
patients should not hold out false hope. It is supposedly dishonest
o f the doctor to believe one thing while the patient believes
256 --------- IN FIN ITE MIND

another. The problem is that during an illness, patients readily

accept the doctor's beliefs. I raise the question, what hope is false?
Hope is hope. We have evidence that so-called impossible things
have happened. The deepest hope or the lack of it, or even
ambivalence, dwells in the mind. In serious illnesses the soul has
a choice, and that choice is easiest when the hope is shared by
doctor and patient. But the hope is broader than life; it is hope for
the soul's best solution. The healer's job is to provide a stimulus
and sufficient energy for this soul to heal if it chooses; if not, the
energy can be used to complete personal preparation, "crossing
over" to life in another form.
Both repressed and conscious mind-field information from
other lifehoods can directly create this-life health problems. These
are broad psychosomatic disturbances if emotions are repressed,
or they are highly specific disturbances similar to what was
experienced in prior traumatic episodes. The mind-field has access
to the soul's memory and delivers instructions to the body tissues.
As an example, one person contracted a major case of shingles
before learning that she was stabbed to death in another life. The
problem was diagnosed by her internist, who was amazed to notice
that the shingles healed rapidly without treatment when the
lifehood was recovered and the dynamics understood.
The source of asthma was found in the field of a physician
who in one lifehood died of an allergic reaction to cats, causing
paroxysmal asphyxiation while he was cloistered in a healing
temple in Egypt. An auto-immune reaction of acute skin rash on
the hands occurred with another person connected with recovery
of a lifetime as a hands-on healer. Loss of memory, fuzzy thinking
and amnesia occurred as another person lived a life of a mystical,
spiritual epileptic.
Lifehood information carried in the field also helps determine
tissue sensitivity and proclivities to various illnesses. One is
already programmed from other lifehoods to compound the
genetic and experiential determinants in this lifehood. Such
information can be triggered into action by current life situations,
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF L I F E --------- 257

showing up exactly as it did time and time before. Many people

know that they are hypersensitive to anti-coherent physical and
emotional fields. What they do not know is that they are affected
in two ways: directly, by the anti-coherent field reaction, and
indirectly, by how the information pushes their current emotional
buttons.
Whatever conditions affect the human energy field will
positively or negatively influence the body's healing capacity. The
idea that the healing response is reserved for healing disease and
tissue trauma must be expanded to include that the healing
response also heals inroads (the field) to the body's function before
clinical or laboratory tests show affected tissue. Healing the field
is as important as healing more advanced tissue pathologies. I
repeat my belief that whenever tissue loses its normal capabilities
there is first a disturbance in the energy field. The field is the
location of the primary interface. It first contacts other fields and
serves as the direct body ingress.
If the healing response is automatic, accessing the chemical-
and energy-field levels of information, then what goes wrong
when healing does not occur? Following my discussion that life is
an electromagnetic fact, it seems logical to believe that the
primary breakdown in the body's healing response is in the
electromagnetic system. Specifically, the problem is in the flow of
electromagnetic energy, its strength and range of vibrations, as
well as its coherency. To say it another way, when consciousness
or awareness is cut off from an area, stagnation occurs, creating a
functional health problem. Or, when anti-coherency or lack of
energy exists in areas of the body, pathology and degeneration
occur. Electromagnetic hyperactivity, likewise, overstimulates
tissues.
Probably all diseases are connected with a break in the flow
or a disturbance in the energy field; this is functionally transferred
to the organ system with ultimately destructive consequences. By
the time organ systems are involved, degenerative changes are
already occurring. In the future we should be able to diagnose field
258 --------- INFINITE MIND

disturbances by an aurascope and to treat them months or years

before they upset physical tissue. Cancer may be one disease that
can be arrested by such early diagnosis and field treatment.
An eminent hematologist recently told me about his new
findings regarding metastatic diseases. Both cancer and
thrombosis are metastatic in nature, where bits of tissue or blood
clots move into the circulatory system and block its flow.
Apparently it is this metastatic characteristic of cancer that causes
death, and not the tumor p er se. His research disclosed that both
cancer and thrombosis are associated with a faster blood clotting
time. He further alluded to anaphylactic shock, or acute allergic
reactions from such things as bee stings, causing an immediate
capillary paralysis of the circulation and possible death without
warning. He reiterated that the anaphylactic shock occurred
sometimes before the injection needle touched the body.
Obviously, the initial shock was registered in the field
first—followed by a shock to the circulation. We discussed my
observation that increased flow in the energy field occurring when
healers lay-on-hands might improve blood circulation, delaying
clotting time.
As energy field blocks are removed and energy flows, the
neuropeptide information chains are apparently activated to
facilitate normal healing responses. Thus it seems obvious that
energy fields have an immediate, direct effect upon the healing
response as well as a long term one. When all conditions are ideal,
the healing response will take over and restore health without
external help. When this does not occur or is slowed, the best and
most natural treatments are those which directly impact the mind-
field. I believe every debility and dysfunction begins, continues,
and stops first in the mind-field.
Well-documented spiritual and attitudinal practices can cause
temporary improvements in the field. Prayer may immediately
submerge unsatisfactory belief systems. Meditation and imagery
can quickly manipulate and stabilize the field. But unless these
permanently change the field to make it more coherent, so that the
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --- 259

energy flows unimpeded, the disease will persist, recur, or take

another form. The ideal antidote is to live a life that by its very
nature is constantly self-healing.
The miracles of healing throughout the ages have never been
explained scientifically. But two requisites seem essential for these
miracles—the power of divine thought and its associated emotion,
love. Some persons call on God to heal them; others open
themselves to love. I know these to be the same, releasing in or
through the person the power to heal. In that sense we are all
healers of ourselves and others. For many of us these powers are
but under-developed.
Testimonies by those who were apparently cured by prayer
and documented cases from Lourdes and other religious spas are
legion. Recently three leading cardiologists stated that doctors
should pray for their patients. They personally believed their
prayer assisted their patients' recovery. What they apparently
overlooked was the highly coherent vibrations these doctors
provided to their patients.

A professor of medicine at the University of California, San

Francisco, and staff cardiologist at San Francisco General
Hospital, conducted a ten-month double blind study of 393
patients at the Coronary Care Unit. Two comparable groups were
randomly selected: 192 patients were prayed for by outside
groups, and 201 patients had no prayer intervention. They found
that the prayed-for subjects suffered fewer complications. Only
three required antibiotics, as compared with 16 of the control
group. Only six suffered pulmonary edema, compared with 18 of
the not-prayed-for group. None of the prayed-for group required
tubular drainage. Twelve of the controls did.
Self-healing, which has been called unorthodox in the past, is
becoming more popular today. Some physicians limit their
practice to patients who will cooperate fully by following their
health regimes, even as far as giving up tobacco, alcohol, and
losing weight.
260 --------- INFINITE MIND

I have created what I call "Mind Mastery Meditations,"*

which are self-help healing procedures to improve the energy
field. These can be applied to broad categories of illnesses:
paralysis, hypo- and hyper-dysfunction, immune deficiency, and
to cardiac and orthopedic disorders.
Public curing ceremonies, healing rituals, healing myths and
cultural rites have been used as primary healing modes
throughout history. Their efficacy is not easily evaluated because
of limited systematic records, diagnosis, or information about the
longevity, mortality, morbidity or survival rates from a disease. If
the criterion o f consumer satisfaction was used, these healings
probably rank higher than those in our Western medical practice.
There is today a growing interest in shamanic healing
practices and non-Westem medicine by the World Health
Organization, and the Agency for International Development.
They are seriously considering incorporating this form of
alternative medicine into world health plans for areas where
health costs prohibit the use of Western medical procedures. I
believe that shamanic group healings with their use of sound and
rhythm to reorganize the human energy field have sufficient value
to be included in standard medicine as well.
Contrary to the tenets of Western medicine, shamans believe
that illness and disease come from incorrect relationships between
man and his environment, the mystical and physical worlds, and
fellow beings. Illness is thought to be as much a condition of the
community and social system as of the individual. Therefore,
curing rituals do not clearly separate and distinguish between
religion, myths and medicine. The healer practitioners work on
many levels to restore harmony to nature and society. They are
not restricted to a specialty practice. These non-Westem energy-
field methods probably have less direct effect upon bacteria, virus
and parasites, but they provide more stimulation to the healing
response.
*M IN D M ASTERY MEDITATIONS, Malibu Publishing Publications,
Fall, 1996. P.O. B ox 4234, Malibu, California 90264, (310) 457-4694,
www.m alibupublishing.com .
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIF E --------- 261

All healing rituals and ceremonies stimulate mystical levels

of consciousness. In fact, they are directed toward the spiritual or
mystical aspects of illness and healing rather than the disease or its
physiological components. When shamans diagnose, they focus
on consciousness problems, not the pathological entity.
There has never been adequate explanation to account for
these apparently miraculous shamanistic cures, other than the
placebo effect. Anthropologists have attributed them to
psychosocial support and changes in status and security of the
person within the group. But from my observations of many
healing rituals in the primitive cultures of Africa and the Pacific
Islands, I believe there are more specific and profound
explanations. All major ceremonies are accompanied by drums,
chanting, rhythmic music, and dance. These carry dramatic
sensory stimulation and symbolism. Participants seem to know
that whatever happens requires a progressive build-up, a
continuation and termination. Such ceremonies last anywhere
from hours to several days. Often many people participate,
including the healer, the family members, and the community at
large. The sounds are low and rhythmic, regular and slow in the
beginning. The movements are continuous, downward, stomping
movements, sometimes staccato and sometimes undulating, all
grounding the electromagnetic frequencies. The monotonous,
repetitive sounds encourage a trance-like consciousness in which
the sensations from the material world lessen and mystical
awareness grows. A powerful group energy-field is created, low in
frequency, which seems to sedate the ordinary senses and heighten
the extra-sensory ones. This initial phase is followed by a gradual
heightening of sound, a quickening of movement, and an increase
in pitch and frequency of the drums and chants. These high
frequency, high amplitude vibrations move the consciousness
higher and higher into the spiritual realm, often with tetanic
contractions, rigidity, great physiological stimulation, and
emotional excitement. Such hyperactivity may result in physical
262 --------- INFINITE MIND

exhaustion and collapse.

In these states the group field is expanded to include the full
frequency spectrum, and it is so strong that the field transaction
with the ill person is profound. Everything is alive and accessible.
Because this healing field is maintained for so long, the healing
response is not only powerfully stimulated, it is also nurtured.
Disease fields have their own unique patterns which perpetuate
themselves, so short treatments of the field are less effective.
We know that overdoses of drugs and chemicals and even
herbs often create unforeseeable long-term repercussions. But
overdoses in the energy-field are probably self-terminating by
stopping the field transaction. An energy field not only transacts,
it selects and it also terminates interaction with a barrier field
response.
The meaning of these rituals to the group and individual
cannot be underestimated. One component of illness seems to be
isolation and alienation, fostering a sense of abandonment.
Actually, a major part of healing is a re-identification, or a
rebonding with people. Energy-field healing centers of the future
must take into account such group healing rituals. Here,
individuals will be encouraged to create self-healing rituals using
sound, color and movement which have deep meaning for each
person.
The practice of wearing copper, crystals, semi-precious stones
or amulets comes from early herbal medicine and shamanism.
These may be effective if the person believes that they have
magical powers to heal. Crystals held by healers may focus and
make more coherent the healer's energy, but there is no evidence
that any of these alone has any measurable effect as a healing tool.
The elusive relationship between doctor or healer and patient
is an emotion-laden connection which carries many messages. We
are aware of the importance of gestures, touch and words to
relieve anxiety, provide hope and stimulate healing. Less well
accepted is the direct field-to-field, patient-healer interaction
which provides immediate, pure information that is not
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 263

consciously offered. When both modes tell the same story, an

impact is assured. When these differ, the patient feels confused
and ambivalent.
Many authors have reported clinical evidence of the healing
effects from hands-on healing. Elmer Green with a Menninger
Clinic team found that healers produce bursts of electromagnetic
energy when they direct their efforts. The surge from meditator-
healers surpassed that from non-healer meditators. Some healing
surges were as much as 1,000 times greater than those recorded
during emotional responses. Also, they were negatively polarized
like the auric field.
My research has taken a different approach, geared to the
scientific recording of the energy patterns of individuals and the
energy transfer between healer and healee. I tried to understand
the phenomena of energy healing by simultaneously recording the
auras of both healer and healee during a hands-on session. From
hundreds of recordings the following information surfaced.
At the onset, both fields are distinctly different in amplitude,
frequency spectra, and patterning. The healer's field is stronger,
containing a wider band of frequencies; it often displays a unique
frequency pattern when healing. Healers creating the strongest
vital field carry the complete spectrum of colors. They are also
very successful at shifting their field to affect many illnesses
(Exhibit 10).
Our data show that the auric field turns red when there is pain.
It also becomes red during strenuous extended physical exercise,
and during emotional pain red combines with orange when anger
accompanies the pain. The escape from pain comes through an
altered consciousness, with white vibrations in the aura. These do
not replace the red, but minimize its intensity (Exhibits 21 and 22).
Painful diarrhea also displays a dynamic red field combined
with a wide green spectrum frequently representing a transitional
state (Exhibit 23). Healers who remove pain display an intense
blue-violet-white field which eliminates the patient's red pain
vibration (Exhibit 8).
264 ---------- INFINITE MIND

Blue constricts blood vessels, removing swelling and

therefore the throbbing of traumatic injury. Blue-violet calms
muscle spasms and tensions and lowers the hyperactive state. Pain
either decreases or goes away, and the person experiences
relaxation, calmness, feelings of comfort, peace and tranquility.
Muscle soreness, common after extended exercise, is lessened.
Insomniacs and restless babies are lulled to sleep. Blue and violet
also calm agitated emotional states and anger, and may ease
depression by moving the person into a higher consciousness state.
Let me caution, however, that for treating emotional states, there
is no one sure color vibration.
Healers specializing in tissue regeneration carry a complete
color spectrum with an elaborate red spectrum sometimes
resembling the double helix of the genetic code. Emilie Conrad, is
the only healer who presented this unique red spectrum. She is
also one of the few proven tissue regenerators (Exhibit 8).
There are times when no transaction takes place between the
healer and healee—both fields remain separate, with no field
interaction or change in the ill one's symptoms. For some reason
these fields did not resonate. If a healing transaction occurs, the
healee's field changes remarkably toward a complete, strong,
coherent one, often becoming identical with the healer's. The
healer stops work when this occurs (Exhibit 10, Healee).
Because these laboratory findings are objective, testable
happenings, the healing relationship should not be described as
simply a placebo, which refers to an end result without
understanding the phenomenon. Healer-healee interactions are
understandable. The direct, powerful field effects are not illusory;
they are to be expected.
Healers can quickly and safely remove anesthetic from
patients following surgery. Anesthetic is known to be stored in
tissues, taking some time to dissipate through regular circulation
channels, thus slowing the healing process. Probably more
accurately, the field which permeates all tissue initially holds the
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 265

anesthetic. To remove it, the healer increases the field flow of

energy in the viscera where circulation pools as she allures the
anesthetic field to the body's surface where she literally attaches it
to the field of her hand and removes it from the patient.
Beginning healers frequently experience numbness in the
hands and arms. With heavy anesthetic they may experience a
mild anesthesia themselves until they learn to direct the anesthetic
up their arms and out the elbows. As the anesthetic is removed
after 15 to 20 minutes, the patient rapidly becomes aware of his
surroundings, color returns to his face, circulation improves and
breathing deepens. Others in the room may smell a strong
anesthetic odor.
Hands-on and healing by one's presence emphasize the
transaction between two people, each with an intent—one to
become well and the other to serve as a catalyst. I believe the best
healer does not attempt to heal; that belongs to the healee. But
rather, the healer intends to present a positive, enlightened
presence to manifest a strong, radiant, complete field to nourish
and encourage the ill field to change. Ideally, the transaction
should reinforce the healing response with the desire to heal
oneself. This means that the patient must tap into personal
strengths rather than weaknesses. (Anyone who has ever spent
dreary days in the ill fields of some conventional hospitals, with
rushing doctors and tired nurses who punch the clock, dole out
treatment schedules, and provide for bodily wants, yearns for
friends, home and a healing environment.) The healer must
provide a model o f vibrant life. Who and what he is, is as
important as his ability to "run energy," select vibrational
spectrums, and direct it to the ill areas. Such is a powerful charge.
Healers are often labeled as spiritual, psychic, or energy
healers, as though these were different approaches. One says he
asks for divine intervention; another calls on guides and mystical
powers; and the third, quite rationally, senses the ill field, notes its
strengths and weaknesses, and consciously screens and sets a
course of action.
266 --------- INFINITE MIND

A beautifully spiritual Jewish healer used meditation to

cleanse herself before healing. Her frequent image of Jesus, while
it seemed to hold great meaning, perturbed her because of her
religious background. At first she adamantly rejected the Christ
symbol. At one stage she sought professional help to understand.
Finally she received the key: the Christ was a powerful symbol of
love which could rule over death. With acceptance of the power of
love, her capacities as a healer bloomed. At times when she
entered a room, healing took place.
A psychologist, David McClelland, discovered a phenomenon
now called "Mother Teresa's effect." When Harvard University
students watched a British Broadcasting Corporation documentary
of this remarkable nun, their immune systems produced more
immunogloblin A, an antibody which fights colds. He concluded
that despite some students' dislike of the film, the filth of the
surroundings or Mother Teresa's techniques, the strength of her
"tender, loving care" boosted their immune systems.
Actually, spiritual, mystic, and energy processes are not
different. They refer to the different ways that the healer prepares
himself, and to how he explains his results. In actuality, every fine
healer uses all o f these modes. Each expands his level of
awareness into the mystical, raises his vibrations to the level where
he can communicate with divine vibrations, experience lovingness
and sense the healee's vibrations as he creates a vibratory field.
During healing, the awareness state is not an everyday one;
creating this state sometimes takes time. Therefore, it is
understandable that some healers develop elaborate rituals to get
themselves prepared; but probably these do not directly determine
the results of the healing.
Some healers pray for divine guidance and ask that nothing
from their field except the positive energy be allowed to enter the
healee. These healers do not understand that nothing from their
field can enter another unless the other allows it to do so—unless
his field resonates with the healer's. Therefore, the healer had best
concentrate on radiating the purest and the highest vibrations,
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 267
rather than dwelling upon such personal rituals.
The emotionally appealing humbleness of saying that one is
only a channel, a conduit, or an inert circuit is also not helpful in
a healing relationship. If your presence assists healing, you are
more than a mechanical circuit; you are an important link; you are
divine energies manifest. While you can be humble in view of the
profound changes which take place, you are dynamically a part of
what happens. To acknowledge it strengthens you. To be "merely
a channel" weakens you.
Many healers diagnose disease by screening the body with
both their hands and their mind. This can create a problem if it
locks the healer into the old disease concept approach. In most
instances, except possibly injury, the problem is first a field- and
secondarily a tissue-disturbance. The overall field must be
changed if there is to be more than just a change in symptoms.
Likewise, the field carries both general and specific information
about the illness. Some trained healers feel heat or cold in the area
of pain, interpreting heat to mean inflammation and cold to be
stagnation or lack of circulation. Prickly feelings are interpreted as
regrowth. Others see forms in the energy field—blocks, breaks,
colors and shapes. Over time, healers learn to associate these with
symptoms and diagnoses. These are elaborately described in
Barbara Brennan's book, Hands o f Light and Rosalyn Bruyere's
book, Wheels o f Light.
The capacity to look into the body and see with the
penetration of a microscope is wondrous, but may also seduce a
healer into becoming involved with the material, spatial aspect of
illness. This emphasizes the disease element rather than its source
or the goal, health. There are healers who lightly record all these
sensory impressions, not working on any one in particular, but
allowing their attention to culminate in the wisdom of knowing.
This makes beginning healers insecure, but it offers the greatest
security for the highly evolved.
Many healers develop techniques for treating specific
illnesses that are particularly successful. When I open the mind-
268 --------- INFINITE MIND

field o f such healers, I frequently find their motivation coming

from other lifehoods. A very successful nutritionist wondered why
she was so compelled to work with AIDS patients and why she
agonized so deeply when they took a turn for the worse. During
our work she found her answer. In the early 16th century, she had
been a leper in Europe, imprisoned to keep her away from people.
Leprosy was the most socially stigmatized and misunderstood
disease of that time. Unfortunately, AIDS is today. She escaped
the prison to live as an outcast in a remote cave. At night she stole
food; by day she sold it in the markets, posing veiled as an old
woman. She existed for many years in the midst of people, yet
totally isolated and without identity. It was the emotion of this
miserably sad life without hope that was reactivated by any
worsening conditions in her AIDS patients.
We have observed that many whose life's work is healing are
considerably overweight and frequently in poor health. You may
wonder why this occurs, and why they do not heal themselves.
There is a common belief that in healing one gives of one's own
energy, which creates systemic problems in the lymphatic and
circulatory systems. To remain in altered states for long periods of
time without grounding oneself in the lower Earth vibrations does
create real field problems, and disturbances in the alkaline-acid
balance in the blood.
But I believe these are not the only sources of poor health
among healers. The cause lies deeper. Perhaps the motivation to
help others comes from a genetic weakness that led to a long
history of illnesses. Possibly, many healers are not emotionally
secure. Like many of us, they have not conquered their soul's
problems. But unlike average people, their poor health stands out
to be criticized. The profoundly satisfying experience which
comes to the healer when assisting another does give superficial
comfort, peace, and belief in oneself which should ideally
facilitate one's evolution. But these experiences can be used to
delay the search for one's own deep unfinished business. These
healers do have a disturbed physiology and they also heal, two
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 269

factors which coexist but are not related in a cause and effect
manner. I find that when satisfaction from healing relationships
becomes a defense to block the deeper emotional needs of feeling
worthy, the systemic problems are inevitable. We may praise
healers who are compelled to heal. On the other hand, compulsion
may come from personal insecurity rather than from heightened
social awareness. The most effective healing occurs when one is
so full and rich with divine energy that it will manifest wherever
one is; it is not so much healing as it is sharing the abundance.
There are as many effective healing techniques as there are
practitioners. Some heal remotely by thought. Our inability to
understand distant healers makes us think that they are even more
remarkable than contact healers. But remember, one's energy can
be controlled by thought. If one successfully projects energy via a
thought-field, one can transmit energy over great distances with
specific intent. First, the healer must believe that he has the power
to do so. For the healing transaction, the healer with a strong field,
focused through intent, will provide a coherent, powerful energy-
field. If there is a healee with a different, hyperactive or deficient,
anti-coherent or diseased field, who at some level wishes
assistance, there can be a positive connection. Without a positive
field transaction, the healing response does not occur. There must
also be sufficient transaction time for the healee's field to change.
Likewise, there is a termination time when the two fields have
become unified, when no more interaction can take place. At this
point, the two fields move apart. For the healer, this is a time of
lowering the field pressure and leaving the healee's field to process
its energy without help.
Lastly, the healer should assist the healee to consciously
recognize a feeling state, and to return to that euphoric sensation
that all is well and that the body is healing. With quite ill people,
I encourage them to revisualize the healer-healee experience and
feel the fresh energy pouring into them. Here, they learn to process
the environmental electromagnetism. And finally, each healer
should as soon as possible teach the person to move energy into his
270 --------- INFINITE MIND

own field. (See M ind Mastery M editations)

I have not discussed the new energy field computer diagnostic
equipment and generators, the Oriental medicine field diagnostic
techniques, Chi Gong or Yoga which may demonstrate
effectiveness in healing. Before I commend them, I await
electromagnetic testing to discover what about the field provides
keys to disease which are purportedly sampled or cured by these
instruments and techniques.
For 30 years I have sought a chemical-field model of health
that reached to the cellular source of disease, one that would
provide the missing link to the mind-field model to complete a
holistic electromagnetic-chemical picture of health. People
repeatedly asked me how changes in the mind-field affect specific
diseases, or more definitively, how energy fields directly alter
enzymes, free radicals, T-cells, or body proteins—all somehow
connected with diseases. While these substances are known to
have electrical charges through their atoms, a neat global
connection eluded us. I thought it was faulty logic to seek
correlation between things that didn't belong together, like field
patterns and specific chemicals. If cause and effect existed, these
would emerge through some complex chemical patterning. But
none existed.
Homeopathic research has shown that chemical fields are
more potent than the dissolved chemicals. But homeopathy,
although based on a field concept, was still allied to the old
medical model of disease in that a homeopathic remedy was
merely substituted for a chemical drug to cure a specific
malfunction. Also, electrically charged particles are at the core of
blood chemistry, but again blood substances were always
measured as deviations from a mean, as though each item had its
unique imprint on disease.
So, with excitement I discovered the Life Balances Health
Program developed by John Kitkoski, a genius biochemist. For 25
years he has researched the patterns of minerals, vitamins and
blood proteins in a new way (Smith). Kitkoski researched and
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 271

cured animal disease by balancing blood chemistry before he

successfully applied his methods to humans. His organization,
Life Balances in Spokane, Washington, has prepared physicians'
manuals and training sessions to carry out their stunning
procedures.
Both Kitkoski's models and mine exist to improve the body's
ability to adapt—health— and to cure disease over time by
removing the cause. This program is not fast, but it is sure. Both
involve people in their treatment so that they become accountable
for their own health. By working with these treatments
simultaneously, one can incorporate the conditions of a more
stable and dense cellular electrical field with the non-material,
rapidly changing electromagnetic field.
Kitkoski uses a simple framework of the acid-alkaline balance
in the blood, along with the deeper, intricate patterns and
proportions of blood substances which enable cells to function
properly. He reminds us that the life and health of all cells result
from an interaction with the fluid systems (particularly the blood)
which carry the nutrients and facilitating substances to the cell
membranes. Here, the conditions of blood, the cell membrane, and
molecules allow for osmotic interchange of inner and outer cell
substances. Metabolic chemicals are forced out of the cells while
fresh supplies enter. Remember, the cell membrane of connective
tissue with its piezoelectric capacity has the capacity to carry
electrical charges.
The emphasis on acid-alkaline blood balance came from
Kitkoski's discovery that when the balance was disturbed, the
blood could not absorb minerals and vitamins, regardless of the
food or supplements ingested. The balance was upset by eating
habits; toxic contaminants in air, food and water; and chemicals
from drugs—tobacco as well as consciousness-altering substances.
These enter the blood stream and become lodged in the cells,
disturbing cell function.
The common belief among body workers that tissue
remembers is confirmed by the fact that the mind-field flows
272 --------- INFINITE MIND

throughout the body and toxic poisons are harbored in the more
dense form of the cells. If either field condition is less than
optimum, the cellular effectiveness breaks down and disease and
malfunction occur.
The form of disease or malfunction is directly related to the
areas weakened by disuse and injury and to the genetic
susceptibility of each person. "Any symptom can be traced back to
some tilt in the blood." (Smith). Kitkoski believes that illness is
not due to simple mineral or vitamin deficiencies, but to the
complex ratio that enables metabolic processes to work.
The treatment for reestablishing the acid-alkaline balance is
electrically synergizing of acid substances with their positive
charges and alkaline ones with their negative charges. Inside each
cell these positive and negative charges create a small battery
providing the energy for cellular life. The specific Life Balancing
procedures are as exquisite as the model. In water or milk, one
takes special electrolytes with balanced positive and negative ions
o f the same dilution as the blood. Based upon a blood test, one
drinks ionized mineral drops in acid fruit juices. Other mineral
substances might be recommended, based upon a computerized
analysis of changes in blood chemistry.
Acidity is required for blood mineral absorption. Kitkoski
found that drinking fluid containing all the necessary electrolytes
is the best way to maintain the fluid electrical balance so that the
cellular exchange improves and starts to heal itself by dumping
toxic substances which have lodged in the cell. In turn, cells
generally and completely detoxify themselves. This is quite
different from detoxification using a homeopathic substance for
each specific chemical, mold, fungus or gas. During treatment,
symptoms may be exaggerated temporarily as is generally the case
with any detox program. The level of discomfort is determined by
the relative extent of the imbalance, the cellular condition, and the
individual response.
I have been asked how acid-alkaline detox differs from diets,
colonics or chelation. First, these are geared to minimizing
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 273

symptoms or temporarily clearing out some of the gastrointestinal

or blood toxicities. These are not based upon altering the cellular
function so that it detoxes itself. Therefore, these treatments take
less time but give only temporary results. They do not eliminate
the cause. Colonics may offer some relief from congestion, but
there is no evidence that major toxic substances remain in the
intestinal wall. Neither does improved diet insure acid-alkaline
balance and better cell function. Nor does blood chelation or
filtering create a balanced blood picture—at best, it only
temporarily removes some blood contaminants.
I am particularly enthusiastic about Kitkoski's program
because it works. I know as a participant and from the progress I
have observed in others.
Today, most people living in North America have an alkaline
blood condition. The earth, water, snow, air, plants and even lower
forms of animal life are more alkaline than they were before.
Vegetables grown in this environment have less balanced
electrical systems. Amphibians, fish, alligators, salamanders, and
even birds have been found to have reproductive problems from
the estrogenizing chemicals in the environment, all of which are
alkalinizing.
We in consciousness research have found that as persons'
electromagnetic frequencies go up, as they evolve, many become
ungrounded. This means that their field loses its lower frequencies
or the acid-reacting positive ions, which are replaced with more
alkaline negative ions. Furthermore, these people gravitate to
lighter vegetarian foods with higher mineral content, some of
which are more alkaline. Women particularly seem to fall into this
vicious cycle; they have higher electromagnetic frequencies; they
are often ungrounded; they eat fruit and vegetable diets with less
acid-producing substances; and they have lower hemoglobin, less
energy and weaker immune systems. Kitkoski and his associates
are particularly sensitive to these destructive biochemical
conditions in women.
Although Life Balances does not focus on specific diseases,
274 --------- INFINITE MIND

the improved cellular condition cures them. Additionally, less

significant but annoying conditions such as rough dry skin, minor
rashes, chronic Candida, nail fungus, recurring muscular aches and
complaints, chronic sinusitis, throat irritations, gastrointestinal
disturbances and hypersensitivity miraculously lessen or
disappear. The problem was a general cellular electromagnetic
imbalance caused by a stressed chemistry and consciousness.
We have known that cells throughout life regularly replace
themselves— some take months, others longer. However, we have
not understood why new cells don't operate perfectly but tend to
inherit the problems of the old ones. Old injured back cells seem
to perpetuate new injured back cells. I believe the template for this
maladaptability or cell chaos existed in the imbalanced
electromagnetic and biochemical blood fields o f old cells.
Therefore, new cells adapted and succumbed in the same sick way.
These new models show that this doesn't have to continue.
Both systems have built-in techniques for health
maintenance—ones that remove the guesswork. Emphasis is upon
enlightened, ongoing choices. Consciousness workshops,
meditation, and new information are ineffectual without changing
deep belief systems—the causes. One cannot plan an adequate diet
without considering the needs of his unique biochemical system.
And there are no standard daily required supplements for all
individuals.
I believe that my electromagnetic mind-field model and
Kitkoski's chemical-field model should steer the future direction
of nutrition, treatment of diseases, and health practices. The
reorganizing of the emotional aspects of the mind-field and the
reordering of the biochemical field of the blood, combined with
improved life practices and the cleansing of the environment are
the only truly holistic approaches that can insure health. By raising
the body's healing response, all diseases and problems associated
with aging are directly attacked. Both Life Balancing and
electromagnetic field evolution work could be used in conjunction
with homeopathic or allopathic treatments until these are no longer
 HEALING: THE MIRACLE OF LIFE --------- 275

necessary. And as both encourage the mind and the cellular tissue
to learn to heal itself, the healing response is conditioned to help
withstand social and chemical contaminants in an improved way.
I encourage you not to separate your illness from your body.
Do not think that emotions have nothing to do with it, or that your
spiritual development is an isolated aspect of your life. During
illness, these components are somehow out of balance; but in
health, there is a perfect blend, a oneness you feel and live.
Electrodynamic field interaction is the premier holistic view of
life.
Yes, the body has an etheric double. It extends beyond its
boundaries into the universe as a field. If that etheric double is
closed, so are our experiences. We just replay the same old tape.
If it is in turmoil, the tissue will suffer, down to its atoms and cells.
The body will revolt. Illness is that insurgence.
Healing celebrates the miracle o f life rather than the
avoidance of death. Illness can teach us about life, that health is
not an end; it is a means that enables us to serve our divine life
purpose. I honor the healing powers of self and others, as I hope
you will yours. My own abilities were first apparent, even if
unexplained, when as a young physical therapist, my
"permanently" paralyzed patients recovered. My first information
about unorthodox healing came from the healers who worked in
my laboratory, who taught me, and who healed me of a potentially
"terminal" illness. Until I found the phenomena that started to
explain these healings, I, too, called them miracles. And then I
learned from using my own loving, healing energies that the
miracle lay within.
My one prevailing message in this book comes from a
demonstrable model, a view of humans in a new and oh, so
glorious light. We are beings with divine power which at its
crowning best is the giver and maintainer of life.
 C H A P T E R XI

SPIRITUAL
ENLIGHTENMENT:
The Evolutionary Goal
By profession I am a scientist, a physiological researcher of
human energy fields—trained as a rational thinker to doubt all that
cannot be scientifically proven. You may wonder, with this
background, why I undertake a treatise on spiritual enlightenment
when I am neither an orthodox religious leader nor a philosopher
in the academic sense. For me, this is the better way, for my
thoughts have been limited by neither religious dogma nor
philosophical constructs.
Today, many eminent scientists are expressing strong
spiritual insights with the surety of conviction that comes only
from deep personal experiences. Some have redirected their lives.
Others have come to spirituality from their knowledge of the
infinite grandeur of nature and the cosmos. Robert Jastrow,
Director o f the Goddard Institute for Space Studies, said that, "For
the scientist who has lived by his faith in the power of reason, the
story ends like a bad dream. He has scaled the mountains of
ignorance and he is about to conquer the highest peak. As he pulls
himself over the final rock, he is greeted by a band of theologians

276
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 277

who have been sitting there for centuries." Religion had

traditionally maintained a stance divorcing reason from faith;
science separated emotion from reason; and herein lies both errors.
The scientist repressed his emotions, the priest his reason, and
both their mystical natures.
It is true that these two ways of pursuing knowledge about the
world had staked off separate domains in the past. But now it is
time for a dialogue between scientists and theologians because we
know that objective reality does not exclude the transcendent
reality of spiritual experiences. Current research on the laws of
nature, from the microscopic physical phenomena—quantum
physics, to the macroscopic order of the material
universe— cosmology, implies an abstract interpretation of
creation rather than a material one.
Even the previous inability of science to explain the miracles
in the Bible is now dwindling in importance. The stand-off
lessened as we began to recognize that the true criterion of
spirituality cannot be found in the physical nature of the universe,
but rather in the essence of the spiritual, mystical experience of
humans. What a glorious time, now that scientific thinking and
divine awareness can hold hands again as partners.
My route to spiritual understanding came not from religious
education nor from scientific deduction, but from my own
experience of carefully observing my own evolutionary quest over
many years. I also learned from my work as a spiritual therapist
with many hundreds of people already advanced in their process
who entrusted me to assist them in discovering their soul's
unfinished business.
As I discussed in the last chapter, I did not use past-life
regression nor did I subscribe to popular cause-and-effect karma
thinking. Instead, I used meditation and imagery to make coherent
the person's energy field and to open the mind-field. In other
chapters I have established the scientific basis for my concept of
the mind-field. We uncovered other lives, but our goal was not to
278 — IN FINITE MIND

fathom the ego or the physical problems of the current lifetime.

Rather, we were after the patterns of behavior and problems that
resulted from deep spiritual experiences. These patterns are the
sole causes of continuing personality problems in the current life.
My goal is to empower each person to reach his ultimately
attainable level. This is spiritual empowerment.
As a university professor, I focused on intellectual
empowerment, helping students to learn facts and to think. As a
physical therapist, I assisted patients to redevelop lost capacities
and gain new skills. Now, I help people to claim their own
spiritual power.
When I work with individuals or conduct workshops, I ask the
following questions:
1. Do you have intellectual power? Are you intellectually
developed? Can you think deeply and coherently on many
subjects?
2. Are you physically vital, robust, and powerful for your age
and sex? Are you secure in your ability to do ordinary work and to
respond to emergencies?
3. Are you emotionally spontaneous, dynamic, and sure? Do
you express this in your life?
4. Lastly, are you spiritually developed and sustained? (Not,
what do you believe, but do you live and manifest spirituality
throughout your life?)
I believe the answer to the last question is particularly
important; it provides the context for all the other answers. The
answer I receive most often from my clients is, "I don't really
know." Others answer by describing spiritual beliefs learned from
mainstream religious systems. Some, who have no religious
affiliation, describe spiritual experiences derived from nature,
such as sunsets, a particular tree, the ocean, or from classical
music. Very, very few, however, ever relate a profound personal
experience with a divine figure or God. This is understandable,
because in our culture if we talk to God we are called religious,
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --- 279

while if God talks to us or if we see God, we are considered

insane. Yet I know the longing for spiritual experience exists in all
humans, for without it there is an unconscious sense that
knowledge of the physical self and the material world is simply
unsatisfying and insufficient. I accept the truism: When one
represses emotion, one's body hurts; when one represses
consciousness, one's mind aches; when one represses spirituality,
one's soul suffers.
There are worldwide signs of spiritual awakening perhaps
stimulated from the horror of religious wars, famine, and
catastrophic climate changes. Contemplative people, dissatisfied
with life and work despite economic plenty, have turned to
religion, frequently without surcease. Even yuppies who became
professionally successful and accumulated an abundance of
material possessions, are disillusioned about their futures. More
and more, people turn to meditation.
For a while, higher states of consciousness seemed like a
sufficient reward—now, they are not. For as people reached these
states, they realized that they were not spiritually free. Many of the
early psychedelic drug-users who were seeking enlightenment
have recognized that, despite the euphoria of their experiences,
their lives remained unchanged.
Mainline churches report decreased attendance and
diminishing financial support, both at a time when more and more
people are on spiritual quests. Apparently the church does not
adequately serve parishioners' needs. Charismatic radio and
television Christian ministries seem to grow. Even a recent Gallup
Poll found that 33% of the population studied admitted to a
personal spiritual experience. Actually, I believe that that number
is much higher because few of us are comfortable acknowledging
deep personal experiences.
As the atmosphere becomes contaminated by both extremely
low and high frequency signals, all physical phenomena seem to
be accelerated. As electromagnetic field vibrations rise, there are
concomitant biological changes. New medical syndromes with
280 — IN FIN ITE MIND

metaphysical-sounding names are being reported. Several

physicians state that their practice has changed from
psychosomatic medicine to spiritual medicine.
Even the cosmic vibrations seem to be quickening as the
Earth evolves. Some believe that the universal mind, or the
morphogenic field, has risen a notch. Nothing works correctly
anymore, one's life, politics, the weather, money, and institutions,
all reflect the breakdown in the old scheme of things.
Human unrest is reflected in the field of psychology as it
attempts to cope with human complaints. The steadily growing
humanistic psychology movement with its emphasis on human
growth and self-actualization, admits that its methods are still too
limited. The new approach, transpersonal psychology,
acknowledges that spiritual and transcendent needs are intrinsic to
human nature and that satisfying these needs is the right of every
individual. Consciousness was on the cutting edge of
psychotherapy in the 60s and 70s. Today it is spirituality.
To summarize our discussion thus far, it seems that
humankind is now experiencing a rebirth—the goal is to live a
more peaceful, happy and fulfilled life in harmony with the
vibrations of the divine. This requires a readiness to understand
our own deep spiritual nature. The problem is that the models we
have held about the mind-body and the spirit are weak, impotent
intellectual constructs that underestimate the human potential.
They are not spiritually anchored; and they are inadequate for the
future.
The most enduring and widely read book, the Bible, is man's
eternal dialogue with God. It relates the history of man's
experiences with one, supreme God. Primary among the many
reasons for reading the Bible is to discover ways in which God
imparts truth, laws, signs, and wisdom to humans—how God
communicates with collective humanity. The Bible relates the
collective history of humanity; past life information carries the
history of each soul's experience with God.
Many times during lifehood recall, themes emerged that
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 281

mirrored Biblical stories about the individual's relationship to

God. At first I surmised that the similarity existed because these
people knew the Bible stories. But strangely, many were not Bible
readers and had not been active in religion. The surprising detail
of their recall, however, led me to realize the universal nature of
human spiritual experiences. It is at this level that humans can
experience their uniqueness and their ability to participate with the
cosmosphere and ionosphere. This is not rational in the ordinary
sense; it is mystical.
Let me review for you the different relationships between
man and God as described in the Bible. The first record of
"bonding" between a supreme God and a human occurred with
Abraham. Remember, Abraham was a simple shepherd in
Mesopotamia. He lived at the base of the Euphrates River and
traded with the caravans. As a Hebrew, he believed in the one
God, while other groups around him embraced many gods.
According to the Bible, God communicated directly with
Abraham, giving him specific orders to leave his native land with
a band o f Hebrews to found a new nation in the land God had
chosen, Canaan. He promised to guide and shield Abraham from
harm during his epic journey. This was the first biblical record of
the classic human experience of forging the most important of all
bonds: that between a human and the divine.
It is written that to Abraham, God became a fearful and loyal
friend. He was a personal, living God. Abraham made a covenant
with God. When He spoke to him, Abraham obeyed his
commands. The story of God dropping in for a fine meal which
Sarah, Abraham's wife, was preparing, to give her the news that
she, an old, wizened woman, would conceive and bear a son,
emphasizes the relationship between these early Hebrews and their
God, a rapport which allowed God to materialize for dinner with
a skeptical old lady who laughed at Him.
The Biblical story of Jacob expressed how in his
communication with God, he argued and fought God. To Jacob,
God was frequently his adversary until, in later years, he accepted
282 — IN FIN ITE MIND

God's teachings and became "The Lion of God."

Remember Joseph, Jacob's son, who was sold into bondage by
his brothers? He saw angels on the stairway to heaven and heard
God promise, "I will protect you wherever you go." Later, as a
man in Egypt, Joseph's relationship with God took on a mystical
nature in which God told him about things to come and how he
could survive and prosper during famines and pestilence.
Although Joseph carried out God's commands, the bonding
seemed to be more co-creative than that of his ancestors.
Biblical records indicate that God gave Moses a divine
mission: "Lead forth my people out of Egypt." This was not a
unified nation but a rabble of a group, fearful of the future but glad
to be free. Moses is said to have had personal misgivings about his
journey because he thought that his followers would not believe he
had received his instruction directly from God. It seems that he
needed divine assurance, which the Bible says he received in the
form of miracles. These reports depict God as a great protector
when people followed his dictates, but as a wrathful God who
judged and punished them for their transgressions. He was
depicted as a powerful judge, the source of the law, the Ten
Commandments, and a judge who could hand out sentences of
punishment.
The rabbi Jesus, called the Christ or the Son of God, brought
a still different idea about God; a loving and protecting father who
cherished equally all humans as his children regardless of their
beliefs and practices. Jesus' relationship with God was as a devout
son who carried out His teachings directly by manifesting God's
power in miracles. Jesus was said to radiate a divine light.
Certain great events in history, the parting of the Red Sea, the
ark of the covenant, and the flood, are said to be God's way of
revealing Himself to humans. Similar is the concept that God
makes His will known through the inspired insights of great men
whom we call prophets.
The value of these stories is limited in terms of effecting deep
life changes. Perhaps a more valuable belief is that God is revealed
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 283

everywhere and at all times to those equipped to discover Him.

Perception of the spiritual world is relative to the light the person
sheds on it. If the person has no light, then he cannot perceive the
spiritual. The prophets have this light which gives them the clarity
to interpret messages from God. Cataclysmic events on earth often
reveal God because they so greatly shock even those vibrating at
the lowest levels.
As humans develop in their awareness and expand their
vibratory complexity, they will no longer need the ordeals of
cataclysms nor the wisdom of the prophets; they will become the
prophets. As humans grow in their capacity to be God-like, they
will experience divine energies not only in themselves, but
everywhere.
Today, many are still attached to concepts of God based on
religious teachings and personal needs. Whereas the Biblical
leaders derived their ideas of God from direct personal experience,
our beliefs about God today are more remote.
A recent American poll indicated that 95% of those surveyed
"believed in God." Yet when asked to define what they meant by
"God," many spoke vaguely about heaven that they could not
define. It is always "out there" somewhere in the atmosphere. Yet
people reach out and pray to this being, entity, or vibration that is
located out there somewhere. It is rare that an individual perceives
that God is in himself. Our beliefs are basically intellectual and
serve to satisfy our emotional needs. However, belief in God is one
thing; knowing God is another.
I recall the story of Carl Jung, the eminent psychiatrist, who
was interviewed in his later years by a young cub reporter. He
asked Jung if he had believed in God when he was a young man.
Jung said that yes, he had believed. But, queried the reporter, now
that you're an old man, do you still believe in God? Jung
responded slowly, "No, I do not believe; I know, for I have
experienced God."
Reading Biblical stories about humankind's struggle to
discover the divine may assist us on our path as we await signs that
284 — IN FIN ITE MIND

we have contacted God; but for a deep emotional understanding,

we must experience God directly. These direct, personal
experiences are mystical in nature. Remember, descriptions in the
New Testament indicated that Jesus taught mystically, by
parables. Ezekiel, the prophet, as he moved toward his direct
knowledge o f God, described visions of animals, which were
emotional symbols. Soon, his animals took on wheels, moving the
emotion into human feelings. Later, he heard sounds. As his
vibrations and emotions grew, he struggled until he reached that
stage where he had direct contact with God. When he recognized
that he was receiving God's messages, his profound shock and
humility caused him to fall to the ground.
Theologians who continually debate whether some Biblical
happenings were miracles and therefore God-ordained do so to
question religious beliefs. But I do believe that they miss the
essence o f spirituality—man's profound personal experience of
knowing. Those who criticize miracles as illusory fail to realize
that the matter and meaning created by the mind are all illusionary.
Illusion is a function of the mind and is as real as any "facts." So
spiritually, the mind's highest experience is also an illusion, but so
profound that its effect in the lives of humans is inestimable.
The great sages have said, "Every human being is nothing but
God." Likewise, the popular concept of "I Am" has been accepted
by many religious leaders. Actually, I have found almost no one
who is considered sane who experiences the great "I Am". Rather,
most people respond that they are much too limited and unworthy.
They hold these limitations deeply in their minds.
When people ask me if it's all right to think of God as a
material being like man, my answer is yes, that is the way we
understand many of the Judeo-Christian ideas. I believe that we
can imagine the entity of God in human form. As the Bible states,
we are made in God's image, but we do not imagine God as a
blood, bone, and tissue being, but as a metaphysical being, or an
energy, a vibration or a light.
Most of us believe that God reveals Himself in certain great
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 285

acts in history. Some, such as the rending of the heavens at Christ's

crucifixion with the splitting of the rock, have been attributed to
divine energies. The inspired insights of the prophets have been
interpreted as God's revelations. Whether these actually are
methods God uses to reveal Himself, they are undeniably how we
understand God's revelations.
Similarly, many people experience God in nature because
they believe that God created and controls it. Remember, it is we
who see God in nature because of the emotional charge our senses
receive. In these instances, we have projected our experiences
outward into the beauty of the world, but not inward to ourselves.
Our experience of God is then stimulated by the harmony, beauty
and grandeur of nature. Unfortunately, what we experience we
project back out there, thinking that God and nature are the same
thing. However, a profound mystical experience with God in an
instant shatters the illusion that our subjective and our objective
wills are the only reality. In this mystical state, a new awakening
dominates the entire scene, including our own life.
I read and hear that God is everywhere. Some ask me when
science will prove it. Wisely, science has not tried to prove God's
existence as an entity or vibration. Probably the closest we will
ever come to understanding God made manifest will be by
knowing more about man himself. In my laboratory, we found that
when a person's energy field reached the highest, most complex
vibrations, from imaging or meditation, that person had spiritual
experiences, regardless of their beliefs. Even though the imagery
was culturally-linked, each person identified his experience with a
divine essence that was beyond any specific religious belief
system.
From my experience, I believe that all children know about
God. Birth and early childhood experiences and illnesses, when
relived, contain deep spiritual feelings. Children also sense the
spiritual attainment of adults.
This reminds me of a story my father told about me when I
was a six-year-old. My family had just moved from Indiana to
286 — INFINITE MIND

Florida because I had a thyroid problem and needed the iodine of

the ocean. Apparently, I had great spiritual urges and asked to go
to church. The closest was a fundamentalist church where I
attended Sunday School. I wanted to be baptized after my parents
told me that I had not been as an infant. When the day for
children's baptism came, we girls were all dressed up in our white,
lacy dresses and, with our parents, sat in the front pew. In the
middle of the sermon preceding the immersion, I got up and
stomped angrily down the aisle and out of the church, announcing
loudly, "If you think that ugly man is going to baptize me, you are
wrong." Yes, I was paddled, but I knew that that preacher and I did
not have the same feeling about God.
The Bible stories depict God working through real, fallible
humans like ourselves, in a co-creative process. Yet the old
concept of spiritual leaders was that people must realize that the
hope o f man was not in himself, but in God. This implied that God
is outside man, a concept that is happily being refuted because it is
hazardous to our evolution. Human behavior does not change
when we experience the power of God separate from ourselves.
With this kind of experience, we do God's work in its profound
sense.
Quite new in Western thought is the grandest of all
thoughts—I am God manifest, I have become God-like. And yet it
has existed in the minds of men, Ken Wilber found, since the time
o f the early Upanishads—that the personal equals the
omnipresent, or the eternal self. Mystics of all centuries have
recognized this truth. The Bhagavad Gita, the ancient Hindu
scripture, says that if you understand your own mind completely,
you are not just a human being, you yourself are God. The old
sages likewise viewed humans as God made manifest. So the
current "new" philosophical concept that "I am God manifest" is
not really new; what is new is the understanding that I am neither
competing with nor separated from God. With this understanding,
abject humility cannot exist.
I concur with the statement o f contemporary theologians,
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 287

"God is indeed within man." But I do not believe that man can
perceive his "God-like" qualities until his field reaches higher
vibrations and attains a greater degree of coherency. No matter
how hard we try to receive spiritual guidance, we cannot until our
fields are attuned to that vibrational system. Does this mean that
God is a vibration? No, God is man's experience and the structure
he gives to his experience. Obviously, this is not the same for all
people because their fields differ, colored by their cultural beliefs.
I believe that at my deepest level, I carry divine images
which, when brought to the level of experience, manifest God's
energy. My acts are no longer totally willful, and it is impossible
for me to behave destructively. I have already chosen to move to
the vibrational level of the soul, which is divine. This refutes the
common belief that, in the sight of God, man is humble and
basically bad because of his humanness, and therefore unable to
manifest Godliness.
Writings on Egyptian papyri offer similar wisdom. "... and the
kingdom of heaven is within you, and whosoever knoweth himself
shall find it, and having found it ye shall know yourself that you
are sons and heirs of the Father, the Almighty, and shall know
yourself that ye are in God and God is in you."
Transpersonal psychology acknowledges the reality of
experience; and it seeks to explore the unfinished business of
spiritual experiences, that is, personal experiences of divine
feelings. Like consciousness, spiritual experiences vary in
intensity, running the entire spectrum from strong to dilute. They
are accompanied by a wide range of sensory phenomena. Primary
among these is a blinding, brilliant white light, more intense than
anything the eye has ever seen. To some, this is an experience of
total radiance; to others, it is like a light at the end of a tunnel
preceding death. Some see it as a star or sun. Occasionally, the
light appears as an aura around a God-like figure from the Bible.
Light is the oldest and most pervasive metaphor in spiritual
experience. In the New Testament when Jesus took Peter, John,
and James into the mountains, it was recorded that "his face did
288 — IN FIN ITE MIND

shine as the sun, his raiments as white as light."

Recently, the Polish physicist Slawinski recorded the flash of
light that occurs at death. Apparently, death is a transition from
one vibrational state to a higher one. He describes the "death flash"
as 10 to 1,000 times stronger than the light radiation emanating
from the body when it is alive. The rapidity of physiological death
apparently determines the rate of dissemination of the light. There
is less radiance at death following a slow, lingering illness than
after a sudden, traumatic, or instant death. I believe the day is near
when we will understand death as a profound change in vibration
which releases this "flash of life."
Recently, I saw two flashes of light accompanying a traumatic
death of a woman and her unborn child. I had seen a violent head-
on auto collision during broad daylight on a sunny day, where one
car had catapulted into the air after hitting a center divider, then
collided with an oncoming truck at the cab level. I hastened to
bring spiritual energy to a badly mutilated young woman who was
partly through the windshield, while others administered
acupressure to stimulate her heart and save her life. In my higher
state of consciousness, I saw a flash of light so bright that it looked
like a camera flashbulb nearby. I thought she had died, but the
accupressurists said no. Some minutes later, a second flash
occurred, even brighter than the first. This happened
simultaneously with the cessation of breathing and heartbeat. We
discovered later that she was eight months pregnant. The first flash
probably was that of her unborn child, and the second her own.
The suddenness of each of these deaths must have created the
intense flash of light.
I have learned by observing deaths in other lifehoods that, at
the onset of non-traumatic death, the experience into transitional
consciousness is beautiful beyond description. Death itself is
peaceful, idyllic, and evolutionary. It is only during pre-death or
near-death experiences that images of tunnels with lights at the
end, and beckoning relatives who had crossed over appear. This is
also the time when there is either peace or a tragic struggle. I have
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 289

found that those who are extremely fearful of death receive

traumatic pre-death experiences from other lifehoods when they
experience near-death episodes in this life.
Near-death experiences occur independently of religiosity or
religious affiliations. Yet after recovering from such experiences,
people report increased spiritual awareness that remains
throughout their lives. The change is sometimes so great that they
become healers or religious leaders, leaving behind the personal
life they knew.
Increased physical energy is a universal characteristic of
divine experiences. Waves of energy create body jerks, shakes,
and undulations as a flood of sensation seems to carry the person
upward into an altered state. Intense heat is common and
sometimes frightening. When a person deeply and quietly prays,
his field often reaches its highest living vibration and becomes
more coherent with all energy focused in the same direction, and
in sync. This is a state of immense power.
Verbal information is also reported during divine states. The
person perceives messages of wisdom coming from God. This is
generally a "charge" such as those received by Abraham, Moses
and Joseph—a destiny. This information is never concerned with
the material world or everyday problems. There are instructions
"to trust in one's own divine guidance" and to accept the divine
power.
In the most profound spiritual experiences, the person moves
to a state of oneness with divine vibrations, where the identity
experiences no separation between the human and divine fields.
The two fields function as one, where "all is all" and everything is
perfect. From that moment on, the person is changed and can
never again deny his spiritual nature. As a result, conscious
knowing and wisdom have broader, more profound dimensions
that are not anchored in the reality of things, ideas, and physical
existence; instead they are anchored in the spiritual.
If we have never had such direct spiritual yearnings or these
profound experiences, what stimulates our spiritual quests?
290 — IN F IN ITE MIND

Ultimately, all thinking people eventually ask: who am I and why

am I here? Intuitively, we know that the personality we have
developed, the selves we identify with, the jobs we hold, are only
superficially "me." The deep part of ourselves we don't even
know. If we do happen to get a glimpse, we quickly cover it with
culturally encouraged denial. Most o f us have relegated these
questions to old age when there is time for life's evaluation.
But something has changed. People in their twenties and
thirties, even those with strong work ethics and materialistic goals
are beginning to ask these questions. More people are discovering
that the major job in life is attending to their own evolution. In
every aspect, this is deeply spiritual. We have made strides in the
physical, intellectual, and emotional improvement of our lot, but
we have done precious little to manifest divine energy in our own
lives, our institutions, and our relationships.
Surely by now we comprehend that relieving human suffering
and pain provides comfort, but not deep happiness. I believe that
peace and joy come only when we are about our evolutionary
work; the insights we gain from this work change us so that we
behave differently. More and more we begin to accept the spiritual
aspect of our nature. This is not a simple nor an easy change; it is
a profound transition which alters our concepts of ourselves as
humans, and our beliefs about our potentials and the relationship
of the soul to our daily existence. Our mission on Earth, then, is to
grow spiritually so that we manifest the divine, not just personally,
but in a way that influences other people, nature and institutions.
These ideas are generally believable and are not new to most
readers. Why then, if we accept these, are we not deeply spiritual?
And why, as we reach for enlightenment, do we become more
afraid, conjuring up all manner of reasons to forget the struggle
and give up spiritual searching? Why do so many get "stuck"? The
problem is always fear of the intense emotions that occur at the
mystical level. We do not want to go through physical, vibrational
shocks in order to perceive the light which brings with it
experiences so real and profound that we cannot easily
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 291

comprehend or accept them. And most of all, we don't really want

the great power of divine vibrations to be at our command.
Another way of describing our blocks is to say that we don't
want to change our priorities, nor our beliefs about ourselves and
God. Although they may be underdeveloped, our ideas are
familiar and comfortable, and make no demands upon our
behavior. In short, we don't know how to be divine and human
simultaneously. With spiritual maturity, life's primary directives
come from the soul level, not from the material or intellectual
level. In general, the course is uncharted; we have existed for so
long emphasizing the human body-personality that we have little
soul-self knowledge of our needs and weaknesses. I grow
increasingly intolerant of the trite supposedly transcendent
concept: "We are perfect; we don't need to change." We all know
that we neither feel nor manifest perfection in either our own or
others' eyes. Such a "pie in the sky," uninspired statement may
please the ungrounded dreamers, but not the masses of humanity.
What are the specific reasons that we are spiritually stuck?
During my many years as a metaphysical counselor, I have
concluded that each emotional block is connected with an
overwhelming experience that the soul had with God and divine
vibrations. These were all in some way traumatic—sometimes
causing physical suffering, and always emotionally foreign,
challenging our accepted notions about what it is to be human.
I have found five different spiritual experiences that
commonly are not integrated. Sometimes we choose to misuse our
capabilities, but more often we deny and turn away from them. Or
we may choose to dilute our spiritual power with a bland
"goodness." Denying spiritual power is a primary defense.
Cultural dictates sometimes encourage denial; at other times they
only serve to complicate the trauma.
One o f the five commonly unintegrated experiences is
experiencing a God-like energy. The exact image that appears is
not as important as the emotional nature of the experience, which
seems to be universal. Often great religious leaders appear: Jesus,
292 — IN FIN ITE MIND

Mohammed, or Mother Mary. In these cases the imagery seems to

be related to cultural patterns that have been associated with
spirituality. If these images are vivid and emotional, they tend to
be viewed as unreal and imagined, a fine way to deny the profound
image. These experiences are often referred to as illusions. But
again, many great thinkers remind us that most mental actions are
illusionary, even if they stem from supposedly "real stimuli."
Frequently, people react to the experiences by saying, "I'm
losing my mind," or asking if they are sane. I always answer, if
you can co-experience mystical reality and material reality— if
you know the difference, yet can integrate and use the force of this
awareness—then you are not merely sane, you are super-sane. I
don't really think that there is a soul that exists in the world today
that does not know at its deepest level about divine things. These
feelings seem to be "built into" humans. When you touch such
knowing, it is as emotional as going home to a place that has
always been yours, a place that you know fully but only glimpse
occasionally. But if the mystical and material realities are not
connected, the memory wanes rapidly and doubt follows.
The second usually non-integrated experience is one in which
the person recalls a past lifehood as a mystic possessing
simultaneous comprehension of the past, present and future. Often
they have access to knowing all manner of things beyond the
capacity of their five senses. These people are generally singled
out for either punishment or honor. Physical torture, even to the
point of death, is frequently their fate if they dare to be spiritually
different.
The third type of unintegrated scenario involves a person who
has been a spiritual healer with the psychic power to perform
miracle healing and to alter material substances. Sometimes as
they relive these vibrations, they recover these capacities. These
come quickly and are disconcerting. If the past healings have the
qualities of miracles, the person's deep emotional beliefs about
himself are shaken. With this emotional release, he recognizes
divine power, but often very slowly. Even if the thought is
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 293

intellectually comfortable, emotionally, it usually isn't. It rocks

one's personality and identity. Being, manifesting and knowing
that he possesses divine power no longer allows a person to pass
off such miracles with comments such as "I am only a channel of
God." You are, in a sense, God's vibrations made manifest, if you
own them.
The fourth unintegrated experience can occur in any of these
lifehood situations. If the person has been leading a good life and
serving a divine purpose, and then finds himself in deep emotional
and physical troubles as a result o f natural catastrophes, wars,
punishment, or starvation—things that threaten his life—he calls
upon God's help. If he feels that he has exhausted his resources,
then in a weak, dependent state he pleads with the "father" as the
last resort. Frequently, he does not receive help on the level of his
request, and he dies depressed and angry at God for forsaking
him—just as Jesus called out from the cross, "Oh, Father, why hast
thou forsaken me?" When it comes to this lifehood, most people
are not willing to acknowledge their rage at God's abandonment of
them. Certainly, our religious teachings don't encourage us to do
this. But if in that life or in the present one, we express our anger
at God, we can receive guidance. Only then can we recognize how
our miscast anger at God has denied us access to our divine power,
and then without guilt we can see how our humanness has played
such a devastating trick on us. We not only comprehend God's
message, but our emotional power comes storming back, sufficient
to handle any physical problem. Even more significantly, this
regained spiritual power eliminates human torture because our
light causes attackers to fall back.
The last non-integrated experience is spiritual in origin, but
generally occurs without spiritual awareness. If the person taps
into the full spiritual vibrations which he has experienced in the
past, his body heats up to such a degree that it causes intense
physical discomfort. Kundalini power may then rise up the spine,
blasting him into an altered state. If the Kundalini starts to rise but
is thwarted by emotional blocks, acute pain can result. The
294 — INFINITE MIND

Kundalini shock to the nervous system is well-known in

meditation circles by those who have practiced kundalini yoga
without supervision and for the wrong purpose. So much sensory
bombardment often activates a protective response, keeping
consciousness locked into the material world. Generally, there is
little spiritual insight to be gained from these experiences.
In these situations the person must lower his vibrations in
order to physically recover before entering the spiritual experience
again, and this time, very slowly. Frequently, it takes months for
the body to become attuned to vibrations that are high enough for
the person to pursue these memories in detail. This probably
accounts for the time and patience so necessary for deep spiritual
experiences.
Implicit in all of these variations is the challenge to change.
Neurotic defenses such as "I am unworthy," or "I have low
self-esteem," are threatened. New, overwhelming urges come—
urges to be forever this new spiritual person, to live it, know it,
profess it, to have such feelings always, not merely as an overlay
but as a warm, nourishing and dominant part of us.
When people do successfully integrate their spiritual
experiences, they usually do it in a very uneven way. People move
toward them and away and back again; they run away because it's
all so overwhelming, and then back again because their souls
demand it—a push-pull situation like a moth to a flame. These
vacillations create frustration. Many want to jump in all at once
and, as they say, "get it over with." But there is nothing to get over
except resistance. After that, the path continues forever.
The major insight I gained from several of my own past
lifehoods was that although I was somewhat spiritually developed,
when my life was on the line and the chips were down, the urge to
maintain physical life came storming through and I gave up my
divine power in an attempt to live. While it is true that we must
maintain the physical body if we are to spiritually evolve in this
lifetime, the logical question follows: Why do we have to come
back at all in this human form? Can't we evolve in spirit form? I
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 295

have no ready answers, only impressions. Apparently, our task is

to be both human and divine at the same time, which requires
physical existence. Spiritual growth probably can occur when the
soul is outside a physical body, but to achieve complete spiritual
maturity, it appears that taking on a human form is necessary.
Otherwise, there would be no reason for reincarnation.
Sometimes a person's life is so changed by spiritual
enlightenment that he no longer fits into his culture. This is
traumatic. Cultural rejection is the most damaging. When people
who are motivated exclusively by ordinary reality have a strong
spiritual experience, they develop grave doubts about their
cherished assumptions about life.
When a critical number of the world's population reaches a
state of spiritual vibrations, our institutions will change.
Institutions are created to facilitate, regulate, and guide human
behavior. During spiritual experiences, guidance comes from a
higher source. As a result, some behaviors will vanish, not by
abstinence or will power, but because one's motivation has
changed.
Finally, fear of spiritual power is universal. This also seems
strange because material power, money, prestige, leadership
status, and rewards are coveted by most people. Yet, when it
seems that spiritual power is available, people begin to describe it
as a heavy burden; the sense that they will be required to carry
responsibilities and obligations that they don't want. This means
giving up some things that seem superficially desirable for others
that can't yet be totally known.
I hear so many people say that when they pray, asking for
divine guidance or solutions to problems, they get no answers.
Others ask devoutly what they should do with their lives, what is
their higher destiny? I have discovered that people do earnestly
solicit spiritual help, but accept help only when it corresponds to
how they have structured their lives, and who they think they are,
so they can remain the same. Answers that don't fit this structure
are not considered plausible answers. Furthermore, when prayer
296 — INFINITE MIND

comes from ordinary material levels of consciousness, the

vibrations are characteristically low and the person cannot
perceive the divine information available to him. He cannot
communicate with the divine unless he is tuned to that same
wavelength.
If we could be God-like and not human-like, or vice versa, we
wouldn't experience much stress. Or if we could totally separate
out or completely integrate our divine and human natures, we
would also be more comfortable. Actually, most of what we create
around us is designed to maintain our human identity. Most of our
official, compulsory institutions are devoted to human concerns.
(Remember, institutions for spiritual direction are volunteer in
nature.)
All metaphysical, mystical experiences I have described add
credibility to the idea of a soul and past lives. I have publicly
expressed my acceptance that the soul is indestructible. I agree
with the teachings of Plato, Aristotle, and the major religions: the
soul can produce its own energy, can move objects or barriers, and
it precedes and exists after the material body.
There are many practical problems when one dedicates
oneself to a deep spiritual path. By its nature it is a solitary journey
where loneliness abides. We have unavoidable urges to be
validated, but whom do we tell about the experiences we believe
only we are having? For instance, suppose you are an average
schoolteacher or an engineer, and you've had an enlightened
experience of walking with Christ. It was so profound and so real
that you were shaken up. What are you going to do about that?
You don't understand at all; it's got to be weird. Generally, you
have three options. You take it to your minister. But unless he or
she is pretty enlightened, you know what your minister will do.
Ministers pray with you. Praying is a step in the right direction.
But it doesn't help you understand the experience, only to accept
it with faith. Or you go to a psychologist who tries to explain it
using the physical model of reality, but it cannot be explained that
way. Or it may cross your mind to talk to a physician, but most
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 297

would probably recommend a sedative or a pill. Maybe you think

of a psychiatrist—they work with these unusual experiences—but
somehow you know this is a real and sane one, and cannot be
explained by a psychopathic model. In short, these highly
respected professionals are not trained in mystical matters. Some
can intuitively help by listening, while others become fearful of
their own strong, spiritual urges.
In vogue today, when you are spiritually stuck, is to turn to a
psychic reader to predict your future and to tell you about your
past. Their predictions provide what most seekers want— some
security about the future or some rational reason for why they're
stuck. Very clever readers can present information about the
client's current life amazingly well by reading the mind-field. The
questions they answer are generally superficial, on the personality-
ego level, not on the soul level. But what is more important, their
answers about past lives tell you who you were and what you did,
rather than what you experienced, the decisions you made, and
how you established patterns of behavior which are today your
unfinished business. Unless you bring forth your own lifehoods
with the vividness of primary recall along with the associated
emotions, you cannot truly know your soul's work. You are caught
in a web of trying to figure it out intellectually and logically.
When he was at Esalen Institute, Stanislav Groff, a pioneer
psychiatrist in the study of altered states, established the Spiritual
Emergency Network. This network service, now connected with
the Institute for Transpersonal Psychology in Menlo Park,
California, provides trained counselors, who by telephone, help
people frightened and confused by unusual experiences.
There is hope, however, in a new breed of transpersonal
counselors who will understand and who know the way. Support
groups are helpful if there is an experienced, wise, mystical leader
comfortable with his own spiritual nature and wise with his
interpretations.
Those of you who find my words compatible with your
intuitive sense, if not your practices, may find that you hold some
298 — IN FIN ITE MIND

deeply ingrained religious and cultural beliefs that are creating

additional barriers. There is a belief that God is the Father
Almighty, that He personally makes everything happen, and that
we, His children, are passive recipients of His love (when things
go right) and His wrath (when they don't). This is an extension of
karmic belief, o f paying for all our bad deeds and profiting from
our good ones.
I have no difficulty with the father/child concept; it is one of
dependency. I reject the idea that all that happens to us should be
excused as God's will. I do not believe that God wills us harm or
suffering. The divine part of our soul is indeed a rigid taskmaster,
and when we stray from the path o f spiritual evolution, it reminds
us with unhappiness and with physical and emotional illness.
Rather than punishment, this is an indication that we are not on
course. From all misfortunes should come profound learning.
Those of you who know me personally know that I have been
blind, so that I might see, and physically paralyzed so that I might
turn inward for instruction. Both misfortunes were ever so
profitable.
The metaphysical literature contains many references to
entities, both good and bad, as though these were physical beings
capable o f doing destructive or constructive things to us without
our participation. Anti-God, possessions and evil entities are their
names.
Never in my many years as a mystic have I seen or
experienced a demonic entity or vibration that in any form
threatened me. True, I have felt some chaotic fields, morphogenic
ones in places, and anti-coherent ones around people in my travels
into so-called "haunted houses," and in Haiti and Africa where
black magic and voodoo are performed. In Brazil, I made friends
with the Espiritista healers who believe in spirit possessions, and
I watched them work—even participated in their ceremonies. I
assisted in the freeing of a house in the West Indies from thought
forms; the house had been declared possessed.
Yes, I have made contact with souls that have crossed over
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 299

and are in spirit form. I have the capacity to read the ancient
history of a place from the vibratory energy that remains years or
centuries later. But I have never been attacked or bombarded, or
even upset by what is called a diabolical entity or a negative
energy. I have found these to be merely an organized energy or
thought form. If one decodes these thought forms, and for some
reason has similar thoughts, one's field resonates and one is
affected. If one doesn't resonate, one can perceive the thoughts
without effect.
To acknowledge diabolical entities that possess power in and
of themselves without the person's participation, I believe is
inaccurate and destructive. It is destructive because it allows one
to project anger at God and the fear of one's own power onto some
entity, which further masks the problem. It assures protection from
uncovering one's unfinished business, because one is looking in
the wrong place— out there, away from self, attached to some
make-believe entity—making the unfinished business difficult to
find while allowing for all manner of imagined threats. Satanic
and demonic forces are only operative—effective as a field of
thought—if people resonate with them, react to them, and act upon
them. So the real threat lies within us.
I vividly recalled a lifehood as a young priest in France in the
16th century. He was sent to his first parish church not knowing
that the congregation was split by some believers in black magic.
One day the black magic group appeared at mass to heckle him
and break up the service. Suddenly, a rage came over him which
caused him to strike out with his arm, knocking down the hecklers
some fifteen feet away. The men bolted in fear while the
worshippers seemed paralyzed by the priest's power. He talked
with them about how power could be used creatively in the service
of God or negatively against God. He described how black magic
is truly anger at God, used to defeat all that represents Godliness,
and unless people join them or become weak with fear, black
magic is powerless. In fact, black magic is weak if compared with
the strength of power used in the service of God.
300 — INFINITE MIND

Professional interest in Multiple Personality Disorder (MPD),

possession and "walk-in" has grown spectacularly in the past years
since a mystic unfortunately introduced the idea of another soul
taking the place of the existing one to explain sudden changes in
personality. She called them "walk-ins." I go on record as rejecting
mechanical concepts such as a foreign entity cohabiting a person,
a possession, or a "walk-in." These concepts are erroneous because
it is the soul that brings life to the body and when the soul leaves,
death occurs. If this were not true, at death when one soul
transcends, another would be waiting in the wings to take over,
and death of the body would be a thing of the past. Personality
changes, shifts, or multiple expressions do happen; but multiple
personalities do not.
The idea of "possessions" is given credence by research.
Eighty-five to 90% of all so-called multiples apparently have a
childhood background o f physical and emotional abuse with a
history of criticism, inconsistency, abandonment, and betrayal by
adults. These factors apparently coexist with personality shifts or
splits, but this does not justify the thinking that some outside force
intervened. Multiples display two or more consciousnesses which
seem to battle for control. A break in selfhood—the person as
known to the person—seems to occur.
I would like to present a different explanation for these
psychological aberrations. First, we are all "multiples" in the broad
sense, with behaviors that we cannot explain. But these behaviors
are not the result of separate entities. Ideally, we experience the
total integration of a rich, flowing, evolved, complex personality.
But in cases of MPD there are sudden shifts in personality without
integration. It seems strange to me that lifehoods have not been
studied as a possible explanation for the gamut of behavioral and
physiological differences in those we label "multiples,"
"possessed" or "walk-ins."
My questions about MPD stemmed from one client who
experienced grave personality stress. Over time, as he moved
beyond repression, he had major conflicts like those of MPDs.
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 301

Finally, he was able to recover in detail three lives as priests, and

one as a scientist, and a mystic healer in China, Italy, France, and
India. His beliefs in each of these lifehoods conflicted with his
current life beliefs. Then he suffered stress from the need to
change, to integrate the best of each into an elaborate expanded
personality. But he did accomplish this. Now he has skills, even
information, from all these sources integrated into his present
personality. But more importantly, he is aware that it is the same
soul carrying all these many personality characteristics in a
complex human being, and that these are all him now.
Many researchers still contend that the distinct shift from one
ego state to another is proof that the minds and bodies of those
with MPDs are invaded. In reality, what the shift does is allow the
person to express the unfinished business of other
lifehoods—which clashes with current life experiences—without
having sufficient conscious recognition to change.
We need to be reminded that our habitual stream of
consciousness is not the only consciousness which exists in the
organism. Therefore, it does not follow that other consciousnesses
are induced from outside "possessions" and "walk-ins." These
consciousnesses are a part of the experience of one soul that has
existed in other lifehood bodies; they are carried by that soul into
this current life. This is possible because the information is carried
in the mind, not in the brain.
Probably the most dangerous belief is that the MPDs'
behavior is caused by the invasion of the minds and bodies of
entities and other souls. That simply is not correct. Furthermore
this belief dictates the treatment and the expected and actual
outcomes, and it can lead to disastrous results. I suggest that
simple integration of so-called separate personalities is a
superficial goal and that psychologists will keep hanging on to the
"strangeness" they attribute to this syndrome because they don't
understand the problem.
I hasten to add that there is value in bringing attention to
failures to integrate apparent multiple personalities or parts of the
302 — INFINITE MIND

same personality. This demands that we evaluate the complex

signals that the mind issues to the brain. It behooves us to clear up
our deficient ideas about soul-life and reincarnation with thorough
investigations into lifehoods. The impact on psychological
diagnoses and treatment will be great.
Why are the numbers o f MPDs apparently mounting
exponentially, so that it is no longer considered a rare disorder?
We have discovered that the memories of lifehoods common to all
children are repressed by cultural pressures by about age five. This
is the same age as onset of childhood MPD. With adult MPD, the
current relaxation of cultural beliefs about mystical things allows
these repressions to loosen sufficiently for multiple consciousness
to emerge, but not enough to encourage spontaneous personality
integration.
I believe that if studies were made of cultures which accept
the concepts of lifehoods and encourage this kind of knowing, we
would not find any MPD. Also, I believe that as more and more
people remember lifehoods and have the ego strength to integrate
these, we will recognize the falsity of "possession" beliefs. What
excites me most is that we will be able to treat personality
complexity not only at the surface integration level, but also on a
deeper mystical plane. The latter is essential to the evolutionary
process and to spiritual enlightenment.
DiMele, a New York psychologist, has said: "Suddenly,
multiples are here like messengers of the gods to skip us eons
ahead of our acceptable understanding of brain and body." May I
add: more than the brain and body, but mind and soul and
lifehoods.
The fact that the brain wave may be different at different
times is sometimes used to justify the belief that two or more souls
could possess the same body. But brain waves also are a part of the
material, structural pattern which is carried in past life
memory—by the same soul, which now has a different personality
and a different physical body. In fact, I am sure that it is
impossible for two souls or entities to inhabit the same body at one
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 303

time. Again, as a person brings to conscious awareness and owns

past lifehood experiences as his, the so-called "possessions" are no
more. "Possessions" are only unorganized and hidden parts of the
same soul.
These are the same criticisms I levy against the idea of "walk-
ins," the miserably inaccurate answer to sudden changes in
personality explained by psychics and latched onto by
psychologists and psychiatrists for lack of a better label for
mystical problems. The concepts of "possessions" or "walk-ins"
are cop-outs for not owning and integrating spiritual experiences,
whether these be gross or great.
More and more people are perplexed about possessions, and
more therapists are trying to treat them with an outmoded model.
Religious groups are considering or even practicing exorcisms to
drive out the "devil." In one sense, possession is a psychopathic
phenomenon, not the devil's work; but in a more enlightened vein,
the source and direction are distinctly mystical and spiritual.
When it comes to treatment, therapists must encourage the
patient to experience the "entity possession" in a safe
psychotherapeutic situation as was done during the treatments at
Epidaris. The therapist must accept the mystical reality of entities,
but have no fear of them or the behavioral aberrations they create.
At the beginning, the therapist must refrain from indicating
that the person's mind has created the entity, but must warmly
understand the trauma the person experiences while strongly
assuring him that he knows the way to remove the entity. He must
be able to convince the person that his strength and mystical
know-how will protect them both—that they can cope with
anything. Short, hourly treatments don't work in the beginning,
because the patient rapidly needs to be free of the dependent
victim state. Each session should move the person up in
consciousness using imagery to find his child, or perhaps walking
on an imaginary path while describing what he sees.
As the imagery progresses, if the person trusts the therapist,
he will find his "entities." These come in many forms and have
304 — INFINITE MIND

numerous behaviors: a diabolical human; an ugly space

monstrosity; animals with huge teeth and claws; spiders invading
the world, or snakes coiled and striking; ghastly, hideous noises
that will not stop; verbal castigations, vile words and thoughts
against self; threats to never tell a soul and never think of God.
These schizophrenic delusions do provide information for the
therapist to set the stage for the game. Actually, the "possessed"
have some consistency in their experiences, and they have created
enough coherent thought to be closer to reality in their life than
many with acute psychopathologies. They feel they are victims of
entity persecution, but most desperately want to be free from
these. Their prognosis can be excellent.
This is a description of a six-hour session with a very serious
case of "possession". This patient was a fifty-year-old woman, a
self-employed commercial artist with a large clientele. Her
possession had occurred nineteen years earlier. Since then she had
had numerous unsuccessful psychotherapeutic procedures and was
institutionalized after she stabbed herself at the command of her
"entity." Other than during her hospital stay, she had not taken
drugs. She had heard of my work with the "possessed" and had
obtained my telephone number two years prior to our work. When
we met, she vociferously expounded about her persecutions and all
the books she had read to convince her of her suffering. She
rambled on about her childhood, her failed marriage, and her
current material problems. I cut short her patter because I know
that this life is not the source of the problem, and I had enough
information about how the "entity" operated. What she wanted
was for me to see her and take "it" away—then she felt she would
be able to live. She interrupted many times until I asked her to be
still and listen. I told her that I knew the way, but that she must
follow me and that would mean giving up some of her deep
convictions about this "entity" that had not worked. She told me
that I didn't understand because she had experienced the
possession, I hadn't. I suggested that she think for a few days about
whether she was ready to follow me; if so, we would work. If not,
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 305

I wished her well, but I could not help.

She came to her first appointment early and was very tense.
"They" had put her through hell all night because she was coming
to see me. She rattled on dramatically at length about being a
victim. Every statement announced her weakness, her passivity,
and the inevitability of her suffering. She had much more detail to
fill me in on when I stopped her monologue. This was her way of
releasing pent-up energy and feeding her psychic split.
Our work started quietly, she lying down and I sitting close
beside her. I screened her electromagnetic field and taught her
breathing exercises to ground and stabilize her field. The only
normal parts of her field were the root chakra or life force, the
third eye or spiritual center, and the crown chakra or higher
consciousness area. All other chakras and joints showed strong
anti-coherent magnetic fields of stress.
When she first saw the "possession" it was a huge black man,
although later she reported many other "entities" because of her
many possessions. I suggested we go ask him what he wanted
from her. (Here I literally joined her imagery so I could lead her
to confront it.) She was so frightened, she said she hid behind me
as we approached him. Of course, as I described approaching him
with her behind me, he disappeared. She said he was afraid of me.
I asked her to command that he come back. He did, finally, only
this time he wasn't very large and was not black. We played this
game for several hours, until she was able to stand beside me, not
behind me, when we confronted him. Now when the entity
appeared, we used our growing strength to disarm him, not to
physically kill him with our rage, but to render him powerless with
our minds and watch him become small and weak. This was the
beginning; she was gaining the strength of mind to know that she
did not have to be a victim. "Perhaps I can rule him," she once
said.
Next came the howling, shrieking noises from her mouth.
"He" was screaming through her and over which she had no
control. I was literally deafened. I told her my ears were so
306 — INFINITE MIND

affected that she should ask him to cut the noise in half. To her
surprise, it worked, and she was able to lower the sound to a mild
whine. I reminded her that if "they" created these noises when she
was alone, she should get angry and command them to cut it down.
To practice her new-found skill, we brought "them" back
screaming while she lowered their voices.
Next, "they" started doing horrible, immoral things, using vile
language that she screamed could not be her—it was "them." She
could never do what "they" did nor think what "they" thought.
This belies the dynamics of "possession." Her anger and rage were
so intense and her imagery so grotesque, her moral mind could not
accept that these came from her, nor could she stop them. Her way
out was to give these thoughts and violence to "them," to create
entities out there, and to run away and be persecuted by them. As
she continues to gain strength to command the entities, they will
be gone and she will realize that her mind created these and has
also eliminated them. Even then, she is not cured until she reaches
the source. We have already found her deep needs to contact God,
which she believes had been held back by "them." If she does, she
will find great frustration and anger at God. And if she isn't able
to take the next steps, she will at least profit from the control she
has over victimship.
Some people, when they do this kind of work, wrap
themselves in white light as a sort of protection. These ideas about
"black" and "white" energy need to be clarified. Actually, energy
is energy. We, on the other hand, judge the information by our
worth and standards, so that the blackness and whiteness is our
judgment; it has nothing to do with energy per se. For these
reasons, I do not wrap myself in white light when I work. I am
protected by the strength, clarity and spiritual vibrations of my
field. I am therefore free to interact with whatever I choose and to
radiate my coherent energy to the world and to all people. They in
turn will resonate with me, and feed me, if there is compatibility
in our fields.
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 307

What can we do personally to hasten our spiritual

development? There are two musts. First, we must choose more
carefully where and on what we spend our free time, and we must
get more spiritual exercise. I don't think religious institutions are
adequate. True, liturgy, ritual, song, group prayer and religious
education are steps in the right direction, but there is no assurance
that from these one will find his spiritual nature and grow. For one
thing, the short length of time most spend in religious places is
inadequate to offset the low vibrations and shady judgment of
everyday life. One needs to schedule and practice regular
meditation and contemplation in and out of religious places.
Secondly, religious leaders and counselors sometimes
perpetuate the faith rather than serve as spiritual models. All
spiritual leaders should personally hold spiritual vibrations that
will set the tone for worship and all group endeavors—
parishioners need an opportunity to resonate in a divine field.
Perhaps we should even demand that our clergy carry abiding
spiritual vibrations before they are ordained.
People needing divine motivation often say they don't get
much out of today's churches. Can this account for the split-off,
mystically-oriented churches that are attracting so many? While I
don't condone many of the practices of charismatic churches, I do
understand their appeal because I understand the mystical element
of the deep spiritual experiences they promote. Spirituality is not
rational or logical—those words best describe religion.
While we all acknowledge the wisdom of separation of
church and state, we have confused religion with spirituality.
Spiritual beliefs weave the fabric of our moral code and our
successful life together. I believe that religious institutions should
continue their educational programs, but if spiritual knowing is
derived only from experience, then the community and the school
should be involved as well as the church and home. A spiritual
tenor should exist wherever words or deeds allow subtle
308 — INFINITE MIND

information to be available for human consumption. This implies

that we need spiritual models in every profession and in every
workplace.
One o f the primary concerns of all religious institutions today
should be to provide opportunities for people to get in touch with
their divine nature. The act of participation, singing and intoning
in a group, for example, is probably much better at creating a
vibrational state than just listening or watching. Unfortunately,
larger churches hurry religious services to finish on time or to
clear the church so that the next service can start. Without pauses
for contemplation, the parishioner cannot absorb higher vibrations
that enable him to be elevated to a spiritual state. Current
scheduling practices need to be re-evaluated.
When we criticize some of the pitfalls of modem religious
institutions, we must look to insights from other religions.
Although the public forms of religions differ widely, the esoteric
or inner circle, the spiritual core of all the great religions share
much in common. This is the perennial wisdom Aldous Huxley
spoke about in the religions around the world. All religions
"recognize a Divine Reality substantial to the world of things, and
lives, and minds. . . find in the soul something similar to, or even
identical with Divine Reality. . . place man's final end in the
knowledge of the imminent and transcendent God of all Beings."
Communication on any level, animal to man, man to man, or
man to God, requires the mutual exchange of information by
symbols and signs. For spiritual communication with a divine
being, the human can initiate it with spiritual thoughts, ideas or
actual questions, or God may provide signs as He did when the
light blinded Saul (later Paul) on the road to Damascus. These
signs must be received and decoded or interpreted, and then must
be acknowledged and responded to with additional signs.
Communication with God breaks down primarily at two places in
the process—in the failure of the human to receive the message,
and in the failure to recognize or decode its meaning and then to
acknowledge it. I believe that God is always expressing, loving,
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --- 309

and sending information that humans don't receive or interact

with. The failure is primarily because humans have not reached
the spiritual vibrational level that is necessary to receive the
message. Divine vibrations are available constantly, at all times,
and they contain all information. Human perception is the weak
link. Yet how easy it is to become angry or disappointed with God
when we think He does not hear or care—when the truth is that we
are not aware of the messages. I have found that when a person
clearly requests, and is high in vibrations and consciousness, the
answers are immediate, clear, and often overwhelming, even if not
exactly what was wished for or expected.
So that you can personalize the ideas presented in this chapter,
read the following questions and quietly await your answer. If
imagery and thoughts come, contemplate these to uncover your
past spiritual experiences.
1. Have you ever been troubled and turned to the divine for
help but there seemed to be a vacuum with no
answer and no deep feeling? Why were you not
answered?
2. Have you ever seen a magnificent sunset in a new way
which seemed to envelop and enrapture you? Why
is one sunset, lasting only a few moments, so
different from others?
3. Have you ever knelt at an altar to receive a sacrament and
experienced the Glory of God and the Holy Spirit
round about you? Why is this not every time—only
sometimes?
4. Have you ever watched a person come to the end of his life
on Earth and realized the peaceful and glorious
transition of a human? Why is it that we fear death?
5. Have you ever experienced lovingness so profoundly that
all in its radiance were changed and healed? Why
can't you willfully create such lovingness?
6. Have you ever seen a work of art glowing with a universal
halo? If you haven't, why not?
310 — INFINITE MIND

7. Have you ever heard the perfect chorus as angels

announced the resurrection from the world's trauma? Can
you grasp and hold it?
The answers are clear and bold. What makes the difference?
Consciousness. Conscious awareness is not off and on; it is
always, though not always the same. We live in everyday reality
of coping, solving problems, thinking and phatic communication.
We forget super-consciousness, the place of spiritual awakening.
And yet sometimes it breaks loose and we know its awesome
power. The Haitians say that the Christians go to church to talk
about God. They dance to become God. When they look into the
sky, there may be only a few stars, and when the clouds come,
even fewer. But behind their stars they see God. Behind our stars
we see more stars. The difference is a matter of consciousness.
Man in his universe is endowed with God-given capacities
which each of us glimpses occasionally. That is so seldom for
some of us that we pass these off as strange, incomprehensible or
coincidental, because we do not understand them. Spiritual
development is difficult because, unlike perfecting physical or
intellectual talents requiring the development of skills, spiritual
development demands freedom to know one's role in the divine
plan.
How can we grow to acknowledge our divine nature? First,
we must quiet ourselves from the fury of living and doing, to the
silence o f being and feeling. We must recognize that we can't
make it happen, but we can negotiate its occasion. Secondly, we
must carefully survey the quality of human awareness around us,
in our friends, acquaintances and work associates. Do these
nourish our higher nature, drag us down, or provide nothing? You
will notice that as you enliven spiritually, those of your friends
who do not will fade from your orbit.
We modem humans announce that we are no longer content
with vicarious religious experiences. We want our lives touched
spiritually and deeply. A personal God who is accessible must be
part o f a new world model. We want to feel the hand of God touch
 SPIRITUAL ENLIGHTENMENT: THE EVOLUTIONARY GOAL --------- 311

us. Through that hand we will move others to higher levels, to heal
and know beyond what we have learned. At these times we
become human interveners. We sense the source of that power, but
we are not merely channels. We are God manifest on this earth.
At first we will find it earth-shattering to comprehend
humanness on the divine plane. Only by observing it in others and
by comprehending its glory do we learn that it is our evolutionary
work to bring such insights and experiences to this earth. For such
knowledge we will give profound thanks.
Evolution does not occur by happenstance. Its goal is to
bridge the levels of consciousness so that we live on all levels with
all capacities simultaneously. It takes place in the mind with what
that mind selects as worthy of its dedication. What has your mind
selected from your experiences? Mind mastery is the soul's
unavoidable journey.
When God is experienced, this event is as real as any sensory
perception of one's own self. In those instances, we have victory
over death and pain. We are in touch with the ongoingness of the
soul. We understand the divine plan and our role in it. We come
closer to perfection, and we are worthy being called God's co­
creator. Science and spirituality started together and then diverged
for many centuries. Now they are coming back together. Two of
the greatest forces in human thoughts are science and spirituality.
Lederman, one of our eminent particle physicists, said, "I think
we're on the threshold o f finding God—or at least higher glory.
We haven't found it yet, but even science is looking in the right
direction." Science has given us new insight that as our field grows
in vibrational complexity, as we maintain its dynamic position on
the ridge o f chaos, our God-like nature will dominate our
consciousness and our life.
I don't think you know yourself at the soul level until you
come to a very divine spiritual experience in some physical life, at
some actual time, and you recognize that it came from the heights
and depths of you. I don't believe you can know your greatness as
an individual until you have had and have acknowledged a
312 — INFINITE MIND

profound spiritual experience, and realized that it is not outside of

you— it is not God in heaven, it is you, experiencing divine
vibrations in yourself. The most you can give to anyone is this
level o f what you are, a human manifesting the glory of God.
314 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 1

TELEMETRY ENERGY FIELD

SENSING INSTRUMENT
 EXHIBITS — 315

The small equipment shown beside the person is a

miniaturized, modular sensing instrument, which is like a battery-
powered telemetry EMG. Actually, it is a small FM broadcasting
system with an amplifier and transmitter for each channel. Note
the 12 modular plug-in, white boxes comprise six IRIG channels
—with an amplifier and transmitter for each channel. The IRIG
channels that we used were numbered 11, 12, 13, and 14 to
indicate the recording capacity o f each channel. The highest
channel that we used was IRIG 14, with a sensing capacity up to
20 thousand Hz.
We had discovered that the regular, hard-wire instruments
(operated by electricity) used for EMG, ECG and EEG did not
pick up the entire millivoltage signal of the energy field. Hard­
wire equipment we designed later allowed us to capture up to 200
thousand cycles per second from the energy field. When the two
instruments, telemetry and hard-wire simultaneously recorded the
energy field, the telemetry information was a perfect harmonic of
the hard-wire instrument, yet of lower frequencies.
In Exhibit 1, the bipolar (2) surface sensors of silver, silver
chloride are affixed to the solar plexus or "emotional body" areas.
The ground, or neutral reference electrode, is on the wrist.
Continuous energy field signals were beamed via the FM
transmitter to receiving instrument panels. These data were
observed from oscilloscopes, and a print-out, and by further
amplifying the sound. At the same time, the energy field data
were recorded on a magnetic tape.
316 --------- INFINITE MIND
 EXHIBITS — 317

The left of Exhibit 2 shows the normal myogram of four

breathing muscles. On the right is the muscular relaxation
following breaths. This is the energy we found to be the higher
frequency of the energy field shown in Exhibit 3, the Fourier
Frequency Analysis Chart.
318 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 4
SPECTROGRAM

NORMAL FIELD
(Vertical - Each number equals 100 Hz)

We found that the color patterns o f individuals' fields were

shifted slightly upwards or downward. The more expansive fields
were skewed upward and the more confined ones downward. Yet
the colors remained in the same sequence with each analytic
technique and each person.

SUMMARY OF AURIC COLOR FREQUENCIES

Color Approximate Central Frequency
Low blue (muscle) 2 or 200 Hz
Green 3 or 300 Hz
Yellow 4 or 400 Hz
Red 5 or 500 Hz
Orange 6 or 600 Hz
High blue 7 or 700 Hz
Violet 8 or 800 Hz
Cream 10 or 1,000 Hz
White 11 or 1,100 Hz up
 EXHIBITS — 319

CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE

320 --------- INFINITE MIND
 EXHIBITS — 321

Exhibits 5A and 5B display a Cross Plot Analysis of two

simultaneous data signals from different body parts. To the
extreme right of Exhibit 5 are four simultaneous energy signals
from different parts of the body. In the middle of that display is
an enlargement of the two separate recordings that were
compared. To the extreme left of the first display and the middle
of the second one, is a graphic representation of this comparison.
We found that when two energy field recordings were out of phase
in frequency and different in strength, as shown in 5A, there was
an anti-coherent random pattern resembling a tangled ball of
string. The second picture or 5B shows a coherent field, the
pattern being more organized in flow and direction.
The first cross plot picture (5A), showing anti-coherency of
two locations, was similar to the cross plot picture derived by
other researchers using two ECG recordings from different heart
locations taken during cardiac dysrhythmia. The second (5B) or
coherent field was likewise similar to the coherent pattern of
recordings found in a normal cardiogram.
322 --------- INFINITE MIND
EXHIBITS — 323
324 --------- INFINITE MIND

White - All Colors - G

In the Exhibit 6A Spectrogram, Column 1 shows the presence

of all colors with a slightly greater intensity of 200 Hz, or blue.
This is the low blue frequency connected with muscle contraction
and is not part of the energy field. Aura readers describe this as a
normal resting aura.
The 6B green spectrogram shows a predominant 300 Hz
frequency with some blue frequencies at 200 and stronger yellow
ones at 400 Hz.
The 6C spectrogram, yellow, at 400 Hz is accompanied by a
strong white signal at 11 or 1100 Hz. The bold upright energy
riding on the yellow band is the heartbeat. This recording was
taken from the chest or heart chakra. The fainter lines between
yellow and white are orange, red, violet and high blue, which
make up the rainbow spectrum of white light.
At the left part of 6D, the red-orange spectrogram, the
 EXHIBITS — 325

strongest colors are orange at 700 and red at 800 Hz. This field
was created by a healer when she was asked to change her red field
to orange. At first, she created both colors, but to the right of the
spectrogram she stated that she would bring in yellow or 400 Hz
to create orange; it was much easier. Here, what the aura reader
saw was a blend of red and yellow. The data showed it was created
by red and yellow vibrations.
Exhibit 6E shows red accompanied by a strong white band.
This is a classic field pattern that occurs during pain. It was taken
from an athlete who was exhausted after running a long distance
event. The white band at 11+ shows that his consciousness was
high —an altered state or runner's high.
See the dramatic wide band of the violet recording 6F, as it
spreads from 9+ to 6+ with unexplained dips much lower. This is
an example o f what happens in the field when a person sees
images. Violet, blue, and red are the dominant colors.
In the last "all color" spectrogram (6G), the aura reader
described the energy field as white, containing all colors.
The same raw data used for the Spectrograms (Exhibit 6,
Column I) was processed by Power Density Spectrum, a Fourier
Analysis procedure (Exhibit 6, Column II). Note that both the
Power Density Spectrum and the Energy Field Spectrogram
(Exhibit 6) are in lower frequencies than the accepted light
frequencies of colors. Remember the description of color that we
used was determined by aura readers. These lower frequency
recordings are subharmonics of light, color frequencies. Note also
that all auric colors did not fall in the same positions as reported in
color charts from red to indigo. The sequence of colors was
rearranged like what happens when light falls through certain
prisms. Notice the many dynamic lines in the spectrogram at
numerous frequencies show that there may be several colors
present even when one color predominates.
Since these early recordings using telemetry, we have
redesigned the older hard-wire EMG and ECG equipment to bring
in the same signal, but with much higher frequency recordings that
are not possible with the limitations of the telemetry carrier bands.
326 --------- INFINITE MIND
 EXHIBITS — 327

In Exhibit 7, distinct wave shape patterns were obtained when

aura readers described the primary and secondary colors of the
auric field. Note the distinct differences: the blue spiking we
describe as "saw tooth on the mountain", with slower sweeps of
positive and negative deflection, but with faster deflexions riding
on these "mountains." I believe this occurs because there is a low
blue vibration (actually in the 80 to 100 Hz band) connected with
muscle contraction, and a higher energy field blue, as described by
aura readers to be at approximately 800+ Hz.
The yellow wave pattern always showed a more regular sine
wave with small higher frequencies riding on the sine wave.
Red shows sharper, more spike-like positive and negative
deflexions with clumps or plateaus of faster signals.
Observe that green does show characteristics of blue and
yellow. Orange has more of the yellow sine wave with the plateaus
of red. Violet does resemble a faster version of blue and red.
White contains the wave shapes of all the color frequencies.
328 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 8

ENERGY FIELD SPECTROGRAM

PAIN HEALER
(Violet-White)

Note in the Energy Field Spectrogram Exhibit 8 - Pain Healer

(Violet-White), there are four primary bands of energy: 1 to 2 is
blue, always present with muscle contraction; a narrow band at 3+
is green; a slight band at 6+ is orange, and the primary band at 9+
is violet. White is shown at 12 to 15. The green, blue and orange
are unique frequencies o f this healer and are not related to the
violet-white characteristic of all pain healing vibrations. Healers
who remove pain always display an intense blue-violet-white field
which eliminates the patient's red pain vibration.
 EXHIBITS — 329

CONTINUED ON N EX T PAGE
330 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 9

ENERGY FIELD SPECTROGRAM

VITALITY HEALER
(Full Color Spectrum)

Exhibit 9 is a normal resting full color spectrum of an

outstanding healer. Note blue or muscle vibration at 1 or 100 Hz,
green at 3 or 300 Hz, yellow at 4 or 400 Hz, orange at 5 or 500 Hz,
red at 7 or 700 Hz, violet at 10 or 1000 Hz, cream color at 12 or
1200 Hz, and white at 14 or 1400 Hz. Individual spectrograms
show slight variations in numbers but the same relative positions
of colors.
 EXHIBITS — 331

This healer shows a nearly complete color frequency field that

is particularly effective after illness or surgery, to increase vitality,
to eliminate asthenia and the fatigue accompanying emotional
disturbances. The higher consciousness mind vibrations are
present, but appear weak when compared to the strength of the
red, orange, yellow, and green vibrations that we have found are
more related to the health of the body.
332 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 10
ENERGY FIELD SPECTROGRAMS

REGENERATION HEALER
(Red-Double Helix)

HEALEE

(Recordings taken simultaneously at end of healing.)

 EXHIBITS — 333

The most disclosing characteristics of the energy field of the

regeneration healer lie in the less defined 1 to 5 spectrum of blue,
green, yellow, and orange, and the increased strength and
coherency in the upper energy bands from 7 to 14. The strong
blue at 10, violet at 11+, and white at 14 all indicate a powerful
elevated consciousness characteristic of many recordings. But the
double helix of the red is unique to this healer, and maybe to all
regenerative healers.
Note that the fields of the healer and healee, which were taken
simultaneously by two separate instruments, are identical in
pattern. They differ only in that the healee's frequencies are
slightly lower.
These spectrograms were made when the healer sensed that
their fields were identical, and therefore she stopped the healing
procedures.
334 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 11

SPECTROGRAM (MU ROOM)

EXHAUSTED - ANTI-COHERENT FIELD

(Vertical - 100 to 1500 Hz frequencies)
 EXHIBITS — 335

Exhibit 11 of the auric fields of two subjects were recorded at

the end of a 10-hour recording session in the Mu Room, where
instruments operated by physicists altered the electrical and
magnetic atmosphere. The human fields became so anti-coherent
that all resemblance of a human energy field pattern was gone.
The subjects complained o f both utter fatigue and incoherent
thought.
We believe these findings give clear indication of the
tremendous importance o f the human and environmental field
transactions. When the atmospheric fields are deficient or anti-
coherent, there is a corresponding confusion and inefficiency of
physiological and mental functioning.
336 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 12

ENERGY FIELD WAVE SHAPE

(3 Seconds Energy Field Data)

EXHIBIT 13
HUNT CHAOS ATTRACTOR GRAPH

(Using Chaos Mathematical Formula -

Data Offset 1/10,000 sec.)
 EXHIBITS — 337

When three seconds' worth o f human energy field data

(Exhibit 12) was compared to itself, an identical sample but with
one ten-thousandth of a second delay time, i.e., where two
identical data samples were compared one ten-thousandth of a
second out o f sync (Exhibit 13), the Hunt Chaos Attractor Graph
was obtained. Note that the spiral characteristics of this chaos
pattern showed gaps in between lines, characteristic of all chaos
attractors. The squiggly, uneven nature of the lines probably
indicates the extreme dynamic nature of these biological data.
With totally random data or white noise, all gaps would be filled
in, losing the unique gap-pattem occurring when each part of a
series of information is slightly different from every other part.

EXHIBIT 14
338 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 14
ROSSLER CHAOS ATTRACTOR GRAPH
(Mathematical Model)

EXHIBIT 15
LORENZ CHAOS ATTRACTOR
(Weather Data)
 EXHIBITS — 339

Note the dynamic wiggly nature of data lines in the Hunt Chaos
Graph (Exhibit 13) from living high frequency data. Compare this
with the Rossler Attractor (Exhibit 14), a mathematical model, and
the Lorenz Chaos Attractor (Exhibit 15), from low frequency
weather data. All three graphs are generated from non-linear data,
but the Hunt pattern is the most dynamic and variable. Also, it
occurred in the human field in three seconds' worth of time.
340 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 16

M u scle w a v e shape - em g

EXHIBIT 17
MUSCLE GRAPH

(Using Chaos Mathematical Formula

Data Offset 1/10,000 Sec.)
EXHIBITS — 341
342 --------- INFINITE MIND

We wondered why an energy field chaos attractor had not been

discovered in other global biological signals. To find out, we
submitted three seconds' worth each of the brain, muscle, and heart
recordings to the same offset procedure.
Exhibit 16 shows an EMG recording of a muscle contraction
to the left of the picture and the baseline resting energy field
electricity to the right. Note in Exhibit 17, the straight line that
occurred when we compared three seconds' worth of the muscle
activity with itself at one-ten-thousandth second offset.
Exhibits 18 and 19, using the same procedure with a heart
(EKG) recording of a dog, again show the self similarity of a
straight line. To reiterate, our biological data were sufficiently
complex to carry the chaos dynamics in brief samplings, whereas
three seconds of data from the heart and muscle recordings didn't
demonstrate a chaos attractor.
In each instance, rather than obtaining the flowing vortex
pattern of chaos, these data created a straight line. Apparently,
small samples of brain and heart recordings are so periodic and
symmetrical that when compared to itself revealed a non-dynamic,
steady, predictable state. In other words, these vibrational
dimensions of the heart, brain and muscle were too limited and too
periodic or too linear. Recently, other researchers have found
chaos attractors from heart and brain wave data, but only after
crunching many hours and days of continuous data, not like the
three seconds' worth of energy field recordings.
Apparently, if data are very complex, as ours was, or if the
data are simple yet massive in quantity, such as hours, days or
years o f EEG, ECG data or weather recordings, a chaos pattern
can be found showing a level of dynamic predictability. If,
however, the data are simple and periodic or if there are small
 EXHIBITS — 343

samples, a straight line appears in the graph (Exhibits 16 and 17,

18, and 19). They are said to be self similar.
344 --------- INFINITE MIND
 EXHIBITS — 345

At any moment in time, a person's state of consciousness and

his level of awareness is predictable from his mind-field
frequency pattern (Exhibit 20).
During the state o f ordinary reality, focus is on the material
world. The energies are confined to the lower frequencies up to
250 Hz, coming from nerve and brain activity.
In altered states,, with a psychic, hypnotic or metaphysical
reality, the frequencies are extended above 400 Hz. These are the
beginning frequencies o f the mind-field. These people, who
"channel" information about current life and who make
predictions about future material happenings, have powerful
energies in this lower mind-field spectrum. Some of these
psychics display unusual skills to obtain hidden information.
Persons in trance states show small ranges of even higher
vibrations that seem to stand alone, unconnected with other levels
of reality or material thought. Here they obtain unbelievable
information about distant happenings as they give predictions
about distant events. This skill could be likened to the pene­
trating depth captured by a telephoto camera lens. However, in
this state, trance mediums do not remember their channeled
predictions because they have excluded the material reality
stemming from the five senses.
There is another group of persons we describe as mystics,
who display the broadest awareness with a complete range of
uninterrupted frequencies. Mystics have available at all times the
capacities o f the psychics and the trance mediums, but they
additionally tap into lofty spiritual knowings. Their predictions
are universal and transcending and full of wisdom. We recorded
their field frequencies to 200 KHz, as high as our instruments
could record. In their presence one sees or senses powerful white
light.
346 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 21

ENERGY FIELD SPECTROGRAM

Here is an Energy Field Spectrogram of a man who felt pain

from an acute muscle spasm while being Rolfed. Note the heavy
black horizontal line at number 7 or 700 Hz represents the red
energy of pain. But he processed and expressed his agony with
emotional outbursts of displeasure, even anger. This is
represented by orange, with the dark line at 6 or 600 cycles per
second. The line at 13 is white, stemming from the presence of all
color vibrations in small quantities. This is an altered state of
consciousness when there are no strong intervening color
frequencies.
 EXHIBITS — 347

EXHIBIT 22

ENERGY FIELD SPECTROGRAM

INTENSE PAIN - MUSCLE SPASM (RED)

Exhibit 22, intense emotional pain shows the strong coherent

and irregular red vibrations from 8 to 7 to 6+. The vibration at 12,
white, represents an altered state which frequently occurs with
pain.
348 --------- INFINITE MIND

EXHIBIT 23

SPECTROGRAM
11*

i----------------- -— ;— — ------------------ ---------

PAINFUL DIARRHEA (Red-Green)

Exhibit 23 is the energy field of a person with painful diarrhea.

Here the red from 7 to 8 has a broader, less defined path with
slightly lower red vibrations than in muscle spasm (Exhibit 22).
Note that the wide green banding at 3 to 4 has spread into the
yellow frequencies to give a muddy yellow-green color. Aura
readers believe green represents a transition state which can also
be applied to diarrhea.
cr®j[ REFERENCES J S ta
350 --------- INFINITE MIND

CHAPTER II
PAGE
9 Szent-Gyorgyi, Albert. Quoted in Robert O. ,Becker, The
!

Body Electric: Electromagnetism and the

Foundation o f Life. N.Y.: Wm. Morrow and Co.,
1985.

10 Mead, Margaret. "Inaugural Address," Association for the

Advancement o f Science, 1969.

12 Conrad, Emilie. Continuum. Santa Monica, CA.

12 Hunt, Valerie V., et al. "A Study of Structural Integration

from Neuromuscular, Energy Field and Emotional
Approaches, Project Report, Rolf Institute,
Boulder, Co.: 1972.

14 Bruyere, Rosalyn. Healing Light Center, Sierra Madre,

CA.

23 Hunt, Valerie V., Project Report, Rolf Institute, 1972

36 Garfinkle, Alan, "A Mathematics for Physiology,"

American Journal o f Physiology. 245: R455-R466
(1983).

CHAPTER III

38 Kuhn, Thomas. The Structure o f Scientific Revolution.

Foundation of Unity of Science Service, Chicago:
1970.

38 Einstein, Albert. The Evolution o f Physics. N.Y.: Simon

& Schuster, 1961.

41 Maharishi University, Fairfield, Iowa.

 REFERENCES — 351

43 Prigogine, Ira, and I. Stengers. Order Out o f Chaos:

Man's New Dialogue with Nature. NYY.: Bantam
Books, 1984.

43 Jahn, Robert G. and B.J. Dunne. Margins o f Reality: The

Role o f Consciousness in the Physical World. San
Diego: Harcourt Brace, 1987.

44 Jahn, p. 281.

46 Hawking, Steven. A Brief History o f Time: From the Big

Bang to Black Holes. N.Y.: Bantam Books, 1988,
p. 18.
47 Jeans, James. Physics and Philosophy. Cambridge: The
University Press, 1943.

48 Sheldrake, Rupert. A New Science of Life: The

Hypothesis o f Formative Causation. L|os Angeles:
Tarcher, 1981.

49 Jeans, Physics and Philosophy.

49 Wolf, Fred Alan. Taking the Quantum Leap. San

Francisco: Harper & Row, 1981.

50 Lewin, Roger. Complexity: Life at the Edge of Chaos.

N.Y.: Macmillan Pub. Co., 1992, p. 133.

50 Jahn and Dunne, Margins o f Reality, p. 61.

50 Santa Fe Group, reported in Lewin, Complexity, 1992.

51 Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order.

London: Routledge and Kegan, 1980.
352 --------- INFINITE MIND

51 Lewin, Complexity, p. 32.

52 Gleick, James. Chaos: Making a New Science. N.Y.:

Viking Penguin, Inc., 1987.

52 Gleick, Chaos, p. 23.

52 Lewin, Complexity

53 Mandelbrot, Benoit B., The Fractal Geometry o f Nature.

N.Y.: W.H. Freeman & Co., 1983.

53 Rossler and Lorenz, "Strange Attractors," in Gleich,

Chaos, 1987.

56 Institute of Noetic Sciences, Scientific Positivism: The

New Dualism, Palo Alto, CA.

57 Jahn and Dunne, Margins o f Reality, p. 204.

57 Lewin, Complexity.

58 Lewin, Complexity, p. 136.

CHAPTER IV

62 Gabor, Dennis. Lensless photography, 1947.

63 Pribram, Karl H., "Holonomy and Structure in the

Organization of Perception." Mimeographed.
Department o f Psychology, Stanford University,
Stanford, CA, n.d..
 REFERENCES — 353

63 Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order.

London: Routledge & Kegan, 1980.

63 Beck, Robert. Private conversation, 1976.

68 Prigogine, I., and I. Stengers. Order Out o f Chaos: Man's

New Dialogue with Nature. N. Y.: Bantam Books,
1984.

72 Harvard Medical School, Public Health. Study of

Environmental Contamination, with U.S. Public
Health.

73 Adey, W. Ross. "Cancer Linked with Electromagnetic

Exposure," P.T. Review, (March 21, 1987).

78 Wilson, Robert A. Cosmic Trigger. New Falcon

Publications, 1985.

CHAPTERV

83 Sherrington, Carl. Man on His Nature. London:

Cambridge University Press, 1940.

83 Pribram, Karl. "Behaviorism Phrenomenology and

Holism in Psychology: A Scientific Analysis,"
Journal o f Social and Biological Structures, 2:65-
72, 1979.

83 Penfield, Wilder. The Mystery of the Mind, Princeton,

N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1975.
354 --------- INFINITE MIND

84 Eccles, John and D.N. Robinson. The Wonder o f Being

Human: Our Brain and Our Mind. Boston:
Shambhala, 1985.

87 Hooper, Judith, and D. Teresi. The Three Pound

Universe. N.Y.: Dell Pub. Co., 1986, p. 15.

89 Bateson, Gregory. Steps to an Ecology o f Mind. N.Y.:

Ballantine, 1975.

90 Eccles, John C. "Cerebral Activity and Consciousness,"

in Studies o f the Philosophy o f Biology: Reduction
and Related Problems. Edited by F.J. Ayala and
T. Dobzhansky. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley
University Press, 1974.

90 Sperry, Roger W. "The Eye and the Brain." Scientific

American, May, 1956.

90 Bogen, Joseph E. "The Other Side of the Brain: An

Appositional Mind," Bulletin o f the Los Angeles
Neurological Societies. 34(3): 135-162, (July
1969).

93 Pert, Candace, and S.H. Snyder. "Opiate Receptor:

Demonstration in Nervous Tissue," Science 179:
1011-1014, (March 9,1973).

99 Sheldrake, R. A New Science o f Life. Los Angeles: J.P.

Tarcher, 1981.

99 Bateson, Gregory, Steps to an Ecology o f Mind.

103 Bhagavad Gita. Trans. Sargeant Winthrop, State U. of

N.Y., Albany, N.Y.: 1984
 REFERENCES — 355

CHAPTER VI

104 Buddha, Shakyamuni. The Dhammapada. DharmaPub.,

Berkeley, CA, 1985.

105 Freud, Sigmund. The Future o f an Illusion. N.Y.: Norton

and Co., 1971.

109 Lewin, Complexity, ip. 16.

109 Lewin, Complexity, p. 127.

114 Frank, Walter. Private conversation, 1989.

CHAPTER VII

147 Targ, Russell, and K. Haray. The Mind Race. N.Y.:

Villard Books, 1984.
148 Dunne, B.J. and J.P. Bisaka. "Precognitive Remote
Perception: A Critical Overview of the
Experimental Program," in W.G. Roll (ed)
Research in Parapsychology. Metuchen, N.J.:
Scarecrow, 1980.

149 Vemy, Thomas, and J. Kelly. Secret Life of the Unborn

Child. N.Y.: Summit Books, 1981.
154 Bronowski, Jacob. The Ascent o f Man. Boston: Little,
Brown, 1973.

154 DeBono, Edward. Lateral Thinking. Int. Ctr. Creative

Thinking, 1990.
356 --------- INFINITE MIND

157 Lewin, Complexity, p. 18.

158 Lewin, Complexity, pp. 51-52.

159 Green, Elmer. ISSSEEMAnnual Conference Proceedings.

Monterey, CA: 1993.

CHAPTER VIII

162 Einstein, Albert. In L. Barnett, The Universe o f Dr.

Einstein. Rev. ed. N.Y.: Wm. Morrow, Bantam
Books, 1979, p. 108.

163 James, William. The Principles o f Psychology. N.Y.:

Dover, 1950.

165 Sorokin. Harvard University Research Center for

Creative Altruism.
172 Reich, Wilhelm. Character Analysis. Trans, from
German by Vincent R. Carfagno, 1980.

183 Noetic Sciences Review, Emotion.

183 Gibran, Kahlil. Secrets o f the Heart. Trans., Citadel,

N.Y.: Carol Pub. Group, 1978.

185 Gibran, Secrets o f the Heart.

193 Pir Vilayat, Khan. Introducing Sprituality Into

Counseling and Therapy. N.Y.: Omega Pubs.,
1982.
 REFERENCES — 357

CHAPTER EX

206 Tart, Charles. Waking Up: Overcoming the Obstacles to

Human Potential. Boston: Shambhala, 1986.

211 Verny, Thomas, and J. Kelly. The Secret Life of the

Unborn Child. N.Y.: Summit Books, 1981.

214 Wilbur, Ken. Quantum Questions: Mystical Writings of

the World's Great Physicists. Boston: Shambhala,
1984.

215 Blavatsky, H.P.. An abridgement of The Secret Doctrine.

Eds., E. Preston and Humphreys. London:
Theosophical Pub. House, 1966.

222 Meek, George W. After We Die What Then? Life's

Energy Fields. Ser. Vol. 3, Ariel, GA:
Metascience, 1980.

223 Stevenson, Ian. Omni, January, 1988.

225 Weiss, Brian. Omni, March, 1994.

225 Wambach, Helen. Life Before Life. N.Y.: Bantam, 1984.

231 Tolstoy, Leo. A Confession and Other Religious

Writings. N.Y.: Viking-Penguin, 1988.
358 --------- INFINITE MIND

CHAPTER X

237 Adey, W.R. "Whispering Between Cells: Electromagnetic

Fields and Regulatory Mechanisms in Tissue."
Frontier Perspectives. Temple Univ. Center for
Frontier Sciences, vol 3, no. 2, Fall, 1993.

237 Truelinger, S.E. "Where Do We Go From Here," in

Solutions, Condensed Matter Physics. Edited by
A.R. Bishop and T.Schneider. Berlin: Springer
Verlag, pp. 338-340.

237 Adey, W. Ross. Brain/Mind Bulletin. Vol. 14, no. 1,

October, 1988.

238 Byrd, Randy. San Francisco General Hospital "Doctors

Pray for Patients," Brain-Mind Bulletin, vol. 11,
no. 7. March 24, 1986.

242 Lewin, Complexity, p. 51.

245 Burr, Harold Saxton. Blueprint for Immortality. London:

Neville Spearman, 1972.
245 Lewin, Complexity, p. 186.

240 Becker, Robert O. and Gary Selden. The Body Electric.

NY: William Morrow and Co., 1985.

251 Rossi, Ernest. Psychobiology o f Mind/Body Healing.

N.Y.: W. W. Norton, 1988.

252 Selye, Hans. The Stress o f Life. NY: McGraw-Hill,

1956.
 REFERENCES — 359

252 O'Regan, Brendon. Noetic Sciences Review. Autumn,

1987.

254 Adey, W. Ross. Medical Hypothesis. 24: pp. 291-292.

254 Delgado, J.M.R., e ta l. "Reports on developmental

defects in chick embryos exposed to various ELF
frequencies." Journal o f Anatomy. 134:533
(1982).

263 Green, Elmer. Subtle Energies, 2: 69-94, ISSSSEEM

Annual Conference, Monterey, CA, 1993.

266 Pert, Candace. Science, 179: pp. 1011-1014, March 9,

1973.

266 McClelland, David. "Sister Theresa", Documentary,

British Broadcasting Corp., 1993.

267 Brennan, Barbara Ann. Hands o f Light: A Guide to

Healing Through the Human Energy Field. N. Y.:
Pleiades Books, 1987.

267 Bruyere, Rosalyn. Wheels of Light: A Study o f the

Chakras. Vol. 1. Sierra Madre, CA: Bon
Productions, 1989.

270 Smith, Lendon H. Feed Your Body Right. N. Y .: M.

Evans & Co., 1994.

CHAPTER XI

276 Jastrow, Robert. "The Post Human World," Science

Digest. Jan-Feb., 1981.
360 --------- INFINITE MIND

286 Wilbur, Ken. Eye to Eye: The Quest fo r the New

Paradigm. N.Y.: Anchor Press, 1983.

288 Slawinski, Janusz. Brain-Mind Bulletin, vol. 10, no. 9,

May 6,1985.

302 DiMele, Armand. Psychotherapist, N.Y.: New York.

308 Huxley, Aldous. The Perennial Philosophy. N.Y.:

Harper, 1994.

311 Lederman, Leon, and D. Schramm. From Quarks to

Cosmos: Tools o f Discovery. N.Y.: W.H.
Freeman, 1989.